S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet

Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3 Device Management Commands

About This Chapter

3.1 Device Status Checking Commands

3.2 Hardware Configuration Commands
3.3 Information Center Configuration Commands
3.4 Fault Management Commands
3.5 NTP Configuration Commands
3.6 Energy-saving Configuration Commands
3.7 PoE Configuration Commands
3.8 Stack Configuration Commands
3.9 SVF Configuration Commands
3.10 Cloud-based Management Configuration Commands

3.1 Device Status Checking Commands

3.1.1 Command Support
3.1.2 display compatible-information
3.1.3 display cpu-usage
3.1.4 display cpu-usage configuration
3.1.5 display cpu-usage history
3.1.6 display device
3.1.7 display device capability
3.1.8 display device manufacture-info

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 617

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.1.9 display diagnostic-information

3.1.10 display elabel
3.1.11 display esn
3.1.12 display fan
3.1.13 display memory-usage
3.1.14 display memory-usage threshold
3.1.15 display power
3.1.16 display transceiver
3.1.17 display transceiver diagnosis interface
3.1.18 display temperature
3.1.19 display version

3.1.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

3.1.2 display compatible-information

Function
The display compatible-information command displays compatible information
of a device.

Format
display compatible-information

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Generally, device versions have matching NMS software. The NMS software needs
to apply to all the devices supported by matching versions. Otherwise, the NMS
cannot manage devices. If the NMS version is an earlier version but the current

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 618

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

device is running a later version that does not match the current NMS version, the
NMS cannot manage the current device.
To decouple the NMS version and device version, a compatible device model
developed based on an earlier version is defined for each device model. If the
NMS cannot manage a device because of version mismatch, obtain information
about the device compatible with the current device. The NMS can then use the
obtained information to manage the current device.
For example:
S5700LI_R7 is a device model newly available in V200R007. The NMS software
version that matches the device software version is V200R007.
S5700LI_R5 is a device model newly available in V200R005. The NMS software
version that matches the device software version is V200R005.
When you use the NMS of V200R005 to manage S5700LI_R7, the device cannot be
managed because of version mismatch. The NMS then obtains compatibility
information about S5700LI_R7 and learns that it is compatible with S5700LI_R5.
Subsequently, the NMS uses information about S5700LI_R5 to manage the current
device.
If the device does not have a compatible version, the system will display a
message, indicating that no compatible information exists after the display
compatible-information command is executed.
Compatible information of stacked devices can also be displayed.

Example
# Display compatible information of a device.
<HUAWEI> display compatible-information
Compatible SysOids : 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.117
Compatible Version : V200R003C00
ProductName : S2750-28TP-EI-AC

Table 3-1 Description of the display compatible-information command output

Item Description

Compatible System OID of an old device version.

SysOids

Compatible Old device version compatible with the current device

Version version.

ProductName Product name of a new device.

3.1.3 display cpu-usage

Function
The display cpu-usage command displays CPU usage statistics.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 619

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display cpu-usage [ slave | slot slot-id ] [ vcpu vcpu ]

NOTE

The slave parameter is not supported if the switch does not support the stacking function or
does not have the stacking function enabled.
Only the S5720HI supports the vcpu vcpu parameter.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slave Displays the CPU usage of slave -
devices in a stack. This parameter is
valid only in a stack system.

slot slot-id The value is 0 if stacking is not

● Specifies the slot ID if stacking is
not configured. configured. The value range
depends on the stack
● Specifies the stack ID if stacking
configuration if stacking is
is configured.
configured.

vcpu vcpu Displays the usage of a specified Specify the vcpu parameter
virtual CPU. based on the hardware
configuration.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
CPU usage is an important indicator to evaluate device performance. A high CPU
usage will cause service faults, for example, BGP route flapping, frequent VRRP
active/standby switchover, and even failed device login. You can use the display
cpu-usage command to view CPU usage to check whether devices are working
properly.
When the CPU usage is high, rectify the fault according to "Troubleshooting: High
CPU" in Huawei S Series Campus Switches Troubleshooting Guide.

Example
# Display the CPU usage on the device.
<HUAWEI> display cpu-usage
CPU Usage Stat. Cycle: 60 (Second)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 620

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

CPU Usage : 20% Max: 99%

CPU Usage Stat. Time : 2013-10-23 10:04:45
CPU utilization for five seconds: 5%: one minute: 5%: five minutes: 5%
Max CPU Usage Stat. Time : 2013-10-21 16:14:00.

TaskName CPU Runtime(CPU Tick High/Tick Low) Task Explanation

VIDL 80% 0/e3a150c0 DOPRA IDLE
OS 10% 0/ bfb0440 Operation System
1AGAGT 6% 0/ 0 1AGAGT
AAA 2% 0/ 1d4a AAA Authen Account Authorize
ACL 1% 0/ 13362 ACL Access Control List
ADPT 1% 0/ 0 ADPT Adapter
AGNT 0% 0/ 0 AGNTSNMP agent task
AGT6 0% 0/ 0 AGT6SNMP AGT6 task
ALM 0% 0/ 0 ALM Alarm Management
ALS 0% 0/ 527a3e ALS Loss of Signal
AM 0% 0/ 232cf AM Address Management
APP 0% 0/ 0 APP
ARP 0% 0/ 36582 ARP
ASFI 0% 0/ 0 ASFI
ASFM 0% 0/ 0 ASFM
BATT 0% 0/ 0 BATT Main Task
BFD 0% 0/ 100f36 BFD Bidirection Forwarding
Detect
BFDA 0% 0/ 0 BFDA BFD Adapter
BFDS 0% 0/ 5825 BFDS
BOX 0% 0/ 1d0097 BOX Output
BPDU 0% 0/ 1806 BPDU Adapter
BTRC 0% 0/ 60e BTRC
CDM 0% 0/ 9b95 CDM
CFM 0% 0/ 6f68 CFM Configuration file
management
CLKI 0% 0/ 0 CLKI
DEFD 0% 0/ 22ebd DEFD CPU Defend
DELM 0% 0/ 355c DELMAC FOR STP
DEV 0% 0/ 0 DEV Device Management
DHCP 0% 0/ 12188 DHCP Dynamic Host Config
Protocol
DLDP 0% 0/ dc0d DLDP Protocol
EAP 0% 0/ 38a9 EAP Extensible Authen
Protocol
EFMT 0% 0/ 11c70 EFMTEST 802.3AH Test
EOAM 0% 0/ ea8f EOAM1AG
ESAP 0% 0/ 0 ESAP eSap Adapter
ETHA 0% 0/ 0 ETHA
EZOP 0% 0/ 506f4 EZOP EasyOperation
application
EZPP 0% 0/ 1e41f8 EZPP EasyOperation packet
FCAT 0% 0/ 6479 FCAT Catch Packets for
debugging
FECD 0% 0/ 11d8e FECD Mod Manage Task
FIB 0% 0/ 523b FIB Forward Information Base
FIB6 0% 0/ 0 FIB6IPv6 FIB
FLOW 0% 0/ ce76 FLOW SFLOW
FMAT 0% 0/ 7f23 FMATFault Manage task
FTS 0% 0/ 125f35 FTS
GEM 0% 0/ 0 GEM task
GEMR 0% 0/ 0 GEMRun task
GRSA 0% 0/ 0 GRSA
GVRP 0% 0/ 0 GVRP Protocol
HACK 0% 0/ 0 HACKtask for HA ACK
HOTT 0% 0/ 0 HOTT
HS2M 0% 0/ 0 HS2MHigh available task
HTTP 0% 0/ 5d420 HTTP
IFLP 0% 0/ 8611 IFLP
IFNT 0% 0/ 0 IFNTIfnet task
IFPD 0% 0/ 2177f21 IFPD Ifnet Product Adapter
INFO 0% 0/ 70409 INFOInformation center
IP 0% 0/ cb13 IP

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 621

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

IPCK 0% 0/ 0 IPCKIPC task for ack message

IPCQ 0% 0/ 3c6ffd IPCQIPC task for single queue
IPCR 0% 0/ 0 IPCR IPC Receiver
JOB 0% 0/ 0 JOB Schedule
L2 0% 0/ 2a6b5 L2
L2IF 0% 0/ b7fbc L2IF
L2_E 0% 0/ 10088 L2_EOAM_Y1731
L2_P 0% 0/ 58a50 L2_PR
L2_R 0% 0/ 169c0c L2_RING
L2_T 0% 0/ 1724 L2_TRUNK
L3I4 0% 0/ 0 L3I4 LPU Manage IPv4 unicast
FDB
L3IO 0% 0/ 0 L3IO LPU Process urpf, vrrp
etc.
L3M4 0% 0/ 0 L3M4 MPU Manage IPv4 unicast
FDB
L3MB 0% 0/ 4319 L3MB MPU Process urpf, vrrp
etc.
LAGAGT 0% 0/ 107dd LAGAGT
LBDT 0% 0/ 1bf810 LBDT Loopback Detect Mpu
LINK 0% 0/ 0 LINK
LLDP 0% 0/ 70921 LLDP Protocol
LNP 0% 0/ 0 LNP task
MAC 0% 0/ 564f MAC Media Access Control
MACL 0% 0/ 21954 MACL Access Control List
MAD 0% 0/ dae7 MAD Task
MADP 0% 0/ 0 MADP MAD proxy Task
MCSW 0% 0/ 12624 MCSW Mulitcast Switch Adapter
MERX 0% 0/ 8a774 MERX Meth Receive
METH 0% 0/ f0699 METH Metropolitan Ethernet
MFF 0% 0/ b308 MFF MAC Forced Forwarding
MFIB 0% 0/ beb MFIBMulticast forward info
MIRR 0% 0/ 0 MIRR Capture Packet
MSYN 0% 0/ 7245a MSYN Mac Synchronization
Mirr 0% 0/ 4107 Mirror
NDIO 0% 0/ 0 NDIO LPU Manage IPv6 unicast
FDB
NDMB 0% 0/ 0 NDMB MPU Manage IPv6 unicast
FDB
NFPT 0% 0/ d2dec NFPTNFP timer task
NTPT 0% 0/ 0 NTPT task
OAM1 0% 0/ 0 OAM1 EOAM Adapter
PAT 0% 0/ 0 PAT
PNGI 0% 0/ 0 PNGI
PNGM 0% 0/ 0 PNGM MPU Process icmp reply
fast
POE+ 0% 0/ 0 POE+ PPP Over Ethernet Plus
PPI 0% 0/ 58e46 PPI Product Process Interface
PTAL 0% 0/ 0 PTAL Portal
RDS 0% 0/ 0 RDS Radius
RMON 0% 0/ 11240 RMONRemote monitoring
ROUT 0% 0/ 6a6343 ROUTRoute task
RPCQ 0% 0/ 22254 RPCQRemote procedure call
RTMR 0% 0/ ed870 RTMR
SAM 0% 0/ 2e2d SAM Service Agent Module
SAPP 0% 0/ 758e SAPP
SECE 0% 0/ 2e6e82 SECE Security
SLAG 0% 0/ 0 SLAG
SMAG 0% 0/ 0 SMAG Smart Link Agent
SMLK 0% 0/ 71827 SMLK Smart Link Protocol
SNPG 0% 0/ d97b7 SNPG Multicast Snooping
SOCK 0% 0/ 4bdda SOCKPacket schedule and
process
SPM 0% 0/ 6a1ce SPM Smart Power Management
SRM 0% 0/ 6bb9b8 SRM System Resource
Management
SRMI 0% 0/ 0 SRMI External Interrupt
SRMT 0% 0/ fe2a46 SRMT System Resource Manage
Timer

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 622

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

STFW 0% 0/ 0 STFW Super task forward

STND 0% 0/ 0 STNDStandby task
STP 0% 0/ 79e590 STP
STRA 0% 0/ 1c767 STRA Source Trail
TACH 0% 0/ 9817e TACHWTACACS
TARP 0% 0/ 0 TARPING
TICK 0% 0/ 7dbef6
TM 0% 0/ 0 TM Transmission Management
TNQA 0% 0/ 83134 TNQAC
TRAP 0% 0/ 14d7 TRAPSNMP trap task
TTNQ 0% 0/ 0 TTNQAS
TUNL 0% 0/ 5c17 TUNL
UCM 0% 0/ 3e46 UCM User Control Management
UTSK 0% 0/ 0 UTSK
VCMP 0% 0/ 0 VCMP task
VFS 0% 0/ 0 VFS Virtual file system
VFSD 0% 0/ 0 VFSDVFS flash task for delete
file block
VMON 0% 0/ 78d5 VMONSystem monitor
VMSH 0% 0/ 0 VMSH
VP 0% 0/ 5966 VP Virtual path task
VPR 0% 0/ 0 VPR VP Receiver
VRPT 0% 0/ 39fd VRPT
VRRP 0% 0/ 152ced VRRP
VT 0% 0/ 0 VT Virtual Transfer
VT0 0% 0/ 4909c5 VT0 Line user's task
VT1 0% 0/ 0 VT1 Line user's task
VTYD 0% 0/ b3282 VTYDVirtual terminal
WEB 0% 0/ 1295 WEB Web
XMON 0% 0/ 0 XMONVxworks system monitor
XQOS 0% 0/ 12999 XQOS Quality of service
_EXC 0% 0/ 0 Exception Agent Task
_TIL 0% 0/ 0 Infinite loop event task
bcmCNTR.0 0% 0/ 61077b tS10
bcmCNTR.1 0% 0/ 605691 tS11
bcmDPC 0% 0/ 25d89 tS09
bcmL2X.0 0% 0/ b069d6 tS0c
bcmL2X.1 0% 0/ b2c5f2 tS0f
bcmRX 0% 0/ 1df879 bcmRX
bcmTX 0% 0/ 16f2 tS0a
frag_add 0% 0/ 45ecce tS0d
frag_del 0% 0/ 0 tS0e
linkscan 0% 0/ ecce16 tS12
root 0% 0/ 0 tS03
soft_learn 0% 0/ 7812a tS0b
tExcTask 0% 0/ 0 tS00
tLogTask 0% 0/ 0 tS01
tShell 0% 0/ 0 tS02

Table 3-2 Description of the display cpu-usage command output

Item Description

CPU Usage Stat. Cycle Interval for collecting CPU usage

statistics. The default interval is 60
seconds.

CPU Usage Average CPU usage in the last 10

seconds.

Max Highest CPU usage in history.

CPU Usage Stat. Time Time when the latest CPU usage
statistics are collected.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 623

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

CPU utilization for five seconds CPU usage in five seconds.

one minute CPU usage in one minute.

five minutes CPU usage in five minutes.

Max CPU Usage Stat. Time Time when the highest CPU usage
statistics are collected.

TaskName Task that is being executed. For details

about all the tasks and functions of
the device, see "Troubleshooting: High
CPU Usage - How to Locate the High
CPU Usage Problem - Determining
Fault Causes According to CPU Usages
of Tasks (Fixed Switches)" and
"Troubleshooting: High CPU Usage -
Appendix - CPU-related Tasks and
Functions for Fixed Switches" in
Huawei S Series Campus Switches
Troubleshooting Guide.

CPU Real-time CPU usage of each task.

Runtime(CPU Tick High/Tick Low) System running time calculated based

on CPU tick.

Task Explanation Explanation to the task.

3.1.4 display cpu-usage configuration

Function
The display cpu-usage configuration command displays CPU usage
configuration.

Format
display cpu-usage configuration [ slave | slot slot-id ]

NOTE

The slave parameter is not supported if the switch does not support the stacking function or
does not have the stacking function enabled.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 624

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slave Displays CPU usage configuration of -
standby switches in a stack. This
parameter is valid only when multiple
switches form stack.

slot slot-id Displays device CPU usage The value is 0 if stacking is

configuration. slot-id specifies the not configured. The value
stack ID. ranges from 0 to 8 if
stacking is configured.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
This command displays the alarm threshold and recovery threshold.
● When CPU usage reaches the alarm threshold, the system generates a CPU
usage alarm.
● When CPU usage falls within the recovery threshold, the system generates a
clear alarm.

Example
# Display CPU usage configuration .
<HUAWEI> display cpu-usage configuration
The CPU usage monitor is turned on.
The current monitor cycle is 60 seconds.
The current monitor warning threshold is 95%.
The current monitor restore threshold is 80%.

Table 3-3 Description of the display cpu-usage configuration command output

Item Description

The CPU usage monitor Whether the CPU usage monitoring

function is enabled or disabled.
To enable the CPU usage monitoring
function, run the cpu-usage monitor
command.

The current monitor cycle CPU usage monitoring period, which

cannot be configured.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 625

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

The current monitor warning threshold Alarm threshold. To set the CPU usage
alarm threshold, run the 3.2.5 cpu-
usage threshold threshold-value
[ restore restore-threshold-value ]
[ slot slot-id ] command.

The current monitor restore threshold Alarm recovery threshold. To set the
CPU usage alarm recovery threshold,
run the 3.2.5 cpu-usage threshold
threshold-value [ restore restore-
threshold-value ] [ slot slot-id ]
command.

Related Topics
3.2.5 cpu-usage threshold

3.1.5 display cpu-usage history

Function
The display cpu-usage history command displays CPU usage statistics within a
period.

Format
display cpu-usage history [ 1hour | 24hour | 72hour ] [ slave | slot slot-id ]
[ vcpu vcpu ]

NOTE

The slave parameter is not supported if the switch does not support the stacking function or
does not have the stacking function enabled.
Only the S5720HI supports the vcpu vcpu parameter.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
1hour Displays CPU usage statistics within the -
last one hour.

24hour Displays CPU usage statistics within the -

last 24 hours.

72hour Displays CPU usage statistics within the -

last 72 hours.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 626

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

slave Displays the CPU usage statistics of slave -
devices in a stack. This parameter is valid
only in a stack system.

slot slot-id Displays the CPU usage statistics of a The value varies with
specified slot ID. the device configuration.

vcpu vcpu Displays the CPU usage statistics of a Specify the vcpu
specified virtual CPU. parameter based on the
hardware configuration.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The system collects CPU usage statistics at a specified interval (usually 60s) and
saves them in the historical record table. To check CPU usage statistics within a
period, run the display cpu-usage history command, and the command output
helps you determine whether the CPU is working properly.
In the display cpu-usage history command output, the x-coordinate indicates the
specified period, and the y-coordinate indicates the CPU usage.
Precautions
If CPU usage is constantly higher than the upper alarm threshold (95% by default)
before the feature is deployed on a large scale, check the device to troubleshoot
the fault.

Example
# Display CPU usage statistics within the last one hour.
<HUAWEI> display cpu-usage history 1hour
100%|
95%|
90%|
85%|
80%|
75%|
70%|
65%|
60%|
55%|
50%|
45%|

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 627

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

40%|
35%| H
30%| H
25%| H
20%| H
15%| H
10%| H
5%|HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+>
10 20 30 40 50 60
System cpu-usage last 60 minutes(Per Min)

# Display CPU usage statistics within the last 24 hours.

<HUAWEI> display cpu-usage history 24hour

100%|
95%|
90%|
85%|
80%|
75%|*
70%|*
65%|*
60%|*
55%|*
50%|*
45%|*
40%|*
35%|* **
30%|* **
25%|* **
20%|* **
15%|* **
10%|H **
5%|HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
---------+---------+---------+---------+-------->
10 20 30 40
System cpu-usage last 24 hours(Per Halfhour)
* = maximum cpu-usage H = average cpu-usage

# Display CPU usage statistics within the last 72 hours.

<HUAWEI> display cpu-usage history 72hour

100%|
95%|
90%|
85%|
80%|
75%|*
70%|*
65%|*
60%|*
55%|*
50%|*
45%|*
40%|*
35%|* *
30%|* *
25%|* *
20%|* *
15%|* *
10%|* *
5%|HHHHHHHHHHHHHH
---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+-->
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
System cpu-usage last 72 hours(Per Hour)
* = maximum cpu-usage H = average cpu-usage

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 628

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-4 Description of the display cpu-usage history command output

Item Description

System cpu- CPU usage statistics within the last one hour, with a step of
usage last 60 one minute
minutes(Per Min)

System cpu- CPU usage statistics within the last 24 hours, with a step of
usage last 24 half an hour
hours(Per
Halfhour)

System cpu- CPU usage statistics within the last 72 hours, with a step of
usage last 72 an hour
hours(Per Hour)

* = maximum Maximum CPU usage

cpu-usage

H = average cpu- Average CPU usage

usage

3.1.6 display device

Function
The display device command displays the type and status of the components on
a device.

Format
display device [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● On a non-stacked The value is an integer,

device, the value and the value must be
indicates the slot ID. set according to the
● On a stacked device, device configuration if
the value indicates stacking is configured.
the stack ID. The value is 0 if stacking
is not configured.

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 629

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
If you need to check whether a switch is working properly, run the display device
command to view hardware information of the components and device
registration status on the switch.
This command can also display the working status of the battery or redundant
power supply (RPS) used for a device.
The following product models support the use of an RPS:
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-52X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC,
S5720S-52P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC
● S5720SI: S5720-28X-SI-24S-AC, S5720-28X-SI-24S-DC
● S5720EI series: S5720-32X-EI-24S-AC, S5720-50X-EI-46S-AC, S5720-32X-EI-AC,
S5720-52X-EI-AC, S5720-50X-EI-AC, S5720-32P-EI-AC, S5720-52P-EI-AC,
S5720-32X-EI-DC, S5720-50X-EI-DC, S5720-32X-EI-24S-DC, S5720-50X-EI-46S-
DC
● S5700LI series: all models except S5700-10P-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-BAT,
S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT, and S5700-10P-PWR-LI-AC
● S5700S-LI series: all models
● S5710-X-LI series: all models
● S5720LI series: S5720-28X-LI-AC, S5720-28X-LI-DC, S5720-28X-PWR-LI-AC,
S5720-52X-LI-AC, S5720-52X-LI-DC, S5720-52X-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28X-LI-24S-
AC, S5720-28X-LI-24S-DC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-52X-PWR-LI-ACF
● S5720S-LI series: S5720S-28X-LI-24S-AC
● S6720LI series: all models
● S6720S-LI series: all models
The following product models support the use of a battery: S5700-28P-LI-BAT,
S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT.

Example
# Display information about the components on a device (with a built-in power
supply unit or power module).
<HUAWEI> display device
S5700-52P-LI-AC's Device status:
Slot Sub Type Online Power Register Status Role
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 - S5700-52P-LI Present PowerOn Registered Normal Master

# Display information about components on a device (connected to an RPS).

<HUAWEI> display device
S5700-28X-LI-AC's Device status:
Slot Sub Type Online Power Register Status Role
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 - S5700-28X-LI Present PowerOn Registered Normal Master
RPS Present PowerOn Registered Self-powered

# Display information about components on a device (with a battery installed).

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 630

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> display device

S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT's Device status:
Slot Sub Type Online Power Register Status Role
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 - S5700-28P-LI-24S Present PowerOn Registered Normal Master
5 BAT-4AHA Present PowerOn Registered Normal NA

# Display information about components on a device (where ports on the device

panel and ports on subcards cannot be used together).
<HUAWEI> display device
S6720-32C-PWH-SI-AC's Device status:
Slot Sub Type Online Power Register Status Role
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 - S6720-32C-PWH-SI Present PowerOn Registered Normal
Master
1 - Present PowerOn Unregistered - NA
PWR1 POWER Present PowerOn Registered Normal
NA
FAN1 FAN Present PowerOn Registered Normal
NA
Info: Slot 0 is in the port-on-card disable mode, so subcard 1 is unavailable and unregistered.

# Display information about the component in slot 0.

<HUAWEI> display device slot 0
*down: administratively down

S5700-52P-LI-AC's Device status:

Slot Sub Type Online Power Register Status Role
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 - S5700-52P-LI Present PowerOn Registered Normal Master
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Board Type : S5700-52P-LI
Board Description : 48 Ethernet 10/100/1000 ports,4 Gig SFP,AC 110/220V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Port Optic MDI Speed Duplex Flow- Port PoE
Type Status (Mbps) Ctrl State State
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0/0/1 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/2 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Up -
0/0/3 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/4 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/5 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/6 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/7 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/8 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/9 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/10 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/11 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/12 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/13 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/14 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/15 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/16 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/17 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/18 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -
0/0/19 GE(C) Absent Auto 1000 Full Disable Down -

Table 3-5 Description of the display device command output

Item Description

Slot ● On a standalone device, this field indicates a slot ID.

● In a stack, this field indicates a stack ID, and the value
must be set according to the device configuration.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 631

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Sub Card ID. The value can be:

● –: The component is a device, not a card.
● 1: front card.
● 2: rear card.
● 3: fan module.
● 4 and 5: power module, lithium battery or lead-acid
battery board.

Type Component type. A component can be a device, RPS, or a

card.
The device types are displayed as S5700-52P-LI. The -AC
or -DC field is not displayed.
Subcards are classified into the front subcard, rear
subcard, power subcard and fan subcard.
● Front card: The command displays the PCB model of a
front card. For card classification and details about
different cards, see the Hardware Description.
● Rear card: The command displays the PCB model of a
rear card. For card classification and details about
different cards, see the Hardware Description.
● Fan subcards include FAN.
● Power subcard is POWER.
● Lithium battery: BAT-4AHA or BAT-8AHA
● Lead-acid battery board: PBB-12AHA
Redundant power supply: RPS

Online Whether a component is available. If the component is

available, this field displays Present. If the component is
unavailable, it is not displayed in the command output.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 632

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Power Power supply status. The value can be:

● PowerOn
● PowerOff
If the device has a battery installed, the following values
may be displayed:
● Lithium battery
PowerOn: A lithium battery is installed.
● Lead-acid battery
PowerOn: A lead-acid battery board is installed and a
lead-acid battery is connected to it.
PowerOff: A lead-acid battery board is installed but no
lead-acid battery is connected to it.
If no lithium battery or lead-acid battery board is
installed, the command does not display the preceding
information. You can also check the power supply status
of a lithium battery or lead-acid battery using the display
power command.

Register Whether the device is registered:

● Registered: indicates that the component is registered.
● Unregistered: indicates that the component is
unregistered.

Status Status of the component. The value can be:

● Abnormal: indicates that the component is running
abnormally.
● Normal: indicates that the component is running
normally.
If the device is connected to an RPS power supply, the
following values may be displayed:
● Non-powered: The RPS power supply is not supplying
power to the local device.
● Other-powered: The RPS power supply is supplying
power to another device and cannot supply power to
the local device.
● Self-powered: The RPS power supply is supplying power
to the local device.
● –: The RPS power supply is initializing and has not
registered.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 633

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Role Role of a component.

● In a stack, the value can be:
Master: The component is the master switch.
Standby: The component is the standby switch.
Slave: The component is a slave switch.
● On a standalone device, this field displays Master.
● The value NA indicates a card.

Board Type Device type.

Board Description Device description.

Port Number of an interface on a device.

Port Type Type of an interface.

● If the field value contains (C), this interface is an
electrical interface.
● If the field value contains (F), this interface is an
optical interface.

Optic Status Whether an optical module is available on an interface.

● Present: An optical module is present on the interface.
● Absent: No optical module is present on the interface.
● -: Optical module information cannot be obtained.

MDI Medium dependent interface (MDI) type, which can be

any of the following:
● Auto
● Normal
● Across
If this field displays -, the MDI type of the interface cannot
be obtained.

Speed (Mbps) Interface speed.

Duplex Duplex mode of an interface.

● Half: The interface works in half-duplex mode.
● Full: The interface works in full-duplex mode.
● -: The interface duplex mode cannot be obtained.
To set the duplex mode for an interface, run the duplex
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 634

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Flow-Ctrl Flow control status on an interface.

● Disable: The flow control function is disabled on the
interface.
● Enable: The flow control function is enabled on the
interface.
● -: The flow control status cannot be obtained.
To configure flow control, run the flow-control command.

Port State Status of an interface:

● down: The interface is physically Down.
● *down: The interface is manually shut down.
● up: The interface is in Up state.

PoE State Status of the PoE function on an interface.

● Enable: The PoE function is enabled.
● Disable: The PoE function is disabled.
● -: PoE information cannot be obtained.

3.1.7 display device capability

Function
The display device capability command displays the hardware and software
capabilities of a device.

NOTE

Only the S5720EI supports this command.

Format
display device capability [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id ● Specifies a slot ID on a In a stack, the value is an integer and
standalone switch where must be set according to the
stacking is not enabled. configuration in the stack. On a
● Specifies a stack ID in a standalone switch where stacking is
stack. not enabled, the value is fixed as 0.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 635

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Whether a device supports a function depends on whether the hardware has the
capability of the function and whether the running system software provides this
function. You can use this command to check the hardware and software support
for a function and determine whether you need to update the system software or
use other methods to obtain the function.

Precautions

Currently, this command can only display the hardware and software support for
the MPLS feature.

Example
# Display the hardware and software capabilities of a device.
<HUAWEI> display device capability
Slot Feature Hardware Software
--------------------------------------------------------
0 MPLS NO YES
--------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-6 Description of the display device capability command output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Feature Name of a feature. Currently, the

feature name can only be MPLS.

Hardware Hardware support for the feature.

Software Software support for the feature.

3.1.8 display device manufacture-info

Function
The display device manufacture-info command displays manufacture
information about the device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 636

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display device manufacture-info [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID ● The value is 0 when

when no stack is no stack is configured.
configured. ● The value ranges
● Specifies the stack ID from 0 to 8 when a
when a stack is stack is configured.
configured.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display device manufacture-info command to view manufacture
information about the device, including the serial number and manufacture date.
The command output contains information about only service subcards and does
not contain information about fans and power modules.

Example
# Display manufacture information about the device.
<HUAWEI> display device manufacture-info
Slot Sub Serial-number Manu-date
----------------------
0 - 2102353169107C800132 2011-08-24
1 021ESN1234567890 2000-01-01

# Display manufacture information about devices in a stack.

<HUAWEI> display device manufacture-info
Slot Sub Serial-number Manu-date
----------------------
0 - 2102353169107C800132 2011-08-24
1 021ESN1234567890 2000-01-01
3 - 2102353170107C800132 2011-08-23
4 - 2102353170107C800132 2011-08-23
1 020WYG1234567892 2010-12-02
8 - 2102353170107C800235 2000-01-01

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 637

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-7 Description of the display device manufacture-info command output

Item Description

slot Stack ID.

Sub Subcard number.

Serial-number Serial number.

Manu-date Manufacture date of the device.

3.1.9 display diagnostic-information

Function
The display diagnostic-information command collects and displays all the
current diagnostic information or saves diagnostic information in a specified file.

Format
display diagnostic-information [ acl | ap | arp | bfd | defend | dhcp | l2adp |
l3adp | lbdt | lldp | mcast | mpls | qos | rrpp | sdk | smlk | srm | sta | stack | stat
| stp | ucm ] [ file-name ]

NOTE

● The S1720 does not support defend.

● Only the S5720S-SI, S5720SI, S5720EI, S5720HI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720SI, S6720S-SI,
S6720S-EI, and S6720EI support bfd.
● Only the S5720EI, S5720HI, S6720S-EI, and S6720EI support mpls.
● Among S5720EI switches running V200R009C00 and later versions, only some switches
support the MPLS feature. Run the display device capability command on the switch to
check the switch's software and hardware capabilities. The switch supports the MPLS
feature only when chips also support the MPLS feature.
● Only the S5720EI, S5720HI, S6720S-EI, and S6720EI support sdk.
● The stack parameter is supported on a stack only.
● Only the S5720HI supports ap and sta.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

acl Displays ACL -

information.

ap Displays AP information. -

arp Displays ARP -

information.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 638

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

bfd Displays BFD -

information.

defend Displays attack defense -

information.

dhcp Displays DHCP -

information.

l2adp Displays L2 information. -

l3adp Displays L3 information. -

lbdt Displays LBDT -

information.

lldp Displays LLDP -

information.

mcast Displays multicast -

information.

mpls Displays MPLS -

information.

qos Displays QoS -

information.

rrpp Displays RRPP -

information.

sdk Displays sdk information. -

smlk Displays Smart Link -

information.

stack Displays stack -

information.

srm Displays device -

information.

sta Displays STA -

information.

stat Displays basic statistic -

information.

stp Displays STP -

information.

ucm Displays UCM module -

information.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 639

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

file-name Specifies the name of The value is a string of 5

the file where diagnostic to 64 characters. The file
information is stored. name extension must
be .txt. The default
directory where files are
stored is flash:/.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When a fault occurs in the system, you can use the display diagnostic-
information command to collect diagnostic information for fault location.
The display diagnostic-information command output includes the output for
multiple display commands, such as 2.4.6 display clock, 3.1.19 display version,
and 2.8.13 display current-configuration. Running the display diagnostic-
information command is like running these display commands in batches.
Precautions
● If the file-name parameter is not specified, diagnostic information is only
displayed on the screen. If the file-name parameter is specified, diagnostic
information is only stored to a specified file but not displayed on the screen,
and the command level is management level (3).
● If this command displays a long output, press Ctrl+C to abort this command.
● This command displays diagnostic information, which helps locate faults but
may affect system performance. For example, CPU usage may become high.
Therefore, do not use this command when the system is running properly.
● Running the display diagnostic-information command simultaneously on
multiple terminals connected to the device is prohibited. This is because CPU
usage of the device may obviously increase and the device performance may
be degraded.
● When you run this command, the device obtains or uses some personal data
of users, such as the STA MAC address. Delete the personal data immediately
after the command is executed to ensure user data security.

Example
# Display diagnostic information about the device.
<HUAWEI> display diagnostic-information
===========================================================

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 640

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

===============display interface brief===============

===========================================================
PHY: Physical
*down: administratively down
#down: LBDT down
(l): loopback
(s): spoofing
(E): E-Trunk down
(b): BFD down
(e): ETHOAM down
(dl): DLDP down
(lb): LBDT block
InUti/OutUti: input utility/output utility
Interface PHY Protocol InUti OutUti inErrors outErrors
Eth-Trunk5 down down 0% 0% 0 0
Eth-Trunk9 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 up up 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/6 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/8 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/10 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/11 up up 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/12 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/13 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/14 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/15 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/16 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/17 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/18 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/19 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/20 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/21 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/22 *down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/23 down down 0% 0% 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/24 up up 0% 0% 0 0
......

# Save diagnostic information to the file aa.txt in the flash memory.

<HUAWEI> display diagnostic-information aa.txt
Now saving the diagnostic information to the device
100%
Info: The diagnostic information was saved to the device successfully.

Related Topics
3.1.19 display version
2.4.6 display clock
2.8.13 display current-configuration

3.1.10 display elabel

Function
The display elabel command displays the electronic label of the device.

Format
display elabel [ slot slot-id [ subcard-id ] ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 641

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID or the The value depends on

number of a fan module the device configuration.
or power module.

subcard-id Specifies the subcard ID. The value must be set

This parameter can be according to the device
specified if any subcard configuration.
is used on the device.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Electronic labels identify the hardware. You can use the display elabel command
to view the electronic label information.
No electronic label is displayed for an electrical interface or a combo interface
working as an electrical interface.

NOTE

For a new device delivered since V200R011, its electronic label version has been updated to
version 4.0, which has the following changes compared to earlier versions:
● The Model field is added to indicate the hardware external model of the device.
● The ExInfo field is added to indicate the hardware extension information of the device. This
field does not exist in electronic labels of optical modules.
● The ElabelVersion is added to indicate the version of the elabel.

Example
# Display the electronic label of the device with stack ID 0.
<HUAWEI> display elabel slot 0
/$[System Integration Version]
/$SystemIntegrationVersion=3.0

[Slot_0]
/$[Board Integration Version]
/$BoardIntegrationVersion=3.0

[Main_Board]

/$[ArchivesInfo Version]
/$ArchivesInfoVersion=3.0

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 642

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

[Board Properties]
BoardType=S5752S-LI
BarCode=2102353174107C800132
Item=
Description=S5752S-LI Mainframe(48 10/100/1000 BASE-T ports and 4 SFP GE (100/1
000 BASE-X) ports (SFP Req.) and DC -48V)
Manufactured=2011-08-22
VendorName=Huawei
IssueNumber=
CLEICode=
BOM=

[Port_GigabitEthernet0/0/1]
/$[ArchivesInfo Version]
/$ArchivesInfoVersion=3.0

[Board Properties]
BoardType=
BarCode=
Item=
Description=
Manufactured=
/$VendorName=
IssueNumber=
CLEICode=
BOM=

Table 3-8 Description of the display elabel command output

Item Description

BoardIntegrationVersion Version of the board software

integration format.

ArchivesInfoVersion Electronic label information version.

SystemIntegrationVersion Version of the host software

integration format.

BoardType Vendor's component model of the

specified component.

BarCode Bar code of the specified component.

Item BOM code of the specified

component.

Description English description of the specified

component.

Manufactured Production date of the specified

component.

VendorName Vendor name of the specified

component.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 643

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

IssueNumber Issuing number of the specified

component.

CLEICode CLEI code of the specified component.

BOM Sales BOM code of the specified

component, which is an item number.

Related Topics
3.2.3 backup elabel

3.1.11 display esn

Function
The display esn command displays the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of a
device.

NOTE

The S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, and S5720EI do not support this command.

Format
display esn

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
An ESN uniquely identifies a device.
In a stack, the display esn command displays the ESNs of all member devices.

Example
# Display the ESN of the device.
<HUAWEI> display esn
ESN of slot 0: 21023586001234567890

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 644

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-9 Description of the display esn command output

Item Description

ESN of slot 0 SN of the device with the slot ID 0.

3.1.12 display fan

Function
The display fan command displays the fan status.

Format
display fan

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Devices can run properly when fans are working properly. If proper heat
dissipation cannot be ensured for devices, devices may overheat, damaging the
hardware. You can use the display fan command to view the fan status.

Different device models may support different number of fans.

Example
# Display the fan status of the device.
<HUAWEI> display fan
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot FanID Online Status Speed Mode Airflow
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 1 Absent - - - -
0 2 Present Normal 100% AUTO Side-to-Side
0 3 Absent - - - -

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 645

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-10 Description of the display fan command output

Item Description

Slot ● On a standalone device, this field

indicates a slot ID.
● In a stack, this field indicates the
stack ID of the local device.

FAN Number of a fan.

Online Check whether a fan is available.

● Present: available
● Absent: unavailable

Status Running status of a fan.

● Normal: The fan is running
normally.
● Abnormal: The fan works
abnormally.
● -: The fan is not present.

Speed Percentage of the current fan speed to

the full speed. If this field displays -,
the fan is not present.

Mode Working mode of a fan.

● AUTO: The fan speed can be
automatically adjusted.
● MANUAL: The fan works at a fixed
speed.
● -: The fan is not present.

Airflow Airflow direction of a fan.

● Back-to-Side: Air flows from the
rear to the left and right sides.
● Side-to-Back: Air flows from the left
and right sides to the rear.
● Side-to-Side: Air flows from one
side to the other side.
● -: The fan is not present.

3.1.13 display memory-usage

Function
The display memory-usage command displays the memory usage of the device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 646

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display memory-usage [ slave | slot slot-id ] [ vcpu vcpu ]

NOTE

The slave parameter is not supported if the switch does not support the stacking function or
does not have the stacking function enabled.
Only the S5720HI supports the vcpu vcpu parameter.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slave Displays memory usage of a slave -
switch in a stack. This parameter is
valid only when multiple switches
form a stack.

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if stacking is

The value ranges from 0 to 8
not configured. if stacking is configured. The
● Specifies the stack ID if stacking value is 0 if stacking is not
is configured. configured.

vcpu vcpu Specifies the virtual CPU number. Specify the vcpu parameter
based on the hardware
configuration.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Memory usage is an important index to evaluate device performance. A high
memory usage will cause service faults. You can use the display memory-usage
command to view memory usage to check whether devices are working properly.

Example
# Display memory usage of the current device.
<HUAWEI> display memory-usage
Memory utilization statistics at 2008-12-15 15:17:42+08:00
System Total Memory Is: 394152720 bytes
Total Memory Used Is: 130975664 bytes
Memory Using Percentage Is: 33%

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 647

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-11 Description of the display memory-usage command output

Item Description

Memory utilization statistics at Time when memory usage is collected.

System Total Memory Total memory of the device network

operating system.

Total Memory Used Total used memory of the device network

operating system.

Memory Using Percentage Memory usage.

3.1.14 display memory-usage threshold

Function
The display memory-usage threshold command displays the memory usage
threshold on the device.

Format
display memory-usage threshold [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id Displays the memory usage The value is 0 if stacking is not
threshold in a specified slot configured; the value ranges from 0 to
ID. 8 if stacking is configured.

Views
All views

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
You can view the memory usage alarm threshold to learn about the conditions for
triggering alarms.
● When memory usage reaches the alarm threshold, the system generates an
alarm.
● When memory usage falls within the alarm threshold, the system generates a
clear alarm.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 648

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the memory usage threshold on the main control board.
<HUAWEI> display memory-usage threshold
Current memory threshold of the main board is 95%.

Table 3-12 Description of the display memory-usage threshold command output

Item Description

Current memory threshold of The memory usage threshold of the main

the main board is 95%. control board is 95%. To set the memory
usage threshold of the main control board,
use the set memory-usage threshold
threshold-value command.

Related Topics
3.2.28 set memory-usage threshold

3.1.15 display power

Function
The display power command displays the information of all power supply units
and battery on the device.

Format
display power

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can use this command to check the status of all power supply units and
battery, and their power. The following product models support the use of a
battery: S5700-28P-LI-BAT, S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT.

No information is displayed for built-in power supplies.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 649

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the current power supply status.
<HUAWEI> display power
------------------------------------------------------------
Slot PowerID Online Mode State Power(W)
------------------------------------------------------------
0 PWRI Present AC Supply 500.00
0 PWRII Absent - - -

# Display the status of the battery used on the device.

<HUAWEI> display power
------------------------------------------------------------
Slot PowerID Online Mode State Power(W)
------------------------------------------------------------
0 PWRI Present BAT Charge 80.00

Table 3-13 Description of the display power command output

Item Description

Slot ● Specifies the slot ID if stacking is

not configured, and the value is 0.
● Specifies the stack ID if stacking is
configured, and the value must be
set according to the device
configuration.

PowerID ID of a power supply slot:

● PWRI: slot for a power module,
lithium battery, or lead-acid battery
board
● PWRII: slot for a power module
On the S5720S-SI, S5720SI, S5720EI,
S5720HI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720SI,
S6720S-SI, S6720S-EI, and S6720EI
series switches, the power supply slots
are PWR1 and PWR2.

Online Whether a power supply is installed

properly.
● Present: indicates that the power
supply is installed properly.
● Absent: indicates that the power
supply is not installed properly, or
the power supply is a fixed power
supply.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 650

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Mode Type of the power module, lithium

battery, or lead-acid battery board:
● AC: AC power module
● DC: DC power module
● –: power supply invalid or absent
● BAT: lithium battery
● PBB: lead-acid battery board

State Working status of a power module or

battery.
● For a power module, the value can
be:
Supply: current is output.
NotSupply: no current is output.
–: invalid or absent
● For a lithium battery, the value can
be:
Charge: The battery is charging.
Discharge: The battery is
discharging.
Full: The battery is in full power
state.
● For a lead-acid battery, the value
can be:
Charge: The battery is charging.
Discharge: The battery is
discharging.
Full: The battery is in full power
state.
Abnormal: The battery is not
working properly. For example, the
lead-acid battery board is installed
but no lead-acid battery is
connected to it; alternatively, the
lead-acid battery is reversely
connected.

Power(W) Rated power of a power supply. –

indicates that the power supply is
invalid or is not installed properly.

3.1.16 display transceiver

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 651

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The display transceiver command displays information about the optical module
on an interface.

NOTE

The command displays only information about optical interfaces.

Format
display transceiver [ interface interface-type interface-number | slot slot-id ]
[ verbose ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface interface-type Specifies the type and -

interface-number number of an interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID The value range depends

on a standalone on the actual
switch. configuration if stacking
● Specifies the stack ID is configured. The value
in a stack. is 0 if stacking is not
configured.

verbose Displays detailed -

information about the
optical module on an
interface, including the
general information,
manufacture
information, alarm
information, and
diagnostic information.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 652

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run this command to view general information, manufacture information,
and alarm information about an optical module. If you specify the verbose
keyword, diagnostic information is also displayed in addition to the preceding
information.
If a device does not support optical modules, a message will be displayed after
you run this command.
Some parameters including the current and optical power will be displayed for
each lane of the 40GE interfaces.

Example
# Display general information, manufacture information, and alarm information
about the optical module on a specified interface.
<HUAWEI> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 transceiver information:
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Transceiver Type :1000_BASE_SX_SFP
Connector Type :LC
Wavelength(nm) :850
Transfer Distance(m) :0(9um),300(50um),150(62.5um)
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring :YES
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Vendor Part Number :02318169
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Manufacture information:
Manu. Serial Number :CD25HP12M
Manufacturing Date :2013-06-184
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------

# Display general information, manufacture information, alarm information and

diagnostic information about the optical module on a specified interface.
<HUAWEI> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 0/0/3 verbose
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 transceiver information:
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Transceiver Type :GPS_SFP
Connector Type :SMA Coaxial Connector
Wavelength(nm) :-
Transfer Distance(m) :100(copper)
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring :NO
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Vendor Part Number :HUAWEI AE 905S A
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Manufacture information:
Manu. Serial Number :031TUX10HB000065
Manufacturing Date :2017-11-28
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Diagnostic information:
Temperature(¡ãC) :26.00
Temp High Threshold(¡ãC) :85.00
Temp Low Threshold(¡ãC) :-40.00
Voltage(V) :3.29
Volt High Threshold(V) :3.64
Volt Low Threshold(V) :2.95
Bias Current(mA) :4.57

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 653

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Bias High Threshold(mA) :9.00

Bias Low Threshold(mA) :2.00
RX Power(dBM) :-40.00
RX Power High Threshold(dBM) :0.00
RX Power Low Threshold(dBM) :-16.99
TX Power(dBM) :-5.03
TX Power High Threshold(dBM) :-2.22
TX Power Low Threshold(dBM) :-6.99
Transceiver phony alarm :Yes
-------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-14 Description of the display transceiver command output

Item Description

Common Generic information about the optical module.

information

Transceiver Type Type of the optical module.

Connector Type Type of the fiber connector required by the optical module.
The value depends on the protocol related to the optical
module.

Wavelength Wavelength of the optical module.

(nm)

Transfer Distance Transmission distance of the optical module. 50 um and 62.5

(m) um are fiber diameters. Fibers with a diameter of 50 um or
62.5 um are multimode fibers. Fibers with a diameter of 9
um are single-mode fibers.

Digital Whether diagnostic information about the optical module is

Diagnostic monitored.
Monitoring

Vendor Name Vendor name of the optical module. If the system has not
determined whether the optical module is a Huawei-
customized one, this field displays Judging.
If the vendor name of an optical module is not HUAWEI,
check whether the optical module is a Huawei-certified
optical module. For details, see "How Can I Determine
Whether an Optical Module Is a Huawei-Certified Optical
Module?" in the S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720
V200R011C10 Configuration Guide - Device Management –
Device Status Query.
Vendor Part The vendor part number or product name. If the system has
Number not determined whether the optical module is a Huawei-
customized one, this field displays Judging.

Ordering Name External name of the optical module. Currently, this field is
not supported and is empty.

Manufacture Manufacture information of the optical module.

information

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 654

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Manu. Serial Vendor sequence number of the optical module.

Number

Manufacturing Manufacturing date of the optical module.

Date

Diagnostic Diagnostic information about the optical module.

information

Temperature (°C) Current temperature of the optical module.

Temp High Upper temperature threshold for the optical module.

Threshold (°C)

Temp Low Lower temperature threshold for the optical module.

Threshold (°C)

Voltage (V) Current voltage of the optical module.

Volt High Upper voltage threshold for the optical module.

Threshold(V)

Volt Low Lower voltage threshold for the optical module.

Threshold(V)

Bias Current Bias current of the optical module.

(mA)

Bias High Upper threshold for the bias current of the optical module.
Threshold (mA)

Bias Low Lower threshold for the bias current of the optical module.
Threshold (mA)

RX Power (dBM) Input power of the optical module. when the Input power is
0 W, -Inf is displayed.

RX Power High Upper warning threshold for the receive power of the optical
Warning(dBM) module.

RX Power Low Lower warning threshold for the receive power of the optical
Warning(dBM) module.

RX Power High Upper input power threshold for the optical module.
Threshold (dBM)

RX Power Low Lower input power threshold for the optical module.
Threshold (dBM)

TX Power (dBM) Output power of the optical module. when the output
power is 0 W, -Inf is displayed.

TX Power High Upper warning threshold for the transmit power of the
Warning(dBM) optical module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 655

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

TX Power Low Lower warning threshold for the transmit power of the
Warning(dBM) optical module.

TX Power High Upper output power threshold for the optical module.
Threshold (dBM)

TX Power Low Lower output power threshold for the optical module.
Threshold (dBM)

Transceiver The device has generated an alarm on an optical module

phony alarm:Yes not certified for Huawei switches. This field is displayed only
when the following conditions are met:
● The device is enabled to generate alarms on non-Huawei-
customized optical modules. This alarm function is
enabled by default. If it is disabled, you can run the undo
transceiver phony-alarm-disable command to enable it.
● This optical module is a non-Huawei-customized one.

3.1.17 display transceiver diagnosis interface

Function
The display transceiver diagnosis interface command displays the diagnosis
parameters of an optical transceiver.

Format
display transceiver diagnosis interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface-type interface- Specifies the type and -

number number of an interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 656

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display transceiver diagnosis interface command to check the
digital diagnostic monitoring (DMM) information about an optical module.

Example
# Display the diagnosis parameters of the optical module installed on
GigabitEthernet0/0/4.
<HUAWEI> display transceiver diagnosis interface gigabitethernet 0/0/4
Port GigabitEthernet0/0/4 transceiver diagnostic information:
Parameter Current Low Alarm High Alarm
Type Value Threshold Threshold Status
------------- --------- --------- ---------- --------
TxPower(dBm) -4.64 0.00 0.00 abnormal
RxPower(dBm) -4.37 33.00 0.00 abnormal
Current(mA) 7.42 0.00 0.00 abnormal
Temp.(ºC) 30.00 0.00 0.00 abnormal
Voltage(V) 3.28 0.00 8.19 normal

Table 3-15 Description of the display transceiver diagnosis interface command

output

Item Description

Parameter Type Parameter type:

● TxPower(dBm): indicates the transmission power of
the optical transceiver, in dBm.
● RxPower(dBm): indicates the receiving power of
the optical transceiver, in dBm.
● Current(mA): indicates the current of the optical
transceiver, in mA.
● Temp.(ºC): indicates the temperature of the optical
transceiver, in degree Celsius.
● Voltage(V): indicates the voltage of the optical
transceiver, in V.

Current Value Current value of a parameter.

Low Alarm Threshold Lower alarm threshold of a parameter.

High Alarm Threshold Upper alarm threshold of a parameter.

Status Status of the optical transceiver:

● Normal: The value is within the normal range.
● Abnormal: The value is not within the normal
range.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 657

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.1.18 display temperature

Function
The display temperature command displays the device temperature.

Format
display temperature { all | slot slot-id }

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

all Displays temperature of all -
slots on the device.

slot slot-id Displays temperature of The value is an integer, and the value
the specified slot. must be set according to the device
configuration if stacking is configured.
The value is 0 if stacking is not
configured.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
A high or low device temperature may damage the hardware. This command
displays the current device temperature instead of the operating temperature that
indicates the temperature range of the surrounding environment. When the device
temperature exceeds the upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold, the
device generates an alarm to alert you that the device temperature is abnormal.

Example
# Display the temperature of all slots.
<HUAWEI> display temperature all
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Card Sensor Status Current(C) Lower(C) Lower Upper(C) Upper
Resume(C) Resume(C)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 NA NA Normal 44 0 4 72 68

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 658

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-16 Description of the display temperature command output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Card Subcard ID.

This field is invalid on the device and displays NA.

Sensor Number of a sensor on a card.

This field is invalid on the device and displays NA.

Status Temperature status of a device.

● Normal: The device temperature is within the normal
range.
● Abnormal: The device temperature is out of the normal
range.

Current(C) Current temperature of a device, expressed in the centigrade

scale (°C). The temperature value is displayed as an integer,
so there may be a maximum of 1°C error between the
displayed value and actual temperature.
This field displays - when the sensor is abnormal or the
obtained temperature is higher than 200°C or lower than
100°C.

Lower(C) Low-temperature alarm threshold, expressed in the

centigrade scale (°C).
To set the low-temperature alarm threshold, run the
temperature threshold command.

Lower Low-temperature alarm clear threshold, expressed in the

Resume(C) centigrade scale (°C).
To set the low-temperature alarm clear threshold, run the
temperature threshold command. The low-temperature
alarm clear threshold is 4°C higher than the low-
temperature alarm threshold.

Upper(C) High-temperature alarm threshold, expressed in the

centigrade scale (°C).
To set the high-temperature alarm threshold, run the
temperature threshold command.
On the devices that support fan speed adjustment using the
set fan speed-adjust threshold minus command, the
default value of this field changes based on the PoE power
load.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 659

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Upper High-temperature alarm clear threshold, expressed in the

Resume(C) centigrade scale (°C).
To set the high-temperature alarm clear threshold, run the
temperature threshold command. The high-temperature
alarm clear threshold is 4°C lower than the high-
temperature alarm threshold.

3.1.19 display version

Function
The display version command displays the device version.

Format
display version [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if
The value range depends on the
stacking is not configured. actual configuration if stacking is
● Specifies the stack ID if configured. The value is 0 if
stacking is configured. stacking is not configured.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can use the display version command to view the device version to
determine whether the device needs to be upgraded.

Example
# Display the device version.
<HUAWEI> display version
Huawei Versatile Routing Platform Software
VRP (R) software, Version 5.170 (S6720
V200R011C10)
Copyright (C) 2000-2017 HUAWEI TECH Co.,

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 660

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Ltd.
HUAWEI S6720-54C-EI-48S-AC Routing Switch uptime is 0 week, 0 day, 0 hour, 5
minutes

ES5D2S50Q002 1(Master) : uptime is 0 week, 0 day, 0 hour, 2

minutes
DDR Memory Size : 2048 M bytes
FLASH Total Memory Size : 512 M bytes
FLASH Available Memory Size : 446 M bytes
Pcb Version : VER.B
BootROM Version : 020b.0001
BootLoad Version : 020b.0001
CPLD Version : 0108
Software Version : VRP (R) Software, Version 5.170
(V200R011C10)
CARD1 information
Pcb Version : ES5D21Q04Q01 VER.A
CPLD Version : 0105
PWR2 information
Pcb Version : PWR VER.A
FAN1 information
Pcb Version : NA

Table 3-17 Description of the display version command output

Item Description

Huawei Versatile Routing Platform -

Software

VRP (R) software, Version Versions of the VRP and the software
of the device.

Copyright (C) 2000-2017 HUAWEI Huawei copyright.

TECH Co., Ltd.

Routing Switch uptime System power-on time.

ES5D2S50Q002 1(Master) : uptime Hardware type, role, and startup time

of the device.
NOTE
The names in the instance are taken as an
example.

DDR Memory Size Device's physical memory capacity,

which stores data when the program is
running.
The System Total Memory field value
displayed using the display memory-
usage command is part of the physical
memory capacity and varies depending
on the device model.

FLASH Total Memory Size Total size of the flash memory.

FLASH Available Memory Size Available flash memory size.

This value is the total field value
displayed using the dir command
divided by 1024.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 661

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Pcb Version Version of the printed circuit board

(PCB).

BootROM Version Version of the BootROM software.

BootLoad Version Version of the BootLoad software.

NOTE
This field can be not displayed on
S1720GFR, S2750, S5700S-LI (except
S5700S-28X-LI-AC and S5700S-52X-LI-AC),
and S5700LI.

CPLD Version Version of the complex programmable

logic device (CPLD).

MCU Version Micro Control Unit ( MCU) version.

NOTE
The information is displayed only for the
S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-
LI-AC, and the PoE devices of S5730SI,
S5730S-EI, and S6720SI.

Software Version Versions of the VRP and the software

of the device.

CARD1 information Information about a front card. If no

front card is available, this field is not
displayed.

CARD2 information Information about a rear card. If no

rear card is available, this field is not
displayed.

FAN1 information Information about a pluggable fan

module. If pluggable fan module is
available, this field is not displayed. If
a pluggable fan module does not have
an electronic label, its PCB version is
displayed as NA.

PWR2 information Information about a pluggable power

module. If no pluggable power module
is available, this field is not displayed.
If a pluggable power module does not
have an electronic label, its PCB
version is displayed as NA.

RPS Version RPS management software version. If

the device does not support RPS, this
information is not displayed.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 662

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.2 Hardware Configuration Commands

3.2.1 Command Support
3.2.2 assign resource-mode
3.2.3 backup elabel
3.2.4 cpu-usage monitor
3.2.5 cpu-usage threshold
3.2.6 display device battery
3.2.7 display device battery lifetime threshold
3.2.8 display device fault-light
3.2.9 display fan speed-adjust threshold minus
3.2.10 display resource-mode configuration
3.2.11 display root-key configuration
3.2.12 display service-mode configuration
3.2.13 display switchover state
3.2.14 display system resource-template
3.2.15 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entityexttrap all
3.2.16 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all
3.2.17 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all
3.2.18 display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all
3.2.19 display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all
3.2.20 display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all
3.2.21 display wavelength-map
3.2.22 reset cpu-usage record
3.2.23 reset slot
3.2.24 set device battery lifetime
3.2.25 set device battery off
3.2.26 set device fault-light
3.2.27 set fan speed-adjust threshold minus
3.2.28 set memory-usage threshold
3.2.29 set root-key
3.2.30 set service-mode

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 663

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.2.31 slave restart

3.2.32 slave switchover
3.2.33 slave switchover { disable | enable }
3.2.34 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap
3.2.35 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib
3.2.36 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap
3.2.37 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap
3.2.38 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres
3.2.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system
3.2.40 temperature threshold
3.2.41 transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power
3.2.42 transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power
3.2.43 transceiver phony-alarm-disable
3.2.44 wavelength-channel

3.2.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

3.2.2 assign resource-mode

Function
The assign resource-mode command configures the resource allocation mode of
the device.

The undo assign resource-mode command restores the default resource

allocation mode of the device.

By default, the resource allocation mode of the S5720EI is enhanced-mac and that
of the S6720EI and S6720S-EI is enhanced-arp.

NOTE

Only the S5720EI, S6720EI and S6720S-EI support this command.

Format
assign resource-mode { enhanced-mac | enhanced-ipv4 | enhanced-ipv6 }
[ slot slot-id | all ] (S5720EI)

assign resource-mode { enhanced-mac | enhanced-arp | enhanced-ipv4 | ipv4-

ipv6 6:1 | 96k-arp } [ slot slot-id | all ] (S6720EI, S6720S-EI)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 664

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo assign resource-mode [ slot slot-id | all ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

enhanced-mac Sets the resource -

allocation mode to
enhanced-mac.

enhanced-ipv4 Sets the resource -

allocation mode to
enhanced-ipv4.

enhanced-ipv6 Sets the resource -

allocation mode to
enhanced-ipv6.

enhanced-arp Sets the resource -

allocation mode to
enhanced-arp.

ipv4-ipv6 6:1 Sets the resource -

allocation mode to ipv4-
ipv6 6:1.

96k-arp Sets the resource -

allocation mode to 96k-
arp.

slot slot-id ● Specifies a slot ID on In a stack, the value is

a standalone switch an integer and must be
where stacking is not set according to the
enabled. configuration in the
● Specifies a stack ID in stack. On a standalone
a stack. switch where stacking is
not enabled, the value is
fixed as 0.

all Configures the resource -

allocation mode of the
system.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 665

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

If a device's MAC address entries, FIB entries, or ARP entries are insufficient to
meet service requirements, you can use this command to change the resource
allocation mode so as to extend the entry space.

Table 3-18 Number of entries supported in different resource allocation modes on

the S5720EI

Resour MAC IPv4 FIB IPv6 FIB IPv6 FIB ARP ND Multic
ce (0-64 (Over 64 ast
Allocat Bits Bits IPv4&
ion Mask) Mask) IPv6
Mode

enhanc 64K 12K 6K 1K 16K 8K 2000

ed-mac

enhanc 32K 16K 8K 0K 16K 8K 2000

ed-ipv4

enhanc 32K 8K 4K 2K 16K 8K 2000

ed-ipv6

NOTE

On the S5720EI, IPv4 FIB and IPv6 FIB (0-64 bits mask) share hardware resources. The
specifications listed in the preceding table indicate the maximum number of FIB entries of a
single type. Numbers of the two types of FIB entries cannot reach the maximum value
simultaneously.
On the S5720EI, ARP and ND share hardware resources. The value listed in the preceding
table indicates the maximum number of entries of a single type. Numbers of the two types
of entries cannot reach the maximum value simultaneously.

Table 3-19 Number of entries supported in different resource allocation modes on

the S6720EI and S6720S-EI

Resour MAC IPv4 FIB IPv6 FIB IPv6 FIB ARP ND Multi
ce (0-64 (Over 64 cast
Allocat Bits Bits IPv4&
ion Mask) Mask) IPv6
Mode

enhanc 96K 12K 6K 1K 48K 44K 4000

ed-arp

enhanc 288K 12K 6K 1K 16K 8K 4000

ed-mac

enhanc 32K 128K 80K 0K 16K 8K 4000

ed-ipv4

ipv4- 32K 64K 10K 10K 16K 8K 4000

ipv6 6:1

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 666

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Resour MAC IPv4 FIB IPv6 FIB IPv6 FIB ARP ND Multi
ce (0-64 (Over 64 cast
Allocat Bits Bits IPv4&
ion Mask) Mask) IPv6
Mode

96k-arp 96K 12K 6K 1K 9600 44K 4000

0

NOTE

On the S6720EI and S6720S-EI, ARP and ND share hardware resources. The value listed in
the preceding table indicates the maximum number of entries of a single type. Numbers of
the two types of entries cannot reach the maximum value simultaneously.
When the S6720EI and S6720S-EI work in enhanced-arp, enhanced-mac, enhanced-ipv4, or
96k-arp mode, IPv4 FIB and IPv6 FIB (0-64 bits mask) share hardware resources. The value
listed in the preceding table indicates the maximum number of FIB entries of a single type.
Numbers of the two types of FIB entries cannot reach the maximum value simultaneously.
When the S6720EI and S6720S-EI work in ipv4-ipv6 6:1 mode, IPv6 FIB (0-64 bits mask)
and IPv6 FIB (over 64 bits mask) share hardware resources. The value listed in the
preceding table indicates the maximum number of FIB entries of a single type. Numbers of
the two types of FIB entries cannot reach the maximum value simultaneously.

Precautions

The configured resource allocation mode takes effect only after the device is
restarted.

The requirements for different entry spaces will change when service configuration
is adjusted. In this case, you can change the resource allocation mode to meet the
new service requirements. Subsequently, entry spaces in different resource
allocation modes will change. Therefore, before changing the resource allocation
mode, consider the benefit and loss that the new mode will bring.

On the S6720EI and S6720S-EI, if the 3.2.2 assign resource-mode command sets
the resource allocation mode to enhanced-ipv4 or ipv4-ipv6 6:1, and the ipv4
destination-unreachable drop or ipv6 destination-unreachable dropcommand
has been executed, the function that dropping the packets that do not match
routing entries does not take effect.

On the S6720EI and S6720S-EI, redirection to a low-priority next hop is not

supported in enhanced-ipv4 or ipv4-ipv6 6:1 resource allocation mode.

On the S6720EI and S6720S-EI, MPLS is not supported in 96k-arp resource

allocation mode.

Example
# Set the resource allocation mode to enhanced-ipv4.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] assign resource-mode enhanced-ipv4
Info: It is executing, please wait.....
Info: The resource mode in slot 0 has been set to Enhanced-IPv4 successfully.
Warning: It will take effect after rebooting this device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 667

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.2.10 display resource-mode configuration

3.2.3 backup elabel

Function
The backup elabel command backs up electronic labels of the device to the flash
memory. The default name of the saved file is elabel-slot0.fls.

The backup elabel ftp command backs up electronic labels of the device to a
specified FTP server.

The backup elabel sftp command backs up electronic labels of the device to a
specified SFTP server.

Format
backup elabel [ slot slot-id [ subcard-id ] ]

backup elabel ftp ftp-server-address filename username password [ slot slot-id

[ subcard-id ] ]

backup elabel sftp sftp-server-address filename username password [ slot slot-id

[ subcard-id ] ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

ftp-server- Specifies the IP address of The value is in dotted decimal
address the FTP server that stores notation.
electronic labels.

sftp-server- Specifies the IP address of The value is in dotted decimal

address the SFTP server that stores notation.
electronic labels.

filename Specifies the name of the file The value is a string of 5 to 28

that stores electronic labels. case-sensitive characters without
spaces.

username Specifies the user name used The value is a string of 1 to 64

to log in to the FTP or SFTP case-sensitive characters without
server. spaces.

password Specifies the password used The value is a string of 1 to 16

to log in to the FTP or SFTP case-sensitive characters without
server. spaces.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 668

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID. The value must be set according
to the device configuration.

subcard-id Specifies the subcard ID. The value must be set according
to the device configuration.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When electronic labels are stored on a device, run the backup elabel command to
save electronic labels to a file. This file can be saved to the flash memory, to the
FTP or SFTP server using FTPor SFTP . FTP cannot ensure secure file transfer. SFTP
is recommended on networks that require high security.

Example
# Save electronic labels of the device to the elabel-slot0.fls file in the flash
memory.
<HUAWEI> backup elabel slot 0
Info: Output information to file: flash:/elabel-slot0.fls. Please wait for a mom
ent...

Info: Put file to flash successfully.

# Save electronic labels of the device to FTP server 192.168.12.91. Set the FTP user
name to user and password to 123. Save electronic labels in the elabel-slot0.fls
file.
<HUAWEI> backup elabel ftp 192.168.12.91 elabel-slot0.fls user 123
Warning: FTP is not a secure protocol, and it is recommended to use SFTP.
Info: It is executing, please wait...

Info: Put file to FTP server successfully.

# Save electronic labels of the device to SFTP server 192.168.12.91. Set the SFTP
user name to client001 and password to Huawei@1234. Save electronic labels in
the elabel-slot0.fls file.
<HUAWEI> backup elabel sftp 192.168.12.91 elabel-slot0.fls client001 Huawei@1234
Info: It is executing, please wait...

Info: Put file to SFTP server successfully.

Related Topics
3.1.10 display elabel

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 669

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.2.4 cpu-usage monitor

Function
The cpu-usage monitor command enables the CPU usage monitoring.
The undo cpu-usage monitor command disables the monitoring function.
By default, the CPU usage monitoring is enabled.

Format
cpu-usage monitor [ { slot slot-id } | slave ]
undo cpu-usage monitor [ { slot slot-id } | slave ]

NOTE

Devices that do not support the stack function or do not have the stack function enabled do not
support the slave parameter.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if stacking is
The value is 0 if stacking is
not configured. not configured; the value is
● Specifies the stack ID if stacking is an integer that ranges from 0
configured. to 8 if stacking is configured.

slave Indicates information about the CPU -

usage of the slave device. This
Parameter is invalid.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
If you want to check the status and performance of the device, run the cpu-usage
monitor command to enable the CPU usage monitoring, and then run the display
cpu-usage command to check information about the CPU usage.

Example
# Enable the CPU usage monitoring.
<HUAWEI> system-view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 670

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

[HUAWEI] cpu-usage monitor

Related Topics
3.1.3 display cpu-usage

3.2.5 cpu-usage threshold

Function
Using the cpu-usage threshold command, you can set the alarm threshold and
alarm recovery threshold of CPU usage.
Using the undo cpu-usage threshold command, you can restore the alarm
threshold and alarm recovery threshold of CPU usage.
By default, the alarm threshold of CPU usage is 95% and alarm recovery threshold
is 80%.

Format
cpu-usage threshold threshold-value [ restore restore-threshold-value ] [ slot
slot-id ]
undo cpu-usage threshold [ threshold-value [ restore [ restore-threshold-
value ] ] ] [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
threshold Specifies the alarm The value is an integer that
threshold-value threshold of CPU usage. ranges from 2 to 100. The default
value is 95.

restore restore- Specifies the alarm The value is an integer that

threshold-value recovery threshold of CPU ranges from 1 to 99. The alarm
usage. recover threshold must be smaller
than the alarm threshold.

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if The value is 0 if stacking is not

stacking is not configured; the value ranges from
configured. 0 to 8 if stacking is configured.
● Specifies the stack ID if
stacking is configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 671

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
When the CPU usage exceeds the alarm threshold, a log is recorded. When the
CPU usage reduces by equal to or smaller than 5% and exceeds the threshold
again, no log is recorded. A log is recorded only when the CPU usage is reduced by
greater than 5% and reaches the threshold again. Through log information, you
can know the CPU usage more conveniently.
If slot slot-id is not configured, the alarm threshold and alarm recovery threshold
of CPU usage are set. In addition, the system automatically synchronizes
thresholds on the master switch with those on other member switches.

Example
# Set the alarm threshold of CPU usage to 85% and alarm recovery threshold to
70% of the switch.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] cpu-usage threshold 85 restore 70

Related Topics
3.1.4 display cpu-usage configuration

3.2.6 display device battery

Function
The display device battery command displays the battery status on a device.

NOTE
Only the S5700-28P-LI-BAT and S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT support this command.

Format
display device battery

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can use this command to check the real-time status of the battery. When the
battery is working normally, it can supply power to the device in case the external
power supply encounters a power failure.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 672

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the battery status.
<HUAWEI> display device battery
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SlotID Type State Temperature(L/H) Remain Remain-Time Charge-Times
(c) (%) (mins)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 BAT-4AHA Charge 29/31 22 54 2

Table 3-20 Description of the display device battery command output

Item Description

SlotID Slot ID of the battery.

Type Type of the battery or battery board. The value can be:
● BAT-4AHA: lithium battery with a rated capacity of 4
Ah.
● BAT-8AHA: lithium battery with a rated capacity of 8
Ah.
● PBB: lead-acid battery board.

State Power supply status of the battery.

● For a lithium battery, the value can be:
Charge: The battery is charging.
Discharge: The battery is discharging.
Full: The battery is in full power state.
● For a lead-acid battery, the value can be:
Charge: The battery is charging.
Discharge: The battery is discharging.
Full: The battery is in full power state.
Abnormal: The battery is not working properly. For
example, the lead-acid battery board is installed but no
lead-acid battery is connected to it; alternatively, the
lead-acid battery is reversely connected.

Temperature(L/H) ● When a lithium battery is installed, this field indicates

the highest and lowest temperature of the lithium
battery's electrochemical cell. The temperature is
expressed in °C.
● When a lead-acid battery is installed, this field displays
N/A.

Remain ● When a lithium battery is installed, this field indicates

the available power of the lithium battery. The value is
a percentage to the full power.
● When a lead-acid battery is installed, this field displays
N/A.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 673

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Remain-Time ● When a lithium battery is installed, this field indicates

the power supply time of the lithium battery. The time
is expressed in minutes.
● When a lead-acid battery is installed, this field displays
N/A.

Charge-Times ● When a lithium battery is installed, this field indicates

the number of charge and discharge events.
● When a lead-acid battery is installed, this field displays
N/A.

3.2.7 display device battery lifetime threshold

Function
The display device battery lifetime threshold command displays the lifetime
expiration alarm threshold for a lithium battery.

NOTE

Only the S5700-28P-LI-BAT and S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT that have a lithium battery installed
support this command.

Format
display device battery lifetime threshold [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID of the lithium The value is fixed as 0
battery. currently.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Use Scenario
If a lithium battery discharges too fast, its lifetime is about to expire. During a
discharge, if the time taken to consume 10% of the total power is shorter than the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 674

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

alarm threshold, the lifetime of the lithium battery is about to expire. When this
occurs, the device generates an alarm. When receiving this alarm, replace the
lithium battery to ensure normal operation of the device in the case of a mains
power outage. You can set the lifetime expiration alarm threshold for a lithium
battery using the set device battery lifetime threshold threshold [ slot slot-id ]
command.

You can use the display device battery lifetime threshold command to check the
lifetime expiration alarm threshold and determine whether the threshold needs to
be changed.

Precautions

When the S5700-28P-LI-BAT and S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT have no battery or a

lead-acid battery installed, the system displays a message indicating that this
command is not supported.

Example
# Display the lifetime expiration alarm threshold for the lithium battery.
<HUAWEI> display device battery lifetime threshold
---------------------------------------------
Slot Type Threshold(mins)
---------------------------------------------
0 BAT 20

Table 3-21 Description of the display device battery lifetime threshold command
output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID of the battery.

Type Battery type. The value is BAT, indicating a lithium battery.

Threshold(mins) Lifetime expiration alarm threshold for the lithium battery.

The unit is minute.
By default, the lifetime expiration alarm threshold for a
lithium battery is 20 minutes. To set the lifetime expiration
alarm threshold for a lithium battery, run the set device
battery lifetime command.

Related Topics
3.2.24 set device battery lifetime

3.2.8 display device fault-light

Function
The display device fault-light command displays status of fault indicator on a
device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 675

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

Only the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720X, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E, S1720X-E, S2720EI,

S5700S-LI (only the S5700S-28X-LI-AC and S5700S-52X-LI-AC), S5710-X-LI, S5720LI,
S5720S-LI, S5720S-SI, S5720SI, S5720EI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI,
S6720S-SI, S6720S-EI, and S6720EI support this command.

Format
display device fault-light

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
After using the display device fault-light command to check the fault indicator
status, you can determine whether to set the fault indicator on a device to
indicate that the device is faulty using the set device fault-light command.

Example
# Display the fault indicator status.
<HUAWEI> display device fault-light
---------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Status Keeptime(s)
---------------------------------------------------------------
0 UnderRepair 45
---------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-22 Description of the display device fault-light command output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Status Status of the fault indicator.

● Normal: Indicate that the device is
running normally.
● UnderRepair: Indicate that the
device is faulty.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 676

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Keeptime(s) Time during which the fault indicator

indicates that the device is faulty.
When the Status displays Normal, the
value displays "--".

Related Topics
3.2.26 set device fault-light

3.2.9 display fan speed-adjust threshold minus

Function
The display fan speed-adjust threshold minus command displays the
temperature thresholds for fan speed adjustment.

Format
display fan speed-adjust threshold minus [ slot slot-id ]

NOTE

The following switches do not support this command:

● S1720GW series
● S1720GW-E series
● S1720GWR series: S1720-28GWR-4P, S1720-28GWR-4X, and S1720-28GWR-PWR-4TP
● S1720GWR-E series: S1720-28GWR-4P-E, S1720-28GWR-4X-E, and S1720-28GWR-
PWR-4TP-E
● S1720GFR series
● S2720EI series: S2720-12TP-EI, S2720-12TP-PWR-EI, S2720-28TP-EI, S2720-28TP-PWR-
EI-L
● S2750EI series: S2750-28TP-EI-AC and S2751-28TP-PWR-EI-AC
● S5700LI series: S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-10P-LI-AC,
and S5700-10P-PWR-LI-AC
● S5700S-LI series: S5700S-28P-LI-AC
● S5710-X-LI series: S5710-28X-LI-AC
● S5720LI series: S5720-12TP-LI-AC, S5720-12TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28P-LI-AC,
S5720-28TP-LI-AC, S5720-28TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28X-LI-AC, S5720-28X-LI-DC, and
S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC
● S5720S-LI series: S5720S-12TP-LI-AC, S5720S-12TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720S-28P-LI-AC,
S5720S-28TP-PWR-LI-AC, and S5720S-28X-LI-AC
● S5720S-SI series: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, and S5720S-28X-SI-DC
If one of the preceding switches can set up a stack with other switch models that support
this command, this switch also supports this command so that this command can be
executed and delivered in the stack.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 677

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID ● The value is 0 when

when stack is not stack is not
configured. configured.
● Specifies the stack ID ● The value can be set
when a stack is according to the
configured. device configuration
If this parameter is not when stack is
specified, the threshold configured.
settings in all slots are
displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
This command displays the temperature thresholds for fan speed adjustment,
including the default values and current values.

Example
# Display the temperature thresholds for fan speed adjustment.
<HUAWEI> display fan speed-adjust threshold minus
----------------------------------------------------------- Slot Default Range Current Range
Speed Rate Adjusted -----------------------------------------------------------
0 NA - 56 NA - 56 35% 53 - 58 53 - 58
40% 55 - 58 55 - 58 45% 55 -
58 55 - 58 50% 52 - 57 52 - 57
60% 54 - 56 54 - 56 70% 54 -
57 54 - 57 80% 55 - 58 55 - 58
90% 56 - NA 56 - NA 100%

Table 3-23 Description of the display fan speed-adjust threshold minus command
output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Default Range Default temperature thresholds, which

change based on the PoE power load.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 678

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Current Range Current temperature thresholds.

To set temperature thresholds, run the
set fan speed-adjust threshold minus
command. The new thresholds are the
fixed temperature thresholds minus
the configured value. After this
command is executed, both the
threshold for increasing the fan speed
and the threshold for lowering the fan
speed are reduced.

Speed Rate Adjusted Fan speed adjustment range.

Related Topics
3.2.27 set fan speed-adjust threshold minus

3.2.10 display resource-mode configuration

Function
The display resource-mode configuration command displays the resource
allocation mode configuration on the device.

Format
display resource-mode configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Before configuring or modifying the resource allocation mode, run the display
resource-mode configuration command to check the resource allocation mode
configuration.

Example
# Display the resource allocation mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 679

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> display resource-mode configuration

Slot Current Mode Next Mode
-----------------------
0 enhanced-mac enhanced-mac

Table 3-24 Description of the display resource-mode configuration command

output
Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Current Mode Current resource allocation mode.

Next Mode Resource allocation mode configured

using the assign resource-mode
command.
NOTE
If the Next Mode is different from the
Current Mode, the device is not restarted
after the resource allocation mode is
modified.

Related Topics
3.2.2 assign resource-mode

3.2.11 display root-key configuration

Function
The display root-key configuration command displays information about the
currently used root key.

Format
display root-key configuration

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can use the display root-key configuration command to check information
about the currently used root key.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 680

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display information about the currently used root key.
<HUAWEI> display root-key configuration
Master:
Current root-key: User-configured
Next root-key: System default

Table 3-25 Description of the display root-key configuration command output

Item Specification

Current root-key Information about the currently used

root key:
● User-configured: user-configured
root key
● System default: system default root
key

Next root-key Information about the root key used

after the device restarts:
● User-configured: user-configured
root key
● System default: system default root
key
To set the root key, run the set root-
key command.

Related Topics
3.2.29 set root-key

3.2.12 display service-mode configuration

Function
The display service-mode configuration command displays the working mode of
the device.

NOTE

This command is supported only by S5720HI.

Format
display service-mode configuration

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 681

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To view the working mode of the device, run the display service-mode
configuration command.

Example
# Display the working mode of the device.
<HUAWEI> display service-mode configuration
Service mode status: Normal

Table 3-26 Description of the display service-mode configuration command

output

Item Description

Service mode status Working mode of the device:

● Normal
● Enhanced
To set the working mode, run the set
service-mode command.

Related Topics
3.2.30 set service-mode

3.2.13 display switchover state

Function
The display switchover state command displays information about active and
standby switchover, which helps check whether the stack meets switchover
requirements.

Format
display switchover state

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 682

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
In a stack containing multiple switches, you can run the display switchover state
command to view the status of master and standby switches to determine
whether to perform an active/standby switchover. When performing active/
standby switchover, ensure that the standby switch is in real-time backup state.

Example
# Display information about active and standby switchover, which helps check
whether the stack meets switchover requirements.
<HUAWEI> display switchover state
Slot 1 HA FSM State(master): waiting for the slave to be inserted.

Table 3-27 Description of the display switchover state command output

Item Description

HA FSM State(master) Master switch status:

● waiting for the slave to be inserted:
There is only the master switch but
not the standby switch.
● waiting batch backup request from
slave: The master switch is waiting
for the batch backup request from
the standby switch.
● realtime or routine backup: The
master switch is in real-time backup
state.
● data smooth: The master switch is
in data smoothing state.

HA FSM State(slave) Standby switch status:

● ready: The standby switch is started
and ready for receiving the batch
backup data.
● receiving batch data: The standby
switch is receiving the batch backup
data.
● receiving realtime or routine data:
The standby switch is ready for
receiving data in real time.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 683

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.2.32 slave switchover
3.2.33 slave switchover { disable | enable }

3.2.14 display system resource-template

Function
The display system resource-template command displays system resource
template information.

NOTE

Only the S5720HI supports this command.

Format
display system resource-template [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● Specifies a slot ID on The value is an integer.

a standalone device. In a stack, the value
● Specifies the stack ID must be set according to
in a stack. the device configuration.
On a standalone device,
the value is 0.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display system resource-template command to view system
resource template information, including the resource type, currently running
resource template information and resource template for the next startup.

Example
# Display information about the system resource template.
<HUAWEI> display system resource-template
Resource Template Information:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Type RunningTemplate NextTemplate

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 684

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

--------------------------------------------------------------
0 acl-mode dual-ipv4-ipv6 dual-ipv4-ipv6
--------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-28 Description of the display system resource-template command output

Item Description

Slot Slot ID.

Type Resource type. Currently, only one

system resource template (acl-mode)
is supported.

RunningTemplate Currently running resource template

information.
To configure a resource template, run
the assign resource-template acl-
mode command.

NextTemplate Resource template for the next startup.

Related Topics
14.1.7 assign resource-template acl-mode

3.2.15 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entityexttrap all

Function
The display snmp-agent trap feature-name entityexttrap all command displays
the status of all traps of the ENTITYEXTTRAP module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name entityexttrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 685

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, to check the status of all
traps of the ENTITYEXTTRAP module, run the display snmp-agent trap feature-
name entityexttrap all command. To enable the trap function for the
ENTITYEXTTRAP module, run the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
entityexttrap command.
Prerequisites
SNMP has been enabled using the snmp-agent command.

Example
# Display the status of all traps of the ENTITYEXTTRAP module.
<HUAWEI> display snmp-agent trap feature-name entityexttrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: ENTITYEXTTRAP
Trap number : 9
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwEntityInputRateThresholdAlarm
on on
hwEntityInputRateThresholdAlarmResume
on on
hwEntityOutputRateThresholdAlarm
on on
hwEntityOutputRateThresholdAlarmResume
on on
hwEntityHigErrorPacketThresholdAlarm
on on
hwEntityHigStateChangeNotify on on
hwEntityHigStateDownNotify on on
hwEntityRuntPacketCheckNotify on on
hwBoardDropRuntPacketNotify on on

Table 3-29 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name

entityexttrap all command output
Item Description

Feature name Name of the module to which a trap belongs.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 686

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Trap name Names of a trap. Traps of the ENTITYEXTTRAP

module include:
● hwEntityInputRateThresholdAlarm: The
bandwidth usage of incoming traffic exceeds the
threshold.
● hwEntityInputRateThresholdAlarmResume: The
bandwidth usage of incoming traffic falls below
the threshold.
● hwEntityOutputRateThresholdAlarm: The
bandwidth usage of outgoing traffic exceeds the
threshold.
● hwEntityOutputRateThresholdAlarmResume: The
bandwidth usage of outgoing traffic falls below
the threshold.
● hwEntityHigErrorPacketThresholdAlarm: Incoming
packets are discarded because an error is detected
during physical layer detection.
● hwEntityHigStateChangeNotify: The Higig port
status changes.
● hwEntityHigStateDownNotify: The Higig port
status remains Down.
● hwEntityRuntPacketCheckNotify: The number of
packet fault recoveries detected on a port exceeds
5000.
● hwBoardDropRuntPacketNotify: Some packets of
64 to 86 bytes or 145 to 193 bytes are discarded.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Trap function status:

● on: The trap function is enabled.
● off: The trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.2.34 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap

3.2.16 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 687

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all command displays the
status of all traps on the ENTITYMIB module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all command to check the status of
all traps of ENTITYMIB. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
entitymib command to enable the trap function of ENTITYMIB.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the ENTITYMIB module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: ENTITYMIB
Trap number : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
entConfigChange on on

Table 3-30 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all
command output

Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 688

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the ENTITYMIB module include:

● entConfigChange: The entity MIB changes.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.2.35 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib

3.2.17 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all command displays the
status of all traps on the ENTITYTRAP module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all command to check the status of
all traps of ENTITYTRAP. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
entitytrap command to enable the trap function of ENTITYTRAP.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 689

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the ENTITYTRAP module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: ENTITYTRAP
Trap number : 79
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwChassisRemove on on
hwChassisInsert on on
hwChassisFail on on
hwChassisFailResume on on
hwChassisInvalid on on
hwChassisInvalidResume on on
hwChassisLeaveMaster on on
hwChassisBecomeMaster on on
hwBoardRemove on on
hwBoardInsert on on
hwBoardFail on on
hwBoardFailResume on on
hwBoardInvalid on on
hwBoardInvalidResume on on
hwBoardLeaveMaster on on
hwBoardBecomeMaster on on
hwCardRemove on on
hwCardInsert on on
hwCardFail on on
hwCardFailResume on on
hwCardInvalid on on
hwCardInvalidResume on on
hwOpticalRemove on on
hwOpticalInsert on on
hwOpticalFail on on
hwOpticalFailResume on on
hwOpticalInvalid on on
hwOpticalInvalidResume on on
hwOpticalTunableNotMatch off on
hwOpticalTunableNotMatchResume off on
hwPowerRemove on on
hwPowerInsert on on
hwPowerFail on on
hwPowerFailResume on on
hwPowerInvalid on on
hwPowerInvalidResume on on
hwPowerUnusable on on
hwPowerUnusableResume on on
hwFanRemove on on
hwFanInsert on on
hwFanFail on on
hwFanFailResume on on
hwFanInvalid on on
hwFanInvalidResume on on
hwFanUnusable on on
hwFanUnusableResume on on
hwLCDRemove on on
hwLCDInsert on on
hwLCDInvalid on on
hwLCDInvalidResume on on
hwLCDUnusable on on
hwLCDUnusableResume on on
hwCMURemove on on
hwCMUInsert on on

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 690

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

hwCMUInvalid on on
hwCMUInvalidResume on on
hwCMUUnusable on on
hwCMUUnusableResume on on
hwCommunicateError on on
hwCommunicateResume on on
hwHumidityAlarm on on
hwHumidityResume on on
hwVoltAlarm on on
hwVoltResume on on
hwGateAlarm on on
hwGateResume on on
hwFogAlarm on on
hwFogResume on on
hwUnstableAlarm on on
hwUnstableResume on on
hwBrdTempAlarm on on
hwBrdTempResume on on
hwCPUUtilizationRising on on
hwCPUUtilizationResume on on
hwMemUtilizationRising on on
hwMemUtilizationResume on on
hwBatteryFull on on
hwOpticalMayInvalid on on
hwOpticalMayInvalidResume on on

Table 3-31 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all
command output
Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Trap name Trap name.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.2.36 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap

3.2.18 display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all command displays the
status of all traps on the SRMTRAP module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 691

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all command to check the status of all
traps of SRMTRAP. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
srmtrap command to enable the trap function of SRMTRAP.
Prerequisites
SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the SRMTRAP module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: SRMTRAP
Trap number : 68
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwPortPhysicalAutoNegotiateFail
on on
hwPortPhysicalEthHalfDuplexAlarm
on on
hwPortPhysicalAutoNegotiateClear
on on
hwPortPhysicalEthFullDuplexClear
on on
hwfanOffline on on
hwfanOnline on on
hwTempRisingAlarm on on
hwTempRisingResume on on
hwTempFallingAlarm on on
hwTempFallingResume on on
hwtempchipexcption on on
hwtempchipexcptionresume on on
hwfanfault on on
hwfanfaultresume on on
hwphychipabnormal on on
hwPHYfaultresume on on
hwtxpowerexceedminor on on
hwtxpowerresume on on
hwrxpowerexceedminor on on

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 692

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

hwrxpowerresume on on
hwPortPhysicalPortTypeChange on on
hwPowerabsent on on
hwPowerabsentresume on on
hwPowerfault on on
hwPowerfaultresume on on
hwTXPowerExceedMajor on on
hwRXPowerExceedMajor on on
hwBIASExceedMajor on on
hwBIASExceedMinor on on
hwBIASResume on on
hwPHYfault on on
hwPCIfault on on
hwPCIfaultResume on on
hwXAUIREFClockFault on on
hwXAUIREFClockFaultResume on on
hwCPICoreClockFault on on
hwCPICoreClockFaultResume on on
hwLanSwitchFault on on
hwLanSwitchFaultResume on on
hwCLPDCheckFault on on
hwCLPDCheckFaultResume on on
hwFPGACheckFault on on
hwFPGACheckFaultResume on on
hwEEPROMCheckFault on on
hwEEPROMCheckFaultResume on on
hwLightFault on on
hwLightFaultResume on on
hwPOEFault on on
hwPOEFaultResume on on
hwUSBFault on on
hwUSBFaultResume on on
hwUSBPlugIn on on
hwUSBPlugOut on on
hwUSBPowerFault on on
hwUSBPowerFaultResume on on
hwI2CFault on on
hwI2CFaultResume on on
hwSubcardPullOut on on
hwSubcardPlugIn on on
hwRTCfault on on
hwRTCfaultresume on on
hwWriteFlashError on on
hwWriteFlashErrorResume on on
hwOpticalPowerAbnormal on on
hwOpticalPowerResume on on
hwEntityHeartbeatTrap on on
hwPoeChipFault on on
hwPoeChipResume on on

Table 3-32 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all
command output
Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 693

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the SRMTRAP module include:

● hwbiasexceedmajor: The bias current exceeds the
upper threshold.
● hwbiasexceedmajor: The bias current falls below
the lower threshold.
● hwbiasresume: The bias current restores to the
normal range.
● hwclpdcheckfault: CPLD check fails.
● hwclpdcheckfaultresume: CPLD check succeeds.
● hwcpicoreclockfault: CPI kernel clock becomes
faulty.
● hwcpicoreclockfaultresume: CPI kernel clock
recovers from a fault.
● hweepromcheckfault: EEPROM check fails.
● hweepromcheckfaultresume: EEPROM check
succeeds.
● hwentityheartbeattrap: The device sends a
heartbeat notification.
● hwfanfault: A fan module becomes faulty.
● hwfanfaultresume: A fan module recovers from a
fault.
● hwfanoffline: A fan module is unavailable.
● hwfanonline: A fan module becomes available.
● hwfpgacheckfault: FPGA check fails.
● hwfpgacheckfaultresume: FPGA check succeeds.
● hwi2cfault: An I2C fault occurs.
● hwi2cfaultresume: An I2C fault is rectified.
● hwlanswitchfault: An LSW chip becomes faulty.
● hwlanswitchfaultresume: An LSW chip recovers
from a fault.
● hwlightfault: An indicator becomes faulty.
● hwlightfaultresume: An indicator recovers from a
fault.
● hwopticalpowerabnormal: The optical module
power is out of the normal range.
● hwopticalpowerresume: The optical module
power restores to the normal range.
● hwpcifault: A PCI fault occurs.
● hwpcifaultresume: A PCI fault is rectified.
● hwphychipabnormal: A PHY chip is faulty.
● hwphyfault: A PHY fault occurs.
● hwphyfaultresume: A PHY fault is rectified.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 694

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

● hwpoechipfault: A PoE chip is faulty.

● hwpoechipresume: A PoE chip recovers from a
fault.
● hwpoefault: The PoE function is unavailable.
● hwpoefaultresume: A PoE function becomes
available.
● hwportphysicalautonegotiateclear: Port auto-
negotiation succeeds.
● hwportphysicalautonegotiatefail: Port auto-
negotiation fails.
● hwportphysicalethfullduplexclea: A port is in full-
duplex mode.
● hwportphysicalethhalfduplexalarm: A port is in
half-duplex mode.
● hwportphysicalporttypechange: The port type
changes.
● hwpowerabsent: A power module is unavailable.
● hwpowerabsentresume: A power module becomes
available.
● hwpowerfault: A power module is faulty.
● hwphyfaultresume: A power module recovers
from a fault.
● hwrtcfault: A real-time clock (RTC) is faulty.
● hwrtcfaultresume: A real-time clock (RTC)
recovers from a fault.
● hwrxpowerexceedmajor: The Rx power exceeds
the upper threshold.
● hwrxpowerexceedminor: The Rx power falls below
the lower threshold.
● hwrxpowerresume: The Rx power restores to the
normal range.
● hwsubcardplugin: A subcard is installed.
● hwsubcardpullout: A subcard is removed.
● hwtempchipexcption: A temperature sensor chip is
faulty.
● hwtempchipexcptionresume: A temperature
sensor chip recovers from a fault.
● hwtempfallingalarm: The device temperature is
too low.
● hwtempfallingresume: The device temperature
restores to the normal range.
● hwtemprisingalarm: The device temperature is too
high.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 695

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

● hwtemprisingresume: The device temperature

restores to the normal range.
● hwtxpowerexceedmajor: The Tx power exceeds
the upper threshold.
● hwtxpowerexceedminor: The Tx power falls below
the lower threshold.
● hwtxpowerresume: The Tx power restores to the
normal range.
● hwusbfault: A USB flash drive is faulty.
● hwusbfaultresume: A USB flash drive recovers
from a fault.
● hwusbplugin: A USB flash drive is installed.
● hwusbplugout: A USB flash drive is removed.
● hwusbpowerfault: A USB 5V power module is
faulty.
● hwusbpowerfaultresume: A USB 5V power module
recovers from a fault.
● hwwriteflasherror: An error occurs when data is
written to the flash memory.
● hwwriteflasherrorresume: An error that occurs
when data is written to the flash memory is
resolved.
● hwxauirefclockfault: An XAUIREF clock is faulty.
● hwxauirefclockfaultresume: An XAUIREF clock
recovers from a fault.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.2.37 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap

3.2.19 display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 696

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all command displays the
status of all traps on the SWITHSRVRES module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all command to check the status of
all traps of SWITHSRVRES. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-
name swithsrvres command to enable the trap function of SWITHSRVRES.
Prerequisites
SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the SWITHSRVRES module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: SWITHSRVRES
Trap number : 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwSrvServiceExceedThreshould on on
hwSrvServiceExceedThreshouldResume
on on
hwSrvServiceConfigFailed on on

Table 3-33 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres

all command output

Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 697

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the SWITHSRVRES module

include:
● hwSrvServiceExceedThreshould: The service
configurations exceed the recommended
threshold.
● hwSrvServiceExceedThreshouldResume: The
service configurations fall below the
recommended threshold.
● hwSrvServiceConfigFailed: The service
configurations fail.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.2.38 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres

3.2.20 display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all

Function
The display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all command displays the
status of all the traps of the SYSTEM module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 698

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all command to
check status of all SYSTEM traps. This status can be configured using the 3.2.39
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system command.

Example
# Display the status of all the traps of the SYSTEM module.
<HUAWEI> display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: SYSTEM
Trap number : 8
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwSysReloadNotification off off
hwSysClockChangedNotification off off
hwPatchErrorTrap off off
hwPatchActiveOverTimeTrap off off
hwPatchMalfunctionComebackTrap off off
hwSysSlaveSwitchFailNotification
off off
hwSysSlaveSwitchSuccessNotification
off off
hwSysIssuNotification off off

Table 3-34 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all
command output

Item Description

Feature name Name of the module where the trap is generated.

Trap number Number of traps.

Trap name Name of a trap.

Default switch status Default status of a trap:

● on: The trap function is enabled.
● off: The trap function is disabled.

Current switch status Current status of a trap:

● on: The trap function is enabled.
● off: The trap function is disabled.
This status can be configured using the 3.2.39 snmp-
agent trap enable feature-name system command.

Related Topics
3.2.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system

3.2.21 display wavelength-map

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 699

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The display wavelength-map command displays the mapping between the
wavelength channel, wavelength, and frequency.

NOTE

This command is not supported by S1720GFR, S2750, S5700LI, and S5700S-LI.

Format
display wavelength-map

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Before using the wavelength-channel command to add an optical module to a
specific wavelength channel, run the display wavelength-map command to view
the mapping between the wavelength channel, wavelength, and frequency.

Example
# Display the mapping between the wavelength channel, wavelength, and
frequency.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] display wavelength-map
--------------------------------------------
Channel Frequency(THz) Wavelength(nm)
--------------------------------------------
1 192.10 1560.606
2 192.15 1560.200
3 192.20 1559.794
4 192.25 1559.389
5 192.30 1558.983
6 192.35 1558.578
7 192.40 1558.173
8 192.45 1557.768
9 192.50 1557.363
10 192.55 1556.959
11 192.60 1556.555
12 192.65 1556.151
13 192.70 1555.747
14 192.75 1555.344
15 192.80 1554.940
16 192.85 1554.537
17 192.90 1554.134
18 192.95 1553.731

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 700

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

19 193.00 1553.329
20 193.05 1552.927
21 193.10 1552.524
22 193.15 1552.122
23 193.20 1551.721
24 193.25 1551.319
25 193.30 1550.918
26 193.35 1550.517
27 193.40 1550.116
28 193.45 1549.715
29 193.50 1549.315
30 193.55 1548.915
31 193.60 1548.515
32 193.65 1548.115
33 193.70 1547.715
34 193.75 1547.316
35 193.80 1546.917
36 193.85 1546.518
37 193.90 1546.119
38 193.95 1545.720
39 194.00 1545.322
40 194.05 1544.924
41 194.10 1544.526
42 194.15 1544.128
43 194.20 1543.730
44 194.25 1543.333
45 194.30 1542.936
46 194.35 1542.539
47 194.40 1542.142
48 194.45 1541.746
49 194.50 1541.349
50 194.55 1540.953
51 194.60 1540.557
52 194.65 1540.162
53 194.70 1539.766
54 194.75 1539.371
55 194.80 1538.976
56 194.85 1538.581
57 194.90 1538.186
58 194.95 1537.792
59 195.00 1537.397
60 195.05 1537.003
61 195.10 1536.609
62 195.15 1536.216
63 195.20 1535.822
64 195.25 1535.429
65 195.30 1535.036
66 195.35 1534.643
67 195.40 1534.250
68 195.45 1533.858
69 195.50 1533.465
70 195.55 1533.073
71 195.60 1532.681
72 195.65 1532.290
73 195.70 1531.898
74 195.75 1531.507
75 195.80 1531.116
76 195.85 1530.725
77 195.90 1530.334
78 195.95 1529.944
79 196.00 1529.553
80 196.05 1529.163
--------------------------------------------

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 701

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-35 Description of the display wavelength-map command output

Item Description

Channel Channel ID.

Frequency(THz) Frequency, in THz.

Wavelength(nm) Wavelength, in nm.

Related Topics
3.2.44 wavelength-channel

3.2.22 reset cpu-usage record

Function
The reset cpu-usage record command clears CPU usage records.

Format
reset cpu-usage record [ slot slot-id | slave | all ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID. Set the value according to
the device configuration.

slave Clears CPU usage records on the -

slave switch.

all Clears CPU usage records on all -

switches

Views
System view, User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
If the slot slot-id or slave parameter is not specified, CPU usage records of the
master switch is cleared.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 702

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Clear CPU usage records of the master switch.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] reset cpu-usage record
Waiting for clearing . . . Done

3.2.23 reset slot

Function
The reset slot command resets a specified device.

Format
reset slot slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot-id Specifies the stack ID of the The value must be set according
device that needs to be restarted. to the device configuration.

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In a stack, you can restart stack members. Restarting a stack member will
interrupt services on this device, but the configuration of this device still exists.
Precautions
Before commands have been executed, if a master/slave switchover occurs
because the reset slot command is used to reset the master switch, you need to
execute the commands that have not been executed on the new master switch
again after the standby switch becomes the new master switch.

Example
# Restart stack member with stack ID 1.
<HUAWEI> reset slot 1
Warning: Confirm to reset slot 1? [Y/N]:y
Info: The board 1 is reset successfully.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 703

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.2.24 set device battery lifetime

Function
The set device battery lifetime command sets the lifetime expiration alarm
threshold for a lithium battery.

By default, the lifetime expiration alarm threshold for a lithium battery is 20

minutes.

NOTE

Only the S5700-28P-LI-BAT and S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT that have a lithium battery installed
support this command.

Format
set device battery lifetime threshold threshold [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

threshold Sets the lifetime expiration The value is an integer that
threshold alarm threshold for a lithium ranges from 10 to 60, in
battery. minutes.

slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID of the The value is fixed as 0

lithium battery. currently.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Use Scenario

If a lithium battery discharges too fast, its lifetime is about to expire. During a
discharge, if the time taken to consume 10% of the total power is shorter than the
configured alarm threshold, the lifetime of the lithium battery is about to expire.
When this occurs, the device generates an alarm. When receiving this alarm,
replace the lithium battery to ensure normal operation of the device in the case of
a mains power outage.

Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 704

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

When the S5700-28P-LI-BAT and S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT have no battery or a

lead-acid battery installed, the system displays a message indicating that this
command is not supported.

Example
# Set the lifetime expiration alarm threshold for the lithium battery to 50 minutes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set device battery lifetime threshold 50

Related Topics
3.2.7 display device battery lifetime threshold

3.2.25 set device battery off

Function
The set device battery off command turns off the lithium battery on a device so
that the battery no longer supplies power to the device.

NOTE

Only the S5700-28P-LI-BAT and S5700-28P-LI-24S-BAT that have a lithium battery installed
support this command.

Format
set device battery off [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID of the lithium The value is fixed as 0
battery. currently.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Use Scenario
If a device has a lithium battery installed, the lithium battery can supply power to
the device after the power supply of the device is turned off. To power off the
device, turn off the lithium battery after powering off the power supply.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 705

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions

This command can be executed only if a lithium battery is available and the power
supply of the device has been turned off. If no lithium battery is available or the
power supply of the device is on, the system displays a message indicating that
the command cannot be executed.

Example
# Turn off the lithium battery.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set device battery off
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
Warning: The configuration has been modified, and it will be saved to the next startup saved-configuration
file flash:/vrpcfg.zip. Continue? [Y/N]:N
Warning:The battery in slot 0 will be turned off and the device will be powered off. Continue? (Y/N): Y

3.2.26 set device fault-light

Function
The set device fault-light command sets the fault indicator status on a device.

The undo set device fault-light command restores the default fault indicator
status.

By default, the fault indicator status of the device is not set. The fault indicator
status is displayed based on the current device running status.

NOTE

Only the S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720X, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E, S1720X-E, S2720EI,

S5700S-LI (only the S5700S-28X-LI-AC and S5700S-52X-LI-AC), S5710-X-LI, S5720LI,
S5720S-LI, S5720S-SI, S5720SI, S5720EI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI,
S6720S-SI, S6720S-EI, and S6720EI support this command.

Format
set device fault-light { normal | under-repair [ keeptime time ] } [ slot slot-id ]

undo set device fault-light [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

normal Displays the fault -

indicator status based on
the current device
running status.

under-repair Configures the fault -

indicator to indicate that
the device is faulty.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 706

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

keeptime time Sets the time during The value is an integer

which the fault indicator that ranges from 45 to
indicates that the device 600, in seconds. The
is faulty. default value is 45.

slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value range depends

on the device
configuration.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Use Scenario
The fault indicator status of the device is indicated by mode indicators and the
system indicator. When a device becomes faulty, you can configure mode
indicators and the system indicator on the device to blink red fast so that
maintenance personnel can quickly find this device on site.
Precautions
Mode indicators include the STAT indicator, SPED indicator, PoE indicator
(supported only on PoE switches) and STCK indicator. The system indicator is the
SYS indicator, which indicates the system running status.
When the set device fault-light under-repair command is executed, the system
indicator and all mode indicators blink red fast. After these indicators blink red
fast for the time specified by keeptime time, the following situations occur:
● The system indicator restores to the previous status.
● The STAT indicator is steady on.
● When the stack function is enabled, the STCK indicator on the master switch
blinks slowly, while the STCK indicators on the other member devices are off.
● When the stack function is disabled, the STCK indicator is off.
● Other mode indicators are off.
The set device fault-light normal and undo set device fault-light commands
have the same functions. That is, after either of the two commands is executed,
the following situations occur:
● The system indicator restores to the previous status.
● The STAT indicator is steady on.
● When the stack function is enabled, the STCK indicator on the master switch
blinks slowly, while the STCK indicators on the other member devices are off.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 707

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● When the stack function is disabled, the STCK indicator is off.

● Other mode indicators are off
If slot slot-id is not specified in a stack, the configuration takes effect on
indicators on the master switch.

Example
# Configure the fault indicator to indicate that the device is faulty.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set device fault-light under-repair

Related Topics
3.2.8 display device fault-light

3.2.27 set fan speed-adjust threshold minus

Function
The set fan speed-adjust threshold minus command adjusts the temperature
thresholds for fan speed adjustment.
The undo set fan speed-adjust threshold minus command restores the default
temperature thresholds for fan speed adjustment.
The default temperature thresholds on different devices are different.

NOTE

The following switches do not support this command:

● S1720GW series
● S1720GW-E series
● S1720GWR series: S1720-28GWR-4P, S1720-28GWR-4X, and S1720-28GWR-PWR-4TP
● S1720GWR-E series: S1720-28GWR-4P-E, S1720-28GWR-4X-E, and S1720-28GWR-
PWR-4TP-E
● S1720GFR series
● S2720EI series: S2720-12TP-EI, S2720-12TP-PWR-EI, S2720-28TP-EI, S2720-28TP-PWR-
EI-L
● S2750EI series: S2750-28TP-EI-AC and S2751-28TP-PWR-EI-AC
● S5700LI series: S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-10P-LI-AC,
and S5700-10P-PWR-LI-AC
● S5700S-LI series: S5700S-28P-LI-AC
● S5710-X-LI series: S5710-28X-LI-AC
● S5720LI series: S5720-12TP-LI-AC, S5720-12TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28P-LI-AC,
S5720-28TP-LI-AC, S5720-28TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720-28X-LI-AC, S5720-28X-LI-DC, and
S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC
● S5720S-LI series: S5720S-12TP-LI-AC, S5720S-12TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5720S-28P-LI-AC,
S5720S-28TP-PWR-LI-AC, and S5720S-28X-LI-AC
● S5720S-SI series: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, and S5720S-28X-SI-DC
If one of the preceding switches can set up a stack with other switch models that support
this command, this switch also supports this command so that this command can be
executed and delivered in the stack.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 708

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
set fan speed-adjust threshold minus threshold-value [ slot slot-id ]

undo set fan speed-adjust threshold minus [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

threshold-value Specifies the deduction The value is an integer

to the temperature that ranges from 1 to 20.
thresholds.

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID The value is an integer

when stack is not that ranges from 0 to 8.
configured.
● Specifies the stack ID
when a stack is
configured.
If this parameter is not
specified, the thresholds
in all slots are set.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The device uses fixed temperature thresholds to increase and decrease the fan
speed by default. The fan speed increases when the device temperature exceeds
the upper threshold and decreases when the device temperature falls below the
lower threshold. If you want to keep the device working at a lower temperature,
you can set deduction for the fixed temperature thresholds. The temperature
threshold after modification is lower than the default temperature threshold.

Precautions

● The new thresholds are the fixed temperature thresholds minus threshold-
value. After this command is executed, both the threshold for increasing the
fan speed and the threshold for lowering the fan speed are reduced.
● To view the fixed temperature thresholds, run the display fan speed-adjust
threshold minus command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 709

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

If a device uses intelligent fan control, this command reduces the temperature thresholds
for starting and stopping the fans. Fans in intelligent heat dissipation mode can only start
and stop rotating at a fixed speed that cannot be increased or reduced.
You can run the display fan speed-adjust threshold minus command to check
temperature thresholds for fan speed adjustment of fans in intelligent heat dissipation
mode. Assume you view that the current temperature threshold of the fans is 40-50, in
which 40°C is the threshold for stopping the fans, and 50°C is the threshold for starting the
fans. When the current device temperature is 45°C, you need to determine whether fans
will rotate according to the fan temperature change:
● When the device temperature is increased to 45°C from a lower temperature (30°C for
example), fans do not rotate because the device temperature does not reach the
threshold for starting the fans.
● When the device temperature is reduced to 45°C from a higher temperature (65°C for
example), fans keep rotating because the device temperature does not fall below the
threshold for stopping the fans.

Example
# Set the deduction to the temperature thresholds to 10.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set fan speed-adjust threshold minus 10
Info: Succeeded in setting the fan speed-adjust threshold.

Related Topics
3.2.9 display fan speed-adjust threshold minus

3.2.28 set memory-usage threshold

Function
The set memory-usage threshold command sets the memory usage threshold.

The undo set memory-usage threshold command restores the default memory
usage threshold.

By default, the memory usage alarm threshold is 90% and the memory usage
alarm recovery threshold is 85% on the S5720EI. On the S1720GFR, S2750EI,
S5700LI and S5700S-LI , The following describes the memory usage alarm
threshold :
● If the memory capacity on the device is lower than or equal to 256 MB, the
memory usage alarm threshold is 85% and the memory usage alarm recovery
threshold is 80%.
● If the memory capacity on the device is larger than 256 MB and smaller than
or equal to 512 MB, the memory usage alarm threshold is 90% and the
memory usage alarm recovery threshold is 85%.
● If the memory capacity on the device is higher than 512 MB, the memory
usage alarm threshold is 95% and the memory usage alarm recovery
threshold is 90%.
The following describes the memory usage alarm threshold on other switch
models:

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 710

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● If the memory capacity on the device is lower than or equal to 512 MB, the
memory usage alarm threshold is 85% and the memory usage alarm recovery
threshold is 80%.
● If the memory capacity on the device is larger than 512 MB and smaller than
or equal to 1.5 GB, the memory usage alarm threshold is 90% and the
memory usage alarm recovery threshold is 85%.
● If the memory capacity on the device is higher than 1.5 GB, the memory
usage alarm threshold is 95% and the memory usage alarm recovery
threshold is 90%.

Format
set memory-usage threshold threshold-value [ slot slot-id ]
undo set memory-usage threshold [ threshold-value ] [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
threshold Specifies the memory usage The value is an integer that
threshold-value threshold. ranges from 75 to 100.

slot slot-id Specifies the memory usage The value is an integer that
threshold of the device. slot-id ranges from 1 to 8.
specifies the stack ID.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can use the set memory-usage threshold command to set the memory
usage threshold. When memory usage exceeds the threshold, the system logs the
event and generates an alarm. By viewing log information, you can learn about
memory usage.
Precautions
You are advised to use the default threshold. If the memory usage threshold is set
too low, the system frequently generates alarms. If the memory usage threshold is
set too high, you cannot learn about memory usage in a timely manner.

Example
# Set the memory usage threshold to 85%.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 711

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set memory-usage threshold 85

Related Topics
3.1.14 display memory-usage threshold

3.2.29 set root-key

Function
The set root-key command configures a root key for a switch.
The undo set root-key command restores the default root key of a switch.
By default, a switch uses the system default root key.

Format
set root-key
undo set root-key

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
A root key is located at the bottom of the key management infrastructure to
protect confidentiality of upper-layer keys (such as key encryption key). Therefore,
a root key is important to data security. A switch's root key is often stored in the
system. If attackers illegally obtain the root key, encrypted data will become
insecure. To improve data security and prevent attackers from obtaining encrypted
packets, configure another root key on the switch. The configured root key will
take effect after the switch restarts.
Precautions
● The root key can only be configured when the switch has no service
configuration. If service configuration has been performed on the switch, an
error message will be displayed when you configure the root key.
● If you configure a password (not the administrator password) and key after
configuring the root key, the password and key configuration will not be
restored after the switch software version is changed to V200R009 or an
earlier version.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 712

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● After the root key is configured, the configuration file of the switch cannot be
exported and used on other devices.

Example
# Set the root key to huawei.
<HUAWEI> set root-key
Warning: A new root key can take effect only after the device is restarted. Are you sure you want to
configure it. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Please enter a new key of no more than 32 characters:huawei
Please enter the new key again:huawei
Info: Successed in setting next root-key on the master board.

3.2.30 set service-mode

Function
The set service-mode command sets the working mode of the device to
enhanced.
The undo set service-mode command restores the working mode of the device to
normal.
By default, the working mode of the device is normal.

NOTE

This command is supported only by S5720HI.

Format
set service-mode enhanced
undo set service-mode enhanced

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

enhanced Sets the working mode -

of the device to
enhanced.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 713

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, S5720HIs work in normal mode, requiring the interval for receiving
BFD packets to be longer than or equal to 100 ms. If the interval cannot meet
requirements, run the set service-mode command to change the working mode
of an S5720HI to enhanced so that the S5720HI supports a minimum of 3 ms
interval.
Precautions
● Running the set service-mode command will reduce the device forwarding
performance. Therefore, confirm the action before you use the command.
● If BFD has been enabled before this command is executed, disable BFD first.

Example
# Set the working mode of the device to enhanced.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set service-mode enhanced
Warning: This command will effect forward performance. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Related Topics
3.2.12 display service-mode configuration

3.2.31 slave restart

Function
Using the slave restart command, you can reload the system software of the
standby device and then restart it.

NOTE

Devices that do not support the stack function or do not have the stack function enabled do not
support this function.

Format
slave restart

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
To upgrade the system software in-service, first upgrade the software on the
standby device when the master device works normally, and then restart the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 714

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

standby device. After the standby device is ready, perform active/standby

switchover and upgrade the software on the master device.

NOTICE

The command may interrupt services on the device. Therefore, exercise caution
when using this command.

Example
# Restart the standby device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] slave restart

3.2.32 slave switchover

Function
The slave switchover command performs an active/standby switchover.

NOTE

Devices that do not support the stack function or do not have the stack function enabled do not
support this function.

Format
slave switchover

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In a stack containing multiple switches, you can manually switch the master and
standby switches during software upgrade or system maintenance. After the
active/standby switchover is complete, the original master switch joins the stack
after restarting, and the original switch becomes the new master switch.

Prerequisites

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 715

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● The forcible active/standby switchover has been enabled on devices.

● The 3.2.13 display switchover state command output shows that system has
met requirements for active/standby switchover. The requirements for an
active/standby switchover are met only when the value of HA FSM
State(master) is realtime or routine backup and the value of HA FSM
State(slave) is receiving realtime or routine data. This indicates that data is
consistent on the active and standby MPUsmaster and standby switches.

Precautions

You can run the slave switchover command to perform an active/standby

switchover only in a stack containing multiple switches.

Before commands have been executed, if the slave switchover command is

executed to perform an active/standby switchover, you need to execute the
commands that have not been executed on the new master switch again after the
standby switch becomes the new master switch.

Example
# Perform an active/standby switchover.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] slave switchover enable
[HUAWEI] slave switchover
Warning: This operation will switch the slave board to the master board. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Related Topics
3.2.13 display switchover state
3.2.33 slave switchover { disable | enable }

3.2.33 slave switchover { disable | enable }

Function
The slave switchover { disable | enable } command enables or disables forcible
master/slave switchover.

undo slave switchover disable command enables forcible master/slave

switchover.

By default, master/slave switchover is enabled.

NOTE

Devices that do not support the stack function or do not have the stack function enabled do not
support this function.

Format
slave switchover { disable | enable }

undo slave switchover disable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 716

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
disable Disables forcible master/slave switchover. -

enable Enables forcible master/slave switchover. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The slave switchover command takes effect only after forcible master/slave
switchover is enabled. If forcible master/slave switchover is disabled, the 3.2.32
slave switchover command does not take effect.

Example
# Disable forcible master/slave switchover.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] slave switchover disable

Related Topics
3.2.13 display switchover state
3.2.32 slave switchover

3.2.34 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap

Function
The snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap command enables the
trap function for the ENTITYEXTTRAP module.
The undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap command
disables the trap function for the ENTITYEXTTRAP module.
By default, the trap function is enabled for the ENTITYEXTTRAP module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap [ trap-name trap-name ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap [ trap-name trap-
name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 717

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name trap-name Enables or disables the The value is a trap name.

trap function of the Traps of the
specified event for the ENTITYEXTTRAP module
ENTITYEXTTRAP module. include:
● hwentityinputrateth-
resholdalarm: The
bandwidth usage of
incoming traffic
exceeds the threshold.
● hwentityinputrateth-
resholdalarmresume:
The bandwidth usage
of incoming traffic
falls below the
threshold.
● hwentityoutputrateth-
resholdalarm: The
bandwidth usage of
outgoing traffic
exceeds the threshold.
● hwentityoutputrateth-
resholdalarmresume:
The bandwidth usage
of outgoing traffic
falls below the
threshold.
● hwentityhigerrorpack-
etthresholdalarm:
Incoming packets are
discarded because an
error is detected
during physical layer
detection.
● hwentityhigstatechan-
genotify: The Higig
port status changes.
● hwentityhigstate-
downnotify: The Higig
port status remains
Down.
● hwentityruntpack-
etchecknotify: The
number of packet
fault recoveries
detected on a port
exceeds 5000.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 718

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

● hwboarddroprunt-
packetnotify: Some
packets of 64 to 86
bytes or 145 to 193
bytes are discarded.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
After the trap function is enabled on a switch, the switch will generate traps
during operation and send the traps to the NMS through the SNMP module. If the
trap function is disabled on the switch, the switch will not generate traps and not
send traps to the NMS through the SNMP module.

You can specify the parameter trap-name to enable one or more event traps.

Example
# Enable the hwboardsoftwareversionincompatible trap for the ENTITYEXTTRAP
module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entityexttrap trap-name
hwboardsoftwareversionincompatible

Related Topics
3.2.15 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entityexttrap all

3.2.35 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib command enables the trap
function for the ENTITYMIB module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib command disables the

trap function for the ENTITYMIB module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the ENTITYMIB module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 719

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib [ trap-name
entconfigchange ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib [ trap-name

entconfigchange ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

entconfigchange Enables the trap function -

when the entity MIB
changes.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.

You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the entconfigchange trap of the ENTITYMIB module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitymib trap-name entconfigchange

Related Topics
3.2.16 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitymib all

3.2.36 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 720

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap command enables the trap
function for the ENTITYTRAP module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap command disables the

trap function for the ENTITYTRAP module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the ENTITYTRAP module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap [ trap-name trap-name ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap [ trap-name trap-

name ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name trap-name Specifies the trap for an The value is an

event of the ENTITYTRAP enumerated value and
module. must be set as prompted
by the device.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.

You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwentitytrapconflictdetect trap of the ENTITYTRAP module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name entitytrap trap-name hwpowerfail

Related Topics
3.2.17 display snmp-agent trap feature-name entitytrap all

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 721

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.2.37 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap command enables the trap
function for the SRMTRAP module.
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap command disables the
trap function for the SRMTRAP module.
By default, the trap function is enabled for the SPMTRAP module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap [ trap-name trap-name ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap [ trap-name trap-name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 722

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name trap-name Specifies the trap for an ● hwbiasexceedmajor:

event of the SRMTRAP The bias current
module. exceeds the upper
threshold.
● hwbiasexceedmajor:
The bias current falls
below the lower
threshold.
● hwbiasresume: The
bias current restores
to the normal range.
● hwclpdcheckfault:
CPLD check fails.
● hwclpdcheckfaultre-
sume: CPLD check
succeeds.
● hwcpicoreclockfault:
CPI kernel clock
becomes faulty.
● hwcpicoreclockfaultre-
sume: CPI kernel clock
recovers from a fault.
● hweepromcheckfault:
EEPROM check fails.
● hweepromcheckfaul-
tresume: EEPROM
check succeeds.
● hwentityheartbeat-
trap: The device sends
a heartbeat
notification.
● hwfanfault: A fan
module becomes
faulty.
● hwfanfaultresume: A
fan module recovers
from a fault.
● hwfanoffline: A fan
module is unavailable.
● hwfanonline: A fan
module becomes
available.
● hwfpgacheckfault:
FPGA check fails.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 723

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

● hwfpgacheckfaultre-
sume: FPGA check
succeeds.
● hwi2cfault: An I2C
fault occurs.
● hwi2cfaultresume: An
I2C fault is rectified.
● hwlanswitchfault: An
LSW chip becomes
faulty.
● hwlanswitchfaultre-
sume: An LSW chip
recovers from a fault.
● hwlightfault: An
indicator becomes
faulty.
● hwlightfaultresume:
An indicator recovers
from a fault.
● hwopticalpowerabnor-
mal: The optical
module power is out
of the normal range.
● hwopticalpowerre-
sume: The optical
module power
restores to the normal
range.
● hwpcifault: A PCI fault
occurs.
● hwpcifaultresume: A
PCI fault is rectified.
● hwphychipabnormal:
A PHY chip is faulty.
● hwphyfault: A PHY
fault occurs.
● hwphyfaultresume: A
PHY fault is rectified.
● hwpoechipfault: A PoE
chip is faulty.
● hwpoechipresume: A
PoE chip recovers
from a fault.
● hwpoefault: The PoE
function is
unavailable.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 724

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

● hwpoefaultresume: A
PoE function becomes
available.
● hwportphysicalauto-
negotiateclear: Port
auto-negotiation
succeeds.
● hwportphysicalauto-
negotiatefail: Port
auto-negotiation fails.
● hwportphysicalethfull-
duplexclea: A port is
in full-duplex mode.
● hwportphysicaleth-
halfduplexalarm: A
port is in half-duplex
mode.
● hwportphysicalportty-
pechange: The port
type changes.
● hwpowerabsent: A
power module is
unavailable.
● hwpowerabsentre-
sume: A power
module becomes
available.
● hwpowerfault: A
power module is
faulty.
● hwphyfaultresume: A
power module
recovers from a fault.
● hwrtcfault: A real-
time clock (RTC) is
faulty.
● hwrtcfaultresume: A
real-time clock (RTC)
recovers from a fault.
● hwrxpowerexceedma-
jor: The Rx power
exceeds the upper
threshold.
● hwrxpowerexceedmi-
nor: The Rx power
falls below the lower
threshold.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 725

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

● hwrxpowerresume:
The Rx power restores
to the normal range.
● hwsubcardplugin: A
subcard is installed.
● hwsubcardpullout: A
subcard is removed.
● hwtempchipexcption:
A temperature sensor
chip is faulty.
● hwtempchipexcption-
resume: A
temperature sensor
chip recovers from a
fault.
● hwtempfallingalarm:
The device
temperature is too
low.
● hwtempfallingresume:
The device
temperature restores
to the normal range.
● hwtemprisingalarm:
The device
temperature is too
high.
● hwtemprisingresume:
The device
temperature restores
to the normal range.
● hwtxpowerexceedma-
jor: The Tx power
exceeds the upper
threshold.
● hwtxpowerexceedmi-
nor: The Tx power
falls below the lower
threshold.
● hwtxpowerresume:
The Tx power restores
to the normal range.
● hwusbfault: A USB
flash drive is faulty.
● hwusbfaultresume: A
USB flash drive
recovers from a fault.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 726

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

● hwusbplugin: A USB
flash drive is installed.
● hwusbplugout: A USB
flash drive is removed.
● hwusbpowerfault: A
USB 5V power module
is faulty.
● hwusbpowerfaultre-
sume: A USB 5V
power module
recovers from a fault.
● hwwriteflasherror: An
error occurs when
data is written to the
flash memory.
● hwwriteflasherrorre-
sume: An error that
occurs when data is
written to the flash
memory is resolved.
● hwxauirefclockfault:
An XAUIREF clock is
faulty.
● hwxauirefclockfaultre-
sume: An XAUIREF
clock recovers from a
fault.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwclpdcheckfault trap of the SRMTRAP module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 727

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name srmtrap trap-name hwclpdcheckfault

Related Topics
3.2.18 display snmp-agent trap feature-name srmtrap all

3.2.38 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres command enables the trap
function for the SWITHSRVRES module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres command disables the

trap function for the SWITHSRVRES module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the SWITHSRVRES module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres [ trap-name
{ hwsrvserviceconfigfailed | hwsrvserviceexceedthreshould |
hwsrvserviceexceedthreshouldresume } ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres [ trap-name

{ hwsrvserviceconfigfailed | hwsrvserviceexceedthreshould |
hwsrvserviceexceedthreshouldresume } ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

hwsrvserviceconfig- Enables the trap function -

failed when the service
configurations fail.

hwsrvserviceexceed- Enables the trap function -

threshould when the service
configurations exceed
the recommended
threshold.

hwsrvserviceexceed- Enables the trap function -

threshouldresume when the service
configurations fall below
the recommended
threshold.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 728

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.

You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwsrvserviceconfigfailed trap of the SWITHSRVRES module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name swithsrvres trap-name hwsrvserviceconfigfailed

Related Topics
3.2.19 display snmp-agent trap feature-name swithsrvres all

3.2.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system

Function
The snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system command enables an
SYSTEM trap.

The undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system command disables an

SYSTEM trap.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system [ trap-name trap-name ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system [ trap-name trap-name ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

trap-name trap- Specifies the name of The value is an enumerated value
name a trap. and must be set as prompted by
the device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 729

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
To enable the NMS to easily manage the SYSTEM module of the device, you can
run the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system command to enables an
SYSTEM trap. The command configuration ensures that the traps generated during
the device operation are sent to the NMS. Otherwise, SYSTEM traps are not sent
to the NMS.

You can run the 3.2.20 display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all
command to check the configuration result.

Example
# Enable the hwSysReloadNotification trap.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name system trap-name hwSysReloadNotification

Related Topics
3.2.20 display snmp-agent trap feature-name system all

3.2.40 temperature threshold

Function
The temperature threshold command sets the temperature alarm thresholds.

The undo temperature threshold command restores the default temperature

alarm thresholds.

By default, the lower temperature threshold is 0°C, and the upper temperature
threshold varies according to hardware of various models, ranging from 44°C to
74°C.

Format
temperature threshold slot { slot-id | all } lower-limit min-temperature upper-
limit max-temperature

undo temperature threshold slot { slot-id | all }

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 730

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if The value is integer that

stacking is not is 0 if stacking is not
configured. configured; and ranges
● Specifies the stack ID from 0 to 8 if stacking is
if stacking is configured.
configured.

all Sets the temperature -

alarm threshold for all
member switches in a
stack.

lower-limit min- Specifies the lower The value is an integer

temperature temperature alarm that ranges from 0 to 74.
threshold. min-temperature
specifies the value of the
temperature. The value
of min-temperature
varies according to
device models. The
minimum value of min-
temperature is the
default lower threshold.
In a stack of multiple
member switches, when
all is specified in the
temperature threshold
command and the
temperature alarm
thresholds of all member
switches are set, the
min-temperature value is
the largest value among
the lower temperature
alarm thresholds of the
member switches.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 731

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

upper-limit max- Specifies the upper The value is an integer

temperature temperature alarm that ranges from 0 to 74.
threshold. max-temperature
specifies the value of the
temperature. The value
of max-temperature
varies according to
device models. The
maximum value of max-
temperature is the
default upper threshold.
max-temperature must
be at least 10 greater
than min-temperature.
In a stack of multiple
member switches, when
all is specified in the
temperature threshold
command and the
temperature alarm
thresholds of all member
switches are set, the
max-temperature value
is the smallest value
among the upper
temperature alarm
thresholds of the
member switches.

Views
system view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The device generates an alarm and records log information when the device
temperature falls below the lower threshold or rises above the upper threshold.
Precautions
● If the configured threshold values are out of the allowed range, the
configuration fails and the upper and lower thresholds are restored to the
maximum values.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 732

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● Configuration commands are generated in a configuration file regardless of

whether the configured threshold values are default values. These commands
can be cleared only when the undo temperature threshold command is
executed.

Example
# Set the lower temperature alarm threshold to 20°C and upper temperature
alarm threshold to 60°C for all member switches in a stack.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] temperature threshold slot all lower-limit 20 upper-limit 60

Related Topics
3.1.18 display temperature

3.2.41 transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power

Function
The transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power command sets the upper and
lower thresholds for the receive optical power of the optical transceiver installed in
an interface.

The undo transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power command restores the upper
and lower thresholds to the default values for the receive optical power of the
optical transceiver installed in an interface.

By default, the optical power upper and lower thresholds vary according to optical
module vendors.

Format
transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power { default | low-alarm low-alarm high-
alarm high-alarm }

undo transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

default Sets the upper and lower -

thresholds for the receive
optical power of the
optical transceiver
installed in an interface
to default values.

high-alarm high-alarm Sets the upper threshold The value varies

for the receive optical according to the optical
power of the optical module vendor.
transceiver installed in
an interface.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 733

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

low-alarm low-alarm Sets the lower threshold The value varies

for the receive optical according to the optical
power of the optical module vendor.
transceiver installed in
an interface.

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power command to adjust
the receive optical power of the optical transceiver.

Example
# Set the upper and lower thresholds for the receive optical power of the optical
transceiver installed in GigabitEthernet 0/0/2 to default values.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/2
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] transceiver diagnosis threshold rx-power default

3.2.42 transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power

Function
The transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power command sets the upper and
lower thresholds for the transmit optical power of the optical transceiver installed
in an interface.

The undo transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power command restores the

upper and lower thresholds for the transmit optical power of the optical
transceiver installed in an interface to default values.

By default, the optical power upper and lower thresholds vary according to optical
module vendors.

Format
transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power { default | low-alarm low-alarm high-
alarm high-alarm }

undo transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 734

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

default Sets the upper and lower -

thresholds for the
transmit optical power of
the optical transceiver
installed in an interface
to default values.

high-alarm high-alarm Sets the upper threshold The value varies

for the transmit optical according to the optical
power of the optical module vendor.
transceiver installed in
an interface.

low-alarm low-alarm Sets the lower threshold The value varies

for the transmit optical according to the optical
power of the optical module vendor.
transceiver installed in
an interface.

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power command to adjust
the transmit optical power of the optical transceiver.

Example
# Set the upper and lower thresholds for the transmit optical power of the optical
transceiver installed in GigabitEthernet 0/0/2 to default values.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/2
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] transceiver diagnosis threshold tx-power default

3.2.43 transceiver phony-alarm-disable

Function
The transceiver phony-alarm-disable command disables the alarm function for
non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 735

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The undo transceiver phony-alarm-disable command enables the alarm function

for non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules.
By default, the alarm function is enabled for non-Huawei-certified switch optical
modules.

Format
transceiver phony-alarm-disable
undo transceiver phony-alarm-disable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules may fail to work normally. If non-
Huawei-certified switch optical modules are used on devices produced since July 1,
2013(January 1, 2016 for QSFP+ 40GE optical modules), the devices generate a
large number of alarms to prompt users to replace these optical modules with
Huawei-certified switch optical modules. However, vendor information of optical
modules early delivered from Huawei may not be recorded. Therefore, non-
Huawei-certified switch optical module alarms are generated. These optical
modules can still be used to protect customer investment. In this case, you can
disable the alarm function for non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules.

Example
# Disable the alarm function for non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] transceiver phony-alarm-disable
Info:Transceiver-phony-alarm disable.

# Enable the alarm function for non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo transceiver phony-alarm-disable
Info:Transceiver-phony-alarm enable.

3.2.44 wavelength-channel

Function
The wavelength-channel command sets the wavelength channel of a
wavelength-tunable optical module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 736

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The undo wavelength-channel command restores the default wavelength

channel of a wavelength-tunable optical module.

The default wavelength channel of a wavelength-tunable optical module is

channel 1.

NOTE

This command is not supported by S1720GFR, S2750, S5700LI, and S5700S-LI.

Format
wavelength-channel channelnum

undo wavelength-channel

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

channelnum Specifies a wavelength The value is an integer

channel number. that ranges from 1 to 80.

Views
XGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To adjust the wavelength of a wavelength-tunable optical module on an interface,

run the wavelength-channel command on this interface. This command will add
the wavelength-tunable optical module to a specified wavelength channel. Each
wavelength channel has a fixed center wavelength and frequency.

To view the mapping between the wavelength channel, center wavelength, and
frequency, run the display wavelength-map command.

Precautions

When the wavelength-channel command configuration exists on the interface,

after the interface has a wavelength-tunable optical module installed, this optical
module will automatically adjust its wavelength to the configured wavelength. If a
non-wavelength-tunable optical module is installed, the command configuration
will not take effect and the system displays an alarm.

Running the wavelength-channel command will open and close the laser,
resulting in interface flapping.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 737

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Add a wavelength-tunable optical module to wavelength channel 20 on
XGigabitEthernet0/0/2.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface XGigabitEthernet 0/0/2
[HUAWEI-XGigabitEthernet0/0/2] wavelength-channel 20

Related Topics
3.2.21 display wavelength-map

3.3 Information Center Configuration Commands

3.3.1 Command Support
3.3.2 display buffer
3.3.3 display channel
3.3.4 display debugging
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.6 display info-center filter-id
3.3.7 display info-center rate-limit record
3.3.8 display info-center rate-limit threshold
3.3.9 display info-center statistics
3.3.10 display logbuffer
3.3.11 display logfile
3.3.12 display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all
3.3.13 display trapbuffer
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.17 info-center filter-id
3.3.18 info-center local log-counter disable
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size
3.3.21 info-center logfile size
3.3.22 info-center loghost
3.3.23 info-center loghost source
3.3.24 info-center loghost source-port

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 738

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.3.25 info-center max-logfile-number

3.3.26 info-center rate-limit except
3.3.27 info-center rate-limit global-threshold
3.3.28 info-center rate-limit monitor-period
3.3.29 info-center rate-limit threshold
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.31 info-center statistic-suppress enable
3.3.32 info-center timestamp
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer
3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer size
3.3.35 reset info-center statistics
3.3.36 reset logbuffer
3.3.37 reset trapbuffer
3.3.38 save logfile
3.3.39 save logfile all
3.3.40 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info
3.3.41 terminal debugging
3.3.42 terminal echo synchronous
3.3.43 terminal logging
3.3.44 terminal monitor
3.3.45 terminal trapping

3.3.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

3.3.2 display buffer

Function
The display buffer command displays the statistics about logs cached in the
buffer.

Format
display buffer [ feature-name [ buffer-name ] ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 739

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
feature-name Name of the buffer dedicated to caching logs of a specific -
feature
buffer-name Name of the buffer -

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
On the device, service modules generate logs and control the log volumes. The
information center processes the received logs.
When the number of logs that are generated within a specified period (T) exceeds
the threshold, the service module, with the buffer mechanism, saves extra logs to
the buffer and does not send them to the information center.
You can run the display buffer command to view the statistics about log
information in the buffer.

Example
# View the statistics about logs cached in the buffer on the service module L2IF.
<HUAWEI> display buffer L2IF
Feature name : L2IF
Buffer number : 1
Buffer name : CALLBACKFAIL
Buffer ID : 35
Max length of message : 256
Max number of message :5
Time threshold(s) : 3600
Store lastest message number : 0
Total receive number : 76
Total process number :5
Max rate record : 0 / 3600(s)
Max rate timestamp : 0-00-00 00:00:00

Table 3-36 Description of the display buffer command output

Item Description

Feature name Feature name

Buffer number Buffer number

Buffer name Buffer name

Buffer ID Buffer ID

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 740

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Max length of Max length of message

message

Max number of Max number of message

message

Time threshold(s) Time threshold

Store lastest Number of messages saved to non-volatile memory

message number

Total receive Total receive number

number

Total process Total process number

number

Max rate record Max rate record

Max rate Max rate timestamp

timestamp

3.3.3 display channel

Function
The display channel command displays the channel configuration.

Format
display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

channel- Specifies the The value is an integer than ranges from 0 to
number number of a 9. That is, the system has 10 channels.
channel. Channels 0 to 5 have default names and the
six channels map to six different output
directions.
Table 3-37 shows the relationship between
channels and output directions.

channel- Specifies the name The value is a string of 1 to 30 case-

name of a channel. insensitive characters. The value consists of
letters or numbers and must start with a
letter.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 741

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-37 Relationship between channel and output directions

Chan Default Output Description

nel Channel Direction
Numb Name
er

0 console console Console that can receive logs, traps, and

debugging messages.

1 monitor monitor VTY terminal that can receive logs, traps,

and debugging messages, which facilitates
remote maintenance.

2 loghost loghost Log host that can receive . By default,

information is saved on the log host in file
format for easy reference.

3 trapbuffer trapbuffer Trap buffer that can receive traps.

4 logbuffer logbuffer Log buffer that can receive logs.

5 snmpagent snmpagent SNMP agent that can receive traps.

6 channel6 Unspecified Reserved. You can specify to which

destination this channel can output
information.

7 channel7 Unspecified Reserved. You can specify to which

destination this channel can output
information.

8 channel8 Unspecified Reserved. You can specify to which

destination this channel can output
information.

9 channel9 Unspecified Reserved. You can specify to which

destination this channel can output
information.

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The display channel command displays the channel configuration.

When using this command, note the following points:

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 742

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● When channel-number or channel-name is specified, the display channel

command displays the specified channel that information passes through and
information severity.
● When channel-number or channel-name is not specified, the display channel
command displays all the channels that information passes through and
information severity.

Example
# Display the configuration of channel 0.
<HUAWEI> display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging

# Display the configuration of all channels.

<HUAWEI> display channel
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging

channel number:1, channel name:monitor

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging

channel number:2, channel name:loghost

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y informational Y debugging N debugging

channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default N informational Y debugging N debugging

channel number:4, channel name:logbuffer

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning N debugging N debugging

channel number:5, channel name:snmpagent

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default N debugging Y debugging N debugging

channel number:6, channel name:channel6

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging

channel number:7, channel name:channel7

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging

channel number:8, channel name:channel8

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging

channel number:9, channel name:channel9

MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging

Table 3-38 Description of the display channel command output

Item Description

channel number Channel number, which ranges from 0 to 9.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 743

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

channel name Channel name. Table 3-37 lists default channel names.
To set the channel name, run the 3.3.15 info-center
channel name command.

MODU_ID Module ID. The default value is ffff0000.

NAME Module name. The default value is default.

To set the module name, run the 3.3.30 info-center source
channel command.

ENABLE Whether logs/traps/debugging messages are allowed to

pass through a channel:
● Y
● N
To specify the channel, run the 3.3.30 info-center source
channel command.

LOG_LEVEL/ Lowest severity of output logs/traps/debugging messages.

TRAP_LEVEL/ The following severities are listed in descending order of
DEBUG_LEVEL priority:
● emergencies
● alert
● critical
● error
● warning
● notification
● informational
● debugging
To set the lowest severity of output logs, run the 3.3.30
info-center source channel command.

Related Topics
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel

3.3.4 display debugging

Function
The display debugging command displays debugging messages allowed to be
sent by the device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 744

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display debugging [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ module-
name ]
display debugging interface all

display debugging slot slot-id vcpu vcpu

NOTE

Only the S5720HI supports the vcpu vcpu parameter.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface Specifies the interface type and -
interface-type number.
interface-number
all Display debugging information -
on all interfaces.
module-name Displays debugging messages Enumerated type. The value
sent by a specified module depends on the registered
such as the DHCP module. If module.
this parameter is not specified,
all debugging messages
allowed to be sent are
displayed.
slot slot-id Specifies a slot ID. The value is an integer, and
the value range depends on
the device configuration.
vcpu vcpu Specifies the virtual CPU Specify the vcpu parameter
number. based on the hardware
configuration.

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Using the display debugging command, you can display the enabled debugging.
If no parameters are specified, the display debugging command displays global
debugging information.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 745

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Debugging affects device performance. The display debugging command displays

debugging messages allowed to be sent by the Switch.

Prerequisites

By default, sending debugging messages is prohibited. The debugging of a

specified module has been enabled.

Example
# Display debugging messages allowed to be sent by the Switch.
<HUAWEI> debugging acl4 all
<HUAWEI> display debugging
ACL4 event debugging switch is on
ACL4 packet debugging switch is on

Table 3-39 Description of the display debugging command output

Item Description

ACL4 event Event debugging is enabled for the ACL4 module.

debugging
switch is on

ACL4 packet Packet debugging is enabled for the ACL4 module.

debugging
switch is on

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.41 terminal debugging
3.3.44 terminal monitor

3.3.5 display info-center

Function
The display info-center command displays the output configuration of the
information center.

Format
display info-center

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 746

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display info-center command to display all information recorded
in the information center.

When a module is specified, you can view all information about the module
recorded in the information center.

Example
# Display output configuration of the information center.
<HUAWEI> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
10.1.1.1, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language English , host facility local7
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 512, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 53
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 256, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 6229
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - date millisecond

Sent messages = 270090, Received messages = 281030

IO Reg messages = 2 IO Sent messages = 10940

Table 3-40 Description of the display info-center command output

Item Description

Information Center Information center status:

● enabled
● disabled
To enable the information center, run the 3.3.16 info-
center enable command.

Log host Log host configuration.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 747

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

10.1.1.1 Log host IP address.

To set the log host IP address, run the 3.3.22 info-center
loghost command.

channel number Number of a channel used to output information.

To set the number of a channel used to output
information, run the 3.3.14 info-center channel
command.

channel name Name of a channel used to output information.

To set the name of a channel used to output information,
run the 3.3.15 info-center channel name command.

language Language mode in which information is output to a log

host.
To set the language mode in which information is output
to a log host, run the 3.3.22 info-center loghost
command.

host facility Logging tool.

To configure the logging tool, run the 3.3.22 info-center
loghost command.

Console Console configuration.

Monitor Remote terminal configuration.

SNMP Agent SNMP agent configuration.

Log buffer Log buffer configuration.

enabled Whether the Switch is enabled to send logs/traps to the

log/trap buffer.
● enabled
● disabled
To enable the Switch to send logs/traps to the log/trap
buffer, run the 3.3.19 info-center logbuffer or 3.3.33
info-center trapbuffer command.

max buffer size Maximum number of logs/traps in the log/trap buffer.

current buffer size Maximum number of logs/traps in the current log/trap

buffer.
To set the maximum number of logs/traps in the current
log/trap buffer, run the 3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size
or 3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer size command.

current messages Number of messages recorded in the log/trap buffer.

dropped messages Number of messages discarded by the log/trap buffer.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 748

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

overwritten Number of overwritten messages in the log/trap buffer.

messages

Trap buffer Trap buffer configuration.

Information Timestamp format of logs, traps, and debugging

timestamp setting messages:
● boot: indicates that the timestamp is expressed in the
format of relative time, a period of time since system
start.
● date: indicates the current system date and time. It is
expressed in mm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss format.
● short-date: indicates the short date. This timestamp
differs from date is that the year is not displayed.
● format-date: indicates that the timestamp is expressed
in YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss format.
● none: indicates that the output information does not
contain the timestamp.
To configure the timestamp format, run the 3.3.32 info-
center timestamp command.

Sent messages Number of sent messages output by information center

modules.

Received messages Number of messages sent to information center modules.

IO Reg messages Number of receive messages by switch.

IO Sent messages Number of sent messages by switch.

Related Topics
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size
3.3.22 info-center loghost
3.3.32 info-center timestamp
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer
3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer size

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 749

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.3.6 display info-center filter-id

Function
The display info-center filter-id command displays information filtered by the
information center.

Format
display info-center filter-id [ id | bymodule-alias modname alias ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
id Displays filtered information The value is in hexadecimal
with the specified ID. notation and is a string of 8
digits. The value can contain
0-9, a-f, and A-F.

bymodule- Displays filtered information Enumerated type. Set the value

alias modname with the specified module according to the device
alias name and mnemonic symbol. configuration.
● modname: specifies the
module name.
● alias specifies the
mnemonic symbol.

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
ID identifies each function module for log registration. An ID filter list is the
aggregation of the shielded IDs.
If id or bymodule-alias is not specified, all information is filtered.
If you do not want to output a specific log to the log file or log buffer, you can
find the ID of the log in the data dictionary and run the 3.3.17 info-center filter-
id command to inject the ID into the filter list. Then, you can run the display info-
center filter-id command to check whether the ID has become the one to be
filtered.

Example
# Display all the IDs in the filter list.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 750

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> display info-center filter-id

ID : 0x40394017
Module : SHELL
Alias : CMDRECORD
Content : Recorded command information. (Task=[string], Ip=[string], VpnName=[STRING],
User=[string], AthenticationMethod="[STRING]",
Command="[string]")
Filtered Number : 2

ID : 0x40394018
Module : SHELL
Alias : DISPLAY_CMDRECORD
Content : Recorded display command information. (Task=[string], Ip=[string], VpnName=[string],
User=[string], AuthenticationMethod="[string]",
Command="[string]")
Filtered Number : 1

Table 3-41 Description of the display info-center filter-id command output

Item Description

ID Identifier to which each log corresponds.

To configure the Switch to filter a log or trap
with a specified ID, run the 3.3.17 info-center
filter-id id command.

Module Module name.

To configure the Switch to filter a log or trap
with a specified module name or alias name,
run the 3.3.17 info-center filter-id bymodule-
alias modname alias command.

Alias Alias name.

To configure the Switch to filter a log or trap
with a specified module name or alias name,
run the 3.3.17 info-center filter-id bymodule-
alias modname alias command.

Content Log message to which each log ID corresponds.

Filtered Number Number of times that the log to which the log
ID corresponds is filtered.

Related Topics
3.3.17 info-center filter-id

3.3.7 display info-center rate-limit record

Function
The display info-center rate-limit record command displays the suppression of
the log processing rate in the information center.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 751

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display info-center rate-limit record

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display info-center rate-limit record command to check
suppression information of the log processing rate. Then you can determine
whether service logs are suppressed because there are many logs.

Example
# Display the suppression of the log processing rate in the information center.
<HUAWEI> display info-center rate-limit record
Record No.1
InfoID : 417d5000
Module : 6OVER4
Alias : DESTFAIL
Rate limit threshold : 50
Total receive number : 1872
Total drop number : 922
Total send number : 950
Begin timestamp : 2009-12-21 11:41:28

Table 3-42 Description of the display info-center rate-limit record command

output

Item Description

InfoID Log ID.

Module Log module name.

Alias Log mnemonic name.

Rate limit threshold Maximum number of logs set for the

information center to process every second.

Total receive number Total number of logs that are generated during
the latest suppression period.

Total drop number Total number of logs that are discarded during
the latest suppression period.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 752

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Total send number Total number of logs that the information

center process during the latest suppression
period.

Begin timestamp Timestamp signifying when the suppression

function is enabled for the last time.

Related Topics
3.3.29 info-center rate-limit threshold

3.3.8 display info-center rate-limit threshold

Function
The display info-center rate-limit threshold command displays the threshold of
the log processing rate (maximum number of logs that the information center can
process every second). The threshold information includes the default threshold
contained in the released version, the default threshold for the specified log ID,
and the threshold set through the command lines after the system startup.

Format
display info-center rate-limit threshold

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display info-center rate-limit threshold command to check the
log processing rate threshold of each module and then adjust the threshold based
on service requirements.

Example
# Display the threshold of the log processing rate set for the information center.
<HUAWEI> display info-center rate-limit threshold
Rate limit threshold(per second):
Module Alias Default Config
default 30 30

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 753

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

IPC IPCFRGTOOLARGE 5 5
IPC IPCDUMPMEM 5 5
IPC ALLOCINDEXERR 5 5
IPC DRVNOTSTABLE 2 2
IPC NOTIMODFALNOREASM 2 2
IPC SYNRPCGETSMFAL 5 5
IPC SYNRPCMODUNREG 5 5
IPC SYNRPCRETNULL 5 5
IPC MODULENOTREG 5 5
IPC SENDRETURN 5 5
IPC GETMTUFAL 5 5
IPC ALLOCIPCFRGFAL 5 5
IPC RECVINVALIDMSG 5 5
IPC RCVNOTIQUEERR 5 5
IPC NOTIFYQUEERR 5 5
IPC SENDFINISHRETURN 5 5
IPC RECVINVALIDMSGTYPE 5 5
SOURCE UMSGGETSRCOBJFAL 1 1

Table 3-43 Description of the display info-center rate-limit threshold command

output

Item Description

Module Log module name.

Alias Log mnemonic name.

Default The default threshold of the log processing rate.

Config The threshold of the log processing rate set for

the information center.

Related Topics
3.3.29 info-center rate-limit threshold

3.3.9 display info-center statistics

Function
The display info-center statistics command displays statistics on the information
center.

Format
display info-center statistics

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 754

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display info-center statistics command to view statistics on the
information center, including logs, traps, and debugging messages of each
module.

Example
# Display statistics on the information center.
<HUAWEI> display info-center statistics
Information statistics data:
ModuleID ModuleName LogSend LogDrop DiagSend DiagDrop TrapSend
TrapDrop DebugSend DebugDrop
0x417d0000 6OVER4 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0x41470000 AAA 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0x406c0000 ACL 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0x40ef0000 ACL6 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0xff060000 ACLE 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0xff380000 ADA_BFD 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0x40e70000 ADDR 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0

0xff2f0000 ADP_RRPP 0 0 114 18 0

0 0 0
0xff950000 ADPIPV4 0 0 253 393 0
0 0 0
---- More ----

Table 3-44 Description of the display info-center statistics command output

Item Description

ModuleID Registered ID of the module.

ModuleName Name of the module that generates

logs.

LogSend Number of sent logs.

LogDrop Number of discarded logs.

DiagSend Number of sent diagnostic messages.

DiagDrop Number of discarded diagnostic

messages.

TrapSend Number of sent traps.

TrapDrop Number of discarded traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 755

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

DebugSend Number of sent debugging messages.

DebugDrop Number of discarded debugging

messages.

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel

3.3.10 display logbuffer

Function
The display logbuffer command displays information recorded in the log buffer.

Format
display logbuffer [ size size | slot slot-id | module module-name | security | level
{ severity | level } ] *

display logbuffer summary [ level severity | slot slot-id ] *

display logbuffer order by module

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

size size Displays the specified The value is an integer

number of logs recently that ranges from 1 to
generated in the log 1024.
buffer.

module module-name Displays logs of a Enumerated type. The

specified module in the value depends on the
log buffer. registered module.

security Specifies the security -

logs.

slot slot-id Displays logs in a The value must be set

specified slot. according to the device
configuration.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 756

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

level { severity | level } Displays logs of specified The value of severity is

severity name or ID. an integer that ranges
● severity specifies the from 0 to 7.
severity ID. ● 0: Emergencies
● level specifies the ● 1: Alert
severity name. ● 2: Critical
● 3: Error
● 4: Warning
● 5: Notification
● 6: Informational
● 7: Debugging
The value of level is the
enumerated type:
● emergencies
● alert
● critical
● error
● warning
● notification
● informational
● debugging

summary Displays the summary of -

logs in the log buffer.

order by module Displays logs in the order -

of the modules to which
they belong to.
NOTE
● Logs in the log buffer
are classified and
displayed by the
modules they belong
to.
● Modules are displayed
by the time that the
module's first log is
generated in the log
buffer in descending
order.
● Logs in each module
are displayed by the
time they are
generated in
descending order.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 757

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The display logbuffer command displays the information of recent logs. If the
actual number of logs is smaller than the value specified by size, the system
displays logs of the actual number.

Example
# Display all the logs in the log buffer.
<HUAWEI> display logbuffer
Logging buffer configuration and contents : enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 512
Channel number : 4 , Channel name : logbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 43

Oct 16 2013 06:06:48 HUAWEI %%01VFS/4/DISKSPACE_NOT_ENOUGH(l)[3]:Disk space is

insufficient. The system begins to delete unused log files.
Oct 10 2013 19:06:48 HUAWEI %%01VFS/4/DISKSPACE_NOT_ENOUGH(l)[4]:Disk space is
insufficient. The system begins to delete unused log files.
Oct 7 2013 16:36:48 HUAWEI %%01VFS/4/DISKSPACE_NOT_ENOUGH(l)[5]:Disk space is
insufficient. The system begins to delete unused log files.
Oct 5 2013 09:12:22 HUAWEI %%01EZOP/3/PROCESS_STOP(l)[6]:Easy-operation upgrad
e process has been stopped. (Reason=There is a configuration file in this device)
Oct 5 2013 09:09:29 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[7]:Interface XGigabitEther
net0/0/4 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:29 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[8]:Interface XGigabitEther
net0/0/3 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:29 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[9]:Interface XGigabitEther
net0/0/2 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:29 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[10]:Interface XGigabitEthe
rnet0/0/1 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:29 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/CARD_ENABLE(l)[11]:Board 0 card 1 has b
een available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:24 HUAWEI %%01ALML/4/ENT_PLUG_IN(l)[12]:LS51S24CA frame[1] bo
ard[0]'s card[1] was plugged in.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:22 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[13]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/24 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:22 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[14]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/23 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:21 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[15]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/22 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:21 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[16]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/21 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:20 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[17]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/20 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:20 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[18]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/19 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:20 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[19]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/18 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:19 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[20]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/17 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:19 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[21]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/16 has been available.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 758

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Oct 5 2013 09:09:18 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[22]:Interface GigabitEther

net0/0/15 has been available.
Oct 5 2013 09:09:18 HUAWEI %%01IFNET/4/IF_ENABLE(l)[23]:Interface GigabitEther
net0/0/14 has been available.
---- More ----

# Display logs in the order of the modules they belong to.

<HUAWEI> display logbuffer order by module
Logging buffer configuration and contents : enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 512
Channel number : 4 , Channel name : logbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 113

Nov 10 2010 16:16:53 HUAWEI %%01DHCP/4/DHCP_INFO_LOG_DHCP_REMOTEBACKUP_FAILED(l)

[0]:Saving the dynamic binding table to a remot
e server failed. Ensure that the FTP/SFTP server address is reachable and the FTP/SFTP user name and
password and the file path are
correct.
Nov 10 2010 10:38:23 HUAWEI %%01INFO/4/SUPPRESS_LOG(l)[1]:Last message repeated 1 times.
(InfoID=1077493787, ModuleName=SHELL, I
nfoAlias=LOGINFAILED)
Nov 10 2010 10:19:42 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGINFAILED(s)[2]:Failed to login. (Ip=10.134.27.157,
UserName=**, Times=3, AccessType=
TELNET, VpnName=)
Nov 10 2010 10:19:42 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGIN_FAIL_FOR_INPUT_TIMEOUT(s)[3]:Failed to log in due
to timeout.(Ip=10.134.27.157, U
serName=**, Times=3, AccessType=TELNET,
VpnName=)
Nov 10 2010 10:18:02 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGINFAILED(s)[4]:Failed to login. (Ip=10.134.27.157,
UserName=**, Times=2, AccessType=
TELNET, VpnName=)
Nov 10 2010 10:18:02 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGIN_FAIL_FOR_INPUT_TIMEOUT(s)[5]:Failed to log in due
to timeout.(Ip=10.134.27.157, U
serName=**, Times=2, AccessType=TELNET,
VpnName=)
Nov 10 2010 10:16:27 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGINFAILED(s)[6]:Failed to login. (Ip=10.134.27.157,
UserName=**, Times=1, AccessType=
TELNET, VpnName=)
Nov 10 2010 10:16:27 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGIN_FAIL_FOR_INPUT_TIMEOUT(s)[7]:Failed to log in due
to timeout.(Ip=10.134.27.157, U
serName=**, Times=1, AccessType=TELNET,
VpnName=)
Nov 9 2010 19:51:57 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/4/LOGINFAILED(s)[8]:Failed to login. (Ip=10.134.27.157,
UserName=**, Times=1, AccessType=
TELNET, VpnName=)

Table 3-45 Description of the display logbuffer command output

Item Description

Logging buffer configuration and Whether the device is enabled to

contents output logs to the log buffer:
● enabled
● disabled
To configure the device to output logs
to the log buffer, run the 3.3.19 info-
center logbuffer command.

Allowed max buffer size Maximum size of the log buffer.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 759

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Actual buffer size Actual size of the log buffer.

To set the log buffer size, run the
3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size
command.

Channel number Number of the channel used to send

logs to the log buffer.
To configure the number of a channel
used to send logs to the log buffer,
run the 3.3.14 info-center channel
command.

Channel name Name of the channel used to send

logs to the log buffer.
To configure the name of a channel
used to send logs to the log buffer,
run the 3.3.15 info-center channel
name command.

Dropped messages Number of dropped messages.

Overwritten messages Number of overwritten messages.

Current messages Number of current messages.

# Display the summary of information in the log buffer.

<HUAWEI> display logbuffer summary
SLOT EMERG ALERT CRIT ERROR WARN NOTIF INFO DEBUG
0 0 0 0 36 476 0 0 0

Table 3-46 Description of the display logbuffer summary command output

Item Description

SLOT ID of the slot where logs are

generated.

EMERG Number of logs of emergency.

ALERT Number of logs of alert.

CRIT Number of logs of critical.

ERROR Number of logs of error.

WARN Number of logs of warning.

NOTIF Number of logs of notification.

INFO Number of logs of informational.

DEBUG Number of logs of debugging.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 760

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size
3.3.36 reset logbuffer

3.3.11 display logfile

Function
The display logfile command displays information about a log file.

Format
display logfile file-name [ offset | hex ] *

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
file-name Specifies the log file name, The value is a string of case-
which can contain the drive insensitive characters, spaces not
and path. supported. If the parameter value
does not contain any path, it is a
string of 1 to 64 bytes. Otherwise, it
is a string of 1 to 160 bytes.
offset Displays the log file with the The value is an integer that ranges
specified offset or byte. from 0 to 2147483647.

hex Displays the log file in -

hexadecimal notation. If the
parameter is not specified, the
log file is displayed in text
format.

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 761

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
When encountering problems, you can query log information to know about what
happened during device operation. This is helpful for fault location.

The file name is generated automatically by the system. The file name extension
of the log file is *.log or *.dblg. When the current log file size reaches the specified
upper limit, the system compresses the file into a *.log.zip or *.dblg.zip file.

You can view the *.log files or *.log.zip files. When viewing a *.log.zip file, you can
press Ctrl+C to abort command execution.

When viewing the *.log.zip file, it is recommended that the length of the file name
(including the driver and path) not exceed 62 bytes. Otherwise, the content of the
file may fail to be viewed.

If the files you filter based on the pipe character are large and no qualified log file
is displayed, the command fails to display any output for a long period of time
until the command execution finishes.

For details about the log format, see "Log Message Format Description" in the
S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 V200R011C10 Log Reference - Introduction.

Example
# Display log information saved in the log file in a specified path.
<HUAWEI> display logfile logfile/log.log
################################################################
# This logfile is generated at slot 0
################################################################

Aug 30 2013 16:18:58-05:13 HUAWEI FSP/4/STANDBY_CHANGE:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.183.1.22.3 Slot 2

is designated as standby.
Aug 30 2013 16:19:40-05:13 HUAWEI SNMP/4/WARMSTART:OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2
warmStart
Aug 30 2013 16:19:15-05:13 HUAWEI %%01ACL/6/INIT_OK(l)[6]:Succeed in mqc
initializtion.
Aug 30 2013 16:19:41-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[7]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="vlan
batch 4090", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:41-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[8]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inter
face Vlanif4090", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:43-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[9]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inter
face Eth-Trunk10", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:43-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[10]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inte
rface Eth-Trunk20", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:44-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[11]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inte
rface Eth-Trunk30", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:44-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[12]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inte
rface GigabitEthernet0/0/1", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:44-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[13]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inte
rface GigabitEthernet0/0/2", Result=Success)
Aug 30 2013 16:19:44-05:13 HUAWEI %%01SHELL/5/CMDRECORD(s)[14]:Record command information.
(Task=CFM, Ip=**, User=**, Command="inte
rface GigabitEthernet0/0/3", Result=Success)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 762

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.38 save logfile

3.3.12 display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all command displays all trap
messages of the Information Center module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all command displays whether
all trap functions of the Information Center module are enabled.

Example
# Display all trap messages of the Information Center module.
<HUAWEI> display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: INFO
Trap number : 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwICLogFileAging on on
hwICLogBufferLose on on

Table 3-47 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all
command output

Item Description

Feature name Name of the module to which a trap message

belongs.

Trap number Number of trap messages.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 763

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Trap name Name of a trap message of the Information Center

module:
● hwICLogFileAging: indicates that a log file aged
and then was deleted.
● hwICLogBufferLose: indicates that some logs in
the log buffer were lost because of storage space
insufficiency.

Default switch status Status of the default trap switch:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Current switch status Status of the current trap switch:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.3.40 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info

3.3.13 display trapbuffer

Function
The display trapbuffer command displays information recorded in the trap buffer.

Format
display trapbuffer [ size value | slot slot-id | module module-name | level
{ severity | level } ] *

display trapbuffer order by module

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

size value Displays the specified number of The value is an integer that
traps recently generated in the ranges from 1 to 1024.
trap buffer. If this parameter is
not specified, all traps are
displayed.
module Displays traps of a specified Enumerated type. The value
module-name module in the trap buffer. depends on the registered
module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 764

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Displays traps in a specified slot. The value must be set
according to the device
configuration.

level { severity Displays traps of specified The value of severity is an

| level } severity name or ID. integer that ranges from 0 to
● severity specifies the severity 7.
ID. ● 0: Emergencies
● level specifies the severity ● 1: Alert
name. ● 2: Critical
● 3: Error
● 4: Warning
● 5: Notification
● 6: Informational
● 7: Debugging
The value of level is the
enumerated type:
● emergencies
● alert
● critical
● error
● warning
● notification
● informational
● debugging

order by Displays alarms in the order of -

module the modules they belong to.
NOTE
● Alarms in the alarm buffer are
classified and displayed by the
modules they belong to.
● Modules are displayed by the
time that the module's first
alarm is generated in the alarm
buffer in descending order.
● Alarms in each module are
displayed by the time they are
generated in descending order.

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 765

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display trapbuffer command displays the information of recent traps. If the
number of traps in the trap buffer is smaller than value, traps of the actual
number are displayed.

Example
# Display all traps in the trap buffer.
<HUAWEI> display trapbuffer
Trapping buffer configuration and contents : enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 256
Channel number : 3 , Channel name : trapbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 6248
Current messages : 256

#Sep 19 2012 04:38:03+08:00 HUAWEI DS/4/DATASYNC_CFGCHANGE:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011

.5.25.191.3.1 configurations have been changed. The current change number is 8,
the change loop count is 0, and the maximum number of records is 4095.
#Sep 19 2012 04:37:39+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.2
5.207.2.2 A user login. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.114, UserC
hannel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 04:35:48+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGOUT:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.
25.207.2.4 A user logout. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.143, Use
rChannel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 04:20:54+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.2
5.207.2.2 A user login. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.143, UserC
hannel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 04:08:03+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGOUT:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.
25.207.2.4 A user logout. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.143, Use
rChannel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 03:54:27+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.2
5.207.2.2 A user login. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.143, UserC
hannel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 03:54:18+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGINFAIL:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011
.5.25.207.2.3 A user login fail. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.1
43, UserChannel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 02:51:03+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGOUT:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.
25.207.2.4 A user logout. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.57, User
Channel=VTY0)
#Sep 19 2012 02:50:24+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGOUT:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.
25.207.2.4 A user logout. (UserIndex=35, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.164, Use
rChannel=VTY1)
#Sep 19 2012 02:40:19+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.2
5.207.2.2 A user login. (UserIndex=35, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.164, UserC
hannel=VTY1)
#Sep 19 2012 02:35:23+08:00 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.2
5.207.2.2 A user login. (UserIndex=34, UserName=VTY, UserIP=10.135.18.57, UserCh
annel=VTY0)
......

# Display alarms in the order of the modules they belong to.

<HUAWEI> display trapbuffer order by module
Trapping buffer configuration and contents : enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 256
Channel number : 3 , Channel name : trapbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 766

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Current messages : 79

#Nov 11 2010 11:51:24 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.2 A user login.

(UserIndex=36, UserName=**, Us
erIP=10.135.19.152, UserChannel=VTY2)
#Nov 10 2010 18:54:06 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.2 A user login.
(UserIndex=35, UserName=**, Us
erIP=10.135.186.212, UserChannel=VTY1)
#Nov 10 2010 12:07:44 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.2 A user login.
(UserIndex=34, UserName=**, Us
erIP=10.135.19.157, UserChannel=VTY0)
#Nov 10 2010 11:19:23 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGOUT:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.4 A user logout.
(UserIndex=34, UserName=**,
UserIP=10.134.27.157, UserChannel=VTY0)
#Nov 10 2010 10:48:57 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.2 A user login.
(UserIndex=34, UserName=**, Us
erIP=10.134.27.157, UserChannel=VTY0)
#Nov 10 2010 10:48:48 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGOUT:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.4 A user logout.
(UserIndex=34, UserName=**,
UserIP=10.134.27.157, UserChannel=VTY0)
#Nov 10 2010 10:38:23 HUAWEI LINE/5/VTYUSERLOGIN:OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.207.2.2 A user login.
(UserIndex=34, UserName=**, Us
erIP=10.134.27.157, UserChannel=VTY0)

Table 3-48 Description of the display trapbuffer command output

Item Description

Trapping buffer configuration and Whether the device is enabled to

contents output traps to the trap buffer:
● enabled
● disabled
To enable the device to output traps
to the trap buffer, run the 3.3.33
info-center trapbuffer command.

Allowed max buffer size Maximum size of the trap buffer.

Actual buffer size Actual size of the trap buffer.

To set the size of the trap buffer, run
the 3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer
size command.

Channel number Number of the channel used to send

traps to the trap buffer.
To set the channel number, run the
3.3.14 info-center channel
command.

Channel name Name of the channel used to send

traps to the trap buffer.
To set the channel name, run the
3.3.15 info-center channel name
command.

Dropped messages Number of dropped messages.

Overwritten messages Number of overwritten messages.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 767

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Current messages Number of current messages.

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer
3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer size
3.3.37 reset trapbuffer

3.3.14 info-center channel

Function
The info-center channel command configures channels for outputting
information in various directions.

The undo info-center channel command restores the default settings.

By default, the system outputs information in various directions through channels

listed in the table below.

Table 3-49 Default association between the channel number, channel name, and
output direction of information channels

Channel Number Channel Name Output Direction

0 console Console

1 monitor User terminal

2 loghost Log host

3 trapbuffer Trap buffer

4 logbuffer Log buffer

5 snmpagent SNMP agent

6 channel6 Unspecified

7 channel7 Unspecified

8 channel8 Unspecified

9 channel9 Log file

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 768

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
info-center { console | logbuffer | logfile | monitor | snmp | trapbuffer }
channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center { { console | monitor | snmp | logfile } channel | { logbuffer |

trapbuffer } channel [ channel-number | channel-name ] }

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

console Specifies the channel used to output -
information to the console.
logbuffer Specifies the channel used to output -
information to the log buffer.
logfile Specifies the channel used to output -
information to the log file.
monitor Specifies the channel used to output -
information to the user terminal.
snmp Specifies the channel used to output -
information to the SNMP agent.
trapbuffer Specifies the channel used to output -
information to the trap buffer.
channel- Specifies the channel number. The value is an integer
number ranging from 0 to 9.
channel-name Specifies the name of a channel, The value is a string of
which can be the default channel 1 to 30 case-insensitive
name or a user-defined name. characters. The value
consists of letters or
numbers and must start
with a letter.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the info-center channel command in the following scenarios: The
same information is sent to different directions. For example, the log file and log
host record the same content or the trap buffer and the SNMP agent record the
same content.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 769

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

The channels should not have the same name.

For details on how to configure a channel for outputting information to a log host, see
3.3.22 info-center loghost.
The info-center channel command takes effect only after the information center function
has been enabled using the info-center enable command.

Example
# Configure the channel used to output information to a console.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center console channel console

# Configure the channel used to output information to the log buffer.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center logbuffer channel logbuffer

# Configure the channel used to output information to the user terminal.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center monitor channel monitor

# Configure the channel used to output information to an SNMP agent.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center snmp channel 5

# Configure the channel used to output information to the trap buffer.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center trapbuffer channel trapbuffer

Related Topics
3.3.3 display channel
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.22 info-center loghost
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer

3.3.15 info-center channel name

Function
The info-center channel name command names a channel with a specified
number.

The undo info-center channel command restores the default channel name.

The following lists default channel names.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 770

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-50 Default channel names

Channel Number Default Channel Name

0 console

1 monitor

2 loghost

3 trapbuffer

4 logbuffer

5 snmpagent

6 channel6

7 channel7

8 channel8

9 channel9

Format
info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
undo info-center channel channel-number

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
channel- Specifies the number The value is an integer that ranges from
number of a channel. 0 to 9. That is, the system has 10
channels.
channel-name Specifies the name of The value is a string of 1 to 30 case-
a channel. insensitive characters. The value consists
of letters or numbers and must start with
a letter.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can rename channels, which facilitates memorization and usage.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 771

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions
Channel names must be unique. It is recommended that channel names represent
channel functions.

Example
# Name channel 0 execconsole.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center channel 0 name execconsole

Related Topics
3.3.3 display channel
3.3.5 display info-center

3.3.16 info-center enable

Function
The info-center enable command enables the information center.
The undo info-center enable command disables the information center.
The info-center disable command disables the information center.
By default, the information center is enabled.

Format
info-center enable
undo info-center enable
info-center disable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
During device running, the information center records device operation. The
system outputs system information to destinations such as the log host and the
console only after the information center is enabled. Network administrators can
store and query output information to monitor device running and locate faults.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 772

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions

After the undo info-center enable or info-center disable command is executed,

only logfile and logbuffer record logs, the other channel no longer records.

Follow-up Procedure

Configure a rule for outputting information to the terminal or remote server.

Example
# Enable the information center.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center enable
Info: Information center is enabled.

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.10 display logbuffer
3.3.13 display trapbuffer
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer

3.3.17 info-center filter-id

Function
The info-center filter-id command configures the Switch to filter a specified log
or trap.

The undo info-center filter-id command disables the Switch from filtering a
specified log or trap.

By default, no log or trap is filtered.

Format
info-center filter-id { id | bymodule-alias modname alias } &<1-50>

info-center filter-id { id | bymodule-alias modname alias } [ bytime interval |

bynumber number ]

undo info-center filter-id all

undo info-center filter-id { id | bymodule-alias modname alias } &<1-50>

undo info-center filter-id { id | bymodule-alias modname alias } [ bytime

interval | bynumber number ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 773

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
id Specifies the ID of the log or trap The value is in hexadecimal
to be filtered. notation and contains 8
NOTE digits. The value contains
This parameter indicates the ID of a 0-9, a-f, and A-F.
log. If this parameter fails to be
configured, the log specified by this
ID does not exist.

bymodule- Specifies the module name and Enumerated type. Set the
alias modname alias name corresponding to the value according to the
alias log or trap to be filtered. device configuration.

all Filters all logs or traps. -

bytime interval Specifies the interval at which The value is an integer that
logs are sent. ranges from 1 to 86400, in
seconds.
bynumber Specifies the number of logs that The value is an integer that
number are discarded between two ranges from 1 to 1000.
received logs.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

If some logs or traps are unnecessary, configure the Switch not to output the logs
and traps. When the filtering function is enabled, the information center does not
send the traps with a specified ID that satisfy the filtering condition to any
channel. As a result, the trap buffer, console, terminal, or SNMP agent cannot
receive the traps with the specified ID.

Precautions

● Currently, the Switch can filter traps with a maximum of 50 IDs. If there are
more than 50 log IDs, the system displays a message indicating that the
filtering table is full. To configure the filtering function, run the undo info-
center filter-id { id | bymodule-alias modname alias } &<1-50> [ bytime
interval | bynumber number ], or the undo info-center filter-id all
command to delete original IDs and reconfigure the log ID.
● When both the bytime interval and bynumber number parameters are not
specified, all the logs with the specified ID will be discarded.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 774

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● When the bytime interval parameter is specified, the interval for sending two
allowed logs must be at least the configured time.
● When the bynumber number parameter is specified, the configured number
of logs between two allowed logs must be discarded.
● To add multiple IDs at a time, use a space to separate every two IDs. The
result of adding each ID is displayed.
● You cannot add the same ID or alias name repeatedly.
● When you add an unregistered or nonexistent ID or alias name, the system
displays a message indicating that the system fails to filter the trap with the
specified ID or alias name.
● During a software upgrade, if the information filtering function is configured
in the old version, but the new version does not support the specified log
module and alias, the information filtering configuration of the specified log
module and alias will be automatically cleared after the upgrade.
● You are advised to use the module name and alias to filter specified log
information. The id parameter can be obtained by running the display info-
center register-info [ module module-name ] log command in the
diagnostic view, and the modname and alias parameters can be obtained
through the command association function.

Example
# Filter information by module names and alias names.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center filter-id bymodule-alias CMD CMD_PRI_REARRG

# Cancel filtering for all logs.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo info-center filter-id all

# Filter the log with the ID of 40394017.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center filter-id 40394017

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.6 display info-center filter-id

3.3.18 info-center local log-counter disable

Function
The info-center local log-counter disable command disables the local log from
carrying the sequence number.
The undo info-center local log-counter disable command enables the local log
to carry the sequence number.
By default, the local log carries the sequence number.

Format
info-center local log-counter disable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 775

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo info-center local log-counter disable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

If the device keeps running for a long time, a large number of logs may be
generated.

● You can run the info-center local log-counter disable command to disable
logs sent to the log buffer, log file, console, or terminal from carrying the
sequence number, and run the undo info-centerlocal log-counter disable
command to enable these logs to carry the sequence number.
● You can run the undo info-center local log-counter disable command to
enable logs to carry the incremental sequence number, checking whether all
logs have been sent to the log buffer, log file, console, or terminal.
NOTE

● Logs sent to the log file, console, or terminalconsole or terminal are counted separately
and therefore carry different sequence numbers in ascending order. The sequence
number of the earliest log is 0.
● Logs sent to the log buffer carry sequence numbers in descending order. The sequence
number of the latest log is 0.

Example
# Disable local logs from carrying the sequence number.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center local log-counter disable

# Enable local logs to carry the sequence number.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo info-center local log-counter disable

3.3.19 info-center logbuffer

Function
The info-center logbuffer command enables the Switch to send logs to the log
buffer.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 776

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The undo info-center logbuffer command disables the Switch from sending logs
to the log buffer.
By default, the Switch is enabled to send logs to the log buffer.

Format
info-center logbuffer
undo info-center logbuffer

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
To log in to a device and check the faults or problems during operation, run the
info-center logbuffer command to enable the function to output logs to the log
buffer. Then, you can view log information in the log buffer.
By configuring the size of the log buffer using the info-center logbuffer size
buffersize command, you can view information about specified logs.
By configuring the number or name of a channel through which a device sends
logs to the log buffer using the info-center logbuffer channel { channel-number
| channel-name } command, you can send log information through a specified
channel to the log buffer.

Example
# Enable the Switch to send logs to the log buffer.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center logbuffer

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.10 display logbuffer
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size
3.3.36 reset logbuffer

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 777

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.3.20 info-center logbuffer size

Function
The info-center logbuffer size command sets the maximum number of logs in
the log buffer.
The undo info-center logbuffer size command restores the default maximum
number of logs in the log buffer.
By default, a log buffer can store a maximum of 512 logs.

Format
info-center logbuffer size logbuffer-size
undo info-center logbuffer size [ logbuffer-size ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
logbuffer-size Specifies the maximum The value is an integer that ranges
number of logs in the log from 0 to 1024. If logbuffer-size is 0,
buffer. logs are not displayed.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If the number of logs in the log buffer reaches the maximum value, new logs will
replace the existing logs that were placed earlier in the log buffer until all the new
logs are stored.
Precautions
When you run the info-center logbuffer size command multiple times, only the
latest configuration takes effect.
The info-center logbuffer size command takes effect only after the information
center function has been enabled using the info-center enable command.

Example
# Set the maximum number of logs in the log buffer to 50.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center logbuffer size 50

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 778

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.10 display logbuffer
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.36 reset logbuffer

3.3.21 info-center logfile size

Function
The info-center logfile size command sets the log file size.
The undo info-center logfile size command restores the default log file size.
By default, the log file size is 8 MB.

Format
info-center logfile size size
undo info-center logfile size

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
size Specifies the log file The value is an integer that is 4, 8, 16, or
size. 32, in MB. The default value is 8 MB.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To configure the Switch to export information to a log file, run the info-center
logfile size command to set the log file size.
Precautions
If you configure the device to export information to a log file, exported
information is saved in the log.log or log.dblg file. When the log.log or log.dblg
file exceeds the specified size, the system compresses the file in to a zip package
and names the compressed file date time.log.zip or date time.dblg.zip.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 779

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The info-center logfile size command takes effect only after the information
center function has been enabled using the info-center enable command.

Example
# Set the log file size to 32 MB.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center logfile size 32

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.11 display logfile
3.3.38 save logfile

3.3.22 info-center loghost

Function
The info-center loghost command configures the device to output information to
a log host.

The undo info-center loghost command disables the device from outputting
information to a log host.

By default, no information is output to the log host.

Format
info-center loghost ip-address [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } |
facility local-number | language language-name | { vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name | public-net } | local-time | log-counter { disable | enable } | port port |
{ source-ip source-ip-address } | transport { udp | tcp ssl-policy policy-name } ] *

info-center loghost ipv6 ipv6-address [ channel { channel-number | channel-

name } | facility local-number | language language-name | local-time | log-
counter { disable | enable } | port port | transport { udp | tcp ssl-policy policy-
name } ] *

undo info-center loghost ip-address [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

undo info-center loghost ipv6 ipv6-address

info-center loghost domain domain-name [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

[ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | facility local-number | language
language-name | log-counter { disable | enable } | local-time | port port |
transport { udp | tcp ssl-policy policy-name } ] *

undo info-center loghost domain domain-name [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-

name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 780

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

Only the S6720EI, S6720S-EI, S5720HI, S5720EI, S6720SI, S6720S-SI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI,
S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5720LI, S5720S-LI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S2720EI, S1720X-E, S1720GW-E,
S1720GWR-E, S1720X, S1720GW, S1720GWR support the vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
parameter.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Specifies the IPv4 address of the The value is in dotted
log host. decimal notation.
channel Specifies the channel used to The value of channel-
{ channel- send information to a log host. number is an integer that
number | ● channel-number: specifies the ranges from 0 to 9.
channel-name } number of a channel.
The value of channel-
● channel-name: specifies the name is a string of 1 to 30
name of a channel. The name case-insensitive characters.
can be the default or user- The value consists of
defined channel name. letters or numbers and
must start with a letter.

facility local- Specifies the tool used by the log The value ranges from
number host to record information. local0 to local7. The
default value is local7.
language Displays the language in which Currently, the value can
language-name logs are recorded. only be English.

vpn-instance VPN instance. The value must be an

vpn-instance- existing VPN instance
name name.
public-net Indicates that the log host is -
connected in the public network.
local-time Indicates the local time when -
logs are sent to the log host.
log-counter Disables or enables the log -
{ disable | counter function.
enable }
port port Specifies the port number of a The value is an integer
log host. that ranges from 1 to
65535
source-ip source- Specifies the source IP address The value is in dotted
ip-address used to send information to the decimal notation.
log host.
transport Indicates the information -
transport mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 781

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

udp Indicates the UDP transport -
mode.
NOTE
The default transport mode is UDP if
no transport mode is specified.

tcp Indicates the TCP transport -

mode.
NOTE
The default transport mode is UDP if
no transport mode is specified.

ssl-policy policy- Specifies a Secure Sockets Layer The value is a string of 1

name (SSL) policy in the TCP transport to 23 case-insensitive
mode. characters without spaces.

This parameter is recommended

to improve log transmission
security.

ipv6 ipv6-address Specifies the IPv6 address of the The value is a 32-digit
log host. hexadecimal number.
domain domain- Specifies a DNS domain name of The value is a string of 1
name a log host. to 255 case-sensitive
characters, spaces not
supported.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To query information generated on the Switch deployed remotely, configure the
Switch to export information to a log host so that you can view device information
on the log host. Run the info-center loghost command to configure the Switch to
export information to a log host.
To configure the Switch to output information to different log hosts using
different channels, specify the channels used to send information to the log hosts.
For example, you can configure the Switch to output information to log hosts at
192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 using channels 7 and 8 respectively.
Precautions
The Switch can output information to eight log hosts including IPv4 and IPv6
hosts to implement backup among log hosts.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 782

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

To transfer logs to the log hosts using TCP and encrypt logs using SSL, create an
SSL policy first.
If the set net-manager vpn-instance command is run to configure the NMS to
manage network elements through a VPN instance, either of the following
situations occurs.
● If vpn-instance is configured, the system accesses the log host in the VPN
instance.
● If public-net is configured, the system accesses the log host on the public
network.
If the transport tcp ssl-policy policy-name parameters are specified to enable
logs to be transmitted in TCP mode through SSL encryption, perform the following
operations:
● Run the ssl-policy policy-name command to configure an SSL policy and
enter the SSL policy view.
● Run the trusted-ca load command to load trusted-CA files (cacert and
rootcert files) of the SSL client.
● On the log server, load trusted-CA files (serverkey and servercert files) of the
SSL server.
● Run the display tcp status command to check that the TC connection status
of port 6514 is Established.

Example
# Configure a device to use channel 6 to output information to the log host at
10.1.1.1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost 10.1.1.1 channel channel6

# Configure the source IP address used to send information to the log host is
Loopback1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost source LoopBack1

# Configure the Switch to send information to the log host at FC00:0:0:3001::1/64.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost ipv6 fc00:0:0:3001::1

# Configure the Switch to send information to the host with the IPv4 address
192.168.2.2 and VPN instance name vpn1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost 192.168.2.2 vpn-instance vpn1

# Configure a device to send information to a log host with the domain name set
to www.test.com.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost domain www.test.com

# Configure a device to send information to the log host at 192.168.2.2 in TCP

mode, using the SSL policy huawei123 that has been created in the system.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ssl policy huawei123
[HUAWEI-ssl-policy-ftps_der] trusted-ca load pem-ca 1_cacert_pem_rsa.pem

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 783

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

[HUAWEI-ssl-policy-ftps_der] trusted-ca load pem-ca 1_rootcert_pem_rsa.pem

[HUAWEI-ssl-policy-ftps_der] quit

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.23 info-center loghost source

3.3.23 info-center loghost source

Function
The info-center loghost source command configures the source interface used by
the Switch to send information to a log host.

The undo info-center loghost source command restores the default source
interface used by the Switch to send information to a log host.

By default, the source interface for a device to send logs to a log host is the actual
interface that sends the logs.

Format
info-center loghost source interface-type interface-number

undo info-center loghost source

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface-type interface- Specifies the type and number of an -
number interface.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

If multiple devices send log messages to the same log host, you can identify the
devices by setting different source interfaces so as to index the received log
messages.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 784

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The source interface specified in the info-center loghost source command for a
device to send logs to a log host is not necessarily the actual interface that sends
the logs, but the IP address of the specified source interface is carried in logs.

Prerequisites

There is a reachable route between the source interface and the log host.

Example
# Specify Loopback0 IP address as the source interface address to send
information to a log host.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface loopback 0
[HUAWEI-LoopBack0] ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
[HUAWEI-LoopBack0] quit
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost source loopback 0

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.22 info-center loghost

3.3.24 info-center loghost source-port

Function
The info-center loghost source-port command configures a source interface
through which the device sends information to the log host.

The undo info-center loghost source-port command restores the default source
interface through which the device sends information to the log host.

By default, the source interface number is 38514.

Format
info-center loghost source-port source-port

undo info-center loghost source-port

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

source-port Specifies the number of the source The value is an integer
interface through which the device sends ranging from 1025 to
information to the log host. 65535.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 785

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
If the device uses the default source interface to send information to the log host,
attackers may keep accessing this interface. As a result, the log host cannot send
information. To improve system security, you can run the info-center loghost
source-port source-port command to change the source interface through which
the device sends information to the log host so that attackers cannot obtain the
new source interface.

Example
# Change the number of the source interface through which the device sends
information to the log host to 1026.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center loghost source-port 1026

3.3.25 info-center max-logfile-number

Function
The info-center max-logfile-number command sets the maximum number of log
files to be saved.

The undo info-center max-logfile-number command restores the default

maximum number of log files to be saved.

By default, a maximum of 200 log files can be saved.

Format
info-center max-logfile-number filenumbers

undo info-center max-logfile-number

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
filenumbers Specifies the maximum number of The value is an integer that
log files that can be saved. ranges from 3 to 500.

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 786

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If too many log files are saved on the Switch, many disk space resources are
occupied. To view log files generated recently, run the info-center max-logfile-
number command to set the maximum number of log files that can be saved.
Precautions
If the number of log files generated on the Switch exceeds the limit, the system
deletes the oldest log file so that the number of log files is not larger than the
maximum value.

NOTICE
If the number of saved log files is greater than the default value, more system
resources are consumed. The default value is recommended. Excess log files can
be deleted manually or automatically. When the system deletes excess log files,
high CPU usage may last for a short period.

Example
# Set the maximum number of log files to be saved to 100.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center max-logfile-number 100

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.21 info-center logfile size
3.3.11 display logfile
3.3.38 save logfile

3.3.26 info-center rate-limit except

Function
The info-center rate-limit except command cancels the log processing rate limit
for logs.
The undo info-center rate-limit except command deletes the preceding
configuration.

Format
info-center rate-limit except { byinfoid infoID | bymodule-alias modname
alias }

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 787

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo info-center rate-limit except { byinfoid infoID | bymodule-alias modname

alias }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
byinfoid infoID Specifies the log ID in The value is a 32-digit hexadecimal
hexadecimal notation. number in the format XXXXXXXX. It
ranges from 0 to ffffffff.

bymodule-alias Specifies the log The value is a string of 1 to 24 case-

modname module name. insensitive characters without spaces.
alias Specifies the log The value is a string of 1 to 64 case-
mnemonic name. insensitive characters without spaces.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When too many logs will never be generated under a specified ID, you can run the
info-center rate-limit except command to avoid the impact of the suppression of
the log processing rate. After this command is run, the configured log processing
rate limit will not be effective for logs with the specified ID or module name.

During a software upgrade, if the function that prevents logs from being
suppressed by the information center is configured in the old version, but the new
version does not support the specified log module and alias, the function
configuration of the specified log module and alias will be automatically cleared
after the upgrade.

Example
# Prevent logs specified by the module name and mnemonic from being
suppressed by the information center.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit except bymodule-alias AAA AUTHEN_ERR_EVENT

# Prevent logs specified by the log ID from being suppressed by the information
center.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit except byinfoid ff011015

# Prevent logs with a specified log ID from being suppressed by the information
center.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo info-center rate-limit except bymodule-alias AAA AUTHEN_ERR_EVENT

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 788

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.3.8 display info-center rate-limit threshold
3.3.7 display info-center rate-limit record

3.3.27 info-center rate-limit global-threshold

Function
The info-center rate-limit global-threshold command sets the total number of
logs that the information center can process every second.

The undo info-center rate-limit global-threshold command restores the default

value.

By default, the information center processes a maximum of 400 logs in every

second.

Format
info-center rate-limit global-threshold value

undo info-center rate-limit global-threshold

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
value Specifies the maximum number of The value is an integer that
logs that the information center can ranges from 100 to 1000.
process every second.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the info-center rate-limit global-threshold command to adjust the
processing capability of the information center. If the number of logs to be
processed exceeds the processing capability of the information center, the extra
logs are discarded.

NOTE

● If the threshold is too low, some logs may be discarded.

● If the threshold is too high, the information center cannot identify the log ID under
which too many logs are generated. The number of logs to be processed depends on the
current processing capacity of the information center.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 789

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Set the number of logs that the information center can process every second to
300.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit global-threshold 300

Related Topics
3.3.8 display info-center rate-limit threshold
3.3.7 display info-center rate-limit record

3.3.28 info-center rate-limit monitor-period

Function
The info-center rate-limit monitor-period command sets the monitoring period
for the information center to suppress the log processing rate.
The undo info-center rate-limit monitor-period command restores the default
value.
By default, the monitoring period is 3 seconds.

Format
info-center rate-limit monitor-period value
undo info-center rate-limit monitor-period

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
value Specifies the monitoring period for The value is an integer
the information center to suppress ranging from 1 to 60, in
the log processing rate. seconds.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
In the monitoring period specified by value, if the rate of sending a single log
every second exceeds the threshold configured using the info-center rate-limit
threshold command, the information center will limit the log processing rate. In
this situation, the information center discards logs exceeding the threshold.
In the monitoring period that is five times value, if the number of a single type of
logs that are sent every second is smaller than the threshold configured using the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 790

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

info-center rate-limit threshold command, the information center does not limit
the log processing rate.

Example
# Set the monitoring period for the information center to suppress the log
processing rate to 5 seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit monitor-period 5

Related Topics
3.3.8 display info-center rate-limit threshold
3.3.7 display info-center rate-limit record
3.3.29 info-center rate-limit threshold

3.3.29 info-center rate-limit threshold

Function
The info-center rate-limit threshold command sets the maximum number of
logs with the same log ID that the information center can process every second.

The undo info-center rate-limit threshold command restores the default setting.

By default, the information center processes a maximum of 30 logs with the same
log ID in every second.

Format
info-center rate-limit threshold value [ byinfoid infoID | bymodule-alias
modname alias ]
undo info-center rate-limit threshold [ value ] [ byinfoid infoID | bymodule-
alias modname alias ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
value Specifies the maximum The value is an integer that ranges
number of logs with the from 1 to 500.
same log ID that the
information center can
process every second.
byinfoid infoID Specifies the log ID. The value is a 32-digit
hexadecimal number in the format
XXXXXXXX. It ranges from 0 to
ffffffff.
bymodule- Specifies the log of the The value is a string of 1 to 24
alias modname module name. case-insensitive characters without
spaces.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 791

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

alias Specifies the log of the The value is a string of 1 to 64
mnemonic name. case-insensitive characters without
spaces.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the info-center rate-limit threshold command to set the maximum
number of logs with the same log ID that the information center can process
every second. The information center monitors the number of logs that are
generated every second under the same log ID. When the number of logs that are
generated every second under the same log ID exceeds the threshold in the
monitoring period, the information center decides that too many logs are
generated and suppresses its log processing rate by processing only the
conforming traffic (logs within the threshold) and discarding the non-conforming
traffic (logs exceeding the threshold). When the number of logs that are
generated every second under the same log ID falls below the threshold and
remains below the threshold for five monitoring periods, the information center
removes the suppression.
By default, the information center processes a maximum of 30 logs with the same
log ID in every second. In certain application scenarios, by default, the information
center needs to process more than 50 logs with the same log ID in every second.
You can set thresholds for logs with different log IDs. Generally, the default
threshold is recommended.
● If the threshold is too low, some logs may be discarded.
● If the threshold is too high, the information center cannot identify the log ID
under which too many logs are generated.
NOTE

● If the threshold value1 specified by the parameter byinfoid infoID or bymodule-alias

modname alias differs from the threshold value0 specified globally, value1 takes effect.
● During a software upgrade, if the threshold is configured in the old version, but the new
version does not support the specified log module and alias, the threshold configuration
of the specified log module and alias will be automatically cleared after the upgrade.

Example
# Set the maximum number of logs that the information center can process every
second to 60.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit threshold 60

# Set the maximum number of logs identified by the same module name and
mnemonic that the information center can process every second to 30.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 792

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit threshold 30 bymodule-alias AAA AUTHEN_ERR_EVENT

# Set the maximum number of logs with the same log ID that the information
center can process every second to 20.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center rate-limit threshold 20 byinfoid ff011015

# Restore the maximum number of logs that the information center can process
every second to the default value.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo info-center rate-limit threshold

# Cancel the restriction on the maximum number of logs with a specified log ID
that the information center can process every second.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo info-center rate-limit threshold bymodule-alias AAA AUTHEN_ERR_EVENT

Related Topics
3.3.8 display info-center rate-limit threshold
3.3.7 display info-center rate-limit record

3.3.30 info-center source channel

Function
The info-center source channel command configures a rule for outputting
information to a channel.

The undo info-center source channel command deletes the rules for outputting
information to a channel.

The following lists the default rule for outputting information to a channel.

Table 3-51 Default rule for outputting information to a channel

Output Module Log Trap Debugging

Channe Enable Message
l d to
Output Status Lowest Status Lowest Status Lowest
Inform Output Output Output
ation Severit Severit Severit
y y y

0 default on warnin on debuggi on debuggi

(consol g ng ng
e)

1 default on warnin on debuggi on debuggi

(remote g ng ng
termina
l)

2 (log default on informa on debuggi off debuggi

host) tional ng ng

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 793

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Output Module Log Trap Debugging

Channe Enable Message
l d to
Output Status Lowest Status Lowest Status Lowest
Inform Output Output Output
ation Severit Severit Severit
y y y

3 (trap default off informa on debuggi off debuggi

buffer) tional ng ng

4 (log default on warnin off debuggi off debuggi

buffer) g ng ng

5 default off debuggi on debuggi off debuggi

(SNMP ng ng ng
agent)

6 default on debuggi on debuggi off debuggi

(chann ng ng ng
el 6)

7 default on debuggi on debuggi off debuggi

(chann ng ng ng
el 7)

8 default on debuggi on debuggi off debuggi

(chann ng ng ng
el 8)

9 default on debuggi on debuggi off debuggi

(chann ng ng ng
el 9)

Format
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ log { state { off | on } | level severity } * | trap { state { off |
on } | level severity } * | debug { state { off | on } | level severity } * ] *

undo info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |

channel-name }

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

module-name Specifies the module Enumerated type. The value
name. depends on the registered
module.
default Indicates the default -
module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 794

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

channel-number Specifies the number of a The value is an integer that
channel. ranges from 0 to 9.
channel-name Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1 to 30
channel. case-insensitive characters. The
value consists of letters or
numbers and must start with a
letter.
log { state { off | Specifies the log status. -
on } } ● off: Logs are not sent.
● on: Logs are sent.
NOTE
This field does not take
effect for diagnostic logs.

log { level Specifies the lowest Logs are classified into eight
severity } severity of output logs. severities. The following
NOTE severities are listed in
This field does not take descending order of priority:
effect for diagnostic logs.
● emergencies
● alert
● critical
● error
● warning
● notification
● informational
● debugging

trap { state { off | Specifies the trap status: -

on } } ● off: Traps are not sent.
● on: Traps are sent.
trap { level Specifies the lowest Logs are classified into eight
severity } severity of output traps. severities. The following
severities are listed in
descending order of priority:
● emergencies
● alert
● critical
● error
● warning
● notification
● informational
● debugging

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 795

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

debug { state Specifies the debugging -
{ off | on } } message status.
● off: Debugging
messages are not sent.
● on: Debugging
messages are sent.
debug { level Specifies the lowest Logs are classified into eight
severity } severity of output severities. The following
debugging messages. severities are listed in
descending order of priority:
● emergencies
● alert
● critical
● error
● warning
● notification
● informational
● debugging

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To collect and query information generated on the Switch, define severities for
various type of information that is output to different channels. You can run the
info-center source channel command to configure a rule for outputting
information to a channel.

The following lists information severities.

Table 3-52 Information severities

Value Severity Description

0 emergencies A fault causes the device to fail to run normally

unless it is restarted. For example, the device is
restarted because of program exceptions or a
memory error is detected.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 796

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Value Severity Description

1 alert A fault needs to be rectified immediately. For

example, memory usage of the system reaches the
upper limit.

2 critical A fault needs to be analyzed and processed. For

example, the memory usage falls below the lower
threshold; temperature falls below the alarm
threshold; BFD detects that a device is unreachable
or detects locally generated error messages.

3 error An improper operation is performed or exceptions

occur during service processing. The fault does not
affect services but needs to be analyzed. For
example, users enter incorrect commands or
passwords; error protocol packets are received from
other devices.

4 warning Some events or operations may affect device

running or cause service processing faults, which
requires full attention. For example, a routing
process is disabled; BFD detects packet loss; error
protocol packets are detected.

5 notification A key operation is performed to keep the device

running normally. For example, the shutdown
command is run; a neighbor is discovered; protocol
status changes.

6 informationa A normal operation is performed. For example, a

l display command is run.

7 debugging A normal operation is performed, which requires no

attention.

Precautions
Each information channel has a default record with the module name default.
The default settings for logs, traps, and debugging messages in different channels
may differ.
If a module generates a large number of logs, traps, or debugging messages in a
short time, use the following methods to suppress this information:
● Specify level severity to adjust the channel level. Information with lower
severity will be filtered.
● Specify state off to disable information sent by a specified module.

NOTICE
After the lowest severity of output information is specified, information lower than
the severity will be filtered.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 797

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Configure the device to send logs higher than or equal to warning of the CFM
module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center source CFM channel snmpagent log level warning

Related Topics
3.3.3 display channel
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.19 info-center logbuffer
3.3.22 info-center loghost
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer
3.3.41 terminal debugging
3.3.43 terminal logging
3.3.44 terminal monitor
3.3.45 terminal trapping

3.3.31 info-center statistic-suppress enable

Function
The info-center statistic-suppress enable command enables suppression of
statistics about consecutive repeated logs.
The undo info-center statistic-suppress enable command disables suppression
of statistics about consecutive repeated logs.
The info-center statistic-suppress disable command disables suppression of
statistics about consecutive repeated logs.
By default, suppression of statistics about consecutive repeated logs is enabled.

Format
info-center statistic-suppress enable
undo info-center statistic-suppress enable
info-center statistic-suppress disable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 798

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In the system, service modules generate logs and control the volume of generated
logs. The information center processes the received logs.
A large number of repeated logs are generated in a short time in some scenarios,
for example, when ARP and VRRP are enabled. This wastes both the storage space
and CPU resources. Generally, users do not want to view the repeated logs. You
can run the info-center statistic-suppress enable command to suppress statistics
on consecutive repeated logs so that the system can still record other logs.
NOTE
Logs that are generated consecutively and with the identical log ID and parameters can be
regarded as repeatedly generated logs.

Precautions
Statistics about repeatedly generated logs are first output at the 30th seconds
from the time the first log is output, and then statistics about repeatedly
generated logs are output at the 120th seconds. After being output two times,
statistics about repeatedly generated logs are output every 600 seconds.
By default, once receiving a log, the information center outputs the log. If the
information center receives repeatedly generated logs within a period, it outputs
the number of these logs and will output logs only when it receives a new log (a
log with a different log ID). For example, a module sends logs to the information
center in the sequence of A1(T1) A2(T2) A3(T2) B1(T3) B2(T4) B3(T4) C1(T5)
C2(T6) A4(T7) B4(T8) B5(T8) B5(T8) B7(T9) A5(T9) B8(T10) D1(T11) A6(T11)
A7(T12) A8(T12) A9(T13) A10(T14) A11(T15) A12(T16) A13(T17) A14(T18)
B9(T18). A1 to A14 are the same; B1 to B9 are the same; C1, C2 and D1 are
different from others; T1 to T18 are sequence numbers. The log information
output by the information center is as follows:
T1:A1
T3(1): last message repeated 2 times
T3:B1
T5: last message repeated 2 times
T5:C1
T6:C2
T7:A4
T8:B4
T9(1): last message repeated 3 times
T9:A5
T10:B8
T11:D1
T11:A6
T13(2): last message repeated 3 times
T18(2): last message repeated 5 times
T18:B9

Logs of the service module received by the information center show that:
● Statistics about repeatedly generated logs are output when either of the
following conditions is met:
– The next log is a different log, as shown in (1).

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 799

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

– The time period (every 30 seconds, 120 seconds, and 600 seconds) for
outputting log statistics expires, as shown in (2).
● Each time the statistics are output, the service module clears the count and
starts counting again. For example, during the period from T11 to T18, log A
is generated 9 times.
● The information center outputs logs in the same sequence the logs are
generated, making the trace of information and scenario easy.

NOTE
Logs with the sequence being A B A B A B A B are alternate logs; therefore, the info-center
statistic-suppress enable command is unable to suppression the statistics about these
logs.

Example
# Disable suppression of statistics about consecutive repeated logs.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] undo info-center statistic-suppress enable

3.3.32 info-center timestamp

Function
The info-center timestamp command sets the timestamp format of logs, traps,
and debugging messages.

The undo info-center timestamp command restores the default timestamp

format of logs, traps, and debugging messages.

By default, the date timestamp is used in traps, logs and debugging messages.
Debugging messages are accurate to milliseconds, and traps and logs are accurate
to seconds.

Format
info-center timestamp { debugging | log | trap } { { date | format-date | short-
date } [ precision-time { second | tenth-second | millisecond } ] | boot }
[ without-timezone ]

undo info-center timestamp { debugging | trap | log }

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

debugging Indicates debugging messages. -
log Indicates logs. -
trap Indicates traps. -

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 800

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

boot Indicates that the timestamp is expressed in the -
format of relative time, a period of time since the start
of the system. The format is xxxxxx.yyyyyy. xxxxxx is
the higher order 32 bits of the milliseconds elapsed
since the start of the system; yyyyyy is the lower order
32 bits of the milliseconds elapsed since the start of
the system.
date Specifies the current date and time. It is expressed in -
mm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss format.
short-date Indicates the short date. This timestamp differs from -
date is that the year is not displayed.
format-date Indicates that the timestamp is expressed in YYYY- -
MM-DD hh:mm:ss format.
precision-time Specifies the precision. -
second Indicates that the precision is accurate to seconds. -
tenth-second Indicates that the precision is accurate to 0.1 second. -
millisecond Indicates that the precision is accurate to milliseconds. -
without- Specifies a timestamp to filter timezone information. -
timezone NOTE
If without-timezone is configured for logs, traps, or debug
information, the log, trap, or debugging information sent to
the log host does not carry time zone or DST information.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The info-center timestamp command sets the timestamp format of logs, traps,
and debugging messages.

The following describes the timestamp in date format.

Table 3-53 Description of fields of the timestamp in date format

Field Description Value

mm Month The value can be Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun,
Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, or Dec.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 801

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Field Description Value

dd Date 1-31. If the date is smaller than 10, add a space

in front of the date, For example, " 7".

yyyy Year 4 digits

hh:mm:ss Local time hh ranges from 00 to 23, and mm or ss ranges

from 00 to 59.

When the precision of the timestamp is accurate to 0.1 second or milliseconds, the
system adds identifiers to the logs generated at the same time based on the
sequence.

Prerequisites

The information center has been enabled by using the 3.3.16 info-center enable
command.

Example
# Set the timestamp format of traps to boot.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center timestamp trap boot

# Set the timestamp precision of logs, traps, and debugging messages.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center timestamp log date precision-time millisecond
[HUAWEI] info-center timestamp debugging date precision-time tenth-second
[HUAWEI] info-center timestamp trap date precision-time millisecond

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center

3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer

Function
The info-center trapbuffer command enables the Switch to send traps to the trap
buffer.

The undo info-center trapbuffer command disables the Switch from sending
traps to the trap buffer.

By default, the Switch is enabled to send traps to the trap buffer.

Format
info-center trapbuffer

undo info-center trapbuffer

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 802

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
To view traps in the trap buffer, run the info-center trapbuffer command to
enable the Switch to send traps to the trap buffer.
The info-center trapbuffer command takes effect only after the information
center function has been enabled using the info-center enable command.

Example
# Enable the Switch to send traps to the trap buffer.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center trapbuffer

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.13 display trapbuffer
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer size
3.3.37 reset trapbuffer

3.3.34 info-center trapbuffer size

Function
The info-center trapbuffer size command sets the maximum number of traps in
the trap buffer.
The undo info-center trapbuffer size command restores the default maximum
number of traps in the trap buffer.
By default, a trap buffer allows a maximum of 256 traps.

Format
info-center trapbuffer size trapbuffer-size
undo info-center trapbuffer size [ trapbuffer-size ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 803

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
trapbuffer-size Specifies the maximum The value is an integer that ranges
number of traps in the from 0 to 1024. If trapbuffer-size is 0,
trap buffer. traps are not displayed.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The info-center trapbuffer size command sets the maximum number of traps in
the trap buffer.

Prerequisites

The Switch has been enabled to output traps to the trap buffer by using the 3.3.33
info-center trapbuffer command.

Precautions

When you run the info-center trapbuffer size command multiple times, only the
latest configuration takes effect.

If a small value of trapbuffer-size is used, some traps may be not displayed. If a

large value of trapbuffer-size is used, repeated traps may be displayed. The default
value of trapbuffer-size is recommended.

Example
# Set the maximum number of traps in the trap buffer to 30.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] info-center trapbuffer size 30

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.13 display trapbuffer
3.3.14 info-center channel
3.3.15 info-center channel name
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.33 info-center trapbuffer
3.3.37 reset trapbuffer

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 804

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.3.35 reset info-center statistics

Function
The reset info-center statistics command clears statistics on each module.

Format
reset info-center statistics

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To recollect statistics on each module, run the reset info-center statistics
command to clear all historical statistics.
Precautions
The cleared statistics cannot be restored. Exercise caution when you run the reset
info-center statistics command.

Example
# Clear statistics on each module.
<HUAWEI> reset info-center statistics

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.9 display info-center statistics

3.3.36 reset logbuffer

Function
The reset logbuffer command clears logs in the log buffer.

Format
reset logbuffer

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 805

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To record logs in the log buffer again, run the reset logbuffer command to clear
all the information in the log buffer.

Precautions

Statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Exercise caution when you run
the reset logbuffer command.

Example
# Clear information in the log buffer.
<HUAWEI> reset logbuffer
Warning: This command will reset the log buffer. Logs in the buffer will be lost. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Related Topics
3.3.10 display logbuffer

3.3.37 reset trapbuffer

Function
The reset trapbuffer command clears Trap information in the trap buffer.

Format
reset trapbuffer

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 806

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To record traps in the trap buffer again, run the reset trapbuffer command to
clear all the information in the trap buffer.
Precautions
Statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Exercise caution when you run
the reset trapbuffer command.

Example
# Clear information in the trap buffer.
<HUAWEI> reset trapbuffer

Related Topics
3.3.13 display trapbuffer

3.3.38 save logfile

Function
The save logfile command saves logs in the user log file buffer to a user log file.

Format
save logfile

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
0: Visit level

Usage Guidelines
The system periodically saves log information in the user log buffer to a user log
file. If the log buffer becomes full within the log saving interval, the system
immediately saves logs to the user log file. To view the current logs, run the save
logfile command to save the logs to the user log file.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 807

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

When you run this command, the device obtains or uses some personal data of
users, such as the STA MAC address. Delete the personal data immediately after
the command is executed to ensure user data security.

Example
# Save logs in the user log file buffer to the user log file.
<HUAWEI> save logfile
Info: Save logfile successfully.

Related Topics
3.3.5 display info-center
3.3.21 info-center logfile size
3.3.11 display logfile
3.3.25 info-center max-logfile-number

3.3.39 save logfile all

Function
The save logfile all command saves the logs in the user log buffer area and
diagnostic log buffer area to the user log file and diagnostic log file, respectively.

Format
save logfile all

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The logs in the user log buffer area and diagnostic log buffer area are periodically
saved to the user log file and diagnostic log file, respectively. The log saving
interval varies with the product. To save the logs in the user log buffer area and
diagnostic log buffer area to the user log file and diagnostic log file, respectively,
run the save logfile all command.
A user log file is saved in a log directory (for example, the log or logfile directory)
and named in the log.log format.
A diagnostic log file is saved in a log directory (for example, the log or logfile
directory) and named in the log.dblg format.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 808

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Save the logs in the user log buffer area and diagnostic log buffer area to the
user log file and diagnostic log file, respectively.
<HUAWEI> save logfile all
Info: Save logfile successfully.
Info: Save diagnostic logfile successfully.

3.3.40 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info command enables the trap function
of the Information Center module.
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info command disables the trap
function of the Information Center module.
By default, the trap function of the Information Center module is enabled.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info [ trap-name { hwiclogbufferlose |
hwiclogfileaging } ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info [ trap-name
{ hwiclogbufferlose | hwiclogfileaging } ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
trap-name Indicates the trap of a specified event type of the -
information center module. If the trap-name
parameter is not specified, all the traps of the
information center module are enabled.
hwiclogbufferlose Enables or disables the trap generated when some -
logs in the log buffer were lost because of storage
space insufficiency.
hwiclogfileaging Enables or disables the trap generated when a log -
file aged and then was deleted.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After the trap function is enabled, the trap about the Information Center module
generated when the device is running will be sent to the NMS. Otherwise, the trap

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 809

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

about the Information Center module will not be sent to the NMS. If you want to
enable a specific trap or several traps, choose the trap-name parameter.

Example
# Enables hwiclogfileaging for the Information Center module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name info trap-name hwiclogfileaging

Related Topics
3.3.12 display snmp-agent trap feature-name info all

3.3.41 terminal debugging

Function
The terminal debugging command enables debugging message display on the
user terminal.
The undo terminal debugging command disables debugging message display on
the user terminal.
By default, debugging message display is disabled on the user terminal.

Format
terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can run the terminal debugging command to enable debugging message
display on the user terminal to view system debugging message and locate faults.
Prerequisites
The 3.3.44 terminal monitor command has been executed to enable display of
logs, traps, and debugging message output on the user terminal.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 810

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Enable debugging message display on the user terminal.
<HUAWEI> terminal debugging
Info: Current terminal debugging is on.

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.44 terminal monitor

3.3.42 terminal echo synchronous

Function
The terminal echo synchronous command enables a terminal to display
debugging, log, or trap information synchronously.
The undo terminal echo synchronous command disables a terminal from
displaying debugging, log, or trap information synchronously.
By default, a terminal displays debugging, log, and trap information
asynchronously.

Format
terminal echo synchronous [ level { severity | all } | size size-number ] *

undo terminal echo synchronous

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 811

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
level severity Specifies an The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 7.
information The default value is 0.
severity.
The information center classifies
information into the following severities:
● 0: emergency
● 1: alert
● 2: critical
● 3: error
● 4: warning
● 5: notice
● 6: informational
● 7: debug
A smaller value indicates a higher severity.
The information with a severity higher than
a specified severity is displayed
asynchronously.

all Displays –
information of all
severities.

size size- Specifies the total The value is an integer ranging from 1 to
number number of 1024. The default value is 512.
debugging, log,
and trap records.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When a device generates debugging, log, or trap information, the information
queues in the device process and is sent to a terminal sequentially. This output is
called a synchronous output.
A synchronous output provides effectively organized output information,
improving user experience. In asynchronous output mode, multiple types of

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 812

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

information interlaces, which brings poor readability. An asynchronous output

allows you to promptly obtain debugging and diagnosis information and therefore
applies to debugging and diagnosis scenarios.
You can run the terminal echo synchronous command to enable a synchronous
output on a terminal, facilitating subsequent operations.
● When you enter a command, the entered command content is displayed after
debugging, log, or trap information is displayed. This function is enabled by
default. After a synchronous output is disabled, this function is still supported.
● When no command is entered, the command prompt is displayed after
debugging, log, or trap information is displayed. This function is enabled by
default. After a synchronous output is disabled, this function is still supported.
● When a command is being run, no debugging, log, or trap information is
displayed. After the command is run, debugging, log, or trap information is
displayed.
● When you enter Y for the message "Are you sure to continue?[Y/N]," the
[Y/N]: prompt is displayed after debugging, log, or trap information is
displayed.
● When you enter the More phase, the More prompt is displayed after
debugging, log, or trap information is displayed.
● If you run a command, for example, for decompressing or saving a file, the
terminal does not display output information until the operation is complete.
This process ensures monitoring continuity.
Prerequisites
● Terminal display has been enabled using the 3.3.44 terminal monitor
command.
● The terminal has been enabled to display debugging, log, or trap information
using the 3.3.41 terminal debugging, 3.3.43 terminal logging, or terminal
trapping command.

Example
# Enable a terminal to display debugging information synchronously.
<HUAWEI> terminal monitor
Info: Current terminal monitor is on.
<HUAWEI> terminal debugging
Info: Current terminal debugging is on.
<HUAWEI> terminal echo synchronous
Info: Current terminal synchronization is on.
<HUAWEI> save
The current configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure to continue?[Y/N]:
Aug 23 2012 12:04:37.790.2 huawei VTY/7/Debug_Stat:
(0)VTY ACCEPT BEGIN !
Aug 23 2012 12:04:37.790.3 huawei VTY/7/Debug_Stat:
(1)SOCKET ACCEPT OK !
Aug 23 2012 12:04:37.790.4 huawei VTY/7/Debug_Stat:
(2)FIND LINE INDEX OK !
[Y/N]:

Related Topics
3.3.44 terminal monitor
3.3.41 terminal debugging

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 813

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.3.43 terminal logging

3.3.45 terminal trapping

3.3.43 terminal logging

Function
The terminal logging command enables log display on the user terminal.
The undo terminal logging command disables log display on the user terminal.
By default, log display is enabled on the user terminal.

Format
terminal logging
undo terminal logging

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To view logs on a terminal, run the terminal logging command to enable log
display on the user terminal.
Prerequisites
The 3.3.44 terminal monitor command has been executed to enable display of
logs, traps, and debugging message output on the user terminal.

Example
# Disable log display on the user terminal.
<HUAWEI> undo terminal logging
Info: Current terminal logging is off.

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.44 terminal monitor

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 814

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.3.44 terminal monitor

Function
The terminal monitor command enables display of logs, traps, and debugging
message output by the information center on the user terminal.
The undo terminal monitor command disables display of logs, traps, and
debugging message output by the information center on the user terminal.
By default, console display is enabled and terminal display is disabled.

Format
terminal monitor
undo terminal monitor

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Prerequisites
The information center has been enabled by using the 3.3.16 info-center enable
command.
Follow-up Procedure
Run the terminal debugging/undo terminal debugging, terminal logging/undo
terminal logging, terminal trapping/undo terminal trapping/ command to
enable or disable terminal debugging message, log, or trap display.
Precautions
Logs, traps, and debugging message are sent to the current terminal only when
the terminal monitor command is used.
Running the undo terminal monitor command is equivalent to running the undo
terminal debugging, undo terminal logging, undo terminal trapping
command.

Example
# Disable display of logs, traps, and debugging message output by the
information center on the user terminal.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 815

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> undo terminal monitor

Info: Current terminal monitor is off.

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.41 terminal debugging
3.3.43 terminal logging
3.3.45 terminal trapping

3.3.45 terminal trapping

Function
The terminal trapping command enables trap display on the user terminal.
The undo terminal trapping command disables trap display on the user terminal.
By default, trap display is enabled on the user terminal.

Format
terminal trapping
undo terminal trapping

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To view traps on a terminal, run the terminal trapping command to enable trap
display on the user terminal.
Prerequisites
The 3.3.44 terminal monitor command has been executed to enable display of
logs, traps, and debugging message output on the user terminal.

Example
# Disable trap display on the user terminal.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 816

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> undo terminal trapping

Info: Current terminal trapping is off.

Related Topics
3.3.16 info-center enable
3.3.30 info-center source channel
3.3.44 terminal monitor

3.4 Fault Management Commands

3.4.1 Command Support
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.3 alarm-name severity
3.4.4 clear alarm active
3.4.5 clear alarm manual-clear
3.4.6 clear event all
3.4.7 clear record device-alarm
3.4.8 delay-suppression enable
3.4.9 display alarm active
3.4.10 display alarm history
3.4.11 display alarm information
3.4.12 display alarm manual-clear
3.4.13 display alarm urgent
3.4.14 display event
3.4.15 display event information
3.4.16 display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all
3.4.17 event
3.4.18 mask manual-clear alarm
3.4.19 reset alarm urgent
3.4.20 set alarm resend interval
3.4.21 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm
3.4.22 suppression alarm-name
3.4.23 suppression event-name

3.4.1 Command Support

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 817

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

3.4.2 alarm (system view)

Function
Using the alarm command, you can enter the alarm view.

Format
alarm

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After running the alarm command to enter the alarm view, you can configuration
alarm management functions.

Example
# Enter the alarm view.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm]

Related Topics
3.4.3 alarm-name severity
3.4.4 clear alarm active

3.4.3 alarm-name severity

Function
The alarm-name severity command sets the severity for an alarm.

The undo alarm-name severity command restores the default setting.

By default, each alarm has a default severity.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 818

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
alarm-name alarm-name severity severity
undo alarm-name alarm-name severity

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

alarm-name Specifies the registered The value is a string and

alarm name. varies according to the
registered device type. To
view registered alarm
information, run the
3.4.11 display alarm
information command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 819

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

severity severity Specifies the alarm The value is of

severity. enumerated type. Alarms
are classified into the
following severities:
● critical: indicates that
a fault affecting
services has occurred
and it must be
rectified immediately.
● major: indicates that
services are being
affected and related
measures need to be
taken urgently.
● minor: indicates that
a fault occurs but
does not affect
services. To avoid
more serious faults
that affect services,
related measures
must be taken.
● warning: indicates
that a potential or
impending service-
affecting fault is
detected before any
significant effect has
been felt. Take
corrective actions to
diagnose and rectify
the fault.
● indeterminate:
indicates that the
alarm severity cannot
be determined.
● cleared: indicates one
or more previous
alarm conditions have
been cleared.

Views
Alarm view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 820

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

You can run the alarm-name severity command to raise or lower the level of an
alarm based on the severity and emergency of the alarm. However, the level of a
clear alarm cannot be changed unless during the configuration restoration period.
You can configure filtering conditions to allow the NMS to receive only alarms of
specified alarm severity.

Precautions

The default severity of each alarm is different. To view the default severity of an
alarm, run the undo alarm-name severity and 3.4.11 display alarm information
commands in sequence.

Example
# Set the severity of the hwSysSlaveHDError alarm to warning.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm] alarm-name hwSysSlaveHDError severity warning

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.11 display alarm information

3.4.4 clear alarm active

Function
The clear alarm active command clears active alarms.

Format
clear alarm active { all | sequence-number sequence-number }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
all Clears all active alarms. -
sequence-number Specifies the sequence The value is an integer
sequence-number number of an active alarm. ranging from 1 to
2147483647.

Views
Alarm view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 821

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Before collecting statistics on alarms generated on the device again, run the clear
alarm active to clear active alarms.

Precautions

After the clear alarm active command is used, all active alarms on the device are
deleted and cannot be restored.

Example
# Clear all active alarms on the device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm] clear alarm active all

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.9 display alarm active

3.4.5 clear alarm manual-clear

Function
The clear alarm manual-clear command clears the active alarms that are not
reported repeatedly so that these active alarms can be reported again.

Format
clear alarm manual-clear { all | sequence-number sequence-number }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
all Specifies all the active alarms that are -
not reported repeatedly.
sequence- Specifies the sequence number of the The value is an
number active alarm that is not reported integer that ranges
sequence- repeatedly. from 1 to
number 2147483647.
You can run 3.4.12 display alarm
manual-clear get the sequence
number of the active alarm.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 822

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
Alarm management view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After the mask manual-clear alarm command is executed to prevent manually
cleared active alarms from being reported repeatedly and then the clear alarm
active command or MIB table hwAlarmActiveTable is used to manually clear
active alarms, active alarms will not be reported repeatedly. To view the active
alarms that are not reported repeatedly, run the clear alarm manual-clear
command.

To ensure that the active alarms that are not reported repeatedly can be reported
again, run the clear alarm manual-clear command. After the clear alarm
manual-clear command is executed, running the display alarm manual-clear
command does not display corresponding alarm information.

Example
# Clear the active alarms that are not reported repeatedly.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm] clear alarm manual-clear all

Related Topics
3.4.4 clear alarm active
3.4.12 display alarm manual-clear
3.4.18 mask manual-clear alarm

3.4.6 clear event all

Function
The clear event all command clears events on the device.

Format
clear event all

Parameters
None

Views
Event view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 823

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Before collecting statistics on events generated on the device again, run the clear
event all to clear events.
Precautions

NOTICE

The clear event all command clears events on the device and cleared events
cannot be restored.

Example
# Clear events on the device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] event
[HUAWEI-event] clear event all

Related Topics
3.4.17 event

3.4.7 clear record device-alarm

Function
The clear record device-alarm command clears hardware alarms.

Format
clear record device-alarm [ all | slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

all Clears all hardware -

alarms of the device.

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if The value is 0 if stacking

stacking is not is not configured; the
configured. value ranges from 0 to 8
● Specifies the stack ID if stacking is configured.
if stacking is
configured.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 824

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When current hardware alarms are not required on the device, use the clear
record command to clear the hardware alarms of the device.

Example
# Clear all hardware alarms of the device.
<HUAWEI> clear record device-alarm all

Related Topics
3.4.13 display alarm urgent

3.4.8 delay-suppression enable

Function
The delay-suppression enable command enables delayed alarm or event
reporting.

The undo delay-suppression enable command disables delayed alarm or event

reporting.

By default, delayed reporting is enabled.

NOTE
Only the S5720EI, S5720HI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI support this command.

Format
delay-suppression enable

undo delay-suppression enable

Parameters
None

Views
Alarm view or event view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 825

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
In the event that an alarm or an event is repeatedly generated, you can enable
delayed reporting to prevent a large number of repeated alarms or events from
being reported to the NMS. You can choose to enable or disable delayed reporting:
● Run the delay-suppression enable command to enable delayed reporting.
● Run the undo delay-suppression enable command to disable delayed
reporting.
Run the delay-suppression enable command in the alarm view to enable delayed
alarm reporting. Run the delay-suppression enable command in the event view
to enable delayed event reporting.

Example
# Enable delayed alarm reporting.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm] delay-suppression enable

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.17 event
3.4.22 suppression alarm-name
3.4.23 suppression event-name

3.4.9 display alarm active

Function
The display alarm active command displays active alarms on the device.

Format
display alarm active

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 826

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display alarm active command to view active alarms on the
device to locate faults.

Example
# Display active alarms on the device.
<HUAWEI> display alarm active
A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J
A=Sequence, B=RootKindFlag(Independent|RootCause|nonRootCause)
C=Generating time, D=Clearing time
E=ID, F=Name, G=Level, H=State
I=Description information for locating(Para info, Reason info)
J=RootCause alarm sequence(Only for nonRootCause alarm)

1/Independent/2015-09-01 09:18:25-05:13/-/0x40c12004/hwEntityInvalid/Critical/
Start/OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.129.2.1.9 Power is abnormal. (EntityPhysicalInde
x=67108873, BaseTrapSeverity=3, BaseTrapProbableCause=67966, BaseTrapEventType=5
, EntPhysicalContainedIn=5, EntPhysicalName=MPU Board 0, RelativeResource=PWR2 P
OWER, ReasonDescription=PWR2 POWER is abnormal)

Table 3-54 Description of the display alarm active command output

Item Description

A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H Alarm display format

/I/J

A=Sequence Sequence number

B=RootKindFlag( Flag indicating a root-cause alarm or a non-root-cause

Independent| alarm:
RootCause| ● Independent: indicates an alarm for which alarm
nonRootCause) correlation analysis is not performed.
● RootCause: indicates a root-cause alarm.
● nonRootCause: indicates a non-root-cause alarm.

C=Generating Time when an alarm is generated

time

D=Clearing time Time when an alarm is cleared

E=ID Alarm ID

F=Name Alarm name

G=Level Alarm severity level

You can run the 3.4.3 alarm-name severity command to set
this parameter.

H=State Alarm status:

● Start
● End

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 827

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

I=Description Alarm description including alarm parameters and causes

information for for triggering alarms
locating(Para
info, Reason
info)

J=RootCause Sequence number of the root-cause alarm (for non-root-

alarm cause alarms only)
sequence(Only
for
nonRootCause
alarm)

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.3 alarm-name severity
3.4.4 clear alarm active

3.4.10 display alarm history

Function
The display alarm history command displays historical alarms on the device.

Format
display alarm history

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display alarm history command to view the alarms that are
cleared or generated on the device. The display alarm history command displays
a maximum of 1024 alarm history records.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 828

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display historical alarms on the device.
<HUAWEI> display alarm history
A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J
A=Sequence, B=RootKindFlag(Independent|RootCause|nonRootCause)
C=Generating time, D=Clearing time
E=ID, F=Name, G=Level, H=State
I=Description information for locating(Para info, Reason info)
J=RootCause alarm sequence(Only for nonRootCause alarm)

3/Independent/2010-07-14 09:40:20-08:00/2010-07-14 09:40:23-08:00/0x502001/linkDown/

Critical/End/OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 Interface 5 turned into DOWN state.

Table 3-55 Description of the display alarm history command output

Item Description

A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H Alarm display format

/I/J

A=Sequence Sequence number

B=RootKindFlag( Flag indicating a root-cause alarm or a non-root-cause

Independent| alarm:
RootCause| ● Independent: indicates an alarm for which alarm
nonRootCause) correlation analysis is not performed.
● RootCause: indicates a root-cause alarm.
● nonRootCause: indicates a non-root-cause alarm.

C=Generating Time when an alarm is generated

time

D=Clearing time Time when an alarm is cleared

E=ID E=ID

F=Name Alarm ID

G=Level Alarm severity level

You can run the 3.4.3 alarm-name severity command to set
this parameter.

H=State Alarm status:

● Start
● End

I=Description Alarm description including alarm parameters and causes

information for for triggering alarms
locating(Para
info, Reason
info)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 829

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

J=RootCause Sequence number of the root-cause alarm

alarm
sequence(Only
for
nonRootCause
alarm)

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.9 display alarm active
3.4.3 alarm-name severity

3.4.11 display alarm information

Function
The display alarm information command displays alarm configurations.

Format
display alarm information [ name alarm-name ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name alarm- Displays the configuration of a The value is a string and
name specified alarm. If this parameter is varies according to the
not set, configurations of all alarms registered device type.
are displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To view alarm configurations on the device, run the display alarm information
command.
If no alarm name is specified, information about all alarms in the system will be
displayed.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 830

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

In addition, to change the severity level of an alarm, you can run the alarm-name
alarm-name severity severity command.

Example
# Display the configuration of the alarm named linkUp.
<HUAWEI> display alarm information name linkUp
**********************************
AlarmName: linkUp
AlarmType: Resume Alarm
AlarmLevel: Cleared
Suppress Period: NA
CauseAlarmName: linkDown
Match VB Name: ifIndex
**********************************

Table 3-56 Description of the display alarm information command output

Item Description

AlarmName Name of an alarm.

AlarmType Alarm type:

● Alarm: indicates a fault occurs.
● Resume Alarm: indicates a fault is rectified.

AlarmLevel Alarm severity.

To set this parameter, run the 3.4.3 alarm-name severity
command.

Suppress Period Alarm reporting delay. To set this parameter, run the 3.4.22
suppression alarm-name command.
If this field displays NA, this alarm does not support the
delayed alarm reporting function.

CauseAlarmNam Name of the root-cause alarm.

e Name of the root-cause alarm, namely, paired alarm name.

Match VB Name Matching content of paired alarms.

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.3 alarm-name severity

3.4.12 display alarm manual-clear

Function
The display alarm manual-clear command displays the alarms that are not
reported repeatedly after being cleared.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 831

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display alarm manual-clear

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
After the mask manual-clear alarm command is executed to prevent manually
cleared active alarms from being reported repeatedly and then the clear alarm
active command or MIB table hwAlarmActiveTable is used to manually clear
active alarms, you can run the display alarm manual-clear command to view the
active alarms that are not reported repeatedly after being cleared.

Example
# Display the alarms that are not reported repeatedly after being cleared.
<HUAWEI> display alarm manual-clear
A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J
A=Sequence, B=RootKindFlag(Independent|RootCause|nonRootCause)
C=Generating time, D=Clearing time
E=ID, F=Name, G=Level, H=State
I=Description information for locating(Para info, Reason info)
J=RootCause alarm sequence(Only for nonRootCause alarm)

2/Independent/2016-05-04 10:38:46-08:00/-/0xff14280c/hwEntityOffline/Major/Start/ OID 1

.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.129.2.1.13 Physical entity changed to the offline state. (E
ntityPhysicalIndex=16842752, BaseTrapSeverity=5, BaseTrapProbableCause=69120, Ba
seTrapEventType=5, EntPhysicalContainedIn=16777216, EntPhysicalName="LPU slot 1"
, RelativeResource="", ReasonDescription="Because of get offline message, the en
tity of SLOT1 changed to offline state")

Table 3-57 Description of the display alarm manual-clear command output

Item Description

A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H Alarm display format

/I/J

A=Sequence Alarm sequence number.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 832

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

B=RootKindFlag( Flag indicating a root-cause alarm or a non-root-cause

Independent| alarm:
RootCause| ● Independent: indicates an alarm for which alarm
nonRootCause) correlation analysis is not performed.
● RootCause: indicates a root-cause alarm.
● nonRootCause: indicates a non-root-cause alarm.

C=Generating Time when an alarm is generated.

time

D=Clearing time Time when an alarm is cleared.

E=ID Alarm ID.

F=Name Alarm name.

G=Level Alarm severity.

To set this parameter, run the 3.4.3 alarm-name severity
command.

H=State Alarm status:

● Start
● End

I=Description Alarm description.

information for
locating(Para
info, Reason
info)

J=RootCause Sequence number of a root-cause alarm (for non-root-cause

alarm alarms only)
sequence(Only
for
nonRootCause
alarm)

Related Topics
3.4.4 clear alarm active
3.4.5 clear alarm manual-clear
3.4.18 mask manual-clear alarm

3.4.13 display alarm urgent

Function
Using the display alarm urgent command, you can view hardware alarms on the
device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 833

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display alarm urgent [ slot slot-id | time interval ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if The value is 0 if stacking

stacking is not is not configured; the
configured. value ranges from 0 to 8
● Specifies the stack ID if stacking is configured.
if stacking is
configured.

time interval Displays hardware The value is an integer

alarms generated in the that ranges from 1 to
last period of time. 10000, in minutes.
interval specifies the
period.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can use the command to view hardware alarms, including alarms about the
abnormality of the temperature, the fan, and the chip.
If no parameter is specified, the command displays all the hardware alarms.

Example
# Display hardware alarms of the device.
<HUAWEI> display alarm urgent
Alarm:

Alarm Slot Date Time(DST) Location

---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power abnormal 1 2015/10/16 18:22:17 Slot 1
PWR Input Vol Low 1 2015/10/16 18:22:17 Slot 1
PWR2
Power abnormal 1 2015/10/16 18:19:11 Slot 1
PWR Input Vol Low 1 2015/10/16 18:19:11 Slot 1
PWR2
Power abnormal 1 2015/10/16 18:10:29 Slot 1
PWR Input Vol Low 1 2015/10/16 18:10:29 Slot 1
PWR2
Power abnormal 1 2015/10/16 09:35:05 Slot 1
PWR Input Vol Low 1 2015/10/16 09:35:05 Slot 1

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 834

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

PWR2
Power abnormal 8 2015/10/16 10:19:18 Slot 8
PWR Input Vol Low 8 2015/10/16 10:19:18 Slot 8
PWR2
Power abnormal 8 2015/10/16 10:04:48 Slot 8
PWR Input Vol Low 8 2015/10/16 10:04:48 Slot 8
PWR2
Power abnormal 8 2015/10/16 10:01:45 Slot 8
PWR Input Vol Low 8 2015/10/16 10:01:45 Slot 8
PWR2
Power abnormal 8 2015/10/16 09:58:53 Slot 8
PWR Input Vol Low 8 2015/10/16 09:58:53 Slot 8
PWR2
Power abnormal 8 2015/10/16 09:56:00 Slot 8
PWR Input Vol Low 8 2015/10/16 09:56:00 Slot 8
PWR2
Power abnormal 1 2015/10/16 09:41:40 Slot 1
PWR Input Vol Low 1 2015/10/16 09:41:40 Slot 1 PWR2

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 835

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-58 Description of the display alarm urgent command output

Item Description

Alarm Details about an alarm.

● Fan pulled out: A fan module is removed.
● Fan plugged in: A fan module is installed.
● Fan abnormal: A fan module is not working properly.
● Fan normal: A fan module is working properly.
● Fan unmatched: A fan module does not match the device
model.
● Fan matched: A fan module matches the device model.
● Power pulled out: A power module is removed.
● Power plugged in: A power module is installed.
● Power abnormal: A power module is not working
properly.
● Power normal: A power module is working properly.
● PWR Input Vol Low: A power module is in an input power
outage or undervoltage condition.
● PWR Input Vol Low Resume: A power module recovers
from an input power outage or undervoltage condition.
● Built-in power Off: A built-in power module does not
provide power.
● Built-in power On: A built-in power module provides
power normally.
● Temp high: The temperature is too high.
● Temp low: The temperature is too low.
● Temp normal: The temperature returns to the normal
range.
● Temp chip abnormal: A temperature sensor is faulty.
● Temp chip normal: A temperature sensor recovers from a
failure.
● Bat temperature low: The lithium battery temperature is
too low.
● Bat temperature normal: The lithium battery temperature
returns to the normal range.
● Bat temperature high: The lithium battery temperature is
too high.
● Bat temperature normal: The lithium battery temperature
returns to the normal range.
● Bat invalid: A lithium battery is unavailable.
● Battery's life end: The lifetime of a lithium battery has
expired.
● Bat supplytime short: The power supply time of a lithium
battery is less than the threshold.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 836

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

● Bat supptime short clear: The power supply time of a

lithium battery is longer than the threshold.
● Bat Voltage Low: A lithium battery is in an undervoltage
condition.
● Bat Voltage Low resume: A lithium battery recovers from
an undervoltage condition.
● Bat Current high: A lithium battery is in an overcurrent
condition.

Slot Stack ID of the device where alarms are generated.

Date Date when alarms are generated.

Time(DST) Time when alarms are generated.

Location Position where alarms are generated.

Related Topics
3.4.7 clear record device-alarm

3.4.14 display event

Function
The display event command displays events on the device.

Format
display event

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To obtain the contents of events in the system, you can run the display event
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 837

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display events on the device.
<HUAWEI> display event
A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J
A=Sequence, B=RootKindFlag(Independent|RootCause|nonRootCause)
C=Generating time, D=Clearing time
E=ID, F=Name, G=Level, H=State
I=Description information for locating(Para info, Reason info)
J=RootCause alarm sequence(Only for nonRootCause alarm)

1/Independent/2008-10-12 22:42:28-08:00/-/0x40812000/warmStart/Warning/Start/O
ID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 warmStart
2/Independent/2008-10-12 22:42:28-08:00/-/0x41132002/hgmpMemberStatusChange/Wa
rning/Start/OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.6.7.1.0.3, DeviceID:0018-8201-0987, Role:17.
3/Independent/2008-10-16 17:50:32-08:00/-/0x41b82000/hwCfgChgNotify/Warning/St
art/OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.191.3.1 configurations have been changed. The curr
ent change number is 2, the change loop count is 0, and the maximum number of re
cords is 4095.

Table 3-59 Description of the display event command output

Item Description

A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H Event display format

/I/J

A=Sequence Sequence number of an event

B=RootKindFlag( Flag indicating a root-cause alarm or a non-root-cause

Independent| alarm (The value of this field is Independent for any event.)
RootCause|
nonRootCause)

C=Generating Time when the event is generated

time

D=Clearing time Time when the event is cleared (for non-root-cause alarms
only)

E=ID Event ID

F=Name Event name

G=Level Event level

H=State Event status:

● Start
● End

I=Description Description of an event, including parameters of the event

information for and the reason why the event was triggered.
locating(Para
info, Reason
info)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 838

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

J=RootCause This parameter is valid only for alarms.

alarm
sequence(Only
for
nonRootCause
alarm)

Related Topics
3.4.6 clear event all
3.4.15 display event information
3.4.17 event

3.4.15 display event information

Function
The display event information command displays event configurations.

Format
display event information [ name event-name ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name event- Displays the configuration of a
The value is a string and
name specified event. If this parameter is
varies according to the
not set, configurations of all events
registered device type.
are displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To view event configurations on the device, run the display event information
command.

If no event name is specified, information about all events in the system will be
displayed.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 839

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display registration information about the hwCfgManEventlog event.
<HUAWEI> display event information name hwCfgManEventlog
**********************************
EventName: hwCfgManEventlog
EventType: Critical Event
EventLevel: Warning
Suppress Period: NA
Match VB Name: hwCfgLogSrcCmd hwCfgLogSrcData hwCfgLogDesData
**********************************

Table 3-60 Description of the display event information command output

Item Description

EventName Event name.

EventType Event type.

EventLevel Event level, which cannot be configured.

Suppress Period Event report delay period. To set this parameter, run the
3.4.23 suppression event-name command.
If this field displays NA, this event does not support the
delayed event reporting function.

Match VB Name Matching content of repeated events.

3.4.16 display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all

Function
The display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all command displays the status
of all traps of the fault management module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 840

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard network
management protocol widely used on TCP/IP networks. It uses a central computer
(a network management station) that runs network management software to
manage network elements. The management agent on the network element
automatically reports traps to the network management station. After that, the
network administrator immediately takes measures to resolve the problem.

The display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all command displays whether

all trap functions of the FM module are enabled.

Example
# Display all trap messages of the fault management module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: FM
Trap number : 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwAlarmTargetHostDel on on
hwAlarmStorm on on

Table 3-61 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name fm all

command output

Item Description

Feature name Name of the module to which a trap message

belongs

Trap number Number of trap messages

Trap name Names of the trap messages of the fault

management module, including:
● hwAlarmTargetHostDel: generated when the
configuration of a target host is deleted
● hwAlarmStorm: generated when an alarm storm
occurs

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: the trap function is enabled.
● off: the trap function is disabled.

Current switch status Current status of the trap function:

● on: the trap function is enabled.
● off: the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.4.21 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 841

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.4.17 event
Function
Using the event command, you can enter the event view.

Format
event

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After running the event command to enter the event view, you can configure
event management functions.

Example
# Enter the event view.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] event
[HUAWEI-event]

Related Topics
3.4.14 display event
3.4.15 display event information

3.4.18 mask manual-clear alarm

Function
The mask manual-clear alarm command prevents manually cleared active
alarms from being reported repeatedly.
The undo mask manual-clear alarm command restores the default setting.
By default, active alarms are reported repeatedly after being manually cleared.

Format
mask manual-clear alarm

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 842

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo mask manual-clear alarm

Parameters
None

Views
Alarm management view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, after the clear alarm active command or MIB table
hwAlarmActiveTable is used to manually clear active alarms, active alarms are
reported repeatedly when being generated again. To prevent manually cleared
active alarms from being reported repeatedly, run the mask manual-clear alarm
command.
After the mask manual-clear alarm command is executed and then the clear
alarm active command or MIB table hwAlarmActiveTable is used, cleared active
alarms will not be reported repeatedly before clear alarms of active alarms are
reported. To view all the active alarms that are not reported repeatedly, run the
display alarm manual-clear command.
Precautions
Before the mask manual-clear alarm command is executed, the active alarms
manually cleared using the clear alarm active command or MIB table
hwAlarmActiveTable will be reported repeatedly.

Example
# Prevent manually cleared active alarms from being reported repeatedly.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm] mask manual-clear alarm

Related Topics
3.4.4 clear alarm active
3.4.12 display alarm manual-clear
3.4.5 clear alarm manual-clear

3.4.19 reset alarm urgent

Function
The reset alarm urgent command clears all alarm messages.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 843

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
reset alarm urgent slot slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id ● Specifies the slot ID if The value is an integer

stacking is not that is 0 if stacking is not
configured. configured. The value
● Specifies the stack ID ranges from 0 to 8 if
if stacking is stacking is configured.
configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the reset alarm urgent command to clear all alarm messages.
Confirm the action before you run this command.

Example
# Clear all alarm messages of the device that slot id is 0.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] reset alarm urgent slot 0

3.4.20 set alarm resend interval

Function
The set alarm resend interval command set the alarm reporting interval.

The undo set alarm resend interval command restores the default alarm
reporting interval.

By default, the alarm interval is 10 minutes.

Format
set alarm resend interval interval-value

undo set alarm resend interval

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 844

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interval-value Specifies the alarm The value is an integer that ranges from
interval. 0 to 65535, in minutes.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The set alarm resend interval command sets the interval at which alarms are
generated. If the periodic alarm reporting function is not required, set the interval
to 0.

Precautions

If the alarm reporting interval is set to 0, the system does not report alarms
periodically.

Example
# Set the alarm reporting interval to 4 minutes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set alarm resend interval 4

3.4.21 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm

Function
The snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm command enables the trap
function of the fault management module.

The undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm command disables the trap
function of the fault management module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the fault management module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm [ trap-name
{ hwalarmtargethostdel | hwalarmstorm } ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm [ trap-name

{ hwalarmtargethostdel | hwalarmstorm } ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 845

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
trap-name Enables the trap of a specified event. If this -
parameter is not specified, all traps of the fault
management module are enabled.
hwalarmtargethostdel Indicates that the configuration of a target host -
is deleted.
hwalarmstorm Indicates that a trap alarm occurs. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The traps of the fault management module generated in the running process of a
device are reported to the NMS only when the trap function is enabled. To enable
the trap function for one or more specific events, configure trap-name in the
command.

Example
# Enable all traps of the fault management module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name fm

3.4.22 suppression alarm-name

Function
The suppression alarm-name command modifies a delay period after which a
generated alarm is reported.

The undo suppression alarm-name command restores the configured delay

period after which a generated alarm is reported.

By default, the system defines a delay period after which a generated alarm is
reported. To view this default delay period, run the undo suppression alarm-
name command and then the display alarm information command. If the
Suppress Period field displays NA for an alarm, this alarm does not support the
delayed alarm reporting function.

NOTE
Only the S5720EI, S5720HI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI support this command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 846

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
suppression alarm-name alarm-name { cause-period cause-seconds | clear-
period clear-seconds }
undo suppression alarm-name alarm-name { cause-period | clear-period }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
alarm-name Specifies the name of The value cannot be the alarm name of
an alarm for which which the Suppress Period field in the
the delay period is set. display alarm information command
output displays NA.
cause-period Specifies the period The value is an integer ranging from 0
cause-seconds after which a to 600, in seconds. If the value is set to
generated alarm is 0s, the alarm management module
reported. sends the alarm to the NMS without
any delay.
clear-period Specifies the period The value is an integer ranging from 0
clear-seconds after which a to 600, in seconds. If the value is set to
generated clear alarm 0s, the alarm management module
is reported. sends the alarm to the NMS without
any delay.

Views
Alarm view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If a certain alarm is repeatedly generated, you can enable delayed alarm reporting
and set a period after which the alarm is reported to prevent the alarm from
being reported during this period.
After the period is set for a certain alarm:
● If no clear alarm is generated during the period, the alarm is not reported to
the NMS until the period expires.
● If a clear alarm is generated during this period, the alarm and its clear alarm
are both deleted from the alarm queue and will not be reported to the NMS.
If the delay period is too short, alarm reporting is not efficiently delayed. If the
delay period is too long, alarm reporting is postponed and the time when the fault
occurs cannot be correctly obtained. For most alarms, the default delay period is
recommended. For common alarms, such as alarms about hardware and
environment, delayed alarm reporting is not recommended.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 847

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The value of cause-period cause-seconds is irrelevant to the value of clear-period

clear-seconds. The delay in reporting an alarm and the delay in reporting a clear
alarm can be configured separately.

Prerequisites

Before running the suppression alarm-name command, ensure that delayed

alarm reporting has been enabled using the delay-suppression enable command.

Precautions

● If the delay period is changed when an alarm is being sent, the changed delay
period takes effect on the next alarm to be sent.
● If alarm-name specifies an alarm, you can configure only cause-period cause-
seconds. If it specifies a clear alarm, you can configured only clear-period
clear-seconds.

Example
# Set the hwsysmasterhderror alarm to be reported 5s after it is generated.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] alarm
[HUAWEI-alarm] delay-suppression enable
[HUAWEI-alarm] suppression alarm-name hwsysmasterhderror cause-period 5

Related Topics
3.4.2 alarm (system view)
3.4.8 delay-suppression enable

3.4.23 suppression event-name

Function
The suppression event-name command modifies a delay period after which a
generated event is reported.

The undo suppression event-name command restores the configured delay

period after which a generated event is reported.

By default, the system defines a delay period after which a generated event is
reported. To view this default delay period, run the undo suppression event-
name command and then the display event information command. If the
Suppress Period field displays NA for an alarm, this alarm does not support the
delayed alarm reporting function.

NOTE
Only the S5720EI, S5720HI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI support this command.

Format
suppression event-name event-name period seconds

undo suppression event-name event-name period

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 848

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
event-name Specifies the name of The value cannot be the event name of
an event for which the which the Suppress Period field in the
delay period is set. display event information command
output displays NA.
period Specifies the period The value is an integer ranging from 0
seconds after which a to 600, in seconds. If the value is set to
generated event is 0s, the alarm management module
reported. sends the event to the NMS without
any delay.

Views
Event view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In the case where a certain event is repeatedly generated, you can enable delayed
event reporting and set a period after which a generated event is reported.
After the delay period is set for a certain event, if an event is generated several
times during the delay period, the system reports only the first one to the NMS
when the delay period expires and discards the following ones.
Prerequisites
Before running the suppression event-name command, ensure that delayed
alarm reporting has been enabled using the delay-suppression enable command.
Precautions
If the delay period is changed when an event is being sent, the changed delay
period takes effect on the next event to be sent.

Example
# Set the delay period to 5s after which a generated hwFlhSyncFailNotification
event is reported.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] event
[HUAWEI-event] delay-suppression enable
[HUAWEI-event] suppression event-name hwFlhSyncFailNotification period 5

Related Topics
3.4.17 event

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 849

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.4.8 delay-suppression enable

3.5 NTP Configuration Commands

3.5.1 Command Support
3.5.2 display ntp-service event clock-unsync
3.5.3 display ntp-service sessions
3.5.4 display ntp-service statistics packet
3.5.5 display ntp-service status
3.5.6 display ntp-service trace
3.5.7 ntp-service
3.5.8 ntp-service access
3.5.9 ntp-service authentication enable
3.5.10 ntp-service authentication-keyid
3.5.11 ntp-service broadcast-client
3.5.12 ntp-service broadcast-server
3.5.13 ntp-service disable
3.5.14 ntp-service discard
3.5.15 ntp-service in-interface disable
3.5.16 ntp-service kod-enable
3.5.17 ntp-service manycast-client
3.5.18 ntp-service manycast-server
3.5.19 ntp-service max-distance
3.5.20 ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions
3.5.21 ntp-service multicast-client
3.5.22 ntp-service multicast-server
3.5.23 ntp-service port
3.5.24 ntp-service refclock-master
3.5.25 ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid
3.5.26 ntp-service server disable
3.5.27 ntp-service source-interface
3.5.28 ntp-service unicast-peer
3.5.29 ntp-service unicast-server
3.5.30 reset ntp-service statistics packet

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 850

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.5.1 Command Support

Only the S6720EI, S6720S-EI, S5720HI, S5720EI, S6720SI, S6720S-SI, S5730SI,
S5730S-EI, S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5720LI, S5720S-LI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S2720EI,
S1720X-E, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E, S1720X, S1720GW, S1720GWR support the
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name parameter.

3.5.2 display ntp-service event clock-unsync

Function
The display ntp-service event clock-unsync command displays the last 10 clock
unsynchronization reasons.

Format
display ntp-service event clock-unsync

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display ntp-service event clock-unsync command to view
information about the last 10 clock unsynchronization reasons in the current
system.

Example
# Display the last 10 clock unsynchronization reasons.
<HUAWEI> display ntp-service event clock-unsync
1. Clock source : 10.1.1.1(vrf1)
Session type : client, configured
Unsync reason : Peer reachability lost
Unsync time : 2012-07-30 12:24:44+00:00

2. Clock source : 10.2.1.1(vrf2)

Session type : bdcast client (Interface: GE0/0/1), dynamic
Unsync reason : Authentication failure
Unsync time : 2011-06-15 11:24:44+00:0

# Display the clock unsynchronization reasons.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 851

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-62 Description of the display ntp-service event clock-unsync command

output
Item Description

Clock source Indicates the IP address of the server

clock.

Session type Indicates the session type of the server

clock.

Unsync reason Indicates the unsynchronous reasons.

Unsync time Indicates the unsynchronous time.

3.5.3 display ntp-service sessions

Function
The display ntp-service sessions command displays all session information
maintained by NTP on the local end.

Format
display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
verbose Displays detailed information about an NTP session. -

If verbose is not specified, only summary information about

the NTP session is displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To monitor or locate faults on NTP sessions, run the display ntp-service sessions
command to obtain status information about NTP sessions so that the fault can
be located efficiently.
Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 852

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● If verbose is not specified, summary information about NTP sessions is

displayed.
● If verbose is specified, detailed information about NTP sessions is displayed.

Example
# Display NTP session information of the local device.
<HUAWEI> display ntp-service sessions
clock source: 224.0.1.1
clock stratum: 1
clock status: configured, insane, valid, unsynced
reference clock ID: LOCAL(0)
reach: 0
current poll: 64
now: 9
offset: 0.0000 ms
delay: 0.00 ms
disper: 0.00 ms

Table 3-63 Description of the display ntp-service sessions command output

Item Description

clock source Address of the clock source.

clock stratum Stratum of the clock source.

The clock stratum determines the precision of the clock,
and its value ranges from 1 to 16. The higher the stratum
value, the lower the clock precision. The value 1 indicates
the highest precision, and the value 16 indicates the
lowest precision. The clock with stratum 16 is in the
unsynchronized status, and cannot be used as a reference
clock.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 853

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

clock status Status of a clock, where

● configured: indicates that the session is set up by a
configuration command.
● master: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session is the primary clock source of the
current system.
● selected: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session passes the clock selecting algorithm.
● candidate: indicates that the clock source
corresponding to the session is a candidate clock
source.
● sane: indicates that the clock source corresponding to
the session passes the saneness test.
● insane: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session does not pass the saneness test.
● valid: indicates that the clock source corresponding to
the session is valid. The clock source corresponding to
the session passes the test, is in a synchronized status
and is of an effective stratum. The root delay and the
root dispersion are within the normal range.
● invalid: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session is invalid.
● unsynced: indicates that the clock source
corresponding to the session is not yet synchronized or
the stratum is invalid.

reference clock ID When the local system has been synchronized to a

remote NTP server or a clock source, the address of the
remote server or the identifier of the clock source is
displayed.

reach Reachability count of the clock source. The value 0

indicates that the clock source is unreachable.

current poll Poll interval of NTP packets. The interval for sending two
successive NTP packets, in seconds.
To set the poll interval, run the ntp-service discard min-
interval command.

now Interval between the last synchronization and the current

time.

offset Offset to the superior clock source.

delay Delay to the superior clock source.

disper Dispersion to the superior clock source.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 854

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

# Display detailed information about NTP sessions on the local device.

<HUAWEI> display ntp-service sessions verbose
clock source: 172.16.12.1
clock stratum: 1
clock status: configured, insane, valid, unsynced
reference clock ID: LOCAL(0)
local mode: client, local poll: 64, current poll: 64
peer mode: server, peer poll: 64, now: 21
offset: -3.2385 ms,delay: 26.97 ms, disper: 14.85 ms
root delay: 0.00 ms, root disper: 10.94 ms
reach: 255, sync dist: 0.058, sync state: 4
precision: 2^18, version: 3, peer interface: wildcard
reftime: 10:01:38.546 UTC Sep 5 2005(C6C69602.8C00DA1A)
orgtime: 10:01:43.463 UTC Sep 5 2005(C6C69607.76ACC921)
rcvtime: 10:01:43.480 UTC Sep 5 2005(C6C69607.7AF4ADBC)
xmttime: 10:01:43.452 UTC Sep 5 2005(C6C69607.73F1E8E6)
filter delay : 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.02
filter offset: 0.00 -0.01 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
filter disper: 0.03 0.02 0.00 0.11 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.05
reference clock status: normal

Table 3-64 Description of the display ntp-service sessions verbose command

output
Item Description

clock source Address of the clock source.

clock stratum NTP stratum on which the local system is located.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 855

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

clock status Status of a clock, where

● configured: indicates that the session is set up by a
configuration command.
● master: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session is the primary clock source of the
current system.
● selected: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session passes the clock selecting algorithm.
● candidate: indicates that the clock source
corresponding to the session is a candidate clock
source.
● sane: indicates that the clock source corresponding to
the session passes the saneness test.
● insane: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session does not pass the saneness test.
● valid: indicates that the clock source corresponding to
the session is valid. The clock source corresponding to
the session passes the test, is in a synchronized status
and is of an effective stratum. The root delay and the
root dispersion are within the normal range.
● invalid: indicates that the clock source corresponding
to the session is invalid.
● unsynced: indicates that the clock source
corresponding to the session is not yet synchronized or
the stratum is invalid.

reference clock ID When the local system has been synchronized to a

remote NTP server or a clock source, the address of the
remote server or the identifier of the clock source is
displayed. When the server is located on a certain VPN,
the name of the VPN instance is displayed.

local mode Local system mode.

peer mode Peer system mode.

local poll Local polling mode.

peer poll Peer polling mode.

offset Offset to the superior clock source.

delay Delay to the superior clock source.

disper Dispersion to the superior clock source.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 856

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

root delay Total system delay between the local end and the master
reference clock. The default value is 0.
If the value of root delay or root disper is large, clock
synchronization may fail. A larger value indicates that the
packet takes a longer time to reach the local device from
the master reference clock. Therefore, the local device
cannot determine whether the time in the packet is
correct.

root disper System dispersion of the local end to the master

reference clock. The default value is 0.
If the value of root delay or root disper is large, clock
synchronization may fail. A larger value indicates that the
packet takes a longer time to reach the local device from
the master reference clock. Therefore, the local device
cannot determine whether the time in the packet is
correct.

reach Reachability mark, indicating the reachability to the clock

source.

sync dist Synchronization distance to the superior clock source.

This parameter evaluates and describes the clock source,
and NTP chooses the clock source with the shortest
synchronization distance.

sync state Synchronization state:

● 0: The clock has never been synchronized.
● 1: Frequency information is obtained from
configuration information.
● 2: The clock is set.
● 3: The clock is set, but the frequency is not yet
determined.
● 4: The clock is synchronized.
● 5: An error is found.

precision Precision of a peer clock.

version NTP version.

peer interface Peer interface.

reftime Reference timestamp.

orgtime Time when an NTP packet is sent for the last time.

rcvtime Time when an NTP packet is received for the last time.

xmttime Time when an NTP packet is forwarded for the last time.

filter delay Filter delays of the 8 packets received for the last time.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 857

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

filter offset Filter offsets of the 8 packets received for the last time.

filter disper Filter dispersions of the 8 packets received for the last
time.

reference clock The status of the reference clock, including:

status ● normal: indicates that the peer clock is reachable.
● abnormal: indicates that the peer clock is unreachable.

Related Topics
3.5.28 ntp-service unicast-peer
3.5.29 ntp-service unicast-server
3.5.11 ntp-service broadcast-client
3.5.12 ntp-service broadcast-server
3.5.21 ntp-service multicast-client
3.5.22 ntp-service multicast-server

3.5.4 display ntp-service statistics packet

Function
The display ntp-service statistics packet command displays statistics on NTP
packets.

Format
display ntp-service statistics packet [ ipv6 | peer [ ip-address [ vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name ] | ipv6 [ ipv6-address [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name ] ] ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ipv6 Displays statistics about global IPv6 NTP -
packets.
peer Displays statistics on an NTP symmetric -
peer.

ip-address Specifies the IP address of an NTP -

symmetric peer.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 858

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

vpn-instance vpn- Specifies a VPN instance related to an The value must be
instance-name NTP symmetric peer. an existing VPN
instance name.

ipv6 Displays the packet statistics on IPv6 -

peers.
ipv6-address Displays the NTP packet statistics on the -
specified IPv6 peer.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display ntp-service statistics packet command output includes the following
information, and can help you to debug NTP packets.

● Number of packets sent and received by an interface

● Number of packets failing authentication
● Number of dropped packets
● Reason for dropping an NTP packet last time

Example
# Display the statistics on NTP packets.
<HUAWEI> display ntp-service statistics packet
NTP IPv4 Packet Statistical Information
---------------------------------------
Sent : 100
Send failures : 10
Received : 1000
Processed : 800
Dropped : 200
Validity test failures : 50
Authentication failures : 20
Invalid packets : 50
Access denied : 50
Rate-limited :0
Processing delay : 50
Interface disabled :0
Max dynamic association reached : 0
Server disabled :0
Others :0
Last 2 packets drop reasons:
[2011-11-24 12:19:26-08:00] Global drop: NTP service disabled for interface.
[2011-11-24 12:20:30-08:00] Global drop: NTP service disabled for interface.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 859

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-65 Description of the display ntp-service statistics packet command

output

Item Description

NTP IPv4 Packet Statistics on IPv4 NTP packets.

Statistical
Information

Sent Number of packets sent.

Send failures Number of failures in sending packets.

Received Number of received packets.

Processed Number of processed packets.

Dropped Number of dropped packets.

Validity test failures Number of packets dropped because the packets fail to
pass the validity test.

Authentication Number of packets dropped because the packets fail to

failures pass the authentication.

Invalid packets Number of packets dropped because the packets are

invalid.

Access denied Number of packets dropped for lack of access control

authority.

Rate-limited Number of packets dropped due to rate limit.

Processing delay Number of packets dropped because processing of the

packets is delayed.

Interface disabled Number of packets dropped because the interface is

disabled.

Max dynamic Number of packets dropped because the maximum

association reached number of dynamic sessions is reached.

Server disabled Indicates the number of packets dropped as server

disabled.

Others Number of packets dropped for other reasons.

Last 2 packets drop Reason for dropping the last n packets, where the
reasons maximum value of n can be 10.

3.5.5 display ntp-service status

Function
The display ntp-service status command displays the status of NTP.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 860

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display ntp-service status

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To monitor or locate faults on the NTP service, run the display ntp-service status
command to obtain status information about the NTP service, such as the
synchronization status of the local clock and the stratum of the clock.

Example
# Display the status of the NTP service.
<HUAWEI> display ntp-service status
clock status: synchronized
clock stratum: 2
reference clock ID: LOCAL(0)
nominal frequency: 60.0002 Hz
actual frequency: 60.0002 Hz
clock precision: 2^18
clock offset: 0.0000 ms
root delay: 0.00 ms
root dispersion: 0.00 ms
peer dispersion: 10.00 ms
reference time: 15:51:36.259 UTC Apr 25 2012(C6179088.426490A3)
synchronization state: spike (clock will be set in 1010 secs)

Table 3-66 Description of the display ntp-service status command output

Item Description

clock status Indicates the clock status.

● synchronized: indicates that the local clock has been
synchronized with an NTP server or the reference clock.
● unsynchronized: indicates that the local clock has not
been synchronized with any NTP server.

clock stratum Indicates the stratum of the reference clock. The value
ranges from 1 to 15. A lower clock stratum indicates higher
clock precision. When the client gets synchronized to a
session, it is stratum becomes session stratum + 1.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 861

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

reference clock Indicates ID of the reference clock.

ID ● When the local clock has been synchronized with the
remote NTP server, ID of the reference clock shows IP
address of the remote server.
● When the local clock has been synchronized with the
reference clock, it shows ID of the reference clock.
● If the local clock is the reference clock, it shows "Local".

nominal Indicates the nominal frequency of the local clock, in Hz.

frequency

actual frequency Indicates the actual frequency of the local clock, in Hz.

clock precision Indicates the precision of the local clock.

clock offset Indicates the offset between the local clock and the NTP
server, in ms.

root delay Indicates the delay between the local clock and the master
reference clock, in ms.

root dispersion Indicates the dispersion between the local clock and the
master reference clock, in ms.

peer dispersion Indicates the dispersion between the local clock and the
peer clock, in ms.

reference time Indicates reference timestamp.

synchronization Indicates the synchronization status of the local clock:

state ● clock not set: Indicates the clock is not updated.
● frequency set by configuration: Indicates the clock
frequency is set by NTP configuration.
● clock set: Indicates the clock is set.
● clock set but frequency not determined: Indicates the
clock is set but the frequency is not determined.
● clock synchronized: Indicates that the clock is
synchronized.
● spike (clock will be set in XXX secs): Indicates a time
difference of more than 128 milliseconds is detected
between NTP server and client clock. The clock change
will take effect in XXX seconds.

3.5.6 display ntp-service trace

Function
The display ntp-service trace command displays the system to trace the path of
reference clock source from the local device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 862

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display ntp-service trace

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
When you run the display ntp-service trace command, summary information of
NTP servers for synchronizing time on the link from the local device to the
reference clock source can be displayed.

Example
# Display the summary of each passing NTP server when you trace the reference
clock source from the local device.
<HUAWEI> display ntp-service trace
server 127.0.0.1,stratum 5, offset 0.024099 s, synch distance 0.06337
server 192.168.1.2,stratum 4, offset 0.028786 s, synch distance 0.04575
server 192.168.2.2,stratum 3, offset 0.035199 s, synch distance 0.03075
server 192.168.10.1,stratum 2, offset 0.039855 s, synch distance 0.01096
refid 127.127.1.0

Table 3-67 Description of the display ntp-service trace command output

Item Description

server IP address of the NTP server.

stratum Stratum of the clock on the NTP server.

offset Offset to the superior reference clock.

synch distance Synchronization distance to the superior reference clock.

This parameter evaluates and describes the reference
clock and NTP chooses the reference clock with the
shortest synchronization distance.

refid Reference clock source.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 863

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.5.7 ntp-service
Function
The ntp-service command configures the maximum polling interval, the
timestamp difference between packets sent by the clock server and received by
the client, the maximum interval at which the clock of the client is synchronized.
The undo ntp-service command restores the default value.
By default, the maximum polling interval is 217s, the timestamp difference
between packets sent by the clock server and received by the client is 128ms, the
maximum interval at which the clock of the client is synchronized is 600 seconds.

Format
ntp-service { max-sys-poll max-sys-poll-value | spike-offset spike-offset-value |
sync-interval interval } *
undo ntp-service { max-sys-poll | spike-offset | sync-interval } *

NOTE

Only S5720EI, S5720HI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI support max-sys-poll max-sys-poll-value

and spike-offset spike-offset-value parameters.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
max-sys-poll max- Specifies the maximum The value is an integer
sys-poll-value polling rate. ranging from 6 to 17.
spike-offset spike- Specifies the timestamp The value is an integer
offset-value difference between packets ranging from 32 to 128, in
sent by the clock server and milliseconds.
received by the client.
sync-interval Sets the maximum interval The value is an integer, in
interval for clock synchronization. seconds. The value ranges
from 180 to 600.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The NTP polling interval is expressed in nth power of 2.(n is an integer.) For
example, run the ntp-service max-sys-poll 6 command, the system sends polling

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 864

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

packets every 64s. In other words, the device monitors the clock change on the
server every 64s.
To decrease the timestamp difference between packets sent by the clock server
and received by the client, run the ntp-service spike-offset command. If the time
offset of the server is greater than the configured timestamp difference, NTP sets
the system clock after the interval for time synchronization elapses.
When the clock of the server changes, the clock of the client is required to be
synchronized with the clock of the server. If the clock of the server is unstable, you
can run the ntp-service sync-interval command on the client to reduce the
interval.
The ntp-service max-distance command is applied to only the NTP client. The
NTP client calculates the distance with each NTP server, and compares the
calculated distance with the distance threshold configured using the ntp-service
max-distance command. If the calculated distance is longer than the threshold,
the NTP client does not synchronize the clock from this NTP server.
Precautions
The NTP poll interval must be an integer power of 2; therefore, the interval for the
client synchronization is configured as a value closest to the integer power of 2.
For example, if the interval configured by the user is 180 seconds, the client is
synchronized at any time after 128 seconds.
If you run the ntp-service command repeatedly, the latest configuration overrides
the previous configurations.

Example
# Sets the maximum interval to 200 seconds for clock synchronization.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service sync-interval 200

3.5.8 ntp-service access

Function
The ntp-service access command sets the access control authority of the local
NTP.
The undo ntp-service access command cancels the configured access control
authority.
By default, no access control authority is set.

Format
ntp-service access { peer | query | server | synchronization | limited } { acl-
number | ipv6 acl6-number } *
undo ntp-service access { peer | query | server | synchronization | limited }
[ ipv6 | all ]
undo ntp-service access { peer | query | server | synchronization | limited }
[ acl-number | ipv6 acl6-number ] *

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 865

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
peer Indicates maximum access authority. Both -
time request and control query can be
performed on the local NTP service, and the
local clock can be synchronized to the remote
server.
query Indicates minimum access. Only control query -
can be performed on the local NTP service.
server Indicates that server access and query are -
permitted. Both time request and control
query can be performed on the local NTP
service, but the local clock cannot be
synchronized to the remote server.
synchronization Indicates that only server access is permitted. -
Only time request can be performed on the
local NTP service.
limited When the rate of NTP packets exceeds the -
upper limit, the incoming NTP packets are
discarded.
acl-number Indicates the number of a basic ACL with IPv4 The value is
address specified. an integer
that ranges
from 2000 to
2999.
ipv6 acl6-number Indicates the number of an ACL with IPv6 The value is
address specified. an integer
that ranges
from 2000 to
2999.
all Indicates all access control authority. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Compared with NTP authentication, ntp-service access is simpler to ensure the

network security. When an access request reaches the local end, the access request
is successively matched with the access authority from the highest one to the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 866

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

lowest one. The first successfully matched access authority takes effect. The
matching order is: peer, server, synchronization, query and limited.

Depending on the access authority to be limited, run the command on different

devices accordingly. For details, see the following table.

Table 3-68 Configuration of the NTP access control authority

NTP Operating Mode Usage Scenario Device

Configured

Unicast NTP server/ The client is restricted from being Client

client mode synchronized to a server, so that the
client will not be synchronized to
an unreliable unicast NTP server on
the network.

Unicast NTP server/ The server is restricted from Server

client mode processing the synchronization time
request of the client, so that the
synchronization range of the server
is controlled.

NTP symmetric peer The two ends are restricted from Symmetric
mode being synchronized with each other active peer
to prevent an unreliable symmetric
passive peer on the network from
synchronizing the client.

NTP symmetric peer The symmetric passive peer is Symmetric

mode restricted from processing the time passive peer
request, so that the synchronization
range of the symmetric passive
peer is controlled.

NTP multicast mode The client is restricted from NTP multicast

synchronizing to the server to client
prevent an unreliable multicast NTP
server from synchronizing the
client.

NTP broadcast mode The client is restricted from being NTP broadcast
synchronized to a server, so that the client
client will not be synchronized to
an unreliable broadcast NTP server
on the network.

NTP manycast client The client is restricted from being NTP manycast
mode synchronized to a server. client

NTP manycast server The server is restricted from NTP manycast

mode processing the clock server
synchronization request sent by the
client.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 867

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The ntp-service access command ensures the security to the minimal extent. A
safer method is to perform identity authentication. See the ntp-service
authentication enable command for relevant configuration.

Precautions

Before configuring access control authority in ACL, check ACL rule configurations
as follows:
● If the ACL rule is set to permit or empty, a permit action will be performed.
● If the ACL rule is set to deny or the associated peer is not bound to the ACL
rule, a deny action will be performed.

Example
# Enable the peer matching ACL 2000 to perform time request, query control and
time synchronization on the local device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service access peer 2000

# Enable the server matching ACL 2002 to perform time request and query control
on the local device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service access server 2002

Related Topics
3.5.9 ntp-service authentication enable

3.5.9 ntp-service authentication enable

Function
The ntp-service authentication enable command enables identity authentication
for NTP.

The undo ntp-service authentication enable command disables the identity

authentication.

By default, identity authentication is disabled.

Format
ntp-service authentication enable

undo ntp-service authentication enable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 868

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
On networks requiring high security, authentication must be enabled for NTP. The
NTP client authenticates NTP servers using a password and synchronizes time with
only the authenticated server. This improves network security.

Example
# Enable identity authentication for NTP.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service authentication enable

Related Topics
3.5.10 ntp-service authentication-keyid
3.5.25 ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid

3.5.10 ntp-service authentication-keyid

Function
The ntp-service authentication-keyid command sets NTP authentication key.

The undo ntp-service authentication-keyid command removes NTP

authentication key.

By default, no authentication key is set.

Format
ntp-service authentication-keyid key-id authentication-mode { md5 | hmac-
sha256 } [ cipher ] password

undo ntp-service authentication-keyid key-id

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

key-id Indicates the key Key ID is an integer and ranges
number. from 1 to 4294967295.
authentication- Indicates MD5 -
mode md5 authentication mode.
authentication- Indicates HMAC- -
mode hmac- SHA256
sha256 authentication mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 869

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

cipher Indicates that the -
configured password
is displayed in cipher
text.

password Specifies the The keyword is a string of case

authentication sensitive characters, spaces
password in plain text supported.
or in cipher text. ● 1 to 255 characters in plain text.
● 20 to 392 characters in cipher
text.
When quotation marks are used
around the string, spaces are
allowed in the string.
NOTE
To improve password security, the
password must be a combination of at
least two of the following: digits, letters,
and special characters, and the
password length must be equal to or
larger than 6.
If a password contains a space, the
password must be placed into a pair of
double quotation marks. Only one pair
of double quotation marks can be used
for each password.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
On a network that requires high security, the NTP authentication must be enabled.
You can configure password authentication between client and server, which
guarantee the client only to synchronize with server successfully authenticated,
and improve network security. If the NTP authentication function is enabled, a
reliable key should be configured at the same time. Keys configured on the client
and the server must be identical.

NOTE

In NTP symmetric peer mode, the symmetric active peer functions as a client and the
symmetric passive peer functions as a server.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 870

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Follow-up Procedure
You can configure multiple keys for each device. After the NTP authentication key
is configured, you need to set the key to reliable using the ntp-service reliable
authentication-keyid command. If you do not set the key to reliable, the NTP key
does not take effect.
Precautions
To ensure security, you are advised to use the HMAC-SHA256 algorithm, which is
more secure, for NTP authentication.
You can configure a maximum of 1024 keys for each device.
If the NTP authentication key is a reliable key, it automatically becomes unreliable
when you delete the key. You do not need to run the undo ntp-service reliable
authentication-keyid command.

Example
# Set the HMAC-SHA256 identity authentication key. The key ID number is 10,
and the key is Betterkey.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode hmac-sha256 BetterKey

# Set authentication text to xyz123 in HMAC-SHA256 authentication with cipher

option.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode hmac-sha256 cipher xyz123

Related Topics
3.5.9 ntp-service authentication enable
3.5.25 ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid

3.5.11 ntp-service broadcast-client

Function
The ntp-service broadcast-client command configures the device to work in NTP
broadcast client mode.
The undo ntp-service broadcast-client command removes the device from the
NTP broadcast client mode.
By default, the device is not configured in the NTP broadcast client mode.

Format
ntp-service broadcast-client
undo ntp-service broadcast-client

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 871

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
On a synchronization subnet, when the IP address of a server or a symmetric peer
is not determined, or when the clocks on a large number of devices need to be
synchronized on the network, you can implement clock synchronization by
configuring the broadcast mode.
On a specified interface on the broadcast client, run the ntp-service broadcast-
client command to configure an interface on the local device to receive NTP
broadcast packets. When the local device automatically runs in the broadcast
client mode, the device can receive the synchronization packets sent by a
broadcast server. For the configuration of the broadcast server, see the ntp-service
broadcast-server command.
When the configuration is complete, you can run the display ntp-service sessions
command to obtain information about sessions between the broadcast server and
the local device.

Example
# Enable VLANIF100 to receive NTP broadcast messages.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service broadcast-client

# Enable GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to receive NTP broadcast messages.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service broadcast-client

Related Topics
3.5.12 ntp-service broadcast-server

3.5.12 ntp-service broadcast-server

Function
The ntp-service broadcast-server command configures the local device to work
in NTP broadcast server mode.
The undo ntp-service broadcast-server command removes the device from the
NTP broadcast server mode.
By default, the broadcast server mode is not configured.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 872

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
ntp-service broadcast-server [ version number | authentication-keyid key-id |
port port-number ] *
undo ntp-service broadcast-server [ version number | authentication-keyid
key-id | port port-number ] *

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
version number Indicates the NTP version The value is an integer that
number. ranges from 1 to 4. The
default value is 3.
If this parameter is not
specified, the version
number is a default value.

authentication- Indicates the authentication For NTPv1, NTPv2, and

keyid key-id key number used to transmit NTPv3, the value is an
a message to broadcast integer ranging from 1 to
clients. 4294967295. For NTPv4, the
value is an integer ranging
If this parameter is not from 1 to 65535.
specified, authentication is
not performed.

port port-number Specifies the number of the The value is 123 or an

port that transmits NTP integer ranging from 1025
broadcast packets. to 65535. The default value
is 123.

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
On a synchronization subnet, when the IP address of a server or a symmetric peer
is not determined, or when the clocks on a large number of devices need to be
synchronized on the network, you can implement clock synchronization by
configuring the broadcast mode.
On a specified interface on the broadcast server, run the ntp-service broadcast-
server command to configure an interface on the local device to send NTP
broadcast packets. When the local device automatically runs in the broadcast
server mode, the device can send synchronization packets to a broadcast client.
For the configuration of the broadcast client, see the ntp-service broadcast-client
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 873

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

When the configuration is complete, you can run the display ntp-service sessions
command to obtain information about sessions between the broadcast server and
the client.

Example
# Enable VLANIF100 to send NTP broadcast packets, with the NTP version as 2
and the key number as 4.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service broadcast-server version 2 authentication-keyid 4

# Enable GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to send NTP broadcast packets, with the NTP

version as 3 and the key number as 100.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service broadcast-server version 3 authentication-keyid 100

Related Topics
3.5.11 ntp-service broadcast-client

3.5.13 ntp-service disable

Function
The ntp-service disable command disables the IPv4 and IPv6 NTP function.

The undo ntp-service disable command enables the IPv4 and IPv6 NTP function.

By default, the NTP function is enabled.

Format
ntp-service [ ipv6 ] disable

undo ntp-service [ ipv6 ] disable

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ipv6 Indicates IPv6 NTP services. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 874

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Run the ntp-service disable or ntp-service ipv6 disable command in the system
view to disable the IPv4 or IPv6 NTP service function.
You can run the ntp-service disable command in either of the following
situations:
● The device does not need to synchronize clock with IPv4 or IPv6 external
servers or peers.
● The device does not need to provide reference clock source for IPv4 or IPv6
external clients.
Precautions
Disabling of NTP service will not delete the existing configurations.
After the NTP service is enabled, the system listens to IP address 0.0.0.0 by default.
That is, the system listens to all IP addresses, which is prone to security issues. It is
recommended that you run the ntp-service access { peer | query | server |
synchronization | limited } { acl-number | ipv6 acl6-number } * command to
configure access control permission on the local NTP service. You can also run the
ntp-service authentication enable command to configure NTP identify
authentication.

Example
# Disable the IPv4 NTP service.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service disable

# Disable the IPv6 NTP service.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service ipv6 disable

3.5.14 ntp-service discard

Function
The ntp-service discard command sets the minimum inter-packet interval and the
average inter-packet interval of NTP.
The undo ntp-service discard command cancels the minimum inter-packet
interval and the average inter-packet interval of NTP.
By default, the minimum inter-packet interval is set to the first power of 2 in
seconds, namely, 2 seconds, and the average inter-packet interval is set to the fifth
power of 2 in seconds, namely, 32 seconds.

Format
ntp-service discard { min-interval min-interval-val | avg-interval avg-interval-
val } *
undo ntp-service discard

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 875

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
min-interval Specifies the minimum inter-packet The value of min-
min-interval-val interval of NTP. interval-val is an
integer that ranges
The actual value of the minimum inter- from 1 to 8.
packet interval of NTP is the value
obtained by raising 2 to the power of
min-interval-val, expressed in seconds.

avg-interval Specifies the average inter-packet The value of avg-

avg-interval-val interval of NTP. interval-val is an
integer that ranges
The actual value of the average inter- from 1 to 8.
packet interval of NTP is the value
obtained by raising 2 to the power of
avg-interval-val, expressed in seconds.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The minimum inter-packet interval and the average inter-packet interval of NTP
are set using the ntp-service discard command. To generate kiss code RATE, we
need to set the minimum inter-packet interval and the average inter-packet
interval of NTP.

Example
# Set both the minimum inter-packet interval and the average inter-packet
interval of NTP to the fourth power of 2, expressed in seconds, namely, 16
seconds.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service discard min-interval 4 avg-interval 4

3.5.15 ntp-service in-interface disable

Function
The ntp-service in-interface disable command disables an interface from
receiving NTP packets.
The undo ntp-service in-interface disable command enables an interface to
receive NTP packets.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 876

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, an interface is enabled to receive NTP packets.

Format
ntp-service [ ipv6 ] in-interface disable

undo ntp-service [ ipv6 ] in-interface disable

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ipv6 Indicates IPv6 NTP services. -

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The undo ntp-service [ ipv6 ] in-interface disable command provides a method

for access control.

You can disable the interface connected to external devices from receiving NTP
packets in either of the following situations:
● An unreliable clock server exists on the interface. By default, all the interfaces
can receive NTP packets after NTP is enabled on the device. However, an
unreliable clock source makes NTP clock data inaccurate.
● The NTP clock data is modified when the interface is attacked maliciously.

Prerequisites

Before an interface is disabled from receiving IPv6 NTP packets, the IPv6 function
must be enabled on the interface.

Example
# Disable VLANIF100 from receiving NTP packets.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service in-interface disable

# Disable GigabitEthernet0/0/1 from receiving NTP packets.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service in-interface disable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 877

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.5.16 ntp-service kod-enable

Function
The ntp-service kod-enable command enables the KOD function.

The undo ntp-service kod-enable command disables the KOD functions.

By default, the KOD function is disabled.

Format
ntp-service kod-enable

undo ntp-service kod-enable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The Kiss-o'-Death (KOD) is a brand new access control technology put forward by
NTPv4, and the KOD is mainly used for a server to provide information, such as a
status report and access control, for a client. After the KOD function is enabled on
the server, the server sends the kiss code DENY or RATE to the client according to
the operating status of the system.

When the kiss code is generated in a specific situation, run the ntp-service kod-
enable command.

Follow-up Procedure

After the KOD function is enabled on the server, you can run the ntp-service
access limited command to enable control on the rate of incoming NTP packets.
When the rate of incoming NTP packets reaches the upper threshold, the server
sends the kiss code.

Example
# Enable the KOD function.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service kod-enable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 878

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.5.17 ntp-service manycast-client

Function
The ntp-service manycast-client command configures the NTP manycast client
mode.

The undo ntp-service manycast-client command cancels the NTP manycast

client mode.

By default, the NTP manycast client mode is disabled.

Format
ntp-service manycast-client [ ip-address | ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] ]
[ authentication-keyid key-id | ttl ttl-number | port port-number ] *

undo ntp-service manycast-client [ ip-address | ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] ]

[ authentication-keyid key-id | ttl ttl-number | port port-number ] *

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Specifies a manycast IPv4 The default IPv4 address
address, which is a class D is 224.0.1.1.
address.

ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] Specifies a manycast IPv6 The default IPv6 address

address. is FF0E::0101.

authentication-keyid Specifies the ID of the The value is an integer

key-id authentication key used for that ranges from 1 to
sending packets to a 65535.
manycast server.

ttl ttl-number Specifies the TTL value of a The value is an integer

manycast packet. ranges from 1 to 255.

port port-number Specifies the number of the The value is 123 or an

port that transmits NTP integer ranging from
manycast packets. 1025 to 65535. The
default value is 123.

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 879

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
The local device runs in the manycast client mode, and periodically sends
manycast packets to manycast servers. After the local device receives the reply
packet sent by a manycast server, the local device establishes dynamic C/S
association with the server.

NOTE
In the configuration of the manycast client, if the server address is not specified, 224.0.1.1
or FF0E::0101 is adopted as the server address by default.

Example
# Configure VLANIF100 to receive NTP manycast packets.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service manycast-client

# Configure GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to receive NTP manycast packets.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service manycast-client

Related Topics
3.5.22 ntp-service multicast-server

3.5.18 ntp-service manycast-server

Function
The ntp-service manycast-server command configures the NTP manycast server
mode.
The undo ntp-service manycast-server command cancels the NTP manycast
server mode.
By default, the NTP manycast server mode is not configured.

Format
ntp-service manycast-server [ ip-address | ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] ]
undo ntp-service manycast-server [ ip-address | ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Specifies a manycast IPv4 The default IPv4 address
address, which is a class D is 224.0.1.1.
address.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 880

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] Specifies a manycast IPv6 The default IPv6 address
address. is FF0E::0101.

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The manycast server responds to the manycast packets sent by the client. After
the manycast client receives the reply packet, the manycast client establishes
temporary association with the server and enters C/S mode.

Precautions

If the manycast IP address is not specified when the undo ntp-service manycast-
server command is run, the local device searches for the default IP address. In
IPv4 networks, the default IP address of the manycast server is 224.0.1.1. In IPv6
networks, the default IP address of the manycast server is FF0E::0101. If the local
device finds the default IP address, the undo ntp-service manycast-server
command takes effect; otherwise, the undo ntp-service manycast-server does
not take effect.

Example
# Configure VLANIF100 as an interface of the server. The interface is used for
responding to the manycast client request from a manycast address.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service manycast-server

# Configure GigabitEthernet0/0/1 as an interface of the server. The interface is

used for responding to the manycast client request from a manycast address.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service manycast-server

Related Topics
3.5.17 ntp-service manycast-client

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 881

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.5.19 ntp-service max-distance

Function
The ntp-service max-distance command configures the maximum distance
threshold value.

The undo ntp-service max-distance command restores the default value.

By default, the maximum distance threshold value is 1.

Format
ntp-service max-distance max-distance-value

undo ntp-service max-distance

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

max-distance- Indicates the maximum The value is an integer and ranges
value distance threshold value from 1 to 16, in seconds. The
in seconds. default value is 1.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
ntp-service max-distance command is used at the client side. At the client side,
NTP will calculate synchronization distance for each server and compare it with
synchronization distance threshold value. If the synchronization distance exceeds
synchronization distance threshold value, the client will not consider that server
for clock synchronization. This command is used in the calculation of
synchronization distance threshold value.

Example
# Set the NTP maximum distance to 16s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service max-distance 16

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 882

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.5.20 ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions

Function
The ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command sets the maximum dynamic
NTP sessions that can be set up.

The undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command restores the maximum

dynamic NTP sessions to the default value.

By default, up to 100 NTP dynamic sessions are allowed to be set up.

Format
ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions number

undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
number The number of dynamic NTP
Indicates the number of
sessions is an integer that ranges
dynamic sessions allowed to
from 0 to 100.The default value is
be set up.
100.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

A maximum of 128 sessions can be established on the same device running the
NTP service in the same period, including static and dynamic sessions. In both
unicast server/client mode and symmetric peer mode, command lines are used to
establish static sessions. The dynamic sessions are established in broadcast mode
or multicast mode.

Excessive dynamic sessions directly affect the establishment of static sessions. A

user can limit the number of local dynamic sessions solve this problem.

Precautions

When the number of local dynamic sessions on the device is limited,

● This command limits the number of only dynamic sessions, not static sessions.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 883

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● NTP dynamic sessions established are not affected. That is, when the number
of the dynamic sessions exceeds the limit, the dynamic sessions established
are not deleted, but a new dynamic session cannot be established.
● The limit on the number of local dynamic sessions allowed should be
configured on the client because the server does not record the number of the
established NTP sessions.

Example
# Set the maximum NTP dynamic sessions allowed to be set up to 50.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 50

3.5.21 ntp-service multicast-client

Function
The ntp-service multicast-client command configures the local device to work in
NTP multicast client mode.
The undo ntp-service multicast-client command cancels the NTP multicast client
mode.
By default, the NTP multicast client mode is not configured.

Format
ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address | ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] ]
undo ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address | ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Indicates the multicast IP The default IP address is
address. 224.0.1.1.
ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] Indicates the multicast IPv6 The default IPv6 address is
address. FF0E::0101.

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 884

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

To perform clock synchronization in multicast mode, you can use the ntp-service
multicast-client command to specify the current interface on the local device to
receive NTP multicast packets. The local device runs in the multicast client mode.

If the valid multicast server is configured, the local device gets synchronized with
the multicast server. The local device time is updated with the time of the server.

Follow-up Procedure

When the configuration is complete, run the display ntp-service sessions

command to obtain session information about the multicast server and the local
device.

NOTE

You can configure more than one multicast client with different multicast IP address on the
same interface. When multiple multicast clients are configured, the device selects the
optimal clock source by selecting a preferred clock.
You can configure a maximum of 1024 multicast clients on the local device, but a
maximum of 128 multicast clients can work simultaneously.

Example
# Configure VLANIF100 to receive NTP multicast packets. The multicast address of
the multicast packets is 224.0.1.2.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.2

# Configure GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to receive NTP multicast packets. The multicast

address of the multicast packets is 224.0.1.1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.1

Related Topics
3.5.22 ntp-service multicast-server
3.5.3 display ntp-service sessions

3.5.22 ntp-service multicast-server

Function
The ntp-service multicast-server command specifies an interface on the local
device to send NTP multicast packets. The local device runs in the multicast server
mode.

The undo ntp-service multicast-server command cancels the NTP multicast

server mode.

By default, the multicast server mode is not configured.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 885

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ] [ version number | authentication-
keyid key-id | ttl ttl-number | port port-number ] *
ntp-service multicast-server ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] [ authentication-keyid key-id
| ttl ttl-number | port port-number ] *
undo ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ] [ version number |
authentication-keyid key-id | ttl ttl-number | port port-number ] *
undo ntp-service multicast-server ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] [ authentication-keyid
key-id | ttl ttl-number | port port-number ] *

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Indicates the multicast IP The default address is
address. 224.0.1.1.
ipv6 [ ipv6-address ] Indicates the multicast IPv6 The default IPv6 address is
address. FF0E::0101.

version number Indicates the NTP version The value is an integer that
number. ranges from 1 to 4. The
default value is 3.
If this parameter is not
specified, the version
number is a default value.

authentication- Indicates the authentication The value is an integer. It

keyid key-id key ID used when sending ranges from 1 to
messages to the multicast 4294967295 when the NIP
clients. version number is 1, 2, or 3,
and ranges from 1 to 65535
If this parameter is not when the version number is
specified, authentication is 4 or the specified remote
not performed. server uses an IPv6 address.

ttl ttl-number Indicates the life span of the The ttl number is an integer
multicast packet. that ranges from 1 to 255.
The default value is 255.
If this parameter is not
specified, the life span of the
multicast packet is a default
value.

port port-number Specifies the number of port The value is 123 or an

that transmits NTP multicast integer ranging from 1025
packets. to 65535. The default value
is 123.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 886

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
Interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To perform clock synchronization in the multicast mode, run the ntp-service
multicast-server command to specify the current interface on the local device to
send NTP multicast packets. The local device runs in the multicast server mode,
and functions as the multicast server to periodically send multicast packets to the
multicast client.
Follow-up Procedure
When the configuration is complete, run the display ntp-service sessions
command to obtain session information about the multicast server and the local
device.

NOTE

You can configure a maximum of 128 multicast servers on the local device.

Example
# Configure VLANIF100 to send NTP multicast packets. The multicast IPv4 address
is 224.0.1.1, the authentication key ID is 4 and the NTP version number is 3.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface vlanif 100
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ip address 10.1.1.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif100] ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.1 authentication-keyid 4 version 3

# Configure GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to send NTP multicast packets. The multicast

IPv4 address is 224.0.1.1, the authentication key ID is 4 and the NTP version
number is 3.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo portswitch
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.1 authentication-keyid 4 version 3

Related Topics
3.5.21 ntp-service multicast-client
3.5.3 display ntp-service sessions

3.5.23 ntp-service port

Function
The ntp-service port command changes the number of the port that sends NTP
packets.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 887

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The undo ntp-service port command restores the default port number.

By default, port 123 sends NTP packets.

Format
ntp-service port port-value

undo ntp-service port

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
port-value Specifies the number of the The value is an integer ranging from
port that sends NTP 1025 to 65535.
packets. NOTE
The port-value can be set to the default
port 123.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
To improve security of network packets, run the ntp-service port command to
configure the number of the port that sends NTP packets. Therefore, the user
firewall filters packets based on the port number.

Example
# Set the number of the port that sends NTP packets to 5000.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service port 5000

3.5.24 ntp-service refclock-master

Function
The ntp-service refclock-master command sets the local clock to be the NTP
primary clock that provides the synchronizing time for other devices.

The undo ntp-service refclock-master command cancels the configuration of the

NTP primary clock.

By default, no NTP primary clock is specified.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 888

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
ntp-service refclock-master [ ip-address ] [ stratum ]
undo ntp-service refclock-master [ ip-address ] [ stratum ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Specifies the IP address of the The value of ip-address is
local reference clock. 127.127.1.u, and u ranges from 0
to 3, which represents the
When no IP address is assigned, number of the selected local
the local clock whose IP address clock.
is 127.127.1.0 is set as the default
NTP primary clock.

stratum Specifies the stratum of the NTP The value of the stratum is an
primary clock. integer that ranges from 1 to 15.
The default value is 8. Timer is
If this parameter is not specified, accurate if the stratum value is
the stratum is a default value. small.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The local clock is the clock of the device itself. Run the ntp-service refclock-
master command to set the local clock as the NTP primary clock that provides the
synchronization time for other devices.
In NTP, the time synchronization in an NTP synchronization subnet is performed
from a smaller level to a larger level, that is, from the 1st level to the 15th level.
An authoritative clock is used as a reference time source for the synchronization
subnet, and is located at the top of the synchronization subnet. The authoritative
clock is stratum0. The current authoritative clock is mostly a Radio Clock or the
Global Positioning System. The time of the authoritative clock is synchronized
through the broadcast UTC time code other than NTP.
Precautions
A device on the network can perform clock synchronization in the following
manners.
● Synchronizing with the local clock: The local clock is used as the reference
clock.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 889

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● Synchronizing with another device on the network: This device is used as an

NTP clock server to provide a reference clock for the local end.
If both manners are configured, the device selects an optimal clock source through
selecting a preferred clock. That is, clocks determined in the two manners are
compared to determine which clock is a lower stratum. The clock of a lower
stratum is the preferred clock source.

Example
# Set the local clock to be the NTP primary clock, the stratum of which set to 3.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service refclock-master 3

3.5.25 ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid

Function
The ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command specifies the
authentication key to be reliable.
The undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command cancels the
current setting.
By default, no authentication key is specified to be reliable.

Format
ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid key-id
undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid key-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
key-id Indicates the key Key ID is an integer and ranges from 1 to
number. 4294967295.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
If the identity authentication is enabled, this command is used to specify that one
or more keys are reliable. That is, the client can only be synchronized with the
server that provides the reliable key. The client cannot be synchronized with the
server that provides unreliable keys.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 890

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Enable the identity authentication in NTP and adopt the HMAC-SHA256
encryption mode with key number as 37 and the key as BetterKey. Specify the key
to be reliable.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service authentication enable
[HUAWEI] ntp-service authentication-keyid 37 authentication-mode hmac-sha256 cipher BetterKey
[HUAWEI] ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 37

Related Topics
3.5.9 ntp-service authentication enable
3.5.10 ntp-service authentication-keyid

3.5.26 ntp-service server disable

Function
The ntp-service server disable command disables NTP server function.

The undo ntp-service server disable command enables NTP server function.

By default, NTP server function is disabled.

Format
ntp-service [ ipv6 ] server disable

undo ntp-service [ ipv6 ] server disable

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ipv6 Indicates IPv6 NTP services. -

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
For the security purpose, NTP server function can be disabled when the device
does not need to act as a server.

By default, NTP server functionality is disabled. To enable NTP server functionality,

first configure other NTP functions, such as a clock source, and then run the undo
ntp-service server disable command to make the NTP server function take effect.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 891

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

If you run the undo ntp-service [ ipv6 ] server disable command alone, the NTP
server function cannot take effect.

Example
# Disable IPv4 NTP server function.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service server disable

# Disable IPv6 NTP server function.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service ipv6 server disable

3.5.27 ntp-service source-interface

Function
The ntp-service source-interface command specifies the local source interface
that sends NTP packets.
The undo ntp-service source-interface command cancels the current setting.
By default, the local source interface is not specified for sending NTP packets. The
local source interface is automatically determined based on the route.

Format
ntp-service [ ipv6 ] source-interface interface-type interface-number [ vpn-
instance vpn-instance-name ]
undo ntp-service [ ipv6 ] source-interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
[ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ipv6 Indicates that the network type of -
the local source interface is IPv6.
interface-type Indicates the local interface that -
interface-number sends the NTP packets.
vpn-instance vpn- Indicates the name of the VPN The value must be
instance-name instance. an existing VPN
instance name.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 892

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Configure the local source interface for sending/receiving NTP packets, so that the
another interface on the device cannot receive the NTP response packets, which is
convenient for a user to subsequently deploy a flow control policy. If the interface
is not specified, the source IP address of the NTP packets is selected according to
the route.

If you have specified vpn-instance when configuring a source IP address with this
command, the source IP address can be used only by the NTP server mapping the
specified VPN instance instead of other VPN instances or NTP servers that do not
have VPN instances specified.

Precautions

For broadcast, multicast, and manycast modes, NTP service is implemented on the
specified interface, and this interface is the source interface. Therefore, the ntp-
service source-interface command is invalid for broadcast, multicast, and
manycast modes.

Example
# Specify VLANIF100 as the source interface to send all the NTP packets.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service source-interface vlanif 100

3.5.28 ntp-service unicast-peer

Function
The ntp-service unicast-peer command configures NTP peer mode.

The undo ntp-service unicast-peer command cancels the NTP peer mode.

By default, the NTP peer mode is not configured.

Format
ntp-service unicast-peer ip-address [ version number | authentication-keyid
key-id | source-interface interface-type interface-number | preference | vpn-
instance vpn-instance-name | maxpoll max-number | minpoll min-number |
preempt | port port-number ] *

ntp-service unicast-peer ipv6 ipv6-address [ authentication-keyid key-id |

source-interface interface-type interface-number | preference | vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name | maxpoll max-number | minpoll min-number | preempt |
port port-number ] *

undo ntp-service unicast-peer { ip-address | ipv6 ipv6-address } [ vpn-instance

vpn-instance-name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 893

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Indicates the IPv4 address of The parameter ip-address is
the remote peer. a host address and cannot
be the broadcast address,
the multicast address or
the IP address of a
reference clock.
ipv6 ipv6-address Indicates the IPv6 address of The value of ipv6-address is
the remote server. a unicast address, but
cannot be a broadcast
address, multicast address,
or reference clock's IP
address.
version number Indicates the NTP version The version number is an
number. If this parameter is integer that ranges from 1
not specified, the default to 4. The default value is 3.
version number is used.
authentication- Indicates the authentication The key ID is an integer
keyid key-id key ID used when that ranges from 1 to
transmitting messages to the 4294967295 when the NTP
remote peer. If this parameter version number is from 1
is not specified, to 3. When the NTP version
authentication is not number is 4, the key ID is
performed. integer that ranges from 1
to 65535. When the remote
server address is an IPv6
address, the key ID is an
integer that ranges from 1
to 65535.

maxpoll max- Indicates the maximum NTP The value is an integer that
number poll interval. ranges from 10 to 17.
minpoll min- Indicates the minimum NTP The value is an integer that
number poll interval. ranges from 3 to 6.
source-interface Indicates the source interface -
interface-type from which the symmetric
interface-number active end sends NTP packets
to the symmetric passive end.
The source IP address of the
NTP packets is the IP address
of this interface.
vpn-instance vpn- Specifies the VPN instance The value must be an
instance-name name. existing VPN instance
name.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 894

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

preference Indicates the remote peer as -
the preferred one. By default,
the remote peer is not
preferred.
preempt Indicates that the symmetric -
peer is in preemption mode. If
any error, for example, an
authentication failure, is
detected on the association,
the symmetric peer in
preemption mode is marked
as unavailable for selection.
However, when no other
symmetric peers are available
for selection, this symmetric
peer is marked as available.
port port-number Specifies the port number to The value is 123 or an
transmit NTP unicast integer ranging from 1025
message. to 65535. The default value
is 123.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When the clock of a device on the network needs to be synchronized in symmetric

peer mode, you can run the ntp-service unicast-peer command to configure a
remote node as the symmetric peer of the device. The local device runs in
symmetric active peer mode. In this mode, the device and the remote peer can
synchronize clock with each other.

Precautions

● If the same server is specified in at least two commands that are run in
sequence to configure the NTP server mode, during the configuration
restoration, the last run command takes effect. For example, the ntp-service
unicast-peer 10.10.1.1 source-interface vlanif 10 command and ntp-service
unicast-peer 10.10.1.1 command are run in sequence. During the
configuration restoration, only the ntp-service unicast-peer 10.10.1.1
command takes effect.
● A maximum of 128 peers can be configured for the local device. The optimal
symmetric peer is selected as the synchronization source.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 895

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● When a PE is synchronized to another PE or CE in a VPN, the parameter vpn-

instance vpn-instance-name needs to be specified.
● When you run the command with a specified vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name, the configuration of the NTP symmetric passive peer with the IP
address ip-address on the VPN is canceled. If vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name is not specified, the configuration of the NTP symmetric passive peer
with the IP address ip-address on the public network.

Example
# Configure the peer 10.10.1.1 to provide the synchronizing time for the local
device. The local device can also provide synchronizing time for the peer. The
version number is 3. The IP address of the NTP packets is the address of
VLANIF100.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service unicast-peer 10.10.1.1 version 3 source-interface vlanif 100

3.5.29 ntp-service unicast-server

Function
The ntp-service unicast-server command configures the NTP server mode.
The undo ntp-service unicast-server command cancels the NTP server mode.
By default, the NTP server mode is not configured.

Format
ntp-service unicast-server ip-address [ version number | authentication-keyid
key-id | source-interface interface-type interface-number | preference | vpn-
instance vpn-instance-name | maxpoll max-number | minpoll min-number |
burst | iburst | preempt | port port-number ] *
ntp-service unicast-server ipv6 ipv6-address [ authentication-keyid key-id |
source-interface interface-type interface-number | preference | vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name | maxpoll max-number | minpoll min-number | burst | iburst
| preempt | port port-number ] *
undo ntp-service unicast-server { ip-address | ipv6 ipv6-address } [ vpn-instance
vpn-instance-name ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Indicates the IPv4 address of the The value of ip-address
remote server. must be an IP address of
a host, but cannot be a
broadcast address,
multicast address, or
reference clock's IP
address.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 896

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

version number Indicates the NTP version The version number is
number. If this parameter is not an integer that ranges
specified, the default version from 1 to 4. By default,
number is used. the version number is 3.
authentication- Indicates the authentication key The key ID is an integer
keyid key-id ID used when messages are that ranges from 1 to
transmitted to the remote server. 4294967295 when the
If this parameter is not specified, NTP version number is
authentication is not performed. from 1 to 3. When the
NTP version number is
4, the key ID is an
integer that ranges from
1 to 65535. When the
remote server address is
an IPv6 address, the key
ID is an integer that
ranges from 1 to 65535.

maxpoll max- Indicates the maximum NTP poll The value is an integer
number interval. that ranges from 10 to
17.

minpoll min- Indicates the minimum NTP poll The value is an integer
number interval. that ranges from 3 to 6.

source-interface Indicates the source interface -

interface-type from which the unicast client
interface-number sends NTP packets to the unicast
server. The source IP address of
the NTP packets is the IP address
of this interface.
vpn-instance vpn- Specifies the VPN instance name. The value must be an
instance-name existing VPN instance
name.
preference Indicates the remote server as -
the preferred one. By default, the
remote server is not preferred.
burst Indicates that a burst of packets -
is sent within a fixed poll period.
When the poll interval is long,
this method helps measure the
time jitter.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 897

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

iburst Indicates that the device sends a -
burst of packets when receiving a
response of an unreachable
server. This parameter can be
used to accelerate
synchronization.
preempt Indicates that the server is in -
preemption mode. If any error,
for example, an authentication
failure, is detected on the
association, the server marked as
"preempt" is marked as
unavailable for selection.
However, the server is marked as
available for selection when no
other servers are available for
selection on the network and no
error occurs on the association of
the server.
port port-number Specifies the port number to The value is 123 or an
transmit NTP unicast message. integer ranging from
1025 to 65535. The
default value is 123.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When the clock of a device on the network needs to be synchronized in unicast

server/client mode, the command can be run, and the remote server specified by
ip-address or ipv6-address is used as the local clock server. The local device runs in
client mode. In this mode, the local client can be synchronized to the remote
server, but the remote server cannot be synchronized to the local client.

When the ntp-service unicast-server command is run, you can also configure the
mode used for the remote server, such as the NTP version, authentication key, and
the polling interval.

Precautions

● A maximum of 128 servers can be configured for the local device. The optimal
symmetric peer is selected as the synchronization source.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 898

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● If the local device works in the client mode, the local device can only be
synchronized with the remote server but the remote server cannot be
synchronized with the local device.
● When a PE is synchronized to another PE or CE in a VPN, the parameter vpn-
instance vpn-instance-name needs to be specified.
● When the undo ntp-service unicast-server command is run, if the parameter
vpn-instance vpn-instance-name is specified, cancel the configuration of the
NTP server with the IP address ip-address or ipv6-address in the VPN. If the
parameter vpn-instance vpn-instance-name is not specified, cancel the
configuration of the NTP server with the IP address ip-address or ipv6-address
in the public network.
● Before deleting a VPN instance, check whether the VPN instance is bound to
the NTP server. This confirmation is to ensure that the changed configuration
meets users' requirements. For example:
a. Specify an NTP server and bind a VPN instance to the NTP server. You can
view the following configurations:
<HUAWEI> display current-configuration | begin ntp
ntp-service unicast-server 10.1.1.1 vpn-instance vpn2
ntp-service refclock-master

b. If the VPN instance named vpn2 is deleted, the VPN instance bound to
the NTP server is also deleted.
<HUAWEI> display current-configuration | be ntp
ntp-service unicast-server 10.1.1.1
ntp-service refclock-master

Example
# Configure the server 10.10.1.1 to provide the synchronizing time for the local
device. The NTP version number is 3.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service unicast-server 10.10.1.1 version 3

# Configure the server 10.10.1.1 with VPN instance "abc" to provide the
synchronizing time for the local device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] ntp-service unicast-server 10.10.1.1 vpn-instance abc

3.5.30 reset ntp-service statistics packet

Function
The reset ntp-service statistics packet command clears statistics on NTP packets.

Format
reset ntp-service statistics packet [ ipv6 | peer [ ip-address [ vpn-instance vpn-
instance-name ] | ipv6 [ ipv6-address [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] ] ] ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 899

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ipv6 Clears the statistics about global IPv6 -
NTP packets.
peer Clears statistics related to NTP peers. -
ip-address Specifies the IP address of an NTP peer. -
vpn-instance vpn- Specifies the VPN instance bound to an The value must
instance-name NTP peer. be an existing
VPN instance
name.
ipv6 Clears the packet statistics on IPv6 -
peers.
ipv6-address Clears the NTP packet statistics on the -
specified IPv6 peer.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When debugging NTP, you can use this command to clear the statistics on NTP.

NOTICE

The statistics on NTP cannot be recovered after being cleared. Confirm before you
delete the statistics.

Example
# Clear statistics on NTP packets.
<HUAWEI> reset ntp-service statistics packet

# Clear statistics on NTP peers.

<HUAWEI> reset ntp-service statistics packet peer

3.6 Energy-saving Configuration Commands

3.6.1 Command Support
3.6.2 als enable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 900

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.6.3 als restart

3.6.4 als restart mode manual
3.6.5 als restart pulse-interval
3.6.6 als restart pulse-width
3.6.7 display als configuration
3.6.8 display power manage cycle
3.6.9 display power manage mode
3.6.10 display power manage power-information
3.6.11 display power manage sleep configuration
3.6.12 display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all
3.6.13 energy-efficient-ethernet enable
3.6.14 port-auto-sleep enable
3.6.15 set power manage awaken-mode fast
3.6.16 set power manage cycle
3.6.17 set power manage interval
3.6.18 set power manage mode
3.6.19 set power manage non-awaken-port
3.6.20 sleep time-range
3.6.21 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap

3.6.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

3.6.2 als enable

Function
The als enable command enables ALS on an interface.
The undo als enable command disables ALS on an interface.
By default, ALS is disabled on an interface.

Format
als enable
undo als enable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 901

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The constraints on ALS are as follows:
● Only optical interfaces support ALS. Electrical interfaces do not support ALS.
● When optical interfaces transmit services unidirectionally, they do not support
ALS.
● When the copper cable or copper module is used on the optical port, the ALS
function is not supported. In addition, after the copper cable is inserted, all
the ALS-related commands configured on this interface are cleared.

Example
# Enable ALS on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als enable

Related Topics
3.6.7 display als configuration

3.6.3 als restart

Function
The als restart command manually restarts the laser of an interface.

Format
als restart

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view, port group view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 902

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can run this command to manually restart the laser of an optical module.
After the optical link recovers, the laser is started after a certain interval if the
restart mode is automatic restart. To start the laser immediately after the optical
link recovers, set the restart mode of the laser to manual restart and run the als
restart command. If this command is not executed, the laser automatically sends
a pulse after receiving a pulse from the remote end.
Prerequisites
ALS has been enabled on the interface using the 3.6.2 als enable command and
the restart mode of the laser has been set to manual restart mode using the 3.6.4
als restart mode manual command.
Precautions
This command cannot be executed on an interface if the interface has been added
to an interface protection group and is in Protect state.

Example
# Restart lasers on GigabitEthernet0/0/1 manually.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als enable
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als restart mode manual
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als restart

Related Topics
3.6.2 als enable
3.6.4 als restart mode manual

3.6.4 als restart mode manual

Function
The als restart mode manual command sets the mode of restarting the laser of
the optical module to manual.
The undo als restart mode manual command restores the mode of restarting the
laser of the optical module to automatic.
By default, a laser works in automatic restart mode.

Format
als restart mode manual
undo als restart mode manual

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 903

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The laser of an optical module works in automatic restart mode or manual restart
mode.
● In automatic restart mode, the laser sends pulses at the interval set using the
3.6.5 als restart pulse-interval command to detect whether the link is
recovered. The pulse width is set through the 3.6.6 als restart pulse-width
command.
● In manual restart mode, you must manually start the laser using the 3.6.3 als
restart command so that the laser can send a pulse. The ALS pulse width is
set using the 3.6.6 als restart pulse-width command.
If the fiber link recovery is detected in time, you can use the manual restart mode
so that the laser can send pulses immediately. Therefore, data communication can
be recovered rapidly.

Example
# Configure lasers on GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to work in manual restart mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als restart mode manual

Related Topics
3.6.2 als enable
3.6.3 als restart
3.6.5 als restart pulse-interval
3.6.6 als restart pulse-width
3.6.7 display als configuration

3.6.5 als restart pulse-interval

Function
The als restart pulse-interval command sets the ALS pulse interval for the laser
of an optical module.
The undo als restart pulse-interval command restores the default ALS pulse
interval of the laser of an optical module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 904

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, the ALS pulse interval of the laser is 100s.

Format
als restart pulse-interval pulse-interval
undo als restart pulse-interval

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
pulse-interval Specifies the ALS pulse The value is an integer that ranges
interval of the laser. from 100 to 20000, in seconds.

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
In automatic restart mode, the ALS pulse interval affects the frequency of
detecting the LOS on the interface. A long ALS pulse interval is beneficial for
energy saving, but the fiber link recovery cannot be detected in a timely manner.
In contrary, a short ALS pulse interval wastes power but the fiber link recovery can
be detected immediately.

Example
# Set the ALS pulse interval of lasers on GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to 150s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als restart pulse-interval 150

Related Topics
3.6.2 als enable
3.6.7 display als configuration

3.6.6 als restart pulse-width

Function
The als restart pulse-width command sets the ALS pulse width for the laser of an
optical module.
The undo als restart pulse-width command restores the default ALS pulse width
for the laser of an optical module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 905

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, the ALS pulse width of the laser is 2s.

Format
als restart pulse-width pulse-width
undo als restart pulse-width

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
pulse-width Specifies the ALS pulse width The value is an integer that ranges
of the laser. from 2 to 200, in seconds.

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The ALS pulse width refers to the period between rising edges of pulses. A short
ALS pulse width is beneficial for energy saving, but the fiber link recovery cannot
be detected immediately. In contrary, a long ALS pulse width consumes more
power but the fiber link recovery can be detected immediately.

Example
# Set the ALS pulse width on GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to 3s.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] als restart pulse-width 3

Related Topics
3.6.2 als enable
3.6.7 display als configuration

3.6.7 display als configuration

Function
The display als configuration command displays ALS configuration.

Format
display als configuration slot slot-id

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 906

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

display als configuration interface interface-type interface-number

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the slot ID if stacking is The value is 0 if
not configured. Specifies the stack stacking is not
ID if stacking is configured. configured; the value
ranges from 0 to 8 if
stacking is configured.

interface Displays ALS configuration on a -

interface-type specified interface.
interface-number
● interface-type specifies the
interface type.
● interface-number specifies the
interface number.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
If an optical interface connects to a high-speed cable, this command does not
have command output.

Example
# Display ALS configuration on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> display als configuration interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface ALS Laser Restart Interval(s) Width(s)
Status Status Mode
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 Disable On Auto 100 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-69 Description of the display als configuration command output

Item Description

Interface Interface type and number.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 907

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

ALS Status Whether ALS is enabled.

● Enable: ALS is enabled.
● Disable: ALS is disabled.
ALS is enabled using the 3.6.2 als
enable command.

Laser Status Status of the laser on the interface.

The value can be:
● Off: The laser is shut down.
● On: The laser is turned on.
● --: No optical module is present on
the interface.

Restart Mode ALS restart mode.

● Auto: automatic restart mode.
● Manual: manual restart mode.
The ALS restart mode is set to manual
using the 3.6.4 als restart mode
manual command.

Interval(s) ALS pulse interval, expressed in

seconds. The ALS pulse interval is set
using the 3.6.5 als restart pulse-
interval command.

Width(s) ALS pulse width, expressed in seconds.

The ALS pulse width is set using the
3.6.6 als restart pulse-width
command.

Related Topics
3.6.2 als enable
3.6.4 als restart mode manual
3.6.5 als restart pulse-interval
3.6.6 als restart pulse-width

3.6.8 display power manage cycle

Function
The display power manage cycle command displays the interval for updating
power consumption data.

Format
display power manage cycle

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 908

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The average power consumption of a device is the average power consumption
within a period of time. You can use the display power manage cycle command
to view the interval for calculating the average power consumption.

Example
# Display the interval for updating power consumption data.
<HUAWEI> display power manage cycle
3 : 1 hour

Table 3-70 Description of the display power manage cycle command output
Item Description

3 (1 hour) The interval for updating power

consumption data is 1 hour. You can
set the interval to the following values:
● 1 : 15 minutes
● 2 : 30 minutes
● 3 : 1 hour
● 4 : 1 day
● 5 : 1 week
● 6 : 1 month (30 days)
To set the interval for updating power
consumption data, use the 3.6.16 set
power manage cycle command.

Related Topics
3.6.16 set power manage cycle

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 909

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.6.9 display power manage mode

Function
The display power manage mode command displays the energy-saving mode of
the device.

Format
display power manage mode

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display power manage mode command to check the currently
configured energy-saving mode of the device.

Example
# Display the energy-saving mode of the device.
<HUAWEI> display power manage mode
2 (Standard mode)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 910

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-71 Description of the display power manage mode command output

Item Description

2 (Standard mode) Standard energy-saving mode. The

device supports the following energy-
saving modes:
● 1. User-defined mode: user-defined
energy-saving mode.
● 2. Standard mode: standard energy-
saving mode
● 3. Basic mode: basic energy-saving
mode
● 4. Deep mode: depth energy-saving
mode
● 5. Standby mode.
NOTE
The device does not support the user-
defined mode.
Only the S5720-16X-PWH-LI supports the
standby mode.
You can set the energy-saving mode
using the 3.6.18 set power manage
mode command.

Related Topics
3.6.18 set power manage mode

3.6.10 display power manage power-information

Function
The display power manage power-information command displays the power
consumption information of a device.

Format
display power manage power-information

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 911

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display power manage power-information command enables you to check
the system power consumption information, including the accumulative power
consumption, average power, real-time power, rated power, and power threshold
of the device.

Example
# Display the system power consumption information.
<HUAWEI> display power manage power-information
The information of net element power:
--------------------------------------------------
The total power consumption (Joule) : 1000
The average power consumption (mW) : 20000
The current power consumption (mW) : 20000
The rated power (mW) : 433000
The threshold of power (mW) : 433000
--------------------------------------------------

Table 3-72 Description of the display power manage power-information

command output

Item Description

The information System power consumption information.

of net element
power

The total power Accumulative power consumption, in Joule.

consumption This field displays NA when the device type is S1720GFR,
(Joule) S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720X, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E,
S1720X-E, S2720EI, S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, S5720LI,
S5720S-LI, S5710-X-LI, S5720S-SI and S5720SI.
NOTE
The accumulative power consumption is stored in the device
memory and will not be lost when the device is powered off. When
the device is running, power consumption is accumulated once every
15 minutes. The accumulated power consumption and accumulative
power consumption in the memory are added and recorded in the
memory once every 24 hours. If there is no accumulative power
consumption in the memory, this field displays 0. If the device is
powered off within 24 hours after starting, the power consumption
accumulated within 24 hours is not added to the accumulative
power consumption in the memory.

The average Average power of the system, in mW.

power This field displays NA when the device type is S1720GFR,
consumption S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720X, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E,
(mW) S1720X-E, S2720EI, S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, S5720LI,
S5720S-LI, S5710-X-LI, S5720S-SI and S5720SI.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 912

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

The current Real-time power of the system, in mW.

power This field displays NA when the device type is S1720GFR,
consumption S1720GW, S1720GWR, S1720X, S1720GW-E, S1720GWR-E,
(mW) S1720X-E, S2720EI, S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, S5720LI,
S5720S-LI, S5710-X-LI, S5720S-SI and S5720SI.

The rated power Rated power of the system, in mW.

(mW)

The threshold of Power threshold of the power supply unit, in mW. The value
power (mW) is the rated power supplied to the device by power supply
units.
When there are two power supply units on the device, they
work in redundancy mode to supply power to the system.
The supplied power is not the accumulated power of the
two power supply units. When the rated power of both
power supply units can be obtained, this field displays the
smaller rated power. If the rated power of one power supply
unit cannot be obtained, this field displays the obtained
rated power. If the rated power of both power supply units
cannot be obtained, this field displays the system rated
power.

3.6.11 display power manage sleep configuration

Function
The display power manage sleep configuration command displays device
dormancy information.

NOTE

The following product models support the sleep mode:

● S5710-X-LI
● S5700S-LI: S5700S-28P-LI-AC, S5700S-52P-LI-AC, S5700S-28X-LI-AC, and S5700S-52X-
LI-AC
● S5700LI: S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC,
S5700-52P-LI-DC, S5700-28X-LI-AC, S5700-28X-LI-DC, S5700-52X-LI-AC, S5700-52X-LI-
DC, and S5701-28X-LI-AC
● S5720SI: S5720-28P-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-DC, S5720-52P-SI-AC,
S5720-52X-SI-DC, and S5720-52X-SI-AC
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52P-SI-
AC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC, and S5720S-52X-SI-AC

Format
display power manage sleep configuration

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 913

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display power manage sleep configuration command shows device
dormancy information, including the time range, period during which the
awakening port status is detected continuously, awakening mode, and non-
awakening ports.

Example
# Display the device dormancy configuration.
<HUAWEI> display power manage sleep configuration
The device sleep function status: enable
The device sleep time-range: night-time
-----------------------------------------------
Current time is 16:19:45 5-14-2012 Monday

Time-range: night-time ( Inactive )

20:00 to 00:00 working-day
00:00 to 08:00 working-day
-----------------------------------------------
The awaken port state check interval (minutes): 20(default)
The configuration of awaken mode: normal
The configuration of non-awaken port:
-----------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 GigabitEthernet0/0/2
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 GigabitEthernet0/0/4
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 GigabitEthernet0/0/6
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 GigabitEthernet0/0/8
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 GigabitEthernet0/0/10
-----------------------------------------------

Table 3-73 Description of the display power manage sleep configuration

command output

Item Description

The device sleep Device dormancy mode.

function status ● disable: The device dormancy function is disabled. That is,
the device energy-saving mode configured using the set
power manage mode command is not 4.
● enable: The device dormancy function is enabled. That is,
the device energy-saving mode configured using the set
power manage mode command is 4.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 914

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

The device sleep Dormancy time range name. If no dormancy time range is
time-range specified, the whole day takes effect by default.
To set a dormancy time range, run the sleep time-range
command.

Time-range Dormancy time range.

● If the field value contains ( Inactive ), the current time is
not within the dormancy time range.
● If the field value contains ( Active ), the current time is
within the dormancy time range.

The awaken port Period during which the awakening port status is detected
state check continuously.
interval To set the period, run the set power manage interval
(minutes) command.

The Configured awakening mode.

configuration of ● normal: Traffic forwarding does not resume quickly after
awaken mode the device exits the device dormancy mode.
● fast: Traffic forwarding resumes quickly after the device
exits the device dormancy mode.
To enable the fast awakening mode, run the set power
manage awaken-mode fast command.

The Configured non-awakening ports.

configuration of To configure non-awakening ports, run the set power
non-awaken port manage non-awaken-port command.

Related Topics
3.6.17 set power manage interval
3.6.15 set power manage awaken-mode fast
3.6.19 set power manage non-awaken-port

3.6.12 display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all command displays the
status of all traps on the SPMTRAP module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 915

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

The following product models support the sleep mode:

● S5710-X-LI
● S5700S-LI: S5700S-28P-LI-AC, S5700S-52P-LI-AC, S5700S-28X-LI-AC, and S5700S-52X-
LI-AC
● S5700LI: S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC,
S5700-52P-LI-DC, S5700-28X-LI-AC, S5700-28X-LI-DC, S5700-52X-LI-AC, S5700-52X-LI-
DC, and S5701-28X-LI-AC
● S5720SI: S5720-28P-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-DC, S5720-52P-SI-AC,
S5720-52X-SI-DC, and S5720-52X-SI-AC
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52P-SI-
AC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC, and S5720S-52X-SI-AC

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all command to check the status of all
traps of SPMTRAP. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
spmtrap command to enable the trap function of SPMTRAP.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the SPMTRAP module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: SPMTRAP
Trap number : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwEnergyDevChangeToSleep on on

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 916

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-74 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all
command output

Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the SPMTRAP module include:

● hwEnergyDevChangeToSleep: The device enters
the sleeping mode.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.6.21 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap

3.6.13 energy-efficient-ethernet enable

Function
The energy-efficient-ethernet enable command enables the Energy Efficient
Ethernet (EEE) function on an electrical interface.

The undo energy-efficient-ethernet enable command disables the EEE function

on an electrical interface.

By default, EEE is disabled on an electrical interface.

Format
energy-efficient-ethernet enable

undo energy-efficient-ethernet enable

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view, XGE interface view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 917

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The system provides power for each interface. Even though an interface is idle, it
consumes the same power as working interfaces. The energy-efficient-ethernet
enable command enables the system to reduce the power on an interface when
the interface is idle and restore the power when the interface starts to transmit
data. This reduces system power consumption.
Prerequisites
If an electrical interface works in non-auto negotiation mode, run the negotiation
auto command to enable auto-negotiation.
Precautions
The EEE function can be configured only on electrical interfaces (including combo
electrical interfaces). Optical interfaces do not support the EEE function. S2750EI
does not support the EEE function.
If an electrical interface works at 10 Mbit/s after auto-negotiation, the EEE
function does not take effect.
The S6720EI and S6720S-EI do not support the EEE function.
Enabling or disabling EEE on an interface will trigger re-negotiation. During the
negotiation, the interface may change to Down state, which causes short service
interruption. Therefore, determine whether the operation is allowed before you
run this command.

Example
# Enable the EEE function on electrical interface GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] energy-efficient-ethernet enable

Related Topics
4.2.4 auto speed
4.2.38 negotiation auto

3.6.14 port-auto-sleep enable

Function
The port-auto-sleep enable command enables the port dormancy function on an
Ethernet electrical port to save energy.
The undo port-auto-sleep enable command disables the port dormancy function
on an Ethernet electrical port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 918

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, the port dormancy function is disabled on an Ethernet electrical port.

Format
port-auto-sleep enable

undo port-auto-sleep enable

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, port group view, Ethernet interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The port-auto-sleep enable command enables electrical port dormancy. If this
function is enabled on a port, the port enters the energy-saving mode when no
carrier wave signals are transmitted on the port. When carrier wave signals are
transmitted on the port, the port exits the energy-saving mode. Port sleep does
not affect functioning of the port.

NOTE

This command can be used on electrical interfaces and combo interfaces working as
electrical interfaces.
The port sleeping function is enabled by default on the 2*10GE electrical sub-card
supported by the S5720EI and cannot be disabled.

Example
# Enable the port dormancy function on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port-auto-sleep enable

3.6.15 set power manage awaken-mode fast

Function
The set power manage awaken-mode fast command enables the fast awaking
mode to allow the device to restore Layer 2 traffic quickly after exiting the device
sleeping mode.

The undo set power manage awaken-mode fast command disables the fast
awaking mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 919

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, a device cannot restore services quickly after exiting the device
sleeping mode.

NOTE

Only S5700S-28P-LI-AC and S5700S-52P-LI-AC in the S5700S-LI series and S5700-28P-LI-

AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC, S5700-52P-LI-DC in the S5700LI series support this
command.

Format
set power manage awaken-mode fast
undo set power manage awaken-mode fast

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
A device can wake from the deep sleeping state in any of the following conditions:
● A user logs in to the device through the serial port and presses Ctrl+W.
● A user logs in from the awakening port.
● The sleeping time range expires (if a time range is configured).
● A user clicks the mode switching button.
The awaking process takes a relatively long time, and services cannot be restored
quickly. To shorten the awaking time, you can use the set power manage
awaken-mode command to enable the fast awaking mode. This mode enables a
device to restore fast Layer 2 traffic after exiting the device sleeping mode.
Precautions
Before using the set power manage awaken-mode command, run the stp
disable command in the system view to disable STP globally and run the save
command to save the configuration. Loops may occur when STP is disabled;
therefore, monitor the network status to check for loops when using the fast
awaking function.
In a stack, the set power manage awaken-mode fast command cannot enable a
device to fast restore Layer 2 traffic after exiting the device sleeping mode.
However, you can use the undo set power manage awaken-mode fast
command to delete the configuration in standalone mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 920

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Enable the fast awaking mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage awaken-mode fast
Warning: This command will take effect only after disable stp and saving the c
onfiguration. Some service would be affected with this awaken mode after the dev
ice restored from sleep. Continue?[Y/N]:y
Info: Succeeded in setting the configuration.

3.6.16 set power manage cycle

Function
The set power manage cycle command sets the interval for updating power
consumption data.
The undo set power manage cycle command restores the default interval for
updating power consumption data.
By default, the interval for updating power consumption data is 1 hour.

Format
set power manage cycle cycle-id
undo set power manage cycle

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
cycle-id Sets the interval for The value is an integer that ranges from 1
updating power to 6.
consumption data. ● 1: 15 minutes
● 2: 30 minutes
● 3: 1 hour
● 4: 1 day
● 5: 1 week
● 6: 30 days

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The average power consumption of a device is the average power consumption
within a period of time. You can use the set power manage cycle command to

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 921

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

set the interval for calculating the average power consumption. To obtain real-
time power consumption, set a short interval.

Example
# Set the interval for updating power consumption data to 15 minutes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage cycle 1

Related Topics
3.6.8 display power manage cycle

3.6.17 set power manage interval

Function
The set power manage interval command sets the period during which the
awakening port status is probed continuously.
The undo set power manage interval command restores the default period
during which the awakening port status is probed continuously.
By default, the period is 20 minutes.

NOTE

The following product models support the sleep mode:

● S5710-X-LI
● S5700S-LI: S5700S-28P-LI-AC, S5700S-52P-LI-AC, S5700S-28X-LI-AC, and S5700S-52X-
LI-AC
● S5700LI: S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC,
S5700-52P-LI-DC, S5700-28X-LI-AC, S5700-28X-LI-DC, S5700-52X-LI-AC, S5700-52X-LI-
DC, and S5701-28X-LI-AC
● S5720SI: S5720-28P-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-DC, S5720-52P-SI-AC,
S5720-52X-SI-DC, and S5720-52X-SI-AC
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52P-SI-
AC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC, and S5720S-52X-SI-AC

Format
set power manage interval interval-time
undo set power manage interval

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interval interval-time Specifies the period The value is an integer

during which the ranging from 5 to 60, in
awakening port status is minutes.
probed continuously.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 922

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When the device does not enter the dormancy state in the specified time range,
the device continuously probes the status of all awakening ports. The device
enters the dormancy state when the device does not probe any awakening port in
Up state within the default 20 minutes. Otherwise, the device continues to probe
the awakening ports status.

If no time range is applied to the device, the device probes the status of all
awakening ports all round the clock. By default, the device enters the dormancy
state when the device does not probe any awakening port in Up state within 20
minutes.

NOTICE

A device enters the dormancy state when the conditions for device dormancy are
met. On the S5700S-28P-LI-AC and S5700S-52P-LI-AC in the S5700S-LI series and
S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC, S5700-52P-LI-DC in the
S5700LI series, save the configuration immediately after you run this command.

NOTE

In a stack, the set power manage interval command cannot set the period during which
the awakening port status is detected continuously. However, you can use the undo set
power manage interval command to delete the configuration in standalone mode.

Example
# Set the period during which the awakening port status is probed continuously to
10 minutes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage interval 10
[HUAWEI] quit
<HUAWEI> save

Related Topics
3.6.11 display power manage sleep configuration

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 923

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.6.18 set power manage mode

Function
The set power manage mode command sets the energy-saving mode of the
device.
The undo set power manage mode command restores the default energy-saving
mode of the device.
By default, the standard energy-saving mode is used.

Format
set power manage mode mode-id
undo set power manage mode

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
mode-id Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 1 to 5:
energy-saving ● 1: indicates the user-defined energy-saving
mode of the mode. This mode is not supported currently.
device.
● 2: indicates the standard energy-saving mode.
● 3: indicates the basic energy-saving mode.
● 4: indicates the deep energy-saving mode.
● 5: indicates the standby energy-saving mode.
NOTE
Only the S5720-16X-PWH-LI supports the standby
energy-saving mode.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
The set power manage mode command sets the energy-saving mode of the
device.
The device can run in the following energy-saving modes:
● Standard mode
Factory mode and default power saving mode.
● Basic mode

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 924

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Components not in use are shut down or switched to the sleep mode when
no services are configured or users are not online.
● Deep mode
Power consumption is dynamically adjusted for running services, and
components not in use are shut down or switched to the sleep mode
according to service requirements.
● Standby mode
The device enters the low power consumption mode when it does not need to
provide PoE power to PDs and shuts down all the interfaces except GE0/0/13
and GE0/0/14.

NOTE

● The ALS, EEE, and port dormancy functions are disabled in standard mode by default.
However, the port dormancy function is enabled by default on the 2*10GE electrical sub-
card supported by the S5720EI and cannot be disabled.
● The ALS, EEE, and port dormancy functions are enabled by default in basic or deep
mode.
● The deep mode adds the device dormancy function based on functions of the basic
mode.
● Only the S5720-16X-PWH-LI supports the standby mode. The interfaces that have been
shut down in standby mode cannot be enabled manually using a command. To enable
these interfaces manually, ensure that the switch exits the standby mode.
● Before entering the standby mode, the system forcibly saves the configuration to the
configuration file that is being used by the device.
● The configuration restoration function is not configured in the standby mode. That is,
after the device restarts, the currently configured standby mode of an interface is
automatically restored to the default standard mode.
● On the S5720-16X-PWH-LI XGE0/0/1 and XGE0/0/2, installing optical modules and
configuring the standby mode are mutually exclusive. That is, the two interfaces cannot
have the standby mode configured after they have optical modules installed. When they
work in standby mode, installing optical modules into them will restore them to the
default standard mode or may even restart the device.

After the energy-saving mode is set to basic or deep mode, loopback test on
interfaces is disabled. Therefore, before performing a loopback test, set the
energy-saving mode to standard mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 925

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

● The minimum interval between configuring and disabling the standby mode is 15s.
● The standby mode cannot be configured in a stack.
● When the device is switched from the basic or deep mode to the standby mode,
disabling the EEE function may cause interface flapping. Similarly, when the device is
switched from the standby mode to the basic or deep mode, enabling the EEE function
may cause interface flapping.
● Before entering the standby mode, the system forcibly saves the configuration to the
configuration file that is being used by the device.
● The configuration restoration function is not configured in the standby mode. That is,
after the device restarts, the currently configured standby mode of an interface is
automatically restored to the default standard mode.
● On the S5720-16X-PWH-LI XGE0/0/1 and XGE0/0/2, installing optical modules and
configuring the standby mode are mutually exclusive. That is, the two interfaces cannot
have the standby mode configured after they have optical modules installed. When they
work in standby mode, installing optical modules into them will restore them to the
default standard mode or may even restart the device.

Example
# Set the energy-saving mode of the device to basic mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage mode 3
Warning: Performance of ALS, EEE, Auto sleep will be enabled, and the EEE function may lead to port
flapping. Continue?[Y/N]:y
Info: It will take a few seconds. Please wait...

# Set the energy-saving mode of the device to deep mode.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage mode 4
Warning: Performance of ALS, EEE, Auto sleep will be enabled, and the EEE function may lead to port
flapping. Continue?[Y/N]:y
Warning: This command will enable the device sleep function. The device will enter in sleep mode under
the conditon specified, and all of service will not be provided. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: It will take a few seconds. Please wait...
Info: Succeeded in setting the configuration.
Info: The system is now comparing the configuration, please wait.
Warning: The configuration has been modified, and it will be saved to the next startup saved-configuration
file flash:/s249.cfg. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Now saving the current configuration to the slot 0....
Save the configuration successfully.

# Set the energy-saving mode of the device to standby mode.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage mode 5
Warning: When the device enters the standby mode, some ports will enter the power down mode and
become unavailable. Installing the optical module to a switch in standby mode will cause the switch to
restart. Continue?[Y/N]:y
Info: It will take a few seconds. Please wait...

Related Topics
3.6.9 display power manage mode

3.6.19 set power manage non-awaken-port

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 926

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The set power manage non-awaken-port command configures a port as a non-
awakening port.
The undo set power manage non-awaken-port command restores a non-
awakening port to be an awakening port.
By default, all ports are awakening ports.

NOTE

The following product models support the sleep mode:

● S5710-X-LI
● S5700S-LI: S5700S-28P-LI-AC, S5700S-52P-LI-AC, S5700S-28X-LI-AC, and S5700S-52X-
LI-AC
● S5700LI: S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC,
S5700-52P-LI-DC, S5700-28X-LI-AC, S5700-28X-LI-DC, S5700-52X-LI-AC, S5700-52X-LI-
DC, and S5701-28X-LI-AC
● S5720SI: S5720-28P-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-DC, S5720-52P-SI-AC,
S5720-52X-SI-DC, and S5720-52X-SI-AC
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52P-SI-
AC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC, and S5720S-52X-SI-AC

Format
set power manage non-awaken-port interface { interface-type interface-
number1 [ to interface-type interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>
undo set power manage non-awaken-port interface { interface-type interface-
number1 [ to interface-type interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

interface { interface- Specifies the type and -

type interface-number1 number of an interface:
[ to interface-type ● interface-type
interface-number2 ] specifies the type of
the interface.
● interface-number1
specifies the number
of the first interface.
● interface-number2
specifies the number
of the second
interface.

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 927

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can use the set power manage non-awaken-port command to configure
some ports as non-awakening ports so that these ports do not affect device
dormancy and awakening. This is because device dormancy and awakening
depend on the awakening port status.

NOTICE

A device enters the dormancy state when the conditions for device dormancy are
met. On the S5700S-28P-LI-AC and S5700S-52P-LI-AC in the S5700S-LI series and
S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC, S5700-52P-LI-DC in the
S5700LI series, save the configuration immediately after you run this command.

NOTE

In a stack, the set power manage non-awaken-port command cannot configure a port as
a non-awakening port. However, you can use the undo set power manage non-awaken-
port command to delete the configuration in standalone mode.

Example
# Configure interfaces GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to GigabitEthernet0/0/5 as non-
awakening interfaces.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage non-awaken-port interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1 to gigabitethernet
0/0/5
Info: Succeeded in setting the configuration.
[HUAWEI] quit
<HUAWEI> save

Related Topics
3.6.11 display power manage sleep configuration

3.6.20 sleep time-range

Function
The sleep time-range command applies a time range to the device in dormancy
state.

The undo sleep time-range command deletes the time range.

By default, no time range is applied to the device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 928

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

The following product models support the sleep mode:

● S5710-X-LI
● S5700S-LI: S5700S-28P-LI-AC, S5700S-52P-LI-AC, S5700S-28X-LI-AC, and S5700S-52X-
LI-AC
● S5700LI: S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC,
S5700-52P-LI-DC, S5700-28X-LI-AC, S5700-28X-LI-DC, S5700-52X-LI-AC, S5700-52X-LI-
DC, and S5701-28X-LI-AC
● S5720SI: S5720-28P-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-DC, S5720-52P-SI-AC,
S5720-52X-SI-DC, and S5720-52X-SI-AC
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52P-SI-
AC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC, and S5720S-52X-SI-AC

Format
sleep time-range timerange-name
undo sleep time-range timerange-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

timerange-name Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1

time range that applies to 32 case-sensitive
to the device. characters without
spaces and must start
with an uppercase or
lowercase.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
A device on an enterprise network is not used at certain time. You can apply a
time range to the device in dormancy mode to save power. When dormancy
conditions are met, the device automatically enters the dormancy state during the
time range. When the time range expires, the device is awakened.
When an awakening interface detects a user, the device in dormancy mode is
awakened. User services on the device are not affected.
The device enters the sleeping mode when the following conditions are met:

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 929

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● The device works in deep mode. By default, the standard energy-saving mode
is used.
● A time range applies to the device in sleeping mode.
● During the period for continuously detecting awakening port status, the
terminals (switches or PCs) connected to awakening ports are shut down.
NOTE

If the terminal is a PC, the device can enter the dormancy state only when the PC is
shut down and its network adapter is powered off (this can be set in the power
management module of BIOS).

The device is awakened when either of the following conditions is met:

● A user logs in to the device through the serial port and presses Ctrl+W.
● The terminals (switches or PCs) connected to awakening ports are started up.
● The sleeping time range expires (if a time range is configured).
● A user presses the mode switching button.

Prerequisites
● The energy-saving mode of the device has been set to deep mode using the
3.6.18 set power manage mode command.
● A time range has been specified using the 14.1.26 time-range command.

NOTICE

A device enters the dormancy state when the conditions for device dormancy are
met. On the S5700S-28P-LI-AC and S5700S-52P-LI-AC in the S5700S-LI series and
S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC, S5700-52P-LI-DC in the
S5700LI series, save the configuration immediately after you run this command.

NOTE

In a stack, the sleep time-range command cannot apply a time range to the device in
dormancy state. However, you can use the undo sleep time-range command to delete the
configuration in standalone mode.

Example
# Apply the time range 1:00 to 6:00 am to the device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set power manage mode 4
[HUAWEI] time-range test 1:00 to 6:00 daily
[HUAWEI] sleep time-range test
[HUAWEI] quit
<HUAWEI> save

Related Topics
3.6.18 set power manage mode
14.1.26 time-range

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 930

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.6.21 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap command enables the trap
function for the SPMTRAP module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap command disables the

trap function for the SPMTRAP module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the SPMTRAP module.

NOTE

The following product models support the sleep mode:

● S5710-X-LI
● S5700S-LI: S5700S-28P-LI-AC, S5700S-52P-LI-AC, S5700S-28X-LI-AC, and S5700S-52X-
LI-AC
● S5700LI: S5700-28P-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-LI-AC, S5700-28P-LI-DC, S5700-52P-LI-AC,
S5700-52P-LI-DC, S5700-28X-LI-AC, S5700-28X-LI-DC, S5700-52X-LI-AC, S5700-52X-LI-
DC, and S5701-28X-LI-AC
● S5720SI: S5720-28P-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-AC, S5720-28X-SI-DC, S5720-52P-SI-AC,
S5720-52X-SI-DC, and S5720-52X-SI-AC
● S5720S-SI: S5720S-28P-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-AC, S5720S-28X-SI-DC, S5720S-52P-SI-
AC, S5720S-52X-SI-DC, and S5720S-52X-SI-AC

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap [ trap-name
hwenergydevchangetosleep ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap [ trap-name

hwenergydevchangetosleep ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

hwenergydevchangeto- Enables the trap function -

sleep when the device enters
the sleeping mode.

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 931

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwenergydevchangetosleep trap of the SPMTRAP module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name spmtrap trap-name hwenergydevchangetosleep

Related Topics
3.6.12 display snmp-agent trap feature-name spmtrap all

3.7 PoE Configuration Commands

3.7.1 Command Support
3.7.2 display poe device
3.7.3 display poe information
3.7.4 display poe power
3.7.5 display poe power-state
3.7.6 display poe-power
3.7.7 display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all
3.7.8 poe af-inrush enable
3.7.9 poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable
3.7.10 poe enable
3.7.11 poe fast-on enable
3.7.12 poe force-power
3.7.13 poe group management enable
3.7.14 poe high-inrush enable
3.7.15 poe { power-off | power-on } interface
3.7.16 poe legacy enable
3.7.17 poe max-power
3.7.18 poe power

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 932

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.7.19 poe power-management

3.7.20 poe power-off time-range
3.7.21 poe power-on delay
3.7.22 poe power-policy port-index-priority disable
3.7.23 poe power-reserved
3.7.24 poe power-threshold
3.7.25 poe priority
3.7.26 poe single-class enable
3.7.27 rps cold-backup
3.7.28 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap

3.7.1 Command Support

Only electrical interfaces of switch models with PWR or PWH in the device names
support the PoE function.

3.7.2 display poe device

Function
The display poe device command displays information about the device
supporting Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Format
display poe device

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Before using the PoE function, run the display poe device command to check
whether the device supports the PoE function. If the command output is displayed,
the device supports the PoE function.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 933

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display information about the device supporting PoE.
<HUAWEI> display poe device
slot 0 : PoE

Table 3-75 Description of the display poe device command output

Item Description

Slot 0 The device supports PoE.

3.7.3 display poe information

Function
The display poe information command displays PoE running information about
the device.

Format
display poe information [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Displays the PoE state The value is 0 if stacking

information about a is not configured; the
specified stack device. value ranges from 0 to 8
If this parameter is not if stacking is configured.
specified, the PoE
information about all
device is displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
This command displays information including the maximum output power set by
the user, current power consumption, peak power consumption, and power
management mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 934

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the PoE running information about the device.
<HUAWEI> display poe information
PSE Information of slot 0:
User Set Max Power(mW) : 739200
PoE Power Supply(mW) : 369600
Available Total Power(mW) : 369600
Total Power Consumption(mW): 0
Power Peak Value(mW) :0
Power-Management Mode : auto
Power High Inrush : disable
Port Index Priority : enable

Table 3-76 Description of the display poe information command output

Item Description

User Set Max Maximum output power set by the user.

Power(mW) To set the value, run the 3.7.17 poe max-power
command. When the value is not set using the
command, this field displays the maximum output
power that can be provided by the device.

PoE Power PoE power supply, which is determined by the PoE

Supply(mW) power module configured on the device.

Available Total Total available power.

Power(mW)

Total Power Total output power.

Consumption(mW)

Power Peak Peak value of the output power.

Value(mW)

Power-Management Power management mode, including auto and manual

Mode modes.
To set the mode, run the 3.7.19 poe power-
management command.

Power High Inrush State of power high inrush function, including enabled
and disabled state. By default, the power high inrush
function is in disabled state.
To set the state, run the 3.7.14 poe high-inrush
enable command.

Port Index Priority Whether the device is enabled to power on or off PDs
connected to interfaces based on the interface
numbers. By default, a device powers on or off PDs
connected to interfaces based on the interface
numbers.
To configure this parameter, run the poe power-policy
port-index-priority disable command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 935

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.7.17 poe max-power
3.7.19 poe power-management
3.7.14 poe high-inrush enable

3.7.4 display poe power

Function
The display poe power command displays current power information on
interfaces.

Format
display poe power [ slot slot-id | interface interface-type interface-number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Displays the PoE power The value is an integer,

information about a and the value ranges
specified stack device. from 0 to 8 if stacking is
If this parameter is not configured. The value is
specified, the PoE power 0 if stacking is not
information of all configured.
devices in a stack system
or the PoE power
information of the device
in a non-stack system is
displayed.

interface interface-type Displays the PoE power -

interface-number information about a
specified interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.
If this parameter is not
specified, the output
power of all interfaces
on the device is
displayed.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 936

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display poe power command displays information including the current
actual power, maximum output power set for an interface, and class, reference
power, and average power of PDs on the interface.
If this parameter is not specified, the output power of all interfaces on the device
is displayed.
An interface provides 15400 mW power to PDs based on the power class 0 if non-
standard PDs are connected to the interface or forcible power supply is configured
on the interface of the switches except the S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S5720-16X-PWH-
LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, and S6720SI. If you run the display poe power
command to check the interface power, the PD class is displayed as 0.

Example
# Display the power information of interfaces on the device whose ID is 0.
<HUAWEI> display poe power slot 0
Codes: REFPW(Reference power), USMPW(User set max power),
CURPW(Current power), PKPW(Peak power), AVGPW(Average power)

PortName Class REFPW(mW) USMPW(mW) CURPW(mW) PKPW(mW) AVGPW(mW)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/6 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/8 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/10 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/11 2 7000 15400 3710 3816 3487
GigabitEthernet0/0/12 2 7000 15400 2968 3180 2960
GigabitEthernet0/0/13 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/14 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/15 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/16 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/17 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/18 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/19 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/20 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/21 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/22 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/23 - - 15400 0 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/24 - - 15400 0 0 0

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 937

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-77 Description of the display poe power slot command output
Item Description

PortName Name of an interface.

Class Class of a PD on an interface.

The system classifies PDs into nine classes, namely,
class 0 to class 8, according to their maximum power. If
no PD is connected to interface, "-" is displayed.

REFPW(mW) Reference power of a PD.

The system can identify the reference power of each
PD. The value varies according to types of PDs. The
mapping between PD classes and the reference power
is as follows:
● 0: reference power 15.4 W
● 1: reference power 4 W
● 2: reference power 7 W
● 3: reference power 15.4 W
● 4: reference power 30 W

USMPW(mW) Maximum output power set for an interface.

To set the value, run the 3.7.18 poe power command.

CURPW(mW) Current power of the PDs on an interface.

PKPW(mW) Peak power of the PDs on an interface.

The value is a statistical value, which equals the
current maximum power consumption of the PDs on
the interface.

AVGPW(mW) Average power of the PDs on an interface.

The value is a statistical value, which equals the
average power consumption from the power-on of the
interface till now.

# Display the power of interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3.

<HUAWEI> display poe power interface gigabitethernet 0/0/3
PD power(mW) : 3710
PD class :2
PD reference power(mW) : 7000
user set max power(mW) : 15400
PD peak power(mW) : 3816
PD average power(mW) : 3487

Table 3-78 Description of the display poe power interface command output
Item Description

PD power(mW) Output power of an interface.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 938

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

PD class Class of a PD on an interface.

The system classifies PDs into nine classes, namely,
class 0 to class 8, according to their maximum power.

PD reference Reference power of a PD.

power(mW) The system can identify the reference power of each
PD. The value varies according to types of PDs. The
mapping between PD classes and the reference power
is as follows:
● 0: reference power 15.4 W
● 1: reference power 4 W
● 2: reference power 7 W
● 3: reference power 15.4 W
● 4: reference power 30 W

user set max Maximum output power set for an interface.

power(mW) To set the value, run the 3.7.18 poe power command.

PD peak power(mW) Peak power of the PDs on an interface.

The value is a statistical value, which equals the
current maximum power consumption of the PDs on
the interface.

PD average Average power of the PDs on an interface.

power(mW) The value is a statistical value, which equals the
average power consumption from the power-on of the
interface till now.

Related Topics
3.7.2 display poe device
3.7.18 poe power
3.7.10 poe enable

3.7.5 display poe power-state

Function
The display poe power-state command displays the PoE power supply status of a
device.

Format
display poe power-state [ slot slot-id | interface interface-type interface-
number ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 939

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Displays the PoE power The value ranges from 0
supply status of a to 8 if stacking is
specified stack device. configured. The value is
If the parameter is not 0 if stacking is not
specified, the PoE power configured.
supply status of all
devices in a stack system
or the PoE power supply
status of a device in a
non-stack system is
displayed.

interface interface-type Displays the PoE power -

interface-number supply status of a
specified interface.
● interface-type
specifies the interface
type.
● interface-number
specifies the interface
number.
If this parameter is not
specified, the PoE power
supply status of all
interfaces on the device
is displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display poe power-state command displays information including whether
an interface is enabled to check compatibility of non-standard PDs, power supply
status on of an interface, class of PDs on an interface, power supply priority, and
maximum output power of an interface.

Example
# Display the PoE power supply status of GigabitEthernet 0/0/3.
<HUAWEI> display poe power-state interface gigabitethernet 0/0/3
Legacy detect : disable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 940

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Power enable state : enable

Power fast-on state : disable
Single-class state : disable
Power-up mode : at
Power-on delay(s) :5
Power ON/OFF : off
Power status : Detecting
PD class :-
Reference power(mW) :-
Power priority : Low
Max power(mW) : 60000
Current power(mW) :0
Peak power(mW) :0
Average power(mW) :0
Current(mA) :0
Voltage(V) :0

Table 3-79 Description of the display poe power-state interface command output
Item Description

Legacy detect Whether an interface is enabled to check compatibility

of non-standard PDs.
To enable an interface to check compatibility of non-
standard PDs, run the poe legacy enable command.

Power enable state Whether PoE is enabled on an interface.

To enable PoE on an interface, run the poe enable
command.

Power fast-on state Whether PoE fast-on is enabled on an interface.

To enable PoE fast-on on an interface, run the poe
fast-on enable command.

Single-class state Single-class power supply mode of an interface:

● disable: standard power supply mode
● enable: single-class power supply
To set this parameter, run the poe single-class enable
command.

Power-up mode Power supply mode of an interface.

To set the power supply mode for an interface, run the
3.7.9 poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush }
enable command. If this field displays -, this interface
does not support this configuration.

Power-on delay(s) Power supply delay of an interface, in seconds. The

value 0 indicates that power supply is not delayed.
To set the power supply delay, run the poe power-on
delay command.

Power ON/OFF Whether the interface is powered on.

● On: indicates that the interface is powered on.
● Off: indicates that the interface is powered off.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 941

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Power status Power supply status of an interface. The status can be:
● Test mode: indicates the testing state.
● Detecting: indicates the detection state.
● Disabled: indicates that PoE is disabled on the
interface.
● Power-deny: indicates that the reference power is
greater than the maximum output power of an
interface.
● Classification overcurrent: indicates that the current
of the PD connected to the interface exceeds the
threshold.
● Unknown: indicates that the class of the PD is
unknown.
● Power overcurrent: indicates that the current of the
PD connected to the interface exceeds the
maximum current of the interface.
● Power-on failed: indicates that the interface fails to
provide power.
● Power-ready: indicates that the interface is ready to
provide power.
● Powering: indicates that the PSE starts to power on
the interface.
● Powered: indicates that the interface is providing
power.
● Overloaded: indicates that the power is overloaded.
● Time-range power-off: indicates that the interface is
in the power-off time range.
● Unstable voltage: indicates that the interface
voltage is unstable.
● Legacy disable: indicates that the PSE does not
check the capability of PDs.
● Class mismatch: indicates that the nterface works in
standard hierarchical power supply mode.

PD class Class of a PD connected to an interface.

The system classifies PDs into nine classes, namely,
class 0 to class 8, according to their maximum power.

Reference power(mW) Reference power of an interface.

The system can identify the maximum power of a PD,
classify the PD into a certain level, and define the
reference power of each level.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 942

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Power priority Power supply priority of an interface. The priority is as

follows:
● Critical: indicates the highest priority.
● High: indicates the second highest priority.
● Low: indicates the lowest priority.
To set the priority, run the 3.7.25 poe priority
command.

Max power(mW) Maximum output power of an interface. A maximum

output power of 15400 mW indicates that the device
complies with 802.3af. A maximum output power of
30000 mW indicates that the device complies with
802.3at.
To set the value, run the 3.7.18 poe power command.

Current power(mW) Current output power of an interface.

Peak power(mW) Peak output power of an interface.

Average power(mW) Average output power of an interface.

Current(mA) Output current of an interface.

Voltage(V) Output voltage of an interface.

# Display the PoE power supply status of the device.

<HUAWEI> display poe power-state slot 0
PORTNAME POWERON/OFF ENABLED FAST-ON PRIORITY STATUS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/6 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/8 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/10 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/11 off enable disable Low Detecting
GigabitEthernet0/0/12 off enable disable Low Legacy disable

Table 3-80 Description of the display poe power-state slot command output
Item Description

PORTNAME Name of an interface.

POWERON/OFF Whether the interface is powered on.

● On: indicates that the interface is powered on.
● Off: indicates that the interface is powered off.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 943

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

ENABLED Whether PoE is enabled on an interface.

To enable PoE on an interface, run the poe enable
command.

FAST-ON Whether PoE fast-on is enabled on an interface.

To enable PoE on an interface, run the poe fast-on
enable command.

PRIORITY Power supply priority of an interface. The priority is as

follows:
● Critical: indicates the highest priority.
● High: indicates the second highest priority.
● Low: indicates the lowest priority.
To set the priority, run the 3.7.25 poe priority
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 944

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

STATUS Power supply status of an interface. The status is

classified into following types:
● Test mode: indicates the testing state.
● Detecting: indicates the detection state.
● Disabled: indicates that PoE is disabled on the
interface.
● Power-deny: indicates that the reference power is
greater than the maximum output power of an
interface.
● Classification overcurrent: indicates that the current
of the PD connected to the interface exceeds the
threshold.
● Unknown: indicates that the class of the PD is
unknown.
● Power overcurrent: indicates that the current of the
PD connected to the interface exceeds the
maximum current of the interface.
● Power-on failed: indicates that the interface fails to
provide power.
● Power-ready: indicates that the interface is ready to
provide power.
● Powering: indicates that the PSE starts to power on
the interface.
● Powered: indicates that the interface is providing
power.
● Overloaded: indicates that the power is overloaded.
● Time-range power-off: indicates that the interface is
in the power-off time range.
● Unstable voltage: indicates that the interface
voltage is unstable.
● Legacy disable: indicates that the PSE does not
check the capability of PDs.
● Class mismatch: indicates that the nterface works in
standard hierarchical power supply mode.

Related Topics
3.7.16 poe legacy enable
3.7.10 poe enable
3.7.25 poe priority
3.7.18 poe power

3.7.6 display poe-power

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 945

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The display poe-power command displays information about the PoE power
supply.

Format
display poe-power [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is 0 if stacking

a device. is not configured. The
value ranges from 0 to 8
if stacking is configured.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
The display poe-power displays information including the available total PoE
power, percentage of the reserved power, power alarm threshold, and PoE power
module.
If the stack ID is not specified, information about the PoE power supply of all the
stack devices is displayed.

Example
# Display information about the PoE power supply of all the stack member
switches.
<HUAWEI> display poe-power
Slot 0
Total Available PoE Power(mW) : 246400
Reserved PoE Power Percent : 20 %
PoE Power Threshold Percent : 90 %
PoE Power 1
Power Value(mW) : 123200
Type : PSA250-A2
Supported Mode : Redundancy, Balance
PoE Power 2
Power Value(mW) : 123200
Type : PSA250-A2
Supported Mode : Redundancy, Balance

Slot 1
Total Available PoE Power(mW) : 492800
Reserved PoE Power Percent : 20 %

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 946

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

PoE Power Threshold Percent : 90 %

PoE Power 1
Power Value(mW) : 123200
Type : PSA250-A2
Supported Mode : Redundancy, Balance
PoE Power 2
Power Value(mW) : 369600
Type : PSA500-A1
Supported Mode : Redundancy, Balance

Slot 2
Total Available PoE Power(mW) : 739200
Reserved PoE Power Percent : 20 %
PoE Power Threshold Percent : 90 %
PoE Power 1
Power Value(mW) : 369600
Type : PSA500-A1
Supported Mode : Redundancy, Balance
PoE Power 2
Power Value(mW) : 369600
Type : PSA500-A1
Supported Mode : Redundancy, Balance

Table 3-81 Description of the display poe-power command output

Item Description

Total Available PoE Total power that can be provided for PDs.
Power(mW)

Reserved PoE Power Percentage of the reserved power to the total power.
Percent To set the percentage, run the 3.7.23 poe power-
reserved command.

PoE Power Threshold Alarm threshold of the power consumption percentage.

Percent To set the threshold, run the 3.7.24 poe power-
threshold command.

PoE Power 1 PoE power supply 1.

PoE Power 2 PoE power supply 2.

Power Value(mW) Power of a PoE power supply.

Type Type of a PoE power supply. The value can be:

● PSA250-A1: 250 W non-current-balance power
supply
● PSA250-A2: 250 W current balance power supply
● PSA500-A1: 500 W current balance power supply
● W2PSA0580: 580W current balance power supply
● PDC-650WA-BE: 650W current balance power
supply
● W2PSA1150: 1150W current balance power supply

Supported Mode Supported PoE power supply mode. The value can be:
● Redundancy: redundancy backup mode
● Balance: current balance mode

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 947

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.7.23 poe power-reserved
3.7.24 poe power-threshold

3.7.7 display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all command displays the
status of all traps on the POETRAP module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all command to check the status of all
traps of POETRAP. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
poetrap command to enable the trap function of POETRAP.
Prerequisites
SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the POETRAP module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: POETRAP
Trap number : 16
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwPoePdConnected on on
hwPoePdDisconnected on on

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 948

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

hwPoePdClassInvalid on on
hwPoePdClassOvercurrent on on
hwPoePowerOff on on
hwPoePowerOn on on
hwPoePdPriorityDifferent on on
hwPoePowerOverUtilizationThreshold
on on
hwPoePowerOverUtilizationThresholdResume
on on
hwPoePowerAbsent on on
hwPoePowerAbsentResume on on
hwPoeRpsPowerOutputAlarm on on
hwPoeRpsPowerOutputAlarmResume on
on
hwPoeCardAbsent on on
hwPoePortFail on on
hwPoePortFailResume on on

Table 3-82 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all
command output
Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 949

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Trap name Trap name:

● hwPoePdConnected: A PD is connected to a port.
● hwPoePdDisconnected: A PD is disconnected from
a port.
● hwPoePdClassInvalid: The system detects that the
PD class is invalid.
● hwPoePdClassOvercurrent: The system detects
that a PD is in overcurrent condition during PD
classification.
● hwPoePowerOff: A PD connected to a port is
powered off.
● hwPoePowerOn: A port meets power supply
requirements.
● hwPoePdPriorityDifferent: The port priority is
inconsistent with the PD priority.
● hwPoePowerOverUtilizationThreshold: The total
PoE power consumption is larger than or equal to
the alarm threshold.
● hwPoePowerOverUtilizationThresholdResume:
The total PoE power consumption is less than the
alarm threshold.
● hwPoePowerAbsent: No PoE power module on a
PoE device is working properly.
● hwPoePowerAbsentResume: There are PoE power
modules working properly on a PoE device.
● hwPoeRpsPowerOutputAlarm: An RPS power
module fails to provide full power for the
connected PoE device.
● hwPoeRpsPowerOutputAlarmResume: An RPS
power module can provide the full power for the
connected PoE device.
● hwPoeCardAbsent: A PoE card is not properly
installed.
● hwPoePortFail: A PoE port is faulty.
● hwPoePortFailResume: A PoE port recovers from a
failure.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 950

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.7.28 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap

3.7.8 poe af-inrush enable

Function
The poe af-inrush enable command changes the power supply standards of
interfaces from 802.3at to 802.3af.
The undo poe af-inrush enable command restores the power supply standards of
interfaces to 802.3at.
By default, interfaces comply with 802.3at.

Format
poe af-inrush enable
undo poe af-inrush enable

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, MultiGE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
Switches that comply with 802.3at cannot power some non-standard PDs that do
not support inrush current. To power these PDs, change the power supply
standards of interfaces from 802.3at to 802.3af.
Precautions
● The poe af-inrush enable command does not take effect on an interface if
the poe force-power command has been executed on the interface.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 951

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● The poe af-inrush enable command applies to the scenario where some non-
standard PDs cannot be powered on. After this command is executed, some
PDs requiring high current may be unable to be powered on.
● After running the poe af-inrush enable command, remove non-standard PDs
and then install them so that they can be powered on.
● On the S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC,
and S6720SI, the poe af-inrush enable and poe single-class enable
commands are mutually exclusive and cannot be configured on the same
interface.
● In an upgrade to V200R011C10 or later, if the poe af-inrush enable
command is configured in the system view before the upgrade, the poe af-
inrush enable command configuration is automatically generated on all
interfaces after the upgrade.

Example
# Configures the power supply standards of interfaces as 802.3af.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe af-inrush enable
Warning: This operation may cause PD to work abnormally. Continue?[Y/N]:y

3.7.9 poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable

Function
The poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable command changes the
power supply mode of interfaces supporting the PoE++ mode.

The undo poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable command restores

the default power supply mode of PoE interfaces.

By default, interfaces supporting the PoE++ mode on devices provide power in PoE
++ mode. That is, the power supply mode is bt-inrush.

NOTE

Only the GE interfaces of S5730SI and S5730S-EI, the GE0/0/1 to GE0/0/12 of S5720-16X-
PWH-LI-AC, the MultiGE interfaces of S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, and S6720SI support this
command.

Format
poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable

undo poe { at-inrush | pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
at-inrush Sets the power supply mode to PoE+. -

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 952

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

pre-bt-inrush Sets the power supply mode to PoE++ compatible. That is, -
except that the PoE power is 60000 mW, interfaces
comply with 802.3at.
bt-inrush Sets the power supply mode to PoE++. -

Views
MultiGE interface view, GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, on the S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, and S6720SI,
interfaces supporting the PoE++ mode provide power in PoE+ mode. To power the
PDs requiring the standard power supply mode, run the poe at-inrush enable
command. This command changes the power supply mode of the PoE interface to
the PoE+ mode. If most of the parameters supported by the PDs requiring high
power comply with 802.3at, run the poe pre-bt-inrush enable command to
change the power supply mode of these interfaces to PoE++ compatible.
Precautions
● When the poe bt-inrush enable command is configured after the poe af-
inrush enable command is configured in the interface, the poe af-inrush
enable command configuration is automatically overwritten.
● The poe { pre-bt-inrush | bt-inrush } enable and poe single-class enable
commands are mutually exclusive and cannot be configured on the same
interface.
● Changing the power supply mode of a PoE interface will power off the PD
connected to this PoE interface.
● After the power supply mode of an interface is set to bt-inrush, forcible PoE
power supply and PD compatibility check configured on this interface using
the poe force-power and poe legacy enable commands respectively do not
take effect on this interface.
● After the power supply mode of an interface is set to bt-inrush, and the
interface detects that it connects to a non-standard PD, confirm whether this
interface is connected to a PD. If so, run the poe pre-bt-inrush enable
command and the poe legacy enable or poe force-power command to
provide power to this PD.

Example
# Set the power supply mode of GE0/0/1 to PoE+.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 953

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe at-inrush enable

Warning: This operation may cause PD to be powered off. Continue?[Y/N]:y

# Set the power supply mode of GE0/0/1 to PoE++ compatible.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe pre-bt-inrush enable
Warning: This operation may cause PD to be powered off. Continue?[Y/N]:y

3.7.10 poe enable

Function
The poe enable command enables the PoE function on an interface.

The undo poe enable command disables the PoE function on an interface.

By default, the PoE function is enabled on an interface.

Format
poe enable

undo poe enable

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios

Before providing power for the PD connected to the interface, ensure the PoE
function on the interface is enabled. IF the PoE function is not enabled, run the
poe enable command to enable the PoE function on the interface.

In automatic mode, the power-on and power-off of interfaces are determined by

the PoE power and interface power priority. When the PoE power is sufficient, the
device does not power off one interface. To stop providing power for one PD, run
the undo poe enable command.

Precautions

The device only supports PoE power supply on downlink interfaces and does not
support PoE power supply on uplink interfaces.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 954

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Disable the PoE function on GigabitEthernet0/0/3.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/3
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/3] undo poe enable

Related Topics
3.7.5 display poe power-state

3.7.11 poe fast-on enable

Function
The poe fast-on enable command enables fast power-on for a PoE interface.

The undo poe fast-on enable command disables fast power-on for a PoE
interface.

NOTE

Only the S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, and S6720SI

support this command.

Format
poe fast-on enable

undo poe fast-on enable

Parameters
None

Views
MultiGE interface view, GE interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After a PoE switch is powered off and then restarts, interfaces on this device can
be powered on again only after a certain period. As a result, PDs connected to
these interfaces are powered off within this period. To shorten the time during
which the PDs are powered off, you can run the poe fast-on enable command on
the PoE switch. After the PoE switch is powered off and then restarts, PoE
interfaces can rapidly resume power supply to PDs.

Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 955

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● This command takes effect only during cold startup of the device.
● The poe fast-on enable command does not generate any configuration but
always takes effect after being executed until the undo poe fast-on enable
command is executed. To determine whether the fast power-on configuration
takes effect, run the display poe power-state command to check the fast-on
field.

Example
# Enable fast power-on for GE0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe fast-on enable
Warning: This configuration takes effect only after a cold restart. Continue?[Y/N]:y

# Disable fast power-on for GE0/0/1.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] undo poe fast-on enable
Warning: This configuration takes effect only after a cold restart. Continue?[Y/N]:y

3.7.12 poe force-power

Function
The poe force-power command enables forcible powering on a PoE interface.

The undo poe force-power command disables forcible powering on a PoE

interface.

By default, forcible powering is disabled on a PoE interface.

Format
poe force-power

undo poe force-power

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 956

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

If the power of the system is sufficient, you can run the poe force-power
command on the interface connected to PDs when the PSE cannot detect the PDs.

Precautions

After the power supply mode of an interface is set to PoE++ using the poe bt-
inrush enable command, the poe force-power command does not take effect on
this interface.

NOTICE

If the interface connects to a non-PD device, configuring forcible powering on the

interface may damage the non-PD device. Exercise caution when using the poe
force-power command. After forcible powering is configured on a PoE switch, you
must delete the forcible powering configuration from the switch if you need to
remove the switch from the current networking environment and deploy it in a
new networking environment.

Example
# Enable forcible powering on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe force-power
Warning: Is there a valid PD connected to this interface? Yes or No?[Y/N]:y

3.7.13 poe group management enable

Function
The poe group management enable command enables a PoE device's group
management of PDs.

The undo poe group management enable command disables a PoE device's
group management of PDs.

By default, a PoE device's group management of PDs is disabled.

Format
poe group management enable

undo poe group management enable

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 957

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Powering on some PDs may affect other PDs, causing other PDs unable to be
detected by a PoE device. After group management of PDs is enabled, a PoE
device can detect PDs on a per-group basis and power on these PDs in a batch.

Precautions

● To support a PoE device's group management of PDs, every four interfaces on

the left are added to one group. For example, interfaces numbered 1 to 4 or
numbered 5 to 8 can be added to one group, but interfaces numbered 2 to 5
cannot. That is, the number of the last interface in each group must be the
multiple of 4. If the poe group management enable command is configured
on any interface in a group, this command is also delivered to the other three
interfaces in the same group.
● After group management of PDs is configured on an interface, the other
interfaces in the same group use the same power supply priority as this
interface and this priority is lower than that of other interfaces that are not
added to any group. If some interfaces have this group management function
configured, the PoE interface power supply priority configured using the
3.7.25 poe priority command does not take effect on these interfaces.

Example
# Enable group management of PDs on PoE interfaces GE0/0/1 through GE0/0/4.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe group management enable
Info: 'Poe group management enable' will be executed on interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to
GigabitEthernet0/0/4. Continue?[Y/N]: y

3.7.14 poe high-inrush enable

Function
The poe high-inrush enable command configures an interface to allow
generation of the high pulse current during power-on.

The undo poe high-inrush enable command configures an interface not to allow
generation of the high pulse current during power-on.

By default, interfaces do not allow generation of the high pulse current during
power-on.

Format
poe high-inrush enable [ slot slot-id ]

undo poe high-inrush enable [ slot slot-id ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 958

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the The value ranges from 0 to 8

stack ID of a if stacking is configured. The
device. value is 0 if stacking is not
configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
High inrush current is generated when a non-standard PD is powered on. In this
case, the PSE cuts off the power of the PD to protect itself. If the PSE is required to
provide power for the PD, the PSE must allow high inrush current. The high inrush
current may damage device components.

Example
# Enable the device to allow generation of the high pulse current during power-
on.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe high-inrush enable

Related Topics
3.7.3 display poe information

3.7.15 poe { power-off | power-on } interface

Function
The poe { power-off | power-on } interface command manually powers on or
powers off the PD of an interface.

NOTE

Among PoE models, the S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC,

and S6720SI do not support this command.

Format
poe { power-off | power-on } interface interface-type interface-number

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 959

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

power-off Powers off an interface. -

power-on Powers on an interface. -

interface-type interface- Specifies the type and -

number number of the interface
that needs to be
powered on or powered
off manually.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios

By default, a PoE device works in automatic power management mode. After a PD

is connected to a PoE device, the PoE device automatically provides power for the
PD.

After you run the3.7.19 poe power-managementcommand to configure the

power management mode of a PoE device to manual, the PoE device does not
automatically provide power for PDs when PDs are connected to the PoE device.
You need to run the poepower-oninterface command to manually power on the
interfaces of the PoE device. Check whether the interface is powered on based on
the Power ON/OFF field in the3.7.5 display poe power-statecommand.

Precautions

When the available power of the device is insufficient and the device cannot
provide power for a new PD, the poe power-on interface command is invalid.

Pre-configuration Tasks

Before powering on or powering off an interface, ensure that:

● The power management mode has been in manual mode through running
the 3.7.19 poe power-management command.
● PDs have been connected to the interface.
● The PoE function of the interface has been enabled.
● The classification of the PDs connected to the interface has finished and the
PDs have been ready for being powered on.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 960

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Manually power on PDs connected to GigabitEthernet 0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe power-management manual
[HUAWEI] poe power-on interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1

Related Topics
3.7.19 poe power-management
3.7.5 display poe power-state
3.7.4 display poe power

3.7.16 poe legacy enable

Function
The poe legacy enable command enables the power sourcing equipment (PSE) to
check the compatibility of power devices (PDs).
The undo poe legacy enable command disables the PSE from checking the
compatibility of PDs.
By default, the PSE does not check the capability of PDs.

Format
poe legacy enable
undo poe legacy enable

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the switch is enabled to check the compatibility of PDs, the switch can
detect and provide power to the PDs that do not comply with the 802.3af or
802.3at standard or the standard PDs that are detected as non-standard PDs
because of the external environment. If compatibility check is disabled, the switch
cannot provide power to the non-standard PDs.
After interfaces are enabled to check the compatibility of PDs, the interfaces can
provide power to both standard and non-standard PDs. This configuration does

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 961

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

not affect the power supply of standard PDs. That is, the interfaces can still
provide power to standard PDs after the poe legacy enable command is
configured.
Precautions
After the power supply mode of an interface is set to PoE++ using the poe bt-
inrush enable command, the poe legacy enable command does not take effect
on this interface.

NOTICE

If the interface is connected to a non-PD device, enabling PD compatibility check

may damage this non-PD device. Exercise caution when you use this command.
After enabling PD compatibility check on a PoE switch, you need to manually
disable this function if you need to remove the switch from the current
networking environment and deploy it in a new networking environment.

Example
# Enable GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to check the compatibility of the PD.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe legacy enable

Related Topics
3.7.5 display poe power-state

3.7.17 poe max-power

Function
The poe max-power command sets the maximum output power of a device.
The undo poe max-power command restores the maximum output power of a
device to the default value.
By default, the maximum output power of the device is the total power that the
PoE power supply provides for PDs. Therefore, the configured maximum output
power must be smaller than the total power that the PoE power supply provides
for PDs.

Format
poe max-power max-power [ slot slot-id ]
undo poe max-power [ [ max-power ] slot slot-id ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 962

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

max-power Specifies the maximum The value is an integer

output power of a ranging from 15400 to
device. 1570800. The unit is mW.

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID. The value is 0 if stacking

is not configured. The
value ranges from 0 to 8
if stacking is configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios

When the stacking function is enabled, if the stack ID is not specified, the poe
max-power command is used to set the maximum output power of all member
switches of a stack.

Precautions

● If the maximum output power that you set is smaller than the total power
required by PDs, PDs with lower priority are powered off or cannot be
powered on manually.
● The maximum output power of the device you configured should be smaller
than the remaining power of the device. Otherwise, the configuration may be
invalid.

Example
# Set the maximum output power of the device to 45000 mW.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe max-power 45000 slot 0

Related Topics
3.7.6 display poe-power
3.7.18 poe power

3.7.18 poe power

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 963

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The poe power command sets the maximum output power of an interface.
The undo poe power command restores the default maximum output power of
an interface.
By default, the maximum power of each interface is 30000 mW , except for the
following exceptions: each MultiGE interface of the S5720-14X-PWH-SI-AC
provides a maximum of 90000 mW power; each MultiGE interface of S5720-28X-
PWH-LI-AC, interfaces GE0/0/1 to GE0/0/12 of the S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, and
S6720SI provide a maximum of 60000 mW power.

Format
poe power port-max-power
undo poe power

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

port-max-power Specifies the maximum The value is an integer

output power of an that ranges from 0 to
interface. 30000 mW , except for
the following exceptions:
each MultiGE interface
of the S5720-14X-PWH-
SI-AC ranges from 0 to
90000 mW; each
MultiGE interface of
S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC,
interfaces GE0/0/1 to
GE0/0/12 of the
S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC,
and S6720SI ranges from
0 to 60000 mW power.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios
The PD negotiation power may be different from the power required by some
non-standard PDs or PDs that cannot be classified. You can run the poe power

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 964

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

command to set the maximum output power of the interface, which prevents
power overload for PDs and saves energy.

Prerequisites

The PoE function has been enabled on the interface using the 3.7.10 poe enable
command.

Example
# Set the maximum output power on GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to 15400 mW.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe power 15400

Related Topics
3.7.5 display poe power-state
3.7.17 poe max-power

3.7.19 poe power-management

Function
The poe power-management command sets the power management mode of
the device.

The undo poe power-management command restores the default power

management mode of the device.

By default, the device uses the automatic power management mode.

NOTE

Among PoE models, the S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC,

and S6720SI do not support this command.

Format
poe power-management { auto | manual } [ slot slot-id ]

undo poe power-management { auto | manual } slot slot-id

undo poe power-management [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

auto Specifies the power -

management mode to
automatic mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 965

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

manual Specifies the power -

management mode to
manual mode.

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID. The value is 0 if stacking

is not configured. The
value ranges from 0 to 8
if stacking is configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios
In automatic power management mode, the device first provides power for the
interfaces with higher priority and powers off the interfaces of lower priority when
the power is insufficient. When the power is sufficient, all interfaces connected to
PDs are powered on. To stop providing power for some interfaces, run the undo
poe enable command to disable the PoE function on the interfaces. If the PoE
function is enabled and disabled frequently, faults may occur on the interfaces. To
prevent the faults, you can set the power management mode to manual mode. In
manual mode, the power-on and power-off of an interface are controlled
manually and not affected by the interface power priority.
Precautions
● If all the interfaces are of the same priority, the power supply priority of the
interface with a smaller interface number is higher in automatic mode.
● You can view the power management mode by running the display poe
information command.
Follow-up Procedures
After setting the power management mode to manual, you need to run the poe
{ power-off | power-on } interface command to manually power on or off the
PDs connected to interfaces of the device. If the device restarts after being
powered off, you need to run the power-on command on the interfaces again to
power on the PDs connected to the interfaces. If the device restarts without being
powered off, you do not need to run the power-on command on the interfaces
again to power on the PDs.

Example
# Set the power management mode of a device to automatic mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 966

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe power-management auto slot 0

Related Topics
3.7.3 display poe information

3.7.20 poe power-off time-range

Function
The poe power-off time-range command makes a configured PoE power-off
time range effective on an interface.

The undo poe power-off time-range command cancels the configuration.

By default, a device is not configured with PoE power-off time range.

Format
poe power-off time-range time-range-name

undo poe power-off time-range

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

time-range-name Specifies a name for a The value is a string of 1

PoE power-off time to 32 case-sensitive
range. characters and must
begin with a letter. In
addition, the word all
cannot be specified as a
time range name.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The poe power-off time-range command makes a PoE power-off time range set
in the system view effective on an interface. If the current time is within the
specified time range, the PD connected to the interface cannot be powered on.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 967

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The undo poe power-off time-range command cancels the configuration. The
time range does not take effect on the PD connected to the interface; however,
the configuration of the time range is still saved.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before running the poe power-off time-range command, you must ensure a PoE
power-off time range has been configured through running the time-range
command in the system view.

Example
# Configure a PoE power-off time range from 10:00 to 11:00 for PDs connected to
GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] time-range PoE 10:00 to 11:00 daily
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe power-off time-range PoE

Related Topics
14.1.26 time-range

3.7.21 poe power-on delay

Function
The poe power-on delay command sets the PoE power supply delay on an
interface.
The undo poe power-on delay command restores the default PoE power supply
delay on an interface.
By default, the PoE power supply delay is 0. That is, the PoE power supply is not
delayed.

Format
poe power-on delay delay-time
undo poe power-on delay

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

delay-time Specifies the PoE power The value is an integer

supply delay. that ranges from 1 to 10,
in seconds.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 968

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

The maintain current of the used PD is insufficient at the power-on moment, so

the PoE switch considers that the PD has been disconnected and powers it off.
IEEE standards require that a PD must maintain a current value of more than 10
mA for at least 75 ms in each 325 ms duration. Otherwise, the PoE switch
considers that the PD has left and powers off the PD.

To enable the PoE switch to power these non-standard PDs, set the PoE power
supply delay on the appropriate interfaces of the switch so that the switch detects
the maintain power of the PDs after the specified delay.

Precautions

After the PoE power supply delay is configured on an interface, do not replace the
PD connected to this interface within the delay. Otherwise, the new PD cannot
work properly.

Example
# Set the PoE power supply delay to 5 seconds on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe power-on delay 5

3.7.22 poe power-policy port-index-priority disable

Function
The poe power-policy port-index-priority disable command disables the device
from powering on or off PDs connected to interfaces based on the interface
numbers.

The undo poe power-policy port-index-priority disable command enables the

device to power on or off PDs connected to interfaces based on the interface
numbers.

By default, a device powers on or off PDs connected to interfaces based on the

interface numbers.

NOTE

Only the S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, S5720EI, and S5720HI support this function.

Format
poe power-policy port-index-priority disable [ slot slot-id ]

undo poe power-policy port-index-priority disable [ slot slot-id ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 969

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a device ID. The value is an integer,

and the value range
depends on the
hardware configuration
of the switch.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
In automatic power supply management mode, a PoE switch provides power to
PDs connected to interfaces according to the following rules:
1. Preferentially provides power to PDs connected to the interface with a higher
power supply priority.
2. Preferentially provides power to PDs connected to the interface with a smaller
interface number if interfaces have the same power supply priority.

According to the rules, when the PoE power of a device is insufficient and
interfaces connected to PDs have the same power supply priority, the device may
power off PDs connected to the interface with a larger interface number to power
on PDs connected to the interface with a smaller interface number even if these
PDs are connected to the device last.

To prevent this problem, you can run the poe power-policy port-index-priority
disable command to disable the device from powering on PDs connected to
interfaces based on the interface numbers. Subsequently, when the PoE power is
insufficient, the device does not power on the PDs that are connected later
regardless of which interface they are connected to and does not power off the
PDs that have been powered on.

Example
# Disable the device from powering on or off PDs connected to interfaces based
on the port numbers.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe power-policy port-index-priority disable

3.7.23 poe power-reserved

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 970

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The poe power-reserved command sets the percentage of the reserved PoE
power against the total PoE power.
The undo poe power-reserved command restores the default percentage of the
reserved PoE power against the total PoE power.
By default, the percentage of the reserved PoE power against the total PoE power
is 20%.

Format
poe power-reserved power-reserved [ slot slot-id ]
undo poe power-reserved power-reserved slot slot-id
undo poe power-reserved [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

power-reserved Specifies the percentage The value is an integer

of the reserved PoE that ranges from 0 to
power against the total 100, in percentage.
PoE power. The default value is 20.

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID. The value is 0 if stacking

is not configured. The
value ranges from 0 to 8
if stacking is configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios
The device can dynamically allocate power to each interface according to the
power consumption of each interface. The power consumption of a PD keeps
changing when the PD is running. The system periodically calculates the total
power consumption of all the PDs. If the total power consumption exceeds the
upper threshold of the device, the system cuts off the power of the PDs on the
interfaces of low priority to ensure that other PDs can run normally.
Sometimes, however, the power consumption increases sharply and the available
power of the system cannot support the burst increase of power. At this time, the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 971

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

system has not calculated and found that the total power consumption exceeded
the upper threshold; therefore, the system does not cut off power low-priority
interfaces in time. As a result, the PoE power supply is shut down for overload
protection, and all PDs are powered off.

This problem can be solved by running the poe power-reserved command to set
proper reserved power. When there is a burst increase in power consumption, the
reserved power can support the system running. Then the system has time to
power off interfaces of low priority to ensure stable running of other PDs.

Precautions

● The reserved power should not be set greater than 20%. If the reserved PoE
power is greater than 20% of the total PoE power, the power capacity of the
device is affected.
● To set the maximum output power of a device, run the 3.7.17 poe max-
power command. In this case, the device calculates the reserved power based
on the set maximum output power. If the maximum output power is not set,
the available PoE power is the power provided by the PoE power module.

Example
# Set the percentage of reserved PoE power to the total PoE power to 30%.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe power-reserved 30
Warning: This operation may power off some PDs of slot 0.Continue?[Y/N]:y

Related Topics
3.7.17 poe max-power
3.7.6 display poe-power

3.7.24 poe power-threshold

Function
The poe power-threshold command sets the alarm threshold of the PoE power
consumption percentage.

The undo poe power-threshold command restores the default alarm threshold of
the PoE power consumption percentage.

By default, the alarm threshold is 90%. That is, an alarm is generated when the
consumed power accounts for 90% of the total power.

Format
poe power-threshold threshold-value [ slot slot-id ]

undo poe power-threshold threshold-value slot slot-id

undo poe power-threshold [ slot slot-id ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 972

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

threshold-value Specifies the alarm The value is an integer

threshold of the PoE that ranges from 0 to
power consumption 100, in percentage.
percentage. When the The default value is 90.
power consumption
reaches this value, a PoE
power alarm is
generated.

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID. The value is 0 if stacking

is not configured. The
value ranges from 0 to 8
if stacking is configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
The poe power-threshold command sets the alarm threshold of the PoE power
consumption percentage. If the total PoE power is 369.6 W and the alarm
threshold is 90%, an alarm is generated when the power consumption is greater
than 332.64 W. When the power consumption falls below 332.64 W, the alarm is
cleared.

Example
# Set the alarm threshold of the PoE power consumption percentage to 80%.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] poe power-threshold 80

Related Topics
3.7.23 poe power-reserved

3.7.25 poe priority

Function
The poe priority command sets the power priority of a PoE interface.
The undo poe priority command restores the default power priority of a PoE
interface.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 973

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, the power supply priority of an interface is low.

Format
poe priority { critical | high | low }

undo poe priority

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

critical Indicates the highest -

priority.

high Indicates the second -

highest priority.

low Indicates the lowest -

priority.

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the output power of a device is insufficient, the device in automatic power
management mode provides power for the interfaces of the higher power supply
priorities first and cuts off power of the interfaces of the lower power supply
priorities. the S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, S5720EI, and S5720HI provide power to
PDs connected to the interfaces in ascending order of interface numbers. Other
series of PoE switches provide power to PDs connected to the interfaces in the
sequence in which PDs are connected to them.

Example
# Set the power supply priority of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 to critical.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe priority critical

Related Topics
3.7.19 poe power-management

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 974

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.7.26 poe single-class enable

Function
The poe single-class enable command configures the single-class power supply
mode for an interface.
The undo poe single-class enable command restores the standard hierarchical
power supply mode for an interface.
By default, an interface works in standard hierarchical power supply mode.

Format
poe single-class enable
undo poe single-class enable

Parameters
None

Views
Ethernet interface view, GE interface view, port group view, MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, a PoE interface works in standard hierarchical power supply mode. If
PoE interfaces provide power to non-standard PDs in standard hierarchical power
supply mode, these PDs cannot initiate power requests using LLDP or CDP and can
only obtain a low power. As a result, these PDs cannot work normally. To address
this issue, run the poe single-class enable command to configure the single-class
power supply mode for PoE interfaces. These non-standard PDs can then initiate
power requests and obtain the standard power supply to work normally.
Precautions
● If a standard PD is connected to the interface, this PD may be unable to work
normally after the poe single-class enable command is run.
● On the S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S5720-16X-PWH-LI-AC, S5720-28X-PWH-LI-AC,
and S6720SI, the poe af-inrush enable and poe single-class enable
commands are mutually exclusive and cannot be configured on the same
interface.

Example
# Configure the single-class power supply mode for GE0/0/1.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 975

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] poe single-class enable

3.7.27 rps cold-backup

Function
The rps cold-backup command configures the RPS as the backup power module.
The undo rps cold-backup command restores the RPS power module for the PoE
device.
By default, if a PoE switch connects to an RPS, the RPS and power modules of the
switch supply power to the switch simultaneously.

NOTE

Only the S5700-28P-PWR-LI-AC, S5700-28TP-PWR-LI-AC, S5700-28X-PWR-LI-AC,

S5700-52P-PWR-LI-AC, S5700-52X-PWR-LI-AC, and S5701-28TP-PWR-LI-AC support the
command.

Format
rps cold-backup [ slot slot-id ]
undo rps cold-backup [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID. The value is 0 if stacking

is not configured. The
value ranges from 0 to 8
if stacking is configured.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenarios
S5700LI can use an RPS and its own power modules for power supply. By default,
if a PoE switch connects to an RPS, the RPS and power modules of the switch
supply power to the switch simultaneously. The switch provides 800 W of PoE
power. You can configure the RPS as a backup power supply using the rps cold-
backup command. After you run this command, the switch uses its own power

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 976

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

modules for PoE power supply. If the total power consumption of all PDs
connected to the switch is low, the RPS can be configured as a backup power
supply to save power.

Precautions

● The command is valid only when the RPS has been correctly connected to the
switch and powered on.
● When the AC input voltage is 220 V, the RPS that has one 870 W PoE power
module can provide 800 W PoE power for only one PoE switch. The RPS can
have at most two 870 W PoE power modules configured to provide PoE
power for two PoE switches, 800 W PoE power for each switch.
● When the AC input voltage is 110 V, each 870 W PoE power module can
provide only 400 W PoE power. If you need to use the RPS to provide PoE
power, the RPS must have two 870 W PoE power modules configured and it
can provide only one port to provide 800 W PoE power for one PoE switch.
● If an RPS is not used as a backup power supply, it can provide PoE power
supply to a maximum of two S5700LI switches at the same time.
● When an RPS is configured as a backup power supply, it can provide power
redundancy for a maximum of six switches. If the power modules of a switch
fail, the RPS can provide power supply to the switch immediately to ensure
uninterrupted services. The RPS can ensure seamless power supply switchover
for one switch at a time.
● Switches connected to the same RPS must have the same configuration.

Example
# Set the RPS to the backup PoE power module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] rps cold-backup
Warning: The RPS power will change the supply mode! Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: Succeeded in setting the configuration. This command will take effect only after
RPS has capability for power suppply.

3.7.28 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap command enables the trap
function for the POETRAP module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap command disables the

trap function for the POETRAP module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the POETRAP module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap [ trap-name trap-name ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap [ trap-name trap-name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 977

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name trap-name Specifies the trap for an The value is an

event of the POETRAP enumerated value and
module. must be set as prompted
by the device.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwpoepdconnected trap of the POETRAP module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name poetrap trap-name hwpoepdconnected

Related Topics
3.7.7 display snmp-agent trap feature-name poetrap all

3.8 Stack Configuration Commands

3.8.1 Command Support
3.8.2 display mad
3.8.3 display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all
3.8.4 display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all
3.8.5 display stack
3.8.6 display stack peers
3.8.7 display stack port
3.8.8 display stack port auto-cable-info

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 978

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.9 display stack port speed

3.8.10 display stack-port load-balance
3.8.11 display stack configuration
3.8.12 display stack channel
3.8.13 display upgrade area
3.8.14 display upgrade state
3.8.15 interface stack-port
3.8.16 mad detect mode direct
3.8.17 mad detect mode relay
3.8.18 mad domain
3.8.19 mad exclude
3.8.20 mad relay
3.8.21 mad restore
3.8.22 port interface enable
3.8.23 reset stack configuration
3.8.24 reset stack port statistics
3.8.25 reset stack-port configuration
3.8.26 save stack configuration
3.8.27 set l2-traffic fast-recover
3.8.28 shutdown interface
3.8.29 stack authentication
3.8.30 stack led enable
3.8.31 stack-port load-balance mode
3.8.32 stack port speed
3.8.33 stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger
3.8.34 stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down
3.8.35 stack reserved-vlan
3.8.36 stack slot priority
3.8.37 stack slot renumber
3.8.38 stack timer mac-address switch-delay
3.8.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack
3.8.40 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad
3.8.41 upgrade backup-area slot

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 979

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.42 upgrade start

3.8.1 Command Support

Table 3-83 Applicable product models and versions

Product Software Version Stack Connection
Mode

S1720 Not supported -

S2700SI Not supported -

S2710SI V100R006(C03&C05) Service port

connection using
ordinary cables

S2700EI V100R005C01, Service port

V100R006(C00&C01&C03&C05) connection using
ordinary cables

S2720EI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R006C10, V200R009C00, ordinary and
V200R010C00, V200R011C10 dedicated cables
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S2750EI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R003C00, V200R005C00SPC300, ordinary and
V200R006C00, V200R007C00, dedicated cables
V200R008C00, V200R009C00,
V200R010C00, V200R011C00,
V200R011C10
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S3700SI V100R005C01, Service port

V100R006(C00&C01&C03&C05) connection using
ordinary cables

S3700EI V100R005C01, Service port

V100R006(C00&C01&C03&C05) connection using
ordinary cables

S3700HI Not supported -

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 980

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Product Software Version Stack Connection

Mode

S5700EI V100R005C01, V100R006(C00&C01), Stack card

V200R001(C00&C01), V200R002C00, connection
V200R003C00,
V200R005(C00&C01&C02&C03)

S5700SI V100R005C01, V100R006C00, Stack card

V200R001C00, V200R002C00, connection
V200R003C00, V200R005C00

S5700HI V200R003C00, V200R005C00 Service port

connection using
ordinary cables

S5700LI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R001C00, V200R002C00, ordinary and
V200R003(C00&C02&C10), dedicated cables
V200R005C00SPC300, V200R006C00,
V200R007C00, V200R008C00,
V200R009C00, V200R010C00,
V200R011C00, V200R011C10
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S5700S-LI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R008C00, V200R009C00, ordinary and
V200R010C00, V200R011C00, dedicated cables
V200R011C10
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S5710EI V200R001C00, V200R002C00, Service port

V200R003C00, V200R005(C00&C02) connection using
ordinary cables

S5710HI V200R005C03 Service port

connection using
ordinary cables

S5710-C-LI V200R001C00 Stack card

connection

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 981

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Product Software Version Stack Connection

Mode

S5710-X-LI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R008C00, V200R009C00, ordinary and
V200R010C00, V200R011C00, dedicated cables
V200R011C10
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S5720LI and Versions supporting service port Service port

S5720S-LI connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R010C00, V200R011C00, ordinary and
V200R011C10 dedicated cables
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S5720SI and Versions supporting service port Service port

S5720S-SI connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R008C00, V200R009C00, ordinary and
V200R010C00, V200R011C00, dedicated cables
V200R011C10
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 982

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Product Software Version Stack Connection

Mode

S5720EI V200R007C00, V200R008C00, Service port

V200R009C00, V200R010C00, connection using
V200R011C00, V200R011C10 ordinary cables:
S5720-C-EI, S5720-
PC-EI
Stack card
connection: S5720-
P-EI, S5720-C-EI,
S5720-X-EI, S5720-
PC-EI
When using the
stack card
connection mode,
note the following:
● S5720-C-EI and
S5720-PC-EI
series switches
use dedicated
stack cards to
set up stacks.
● S5720-X-EI and
S5720-P-EI
series switches
use stack ports
fixed on cards to
set up stacks.

S5720HI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R009C00, V200R010C00, ordinary and
V200R011C00, V200R011C10 dedicated cables
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S5730SI V200R011C10 Service port

connections using
ordinary and
dedicated cables

S5730S-EI V200R011C10 Service port

connections using
ordinary and
dedicated cables

S6700EI V100R006C00, V200R001(C00&C01), Service port

V200R002C00, V200R003C00, connection using
V200R005(C00&C01&C02) ordinary cables

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 983

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Product Software Version Stack Connection

Mode

S6720EI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R008C00, V200R009C00, ordinary and
V200R010C00, V200R011C00, dedicated cables
V200R011C10
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S6720S-EI Versions supporting service port Service port

connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R009C00, V200R010C00, ordinary and
V200R011C00, V200R011C10 dedicated cables
Versions supporting service port
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S6720SI and Versions supporting service port Service port

S6720S-SI connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R011C00, V200R011C10 ordinary and
Versions supporting service port dedicated cables
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

S6720LI and Versions supporting service port Service port

S6720S-LI connection using ordinary cables: connections using
V200R011C00, V200R011C10 ordinary and
Versions supporting service port dedicated cables
connection using dedicated cables:
V200R011C10

3.8.2 display mad

Function
The display mad command displays the multi-active detection (MAD)
configuration.

Format
display mad [ proxy | verbose ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 984

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
proxy Displays information about the proxy device. -

verbose Displays detailed MAD configuration. -

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check the MAD configuration, run the display mad command. If the verbose
parameter is specified, detailed MAD configuration is displayed, including MAD-
enabled interfaces and interfaces excluded from shutdown.
When MAD in relay mode is configured, you can run the display mad proxy
command on the proxy device to check its MAD configuration.

Example
# Display MAD configuration.
<HUAWEI> display mad
Current MAD domain: 0
MAD direct detection enabled: YES
MAD relay detection enabled: NO

# Display detailed MAD configuration.

<HUAWEI> display mad verbose
Current MAD domain: 0
Current MAD status: Detect
Mad direct detect interfaces configured:
GigabitEthernet2/0/8
GigabitEthernet2/0/9
Mad relay detect interfaces configured:
Excluded ports(configurable):
GigabitEthernet2/0/4
Excluded ports(can not be configured):

# Display information about the specified proxy device.

<HUAWEI> display mad proxy
Mad relay interfaces configured:
Eth-Trunk1

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 985

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-84 Description of the display mad command output

Item Description

Current MAD domain MAD domain configured in the system.

To configure this parameter, run the
3.8.18 mad domain command.

MAD direct detection enabled MAD in direct mode is configured. To

configure MAD in direct mode, run the
3.8.16 mad detect mode direct
command.

MAD relay detection enabled MAD in relay mode is configured. To

configure MAD in relay mode, run the
3.8.17 mad detect mode relay
command.

Current MAD status Current MAD status:

● Detect: The stack is running
properly.
● Recovery: The switch that fails
master switch election in a MAD
scenario enters the Recovery state
and blocks all of its service ports
except those excluded from
shutdown.

Mad direct detect interfaces Interface on which MAD in direct

configured mode is configured. To configure MAD
in direct mode on an interface, run the
3.8.16 mad detect mode direct
command.

Mad relay detect interfaces configured Interface on which MAD in relay mode
is configured. To configure MAD in
relay mode on an interface, run the
3.8.17 mad detect mode relay
command.

Excluded ports(configurable) Interfaces excluded from shutdown. To

configure interfaces excluded from
shutdown, run the 3.8.19 mad
exclude command.

Excluded ports(can not be configured) Interfaces that are excluded from

shutdown in the system by default.

Mad relay interfaces configured Interface on which the relay function is

configured. To configure the relay
function on an interface, run the
3.8.20 mad relay command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 986

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.8.16 mad detect mode direct
3.8.17 mad detect mode relay
3.8.19 mad exclude
3.8.20 mad relay

3.8.3 display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all

Function
The display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all command displays the
status of all stack traps.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can use this command to check the status of all stack traps. These traps can
be enabled or disabled using the 3.8.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
stack command.

Example
# Display the status of all stack traps.
<HUAWEI> display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: stack
Trap number : 21
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwStackLinkUp on on
hwStackLinkDown on on
hwStackStandbyChange on on
hwStackSwitchOver on on
hwStackSystemRestart on on
hwStackStackMemberAdd on on
hwStackStackMemberLeave on on
hwStackStackMacChange on on
hwStackLogicStackPortLinkErr on on
hwStackPhyStackPortLinkErr on on
hwPhyStackPortIsDown on on

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 987

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

hwPhyStackPortIsUp on on
hwStackPortConfigureFailed on on
hwStackMemberExceedSpec on on
hwPhyStackPortErrorDown on on
hwPhyStackPortErrorDownRecover on on
hwPhyStackVlanConflict on on
hwStackPortErrorDown on on
hwStackPortErrorDownRecovery on on
hwStackSetUpFailure on on
hwStackAutoConfigFailed on on

Table 3-85 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all
command output
Item Description

Feature name Name of the feature for which the traps are defined.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 988

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Trap name Name of a trap:

● hwStackLinkUp: A stack port was Up.
● hwStackLinkDown: A stack port was Down.
● hwStackStandbyChange: A slave switch was
elected as the standby switch.
● hwStackSwitchOver: The standby switch became
the master switch.
● hwStackSystemRestart: A stack restarted, and the
original master switch was no longer the master
after master preemption.
● hwStackStackMemberAdd: A new member switch
joined the stack.
● hwStackStackMemberLeave: A member switch
left the stack.
● hwStackStackMacChange: The stack MAC address
changed.
● hwStackLogicStackPortLinkErr: A logical stack port
was incorrectly connected.
● hwStackPhyStackPortLinkErr: A physical member
port was incorrectly connected.
● hwPhyStackPortIsDown: The physical member
port was Down.
● hwPhyStackPortIsUp: The physical member port
was Up.
● hwStackPortConfigureFailed: The stack port
configuration was incorrect.
● hwStackMemberExceedSpec: The number of
member switches reached the maximum value.
● hwPhyStackPortErrorDown: An Error-down event
occurred on a physical member port that was
added to a logical stack port.
● hwPhyStackPortErrorDownRecover: The physical
member port that was added to a logical stack
port recovered from the Error-down state.
● hwPhyStackVlanConflict: The service VLAN
conflicted with the stack reserved VLAN.
● hwStackPortErrorDown: The stack port entered
the Error-down state.
● hwStackPortErrorDownRecovery: The stack port
recovered from the Error-down state.
● hwStackSetUpFailure: The stack failed to be set
up.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 989

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

● hwStackAutoConfigFailed: After a dedicated stack

cable was connected, the interface did not
automatically become a stack port.

Default switch status Default status of a trap:

● on: The trap is enabled by default.
● off: The trap is disabled by default.

Current switch status Current status of a trap:

● on: The trap is enabled.
● off: The trap is disabled.
A trap can be enabled or disabled using the 3.8.39
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack
command.

Related Topics
3.8.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack

3.8.4 display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all command displays the status of
all traps in the MAD module.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the trap function of the MAD module is enabled using the snmp-agent trap
enable feature-name mad command, you can run the display snmp-agent trap

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 990

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

feature-name mad all command to check the status of all traps in the MAD
module.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled using the snmp-agent command.

Example
# Display the status of all the traps in the MAD module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: MAD
Trap number : 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwMadConflictDetect on on
hwMadConflictResume on on

Table 3-86 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all
command output

Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Trap name Trap name:

● hwMadConflictDetect: A MAD conflict is detected.
● hwMadConflictResume: Existing stacks are
merged.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: The trap function is enabled by default.
● off: The trap function is disabled by default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: The trap function is enabled.
● off: The trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.8.40 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad

3.8.5 display stack

Function
The display stack command displays information about the member switches in a
stack.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 991

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display stack

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check stack information, including stack topology and stack member switches,
run the display stack command.

This command can be used only after the stack function is enabled (default
status).

Example
# Display stack information.
<HUAWEI> display stack
Stack mode: Service-port
Stack topology type: Link
Stack system MAC: 0018-82b1-6eb4
MAC switch delay time: 10 min
Stack reserved VLAN: 4093
Slot of the active management port: 0
Slot Role MAC address Priority Device type
-------------------------------------------------------------
0 Master 0018-82b1-6eb4 200 S5700-28P-LI-AC
1 Standby 0018-82b1-6eba 150 S5700-28P-LI-AC

Table 3-87 Description of the display stack command output

Item Description

Stack mode Stack connection mode supported by

the switch:
● Service-port: Service port
connection
● Card: Stack card connection

Stack topology type Stack topology type:

● Link: chain topology
● Ring: ring topology

Stack system MAC Stack system MAC address.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 992

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

MAC switch delay time Time after which the system MAC
address of the stack is switched. To
configure this parameter, run the stack
timer mac-address switch-delay
command.

Stack reserved VLAN Stack reserved VLAN.

To configure this parameter, run the
stack reserved-vlan command.

Active management slot Slot ID of the effective management

interface in the stack. If no member
switch in the stack has a management
interface or all the management
interfaces are Down, this field displays
--.
NOTE
After a stack is set up, you can log in to
the stack through any member switch's
management interface or console
interface. A stack can have only one
effective management interface at a time.

Slot Stack ID of the member switch.

Role Member switch role:

● Master
● Standby
● Slave

MAC address MAC address of the member switch.

Priority Stack priority.

To configure this parameter, run the
stack slot priority command.

Device Type Device model of the member switch.

3.8.6 display stack peers

Function
The display stack peers command displays information about the neighbors of a
member switch.

Format
display stack peers

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 993

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check information about the neighbors of a member switch, run the display
stack peers command.

This command can be used only after the stack function is enabled (default
status).

Example
# Display information about the neighbors of a member switch.
<HUAWEI> display stack peers
Slot Port1 Peer1 Port2 Peer2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 STACK 1 1 STACK 2 None
1 STACK 1 None STACK 2 0

Table 3-88 Description of the display stack peers command output

Item Description

Slot Stack ID of a member switch.

Port1 Stack port 1.

Peer1 Stack ID of the switch to which stack

port 1 connects. If this field displays
ID(B), stack port 1 is blocked. If this
field displays None, there is no peer
device.

Port2 Stack port 2.

Peer2 Stack ID of the switch to which stack

port 2 connects. If this field displays
ID(B), stack port 2 is blocked. If this
field displays None, there is no peer
device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 994

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.7 display stack port

Function
The display stack port command displays information about stack ports.

Format
display stack port [ brief | slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

brief Displays summary of -

stack ports.

slot slot-id Displays configuration of Set the value according

stack ports on a specified to the device
switch. slot-id specifies configuration.
the stack ID of a switch.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display stack port command to check summary and detailed
information about stack ports.

Example
# Display summary of stack ports on the S5720EI (stack card connection).
<HUAWEI> display stack port brief
PHY :Physical state
Protocol:Stack link protocol state
*down :Administratively down
(r) :Runts trigger error down
(c) :CRC trigger error down
(l) :Link-flapping trigger error down
Stack Port PHY Protocol InUti OutUti InErrors OutErrors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
stack-port0/1 up up 0% 0% 0 0
stack-port0/2 up up 0% 0% 0 0

# Display summary of stack ports on the S5720LI (service port connection).

<HUAWEI> display stack port brief
PHY :Physical state
Protocol:Stack link protocol state
*down :Administratively down

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 995

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

(r) :Runts trigger error down

(c) :CRC trigger error down
(l) :Link-flapping trigger error down
Stack Port PHY Protocol InUti OutUti InErrors OutErrors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
stack-port0/1 up up 0% 0% 0 0
XGigabitEthernet0/0/1 up up 0% 0% 0 0
XGigabitEthernet0/0/2 up up 0% 0% 0 0
stack-port0/2 up up 0% 0% 0 0
XGigabitEthernet0/0/3 up up 0% 0% 0 0
XGigabitEthernet0/0/4 up up 0% 0% 0 0

# Display summary of stack ports on the S6720EI (service port connection).

<HUAWEI> display stack port brief
PHY :Physical state
Protocol:Stack link protocol state
*down :administratively down
(r) :Runts trigger error down
(c) :CRC trigger error down
(l) :Link-flapping trigger error down
Stack Port PHY Protocol InUti OutUti InErrors OutErrors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
stack-port0/1
XGigabitEthernet0/0/1 down down 0.00% 0.00% 0
0
unAllocated
XGigabitEthernet0/0/2 down -- 0.00% 0.00% 0 0
XGigabitEthernet0/0/3 down -- 0.00% 0.00% 0 0
XGigabitEthernet0/0/4 down -- 0.00% 0.00% 0 00

Table 3-89 Description of the display stack port brief command output
Item Description

Stack Port Number of a stack port.

unAllocated indicates that a service port has become a
stack member port but has not been bound to a logical
stack port.

PHY Physical status of an interface:

● down: The interface is physically disabled.
● up: The interface is physically enabled.
● *down: The interface is manually shut down.
● down(r): Runts error continuously occurs on a stack
port.
● down(c): There are CRC error packets on a stack port.
● down(l): A stack port repeatedly alternates between
Up and Down states.

Protocol Link layer protocol status of the interface:

● down: A stack port does not receive stack link
packets.
● up: A stack port can receive stack link detection
packets.

InUti Average inbound bandwidth usage of an interface

within the last 300 seconds.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 996

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

OutUti Average outbound bandwidth usage within the last 300

seconds.

InErrors Number of error packets received by an interface.

OutErrors Number of error packets sent by an interface.

# Display detailed information about stack ports (stack card connection).

<HUAWEI> display stack port
stack-port1/1:
---------------------------------------------
Current state : DOWN
Speed : NA

Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Frames: 0

Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Fragments: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0

Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0

Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0

stack-port1/2:
---------------------------------------------
Current state : DOWN
Speed : NA

Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Frames: 0

Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Fragments: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0

Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes

Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0

Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 997

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-90 Description of the display stack port command output (stack card
connection)
Item Description

stack-port1/1 Stack port 1 in slot 1.

Speed Interface forwarding rate.

current state Stack port status:

● DOWN: The stack port is disabled.
● UP: The stack port is enabled.

Input Total number of packets received by the stack port.

Output Total number of packets sent by the stack port.

Unicast Number of unicast packets sent or received by the stack

port.

Multicast Number of multicast packets sent or received by the

stack port.

Broadcast Number of broadcast packets sent or received by the

stack port.

Jumbo Number of jumbo frames sent or received by the stack

port.

Discard Number of packets discarded by the stack port during

physical layer detection.

Total Error Total number of error packets found by the stack port
during physical layer detection.

CRC Number of CRC error packets received by the stack port.

Giants Number of jumbo frames with correct FCS received by

the stack port.

Jabbers Number of jumbo frames with incorrect FCS received by

the stack port.

Fragments Number of undersized frames with incorrect FCS

received by the stack port.

Runts Number of undersized frames with correct FCS received

by the stack port.

DropEvents Number of received packets that are discarded because

the GBP is full or there is back pressure.

Alignments Number of frames with alignment errors received by the

stack port.

Symbols Number of coding error frames received by the stack

port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 998

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Ignoreds Number of received MAC control frames whose OpCode

is not PAUSE.

Frames Number of packets with an incorrect 802.3 length

received by the stack port.

Collisions Number of packets that encountered 1 to 15 conflicts

and sent by the stack port.

ExcessiveCollisions Number of packets that encountered 16 conflicts and

fail to be sent by the stack port.

Late Collisions Number of packets sent by the stack port after a delay
due to conflicts.

Deferreds Number of packets sent by the stack port after a delay

without any conflict.

Buffers Purged Number of packets aged due to existence in the buffer

for an extended time before being sent out by the stack
port.

# Display detailed information about stack ports (service port connection).

<HUAWEI> display stack port
*down : administratively down
Logic Port Phy Port Online Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
stack-port0/1 XGigabitEthernet0/0/1 present up
XGigabitEthernet0/0/2 present down
XGigabitEthernet0/0/4 present down
stack-port0/2 XGigabitEthernet0/0/3 present up
stack-port3/1 XGigabitEthernet3/0/1 present up
stack-port3/2 XGigabitEthernet3/0/3 present up
stack-port4/1 XGigabitEthernet4/0/1 present up
stack-port4/2 XGigabitEthernet4/0/3 present up
stack-port8/1 XGigabitEthernet8/0/1 present up
stack-port8/2 XGigabitEthernet8/0/3 present up

Table 3-91 Description of the display stack port command output (service port
connection)
Item Description

Logic Port Number of a stack port.

Phy Port Type and number of a physical member port.

Online Presence of a physical member port.

● present: The current installed service card type is
consistent with that configured on the switch.
● absent: The current installed service card type is
inconsistent with that configured on the switch.

Status Status of a physical member port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 999

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.8 display stack port auto-cable-info

Function
The display stack port auto-cable-info command displays information about
dedicated stack cables.

NOTE

S1720 and S5720EI do not support this command.

Format
display stack port auto-cable-info slot slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value range depends

a member switch. on the device.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display stack port auto-cable-info command to check interfaces
supporting dedicated stack cables and whether dedicated stack cables have been
connected to interfaces.

Example
# Display information about dedicated stack cables on the switch with the slot ID
0.
<HUAWEI> display stack port auto-cable-info slot 0
Logic Port Phy Port Cable-role
----------------------------------------------------------
stack-port0/1 XGigabitEthernet0/0/1 Slave
stack-port0/1 XGigabitEthernet0/0/2 --
stack-port0/2 XGigabitEthernet0/0/3 --
stack-port0/2 XGigabitEthernet0/0/4 Master

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1000

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-92 Description of the display stack port auto-cable-info command

output
Item Description

Logic Port Logical stack port.

Phy Port Physical member port.

Cable-role Role of a dedicated stack cable:

● Master: The installed dedicated
stack cable is the master end.
● Slave: The installed dedicated stack
cable is the slave end.
● --: No dedicated stack cable is
connected to the current port.

3.8.9 display stack port speed

Function
The display stack port speed command displays the stack port working speed.

NOTE

● Only the S5710-X-LI, S5700S-X-LI, S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5720-X-LI, S5720S-X-LI,

S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI, and S6720S-SI support this
command.
● The S5720-P-LI does not support this command before the license is loaded and
supports this command after the license is loaded and it restarts.

Format
display stack port speed

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display stack port speed command to check the stack port's
current working speed and working speed taking effect after a restart. To set the
stack port working speed, run the stack port speed command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1001

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the stack port's current working speed and working speed taking effect
after a restart.
<HUAWEI> display stack port speed
Stack Port Current Speed Next Speed
------------------------------------------------------
stack-port2/1
XGigabitEthernet2/0/1 10G 12G
stack-port2/2
XGigabitEthernet2/0/4 10G 12G
stack-port3/1
XGigabitEthernet3/0/1 10G 12G
XGigabitEthernet3/0/3 10G 12G
stack-port3/2
XGigabitEthernet3/0/28 10G 12G
XGigabitEthernet3/0/30 10G 12G

Table 3-93 Description of the display stack port speed command output

Item Description

Stack Port Stack port.

Current Speed Stack port's current working speed.

Next Speed Stack port's working speed taking

effect after a restart.
To configure the parameter, run the
stack port speed command.

3.8.10 display stack-port load-balance

Function
The display stack-port load-balance command displays the load balancing
modes of stack ports.

NOTE

Only the S5720HI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI support this command.

Format
display stack-port { global load-balance | load-balance [ slot-id/port-id ] }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is an integer

a member switch. that ranges from 0 to 8.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1002

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

port-id Specifies the ID of a The value is 1 or 2.

stack port.

global Displays the global load -

balancing mode.
NOTE
The S5720HI only support
this parameter.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display stack-port load-balance command to check the load
balancing modes of stack ports and then locate data transmission failures
between stack links.

Example
# Display the load balancing modes of stack ports.
<HUAWEI> display stack-port load-balance
Global load balance mode: ENHANCED
Interface stack-port0/1 load balance mode: ENHANCED
Interface stack-port0/2 load balance mode: ENHANCED
Interface stack-port1/1 load balance mode: DST-MAC
Interface stack-port1/2 load balance mode: SRC-MAC
Interface stack-port2/1 load balance mode: DST-IP
Interface stack-port2/2 load balance mode: SRC-DST-IP

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1003

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-94 Description of the display stack-port load-balance command output

Item Description

Global load balance Global load balancing mode:

mode ● DST-IP: performs load balancing based on destination
IP addresses.
● DST-MAC: performs load balancing based on
destination MAC addresses.
● SRC-IP: performs load balancing based on source IP
addresses.
● SRC-MAC: performs load balancing based on source
MAC addresses.
● SRC-DST-IP: performs load balancing based on the
Exclusive-OR result of source and destination IP
addresses.
● SRC-DST-MAC: performs load balancing based on the
Exclusive-OR result of source and destination MAC
addresses.
● ENHANCED: enhanced load balancing mode.
To set the global load balancing mode, run the stack-
port load-balance mode command in the system view.

Interface stack- Load balancing mode of a stack port:

port0/1 load balance ● DST-IP: performs load balancing based on destination
mode IP addresses.
● DST-MAC: performs load balancing based on
destination MAC addresses.
● SRC-IP: performs load balancing based on source IP
addresses.
● SRC-MAC: performs load balancing based on source
MAC addresses.
● SRC-DST-IP: performs load balancing based on the
Exclusive-OR result of source and destination IP
addresses.
● SRC-DST-MAC: performs load balancing based on the
Exclusive-OR result of source and destination MAC
addresses.
● ENHANCED: enhanced load balancing mode.
To set the load balancing mode for a stack port, run the
stack-port load-balance mode command in the stack
port view.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1004

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.11 display stack configuration

Function
The display stack configuration command displays stack configuration
commands configured in a stack.

Format
display stack configuration [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id Displays the stack commands The value range depends
configured on a stack member switch. on the device
slot-id specifies the stack ID of the configuration.
member switch.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When a new device joins a stack, you can run this command to check which stack
commands have been configured in the stack. You can then modify parameter
settings in these commands and issue these commands to the new device in
sequence. During command execution, you may need to restart the device or
confirm your operation as prompted.
Precautions
● This command is valid only when the stack function is enabled and has taken
effect. By default, the stack function is enabled.
● This command displays only the stack commands that have been executed.
The displayed command configuration is not necessarily the running stack
configuration, because most stack configuration commands take effect after a
system restart.

Example
# Display the stack configuration commands that have been executed in a stack.
<HUAWEI> display stack configuration
* : Invalid-configuration

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1005

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

# : Unsaved configuration
---------------Configuration on slot 2
Begin---------------

stack enable
stack slot 0 renumber 2
stack slot 2 priority 150
stack reserved-vlan 4093
stack timer mac-address switch-delay 10

interface stack-port 2/1

*port interface XGigabitEthernet2/0/1 enable

interface stack-port 2/2

#port interface XGigabitEthernet2/0/4 enable
---------------Configuration on slot 2 End-----------------

● If a stack member port is marked with an asterisk (*), the current

configuration does not take effect because of the following reasons:
– The current configuration is the preconfiguration that has not taken
effect.
– The stack member port is located on a subcard that is not available.
– When ports on the device panel and ports on subcards cannot be used
together, one of the two port types is configured as stack member ports
but not configured as the ports that take effect on the device, and the
device is restarted.
● If a stack member port is marked with a number sign (#), the current
configuration is automatically generated for dedicated cable stacking but not
saved to the flash memory using the save stack configuration or save
command.

3.8.12 display stack channel

Function
The display stack channel all command displays stack link connections and
status.

Format
display stack channel [ all | slot slot-id ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

all Displays stack link connections and status -
of all the member switches.

slot slot-id Displays stack link connections and status The value range depends
of the member switch with a specified on the device
stack ID. configuration.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1006

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check stack link connections and status, run the display stack channel all
command. If you do not specify all or slot slot-id in the command, this command
displays the stack link connections and status of the master switch.

Example
# Display stack link connections and status of all the member switches.
<HUAWEI> display stack channel all
! : Port have received packets with CRC error.
L-Port: Logic stack port
P-Port: Physical port
Slot L-Port P-Port Speed State || P-Port Speed State L-Port Slot
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1/2 GE1/0/28 2.5G UP GE2/0/27 2.5G UP 2/1 2
2 2/1 GE2/0/27 2.5G UP GE1/0/28 2.5G UP 1/2 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following output information shows that the physical member port GE1/0/28
works at 2.5 Gbit/s and is in Up state; it is bound to stack port 1/2 and belongs to
the member switch with stack ID 1; GE1/0/28 is connected to the physical member
port GE2/0/27; GE2/0/27 works at 2.5 Gbit/s and is in Up state; It is bound to
stack port 2/1 and belongs to member switch with stack ID 2.
1 1/2 GE1/0/28 2.5G UP GE2/0/27 2.5G UP 2/1 2

Table 3-95 Description of the display stack channel command output

Item Description

! A physical member port has received CRC error packets.

NOTE
If a physical member port receives CRC error packets, its Speed
field displays the speed value and an exclamation mark (!), for
example, 2.5G!.

Slot Stack ID of a device.

L-Port Number of a stack port.

P-Port Number of a physical member port.

Speed Speed of a physical member port.

Status Status of a physical member port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1007

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.13 display upgrade area

Function
The display upgrade area command displays area status and whether a smooth
upgrade can start.

Format
display upgrade area

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
If the stack topology changes after the areas for smooth upgrade are divided,
members in the active and backup areas may change, resulting in a smooth
upgrade failure. To check whether a smooth upgrade can start in these areas, run
the display upgrade area command.

If the areas fail the check, re-define the active and backup areas according to the
current stack topology.

The active area contains the master switch.

Example
# Display the current area status and whether a smooth upgrade can start.
<HUAWEI> display upgrade area
Slot Area Upgrade-Check
------------------------------------
0 backup passed
3 active passed
4 active passed
8 active passed

Table 3-96 Description of the display upgrade area command output

Item Description

Slot Stack ID of a device.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1008

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Area Area to which a device belongs.

● active
● backup
● unknown: The device does not belong to any area.

Upgrade-Check Upgrade check result.

● passed
● failed

3.8.14 display upgrade state

Function
The display upgrade state command displays the smooth upgrade status of
member switches in a stack.

Format
display upgrade state [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is an integer

a member switch. that ranges from 0 to 8.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check the status of member switches in the active and backup areas before or
after a smooth upgrade, run the display upgrade state command.
If you specify the slot slot-id parameter in the command, you can check whether
the member switch with this slot ID has been upgraded successfully.
If the master switch of a stack restarts or experiences a master/standby switchover
after a smooth upgrade, area information will be deleted from the master switch,
and the Area field of the master switch will be displayed as unknown.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1009

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the smooth upgrade status of member switches in a stack.
<HUAWEI> display upgrade state
Slot Area Status
-----------------------------
0 backup backup rebooting
3 backup backup rebooting
4 active backup rebooting
8 active backup rebooting

# Display the smooth upgrade status of the member switch with stack ID 4.
<HUAWEI> display upgrade state slot 4
--------------------------------------
Slot :4
Area : backup
Status : successful
ErrorCode : -
Description : -
--------------------------------------

Table 3-97 Description of the display upgrade state command output

Item Description

Slot Stack ID of a device.

Area Area to which a device belongs.

● active
● backup
● unknown: The device does not belong to any area.

Status Upgrade progress of a device.

● idle: The upgrade has not been performed yet.
● backup rebooting: The backup area is upgrading.
● active rebooting: The active area is upgrading.
● failed: The upgrade failed.
● successful: The upgrade succeeded.

ErrorCode Error code of an upgrade failure.

Description Description about the failure if an upgrade fails.

3.8.15 interface stack-port

Function
The interface stack-port command displays the stack port view.

NOTE

Only devices supporting service port stacking support this command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1010

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
interface stack-port member-id/port-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
member-id Specifies the stack ID of a The value is an integer that
member switch. ranges from 0 to 8.

port-id Specifies a stack port number. The value is 1 or 2.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Each member switch has two stack ports, which are named Stack-Portn/1 and
Stack-Portn/2. n specifies the stack ID of a member switch. After you run the
interface stack-port command to enter the view of a stack port, you can
configure attributes for the stack port.

Example
# Display the view of Stack-Port1/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface stack-port 1/1
[HUAWEI-stack-port1/1]

3.8.16 mad detect mode direct

Function
The mad detect mode direct command configures multi-active detection (MAD)
in direct mode on an interface.

The undo mad detect command cancels the configuration.

By default, MAD in direct mode is disabled on an interface.

Format
mad detect mode direct

undo mad detect [ mode direct ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1011

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
GE interface view, XGE interface view, 40GE interface view, port group view,
MultiGE interface view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To ensure that only one switch becomes the master switch after a stack splits,
thereby enhancing stack stability, run the mad detect mode direct command to
configure MAD in direct mode on an interface.
Configuration Impact
Configuring MAD in direct mode on an interface blocks the interface. Disabling
MAD in direct mode on an interface restores the forwarding function of the
interface. If a loop exists on the network, a broadcast storm occurs.
Precautions
The undo mad detect command is not supported in the port group view. You can
only run the undo mad detect mode direct command in the port group view to
disable MAD in direct mode.

Example
# Configure MAD in direct mode on GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] mad detect mode direct
Warning: This command will block the port, and no other configuration running on
this port is recommended. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Related Topics
3.8.2 display mad

3.8.17 mad detect mode relay

Function
The mad detect mode relay command configures multi-active detection (MAD)
in relay mode on an interface.
The undo mad detect command cancels the configuration.
By default, MAD in relay mode is disabled on an interface.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1012

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
mad detect mode relay

undo mad detect [ mode relay ]

Parameters
None

Views
Eth-Trunk interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To ensure that only one switch becomes the master switch after a stack splits,
thereby enhancing stability of the stack, run the mad detect mode relay
command to configure MAD in relay mode on an Eth-trunk.

Precautions

The undo mad detect command is not supported in the port group view. You can
only run the undo mad detect mode relay command in the port group view to
disable MAD in relay mode.

Example
# Configure MAD in relay mode on Eth-Trunk 10.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface eth-trunk 10
[HUAWEI-Eth-Trunk10] mad detect mode relay

Related Topics
3.8.2 display mad

3.8.18 mad domain

Function
The mad domain command sets a MAD domain ID for a stack.

The undo mad domain command restores the default MAD domain ID for a
stack.

By default, the MAD domain ID of a stack is 0.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1013

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
mad domain domain-id
undo mad domain

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
domain-id Specifies the MAD domain ID for The value is an integer that
a stack. ranges from 0 to 255.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
In most MAD scenarios, configuring a MAD domain ID for a stack is unnecessary.
When two stack systems function as a proxy of each other to implement MAD,
configure different MAD domain IDs for the stack systems.

Example
# Set the MAD domain ID for a stack to 1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] mad domain 1

Related Topics
3.8.2 display mad

3.8.19 mad exclude

Function
The mad exclude command excludes specified interfaces of a stack from
shutdown.
The undo mad exclude command cancels excluding specified interfaces of a stack
from shutdown.
By default, only physical member ports are excluded from shutdown.

Format
mad exclude interface { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type
interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1014

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo mad exclude interface { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-

type interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface { interface- Specifies the type and number of an The value of
type interface- interface: interface-number2
number1 [ to must be larger
interface-type ● interface-type specifies the type
of the interface. than that of
interface-number2 ] } interface-number1.
● interface-number1 specifies the
number of the first interface.
● interface-number2 specifies the
number of the second interface.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If MAD detects a stack split, all service ports of the member switch that fails
master switch election must be shut down to prevent network flapping caused by
MAC or IP address flapping. If some interfaces only transparently transmit packets,
they do not affect network operation in a dual-active condition. You can run the
mad exclude command to exclude these interfaces from shutdown before a stack
split occurs.
Precautions
● After an interface is shut down because of MAD, it cannot be enabled if the
mad exclude command is executed to exclude it from shutdown.
● When the to parameter is specified to exclude multiple ports from shutdown,
these ports must reside on the same card and the port number following this
parameter must be larger than the port number followed by this parameter.

Example
# Exclude GigabitEthernet0/0/2 and GigabitEthernet0/0/3 from shutdown.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] mad exclude interface gigabitethernet 0/0/2 to gigabitethernet 0/0/3

Related Topics
3.8.2 display mad

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1015

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.20 mad relay

Function
The mad relay command enables the relay function on an interface of a proxy
device.
The undo mad relay command disables the relay function on an interface of a
proxy device.
By default, the relay function is disabled on an interface.

Format
mad relay
undo mad relay

Parameters
None

Views
Eth-Trunk interface view, port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
For MAD working in relay mode, run the mad relay command to configure the
relay function on an Eth-Trunk interface of a proxy device. Member interfaces of
the Eth-Trunk interface exchange MAD packets between member switches.

Example
# Enable the relay function on Eth-Trunk 10 of a proxy device.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface eth-trunk 10
[HUAWEI-Eth-Trunk10] mad relay

3.8.21 mad restore

Function
The mad restore command restores all the blocked interfaces of a standby switch
that enters the Recovery state after its stack splits.

Format
mad restore

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1016

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When MAD detects a multi-active event, the member switch elected as the master
switch remains in the Detect state. The elected standby switch enters the Recovery
state, shuts down all its service ports except those excluded from shutdown, and
stops forwarding service packets.
If the switch in the Detect state fails or is removed before the split stack is
restored, run the mad restore command on the switch in the Recovery state to
restore the interfaces in shutdown state. The switch in the Recovery state then
goes to the Detect state. You can then restore the original switch in the Detect
state and rectify the faulty stack links. After the faults are rectified, the two
switches form a stack again.

Example
# Restore all the blocked interfaces of the standby switch that enters the Recovery
state after its stack splits.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] mad restore

3.8.22 port interface enable

Function
The port interface enable command configures a service interface as a physical
member port and adds it to a stack port.
The undo port interface enable command restores a physical member port to
being a service interface.
By default, service interfaces are not used as physical member ports of a stack
port.

NOTE

Only the switches supporting service port stacking support this command.

Format
port interface { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type interface-
number2 ] } &<1-10> enable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1017

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo port interface { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type

interface-number2 ] } &<1-10> enable

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface-type Specifies the type and number of an The value of
interface-number1 interface: interface-number2
[ to interface-type must be larger
interface-number2 ] ● interface-type specifies the type
of the interface. than that of
interface-number1.
● interface-number1 specifies the
number of the first interface.
● interface-number2 specifies the
number of the second interface.

Views
Stack interface view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In service interface connection mode, run the port interface enable command to
configure a service interface as a physical member port to implement the stack
function.
Configuration Impact
A stack physical member port supports only stack-related functions, and other
functions cannot be configured on the interface. All the commands irrelevant to
the stack function are masked in the interface view, and only basic configuration
commands, such as 4.1.4 description (interface view), are retained.
After configuring a service port of a switch as a physical stack member port, you
are advised to save the configuration if this service port has been referenced by
other commands. Otherwise, the commands that reference this service port may
be retained after the switch restarts.
On the S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI, and
S6720S-SI, the electrical or optical port stack configuration on the front panel is
mutually exclusive with the SVF client mode configuration. If electrical or optical
ports on the front panel have been configured as stack physical member ports,
SVF management VLAN cannot be configured. If an SVF management VLAN has
been configured, electrical or optical ports on the front panel cannot be
configured as stack physical member ports.
On the S6720EI and S6720S-EI, every four of XGE interfaces from the left are
added to one group. For example, XGE interfaces numbered 1 to 4 can be added

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1018

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

to one group, but XGE interfaces numbered 2 to 5 cannot. That is, the number of
the last XGE interface in each group must be the multiple of 4. If you configure
any interface in each group as a physical member port, configurations on the
other three interfaces in the group will be lost and the three interfaces cannot be
used as service ports.

Precautions

● To restore a physical member port as a service interface, run the 3.8.28

shutdown interface command in the stack port view and then run the undo
port interface enable command.
● On the S2720EI, S2750EI, S5700S-LI, S5700LI, S5710-X-LI, S5720LI, S5720S-LI,
S5720S-SI, S5720SI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI, and
S6720S-SI, after a service interface is configured as a stack member port, the
following priority mapping rules apply to packets on this interface:
– Packets sent to the CPU are mapped to queue 7.
– Packets with priority 0 or 1 are mapped to queue 0.
– Packets with priorities 2 to 7 are mapped to queues 1 to 6, respectively.
● If the switch functions as an AS in an SVF system and its downlink service
ports have been configured as member ports of an uplink fabric port, all the
downlink ports of the AS cannot be configured as stack member ports.

Example
# Configure XGigabitEthernet0/0/28 as a physical member port and add it to stack
port 0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface stack-port 0/1
[HUAWEI-stack-port0/1] port interface xgigabitethernet 0/0/28 enable
Warning: Enabling stack function may cause configuration loss on the interface. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait.......

# On the S6720EI, configure XGigabitEthernet0/0/15 as a physical member port

and add it to stack port 0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface stack-port 0/1
[HUAWEI-stack-port0/1] port interface xgigabitethernet 0/0/15 enable
Warning: Enabling stack function may cause configuration loss on the interface XGigabitEthernet0/0/13 to
XGigabitEthernet0/0/16. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait........
Info: Port groups XGigabitEthernet0/0/13 to XGigabitEthernet0/0/16 have been configured as physical stack-
ports.

Related Topics
3.8.15 interface stack-port

3.8.23 reset stack configuration

Function
The reset stack configuration command clears all stack configuration. That is,
this command restores the default stack configuration.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1019

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

S1720 and S5720EI do not support this command.

Format
reset stack configuration

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When switches are stacked using dedicated stack cables, to ensure that slot IDs
are automatically generated for the switches based on the sequence in which
dedicated stack cables are connected, run the reset stack configuration
command to clear all stack configuration.
The cleared stack configuration includes: switch slot ID, stack priority, stack
reserved VLAN, stack MAC address switching delay, stack port configuration, and
stack port rate configuration.
Precautions
Running this command will cause the stack to split and member switches to
restart.

Example
# Clear all stack configuration.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] reset stack configuration
Warning: This operation will clear all stack configurations and may lead to the loss of the slot ID
configuration and cause the device to reset immediately. Are you sure you want to continue? [Y/N]:y

3.8.24 reset stack port statistics

Function
The reset stack port statistics command clears stack port statistics.

Format
reset stack port statistics [ slot-id/port-id ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1020

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is an integer

a member switch. that ranges from 0 to 8.

port-id Specifies the number of The value is 1 or 2.

a stack port.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Before collecting interface traffic statistics in a certain period of time, run the
reset stack port statistics command to clear existing traffic statistics. If you do
not specify the port number, statistics on all stack ports are cleared. If you specify
the port number, only statistics on the specified port are cleared.

Precautions

The cleared statistics cannot be restored. Therefore, exercise caution when you run
the reset stack port statistics command.

This command can be used only after the stack function is enabled (default
status).

Example
# Clear the statistics from all stack ports.
<HUAWEI> reset stack port statistics

3.8.25 reset stack-port configuration

Function
The reset stack-port configuration command clears the service port stack
configuration.

NOTE

Only the S5720EI supports this command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1021

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
reset stack-port configuration [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies a stack ID. The value is an integer

that ranges from 0 to 8.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

● When the current stack connection mode is service port connection, you must
run the reset stack-port configuration command to clear the existing service
port stack configuration before changing the stack connection mode to stack
card connection. After the configuration is cleared, restart the stack and then
the stack card connection mode takes effect.
● If the current stack connection mode is stack card connection, you can run the
reset stack-port configuration command to clear the service port stack
configuration if such configuration already exists. You can run the 3.8.11
display stack configuration command to check the existing service port
stack configuration.

Precautions

● In service port connection mode, after clearing the service port stack
configuration of a member switch, restart the switch to make the
configuration take effect. If you perform the service port stack configuration
on the member switch before restarting, the service port stack configuration
on the member switch is not cleared.
● When the stack is changed from service port connection to stack card
connection, remove the cables connected to service ports to prevent potential
loops.

Example
# Clear the service port stack configuration.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] reset stack-port configuration

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1022

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.8.11 display stack configuration

3.8.26 save stack configuration

Function
The save stack configuration command saves the stack configuration
automatically generated for dedicated cable stacking to the flash memory.

By default, the stack configuration automatically generated for dedicated cable

stacking is not saved to the flash memory.

NOTE

S1720 and S5720EI do not support this command.

Format
save stack configuration

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After dedicated stack cables are connected to ports, stack configuration is

automatically generated but not saved to the flash memory. If these cables are
removed or other cables are connected, the stack configuration is automatically
deleted. To ensure that the stack configuration still takes effect when these cables
are removed or other cables are connected, run the save stack configuration
command.

Precautions

● Removing dedicated stack cables from ports after this command is executed
will cause these ports unable to automatically become service ports.
● No stack configurations can be manually modified before the stack
configuration automatically generated for dedicated cable stacking is saved to
the flash memory.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1023

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Save the stack configuration that is automatically generated for dedicated cable
stacking to the flash memory.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] save stack configuration
Warning: This operation will save all stack configurations to flash. Are you sure you want to continue? [Y/
N]:y

3.8.27 set l2-traffic fast-recover

Function
The set l2-traffic fast-recover enable command enables fast recovery of Layer 2
traffic.

The undo set l2-traffic fast-recover enable command disables fast recovery of
Layer 2 traffic.

By default, fast recovery of Layer 2 traffic is disabled.

Format
set l2-traffic fast-recover enable

undo set l2-traffic fast-recover enable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
After fixed switches set up a stack and the standby switch starts, the standby
switch restores configurations and then implements batch backup from the master
switch.

By default, interfaces on the standby switch become Up when batch backup is

complete. In this case, Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic can be normally forwarded but
there is a delay in Layer 2 traffic recovery. To enable fast recovery of Layer 2
traffic, run the set l2-traffic fast-recover enable command. Interfaces on the
standby switch then immediately go Up when configuration restoration is
complete. This way, however, cannot ensure Layer 3 traffic forwarding through the
Up interfaces.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1024

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Enable fast recovery of Layer 2 traffic.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] set l2-traffic fast-recover enable

3.8.28 shutdown interface

Function
The shutdown interface command shuts down a physical member interface.

The undo shutdown interface command enables a physical member interface.

By default, a physical member interface is enabled after being configured.

NOTE

Only devices supporting service port stacking support this command.

Format
shutdown interface { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type
interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

undo shutdown interface { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-type

interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

interface-type Specifies the type and number of an The value of
interface-number1 interface: interface-number2
[ to interface-type must be larger
interface-number2 ] ● interface-type specifies the type
of the interface. than that of
interface-number1.
● interface-number1 specifies the
number of the first interface.
● interface-number2 specifies the
number of the second interface.

Views
Stack interface view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1025

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
To restore a physical member interface to being a service interface, run the
shutdown interface command in the stack interface view and then run the undo
port interface enable command.

If there is only one available link on a stack interface, running the shutdown
interface command will change the stack status or split the stack. After you run
the undo shutdown interface command on the stack interface, the stack will be
set up again when a link on the stack interface becomes available.

Example
# Shut down physical member interface XGigabitEthernet0/0/3.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface stack-port 0/1
[HUAWEI-stack-port0/1] shutdown interface XGigabitEthernet0/0/3
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait...succeeded.

3.8.29 stack authentication

Function
The stack authentication command configures the authentication mode and
authentication information used when a switch needs to join a stack.

The undo stack authentication command deletes the authentication mode and
authentication information used when a switch needs to join a stack.

By default, a switch does not need to be authenticated when joining a stack.

Format
stack authentication slot slot-id { mac mac-address | esn esn-value }

undo stack authentication slot slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is an integer

a switch. that ranges from 0 to 8.

mac mac-address Configures MAC-based The value is in H-H-H

authentication. format, where H is a
hexadecimal number of
1 to 4 digits.

esn esn-value Configures ESN-based The value is a string of

authentication. 10 to 32 characters.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1026

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
A switch can join a stack without being authenticated. In this situation, an
attacker can add any switch to a stack to obtain the configuration file of the stack
master switch, resulting in information leak. To solve this problem, configure
authentication when a switch needs to join a stack. This configuration ensures
that this switch joins the stack only when it is authenticated successfully.
A switch will be authenticated only when its stack ID is the same as that specified
in the stack authentication command. Otherwise, this switch can join a stack
without being authenticated. Therefore, before adding a switch to a stack, you are
advised to change the slot ID of the switch to an unused stack ID in the stack and
then configure an authentication mode for this stack ID.
Precautions
● This command can be executed only after the stacking function is enabled.
● Only one authentication mode can be configured for a stack ID, and the latest
configuration takes effect.
● If a switch to join a stack fails the authentication, this switch will restart
repeatedly.

Example
# Configure MAC-based authentication to be used when a switch with the stack
ID 4 needs to join a stack.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack authentication slot 4 mac-address 3-3-3

3.8.30 stack led enable

Function
The stack led enable command enables a service port indicator to indicate the
stack ID of a stack switch.
The stack led disable command disables a service port indicator from indicating
the stack ID of a stack switch.
By default, a service port indicator does not indicate the stack ID of a stack switch.

Format
stack led enable [ duration duration-value ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1027

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

stack led disable

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

duration duration-value Specifies how long a The value is an integer

service port indicator that ranges from 30 to
indicates the stack ID of 600, in seconds. By
a stack switch. default, a stack ID
indicator stays on for 45
seconds.

Views
All views

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Stack IDs can be allocated by the master switch when a stack is set up, or you can
configure them yourself. If stack IDs are allocated by the master switch, you
cannot identify which ID a device maps to. To enable a service port indicator to
indicate the stack ID of a stack switch, run the stack led enable command.

A service port indicator indicates the stack ID of a stack switch as follows:

● For a switch whose stack ID ranges from 1 to 8: Only the indicator whose
serial number matches the stack ID is on. For example, if the stack ID is 1, the
first indicator is on. If the stack ID is 2, the second indicator is on.
● For a switch whose stack ID is 0: If the stack contains N stack switches, the
first N indicators are on. For example, if the stack contains 9 stack switches,
the first 9 indicators are on, indicating the stack ID is 0.
● After service port indicators are configured to indicate the stack IDs, the
service port indicator of the master switch blinks, and that of the slave switch
is steady on.

The configuration of this command becomes invalid when port indicators show
stack IDs of member switches for the specified time.

Example
# Enable a service port indicator to indicate the stack ID of a stack device for a
period of 30s.
<HUAWEI> stack led enable duration 30

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1028

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.31 stack-port load-balance mode

Function
The stack-port load-balance mode command sets a load balancing mode for the
physical member ports of a stack port.

The undo stack-port load-balance mode command restores the default load
balancing mode.

By default, the load balancing of stack member ports is performed in enhanced

mode based on the source MAC address, destination MAC address, source IP
address, destination IP address, and port number.

NOTE

Only the S5720HI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI support this command.

Format
stack-port load-balance mode { dst-ip | dst-mac | src-dst-ip | src-dst-mac | src-
ip | src-mac }

undo stack-port load-balance mode

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

dst-ip Performs load balancing -

based on destination IP
addresses.

dst-mac Performs load balancing -

based on destination
MAC addresses.

src-dst-ip Performs load balancing -

based on the Exclusive-
OR result of the source
and destination IP
addresses.

src-dst-mac Performs load balancing -

based on the Exclusive-
OR result of the source
and destination MAC
addresses.

src-ip Performs load balancing -

based on source IP
addresses.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1029

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

src-mac Performs load balancing -

based on source MAC
addresses.

Views
System view
Logical stack port view (The S5720HI does not support the stack-port load-
balance mode command in this view.)

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Use Scenario
To transmit traffic from a stack port to a destination over different links, run the
stack-port load-balance mode command to configure an appropriate load
balancing mode for the physical member ports of the stack port. Outgoing traffic
is then properly balanced among the physical links, preventing congestion on
these links. If you run this command multiple times to set different load balancing
modes, the last configuration takes effect. The load balancing mode configured in
the system view takes effect globally, and the load balancing mode configured in
a stack port view takes effect only on the specified stack port. You can run the
display stack-port command to view the load balancing mode on a stack port.
Precautions
● If a non-default load balancing mode is configured on a stack port, the
configured load balancing mode takes effect. If a stack port uses the default
load balancing mode and the global load balancing mode is not the default
one, the global load balancing mode takes effect.
● If the source MAC address-based load balancing mode is used, Layer 3
packets forwarded to a downstream device may fail to be balanced among
the stack links because the source MAC address of the packets is the fixed
system MAC address. If the traffic rate exceeds the bandwidth of a single
stack link, some packets may be dropped.

Example
# Set the global load balancing mode to src-ip.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack-port load-balance mode src-ip

# Set the load balancing mode on stack port 0/1 to dst-ip.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] interface stack-port 0/1
[HUAWEI-stack-port0/1] stack-port load-balance mode dst-ip

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1030

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.32 stack port speed

Function
The stack port speed command sets the working speed for stack member ports.
The undo stack port speed command restores the working speed of stack
member ports to the default value.
For the default working speeds of stack member ports on different switch models,
see "Stacking Support and Version Requirements " in Stack Configuration in the
S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 V200R011C10 Configuration Guide - Device
Management.

NOTE

● Only the S5710-X-LI, S5700S-X-LI, S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5720-X-LI, S5720S-X-LI,

S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI, and S6720S-SI support this
command.
● The S5720-P-LI does not support this command before the license is loaded and
supports this command after the license is loaded and it restarts.

Format
stack port speed { 48G | 12G | 2.5G }
undo stack port speed

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

48G Sets the working speed -

of stack member ports to
48 Gbit/s.
This speed can be set
only on the S5730SI,
S5730S-EI, S6720LI,
S6720S-LI, S6720SI, and
S6720S-SI.

12G Sets the working speed -

of stack member ports to
12 Gbit/s.
This speed can be set
only on the S5710-X-LI,
S5700S-X-LI, S5720SI,
S5720S-SI, S5720-P-LI,
S5720-X-LI, and S5720S-
X-LI.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1031

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

2.5G Sets the working speed -

of stack member ports to
2.5 Gbit/s.
This speed can be set
only on the S5720-P-LI,
S5720-X-LI and S5720S-
X-LI.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
On the S5710-X-LI, S5700S-X-LI, S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5720-P-LI, S5720-X-LI, and
S5720S-X-LI, if optical ports are used as stack member ports and are connected
using 1 m or 3 m SFP+ passive copper cables, you can use this command to
increase their working speed from 10 Gbit/s to 12 Gbit/s, expanding the stack
bandwidth. After their working speed is increased to 12 Gbit/s, switches using
these ports cannot set up a stack with switches using ports with the working
speed 10 Gbit/s.
On the S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI, and S6720S-SI, if 40GE
optical ports are used as stack member ports and are connected using 1 m, 3 m or
5m QSFP+ passive copper cables, you can use this command to increase their
working speed from 40 Gbit/s to 48 Gbit/s, expanding the stack bandwidth. After
their working speed is increased to 48 Gbit/s, switches using these ports cannot
set up a stack with switches using ports with the working speed 40 Gbit/s.
On the S6720SI, only the rate of 40GE interfaces on the front panel can be
increased to 48 Gbit/s.
If S5720-P-LI, S5720-X-LI and S5720S-X-LI switches use XGE optical ports to stack
with other switches that have GE optical ports, use this command to reduce the
working speed of the XGE optical ports from 10 Gbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s, so that the
XGE optical ports can work with the remote GE optical ports.
Precautions
After changing the working speed of stack member ports, you need to restart the
switch for the new speed to take effect.

Example
# Set the working speed of stack member ports to 12 Gbit/s.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1032

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack port speed 12G

3.8.33 stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger

Function
The stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger command sets the stack port error-down
parameters.

The undo stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger command restores the default
settings of the stack port error-down parameters.

By default, the error-down alarm threshold is 10 times per minute, the error-down
check interval is 3 minutes, and the alarm clearance interval is 0 (not cleared
automatically).

Format
stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger { threshold threshold | interval interval } *

undo stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger { threshold | interval }

stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down auto-recovery-interval auto-

recovery-interval
undo stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down auto-recovery-interval

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

crc Sets the parameters for -

stack port error-down
alarms triggered by CRC
errors.

link-flap Sets the parameters for -

stack port error-down
alarms triggered by port
Up/Down transitions.

threshold threshold Specifies the error-down The value is an integer. It

alarm threshold. ranges from 1 to 10000
for error-down alarms
triggered by CRC errors
and ranges from 3 to 30
for error-down alarms
triggered by port Up/
Down transitions. The
unit is times per minute.

interval interval Specifies the error-down The value is an integer

check interval. that ranges from 3 to 30,
in minutes.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1033

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

auto-recovery-interval Specifies the error-down The value is an integer

auto-recovery-interval alarm clearance interval. that ranges from 3 to 30,
in minutes.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After the stack port error-down function is enabled, you can run the stack port
{ crc | link-flap } trigger command to adjust the related parameters.

Example
# Set the clearance interval of stack port error-down alarms triggered by CRC
errors to 3 minutes. That is, if the rate of received CRC error packets stays below
the threshold for 3 minutes, the stack port changes to Up state and the error-
down alarm is cleared.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack port crc trigger error-down auto-recovery-interval 3

3.8.34 stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down

Function
The stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down command enables the stack
port error-down function.
The undo stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down command disables the
stack port error-down function.
By default, the stack port error-down function is enabled.

Format
stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down
undo stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger error-down

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1034

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

crc Enables stack port error- -

down triggered by CRC
errors.

link-flap Enables stack port error- -

down triggered by port
Up/Down transitions.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In a stack system, if a stack port continuously receives CRC error packets or flaps
between Up and Down states, the corresponding stack link cannot forward traffic
normally, thereby affecting network services. This command enables the stack port
error-down function. This function can shut down a stack port and switch traffic to
other stack links if the rate of received CRC error packets or the number of Up/
Down transitions on the stack port reaches the specified threshold, reducing the
impact on services. Additionally, the system generates stack port error-down
alarms to help in fault location.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the stack port { crc | link-flap } trigger command to set stack port error-
down parameters.

Precautions

● When one end is a stack port and the other end is a service port, the system
does not set the stack port to error-down state or generate an error-down
alarm even if this stack port continuously receives CRC error packets.
● The stack port error-down alarm OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.183.1.22.59.
● The stack port error-down alarm clearance OID is
1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.5.25.183.1.22.60.

Example
# Enable stack port error-down triggered by CRC errors.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack port crc trigger error-down

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1035

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.35 stack reserved-vlan

Function
The stack reserved-vlan command configures a reserved VLAN for a stack.

By default, a stack uses VLAN 4093 as the reserved VLAN.

Format
stack reserved-vlan vlan-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

vlan-id Specifies the ID of a The value is an integer

reserved VLAN. that ranges from 1 to
4094.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
By default, a stack uses VLAN 4093 as the reserved VLAN. A reserved VLAN is used
only to exchange stack protocol packets.

To deploy services in VLAN 4093, run the stack reserved-vlan command to

change the reserved VLAN of the stack.

NOTICE

If the reserved VLAN is used for other services, the stack cannot be set up. You
must specify an unused VLAN as the reserved VLAN for a stack.

Example
# Configure VLAN 4000 as the reserved VLAN of a stack.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack reserved-vlan 4000

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1036

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.36 stack slot priority

Function
The stack slot priority command sets a stack priority for a member switch in a
stack.

By default, the stack priority of a member switch is 100.

Format
stack slot slot-id priority priority

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is an integer

a member switch. that ranges from 0 to 8.

priority Specifies a stack priority. The value is an integer

that ranges from 1 to
255.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To set a stack priority for a member switch in a stack, run the stack slot priority
command. A larger priority indicates a higher priority, meaning that a switch is
more likely to be selected as a master switch.

Example
# Set the stack priority of the member switch with stack ID 4 to 150.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack slot 4 priority 150
Warning: Please do not frequently modify Priority because it will make the stack split. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Related Topics
3.8.5 display stack

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1037

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.37 stack slot renumber

Function
The stack slot renumber command changes the stack ID of a specified member
switch in a stack.

Format
stack slot slot-id renumber new-slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot-id Specifies the current The value is an integer

stack ID. that ranges from 0 to 8.

new-slot-id Specifies a new stack ID. The value is an integer

that ranges from 0 to 8.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To change the stack ID of a member switch in a stack, run the stack slot
renumber command.

NOTE

● After changing the stack ID of a switch, if you do not restart the switch, the switch continues
to use the original stack ID, and all physical resources are identified by the original stack ID.
● After changing the stack ID of a switch, if you save the current configuration and restarts the
switch, the new stack ID takes effect and all physical resources are identified by the new
stack ID. In the configuration file, only the global stack configuration and stack priority of
the switch continue to take effect. All other configurations related to the old stack ID (such
as interface configuration) become invalid and must be reconfigured.

Example
# Change the stack ID of a member switch from 4 to 5.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack slot 4 renumber 5
Warning: All the configurations related to the slot ID will be lost after the slot ID is modified.
Please do not frequently modify slot ID because it will make the stack split. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1038

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Info: Stack configuration has been changed, and the device needs to restart to make the configuration
effective.

Related Topics
3.8.5 display stack

3.8.38 stack timer mac-address switch-delay

Function
The stack timer mac-address switch-delay command sets a period after which a
stack changes its system MAC address.
The undo stack timer mac-address switch-delay command configures a stack to
change the system MAC address immediately after the owner of the original
system MAC address leaves the stack.
By default, a stack changes the system MAC address after 10 minutes.

NOTICE
When a stack is configured to switch the system MAC address immediately, the
system begins using the MAC address of the new master switch the moment the
previous master switch fails or leaves the stack. This may cause protocols such as
LACP and STP to flap, thereby affecting services.

Format
stack timer mac-address switch-delay delay-time
undo stack timer mac-address switch-delay

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

delay-time Specifies a period after The value ranges from 0

which a stack changes to 60, in minutes.
the system MAC address.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When a member switch leaves a stack, if you specify the MAC address of the
leaving switch as the stack MAC address and it does not rejoin the stack within

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1039

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

the time specified by delay-time, the master switch changes the stack MAC
address to its own MAC address.
The stack MAC address switchover delay time of any member switch in a stack is
the same as that of the master switch.
If the value of the MAC address switchover timer is set to 0, no stack MAC address
switchover will be performed.
This command can be used only after the stack function is enabled (default
status).

Example
# Set the MAC address switchover delay of the local switch to 4 minutes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] stack timer mac-address switch-delay 4
Warning: Please do not frequently modify MAC switch time because it will make the stack split. Continue?
[Y/N]:y

3.8.39 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack

Function
The snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack command enables a specified
stack trap or all stack traps.
The undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack command disables a
specified stack trap or all stack traps.
By default, all stack traps are enabled.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack [ trap-name trap-name ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack [ trap-name trap-name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1040

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
trap-name Specifies the This parameter has enumerated values:
trap-name name of a
trap. ● hwphystackporterrordown: An Error-down event
occurred on a physical member port that was
added to a logical stack port.
● hwphystackporterrordownrecover: The physical
member port that was added to a logical stack
port recovered from the Error-down state.
● hwphystackportisdown: The physical member port
was Down.
● hwphystackportisup: The physical member port
was Down.
● hwphystackvlanconflict: The service VLAN
conflicted with the stack reserved VLAN.
● hwstackautoconfigfailed: After a dedicated stack
cable was connected, the interface did not
automatically become a stack port.
● hwstacklinkdown: A stack port was Down.
● hwstacklinkup: A stack port was Up.
● hwstacklogicstackportlinkerr: A logical stack port
was incorrectly connected.
● hwstackmemberexceedspec: The number of
member switches reached the maximum value.
● hwstackphystackportlinkerr: A physical member
port was incorrectly connected.
● hwstackportconfigurefailed: The stack port
configuration was incorrect.
● hwstackporterrordown: The stack port entered the
Error-down state.
● hwstackporterrordownrecovery: The stack port
recovered from the Error-down state.
● hwstacksetupfailure: The stack failed to be set up.
● hwstackstackmacchange: The stack MAC address
changed.
● hwstackstackmemberadd: A new member switch
joined the stack.
● hwstackstackmemberleave: A new member switch
left the stack.
● hwstackstandbychange: A slave switch was
elected as the standby switch.
● hwstackswitchover: The standby switch became
the master switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1041

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

● hwstacksystemrestart: A stack restarted, and the

original master switch was no longer the master
after master preemption.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
By default, all stack traps are enabled. You can learn about stack status changes
from these traps. If you disable a type of stack trap, the switch no longer sends
this trap. Disabling the stack traps is not recommended.

Example
# Enable the hwstackswitchover trap.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name stack trap-name hwstackswitchover

Related Topics
3.8.3 display snmp-agent trap feature-name stack all

3.8.40 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad command enables the trap function
for the MAD module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad command disables the trap
function of the MAD module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the MAD module.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad [ trap-name
{ hwmadconflictdetect | hwmadconflictresume } ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad [ trap-name

{ hwmadconflictdetect | hwmadconflictresume } ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1042

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for a
specified event.

hwmadconflictdetect Enables or disables the -

trap function when a
MAD conflict is detected.

hwmadconflictresume Enables or disables the -

trap function when
existing stacks are
merged.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps for failures and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is disabled, the
device does not generate traps for failures, and the SNMP module does not send
traps to the NMS.

You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwmadconflictdetect trap function of the MAD module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name mad trap-name hwmadconflictdetect

Related Topics
3.8.4 display snmp-agent trap feature-name mad all

3.8.41 upgrade backup-area slot

Function
The upgrade backup-area slot command defines the active and backup areas in
a stack in preparation for a smooth upgrade.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1043

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
upgrade backup-area slot slot-id to slot-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

slot-id Specifies the stack ID of The value is an integer

a member switch. that ranges from 0 to 8.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Before upgrading a reliable stack with uplinks and downlinks working in

redundancy mode, you can divide the stack into an active area and a backup area
for redundancy. Member switches in the two areas can then be upgraded in turns.
When member switches in one area are being upgraded, traffic is transmitted to
member switches in the other area.

Precautions

● Member switches in the active and backup areas form the entire stack. When
dividing active and backup areas, note that:
– The active and backup areas cannot have the same member switch, and
both areas must have at least one member switch.
– The backup area cannot contain the master switch of the stack.
– Member switches in each area must be directly connected.
● After this command is run, the member switches with specified stack IDs join
the backup area. The other member switches automatically join the active
area.
● To ensure mutual backup, it is recommended that the two areas have similar
quantities of member switches.

Example
# Add member switches with stack IDs 0 to 3 to the backup area.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] upgrade backup-area slot 0 to 3

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1044

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.8.42 upgrade start

Function
The upgrade start command starts a smooth upgrade.

Format
upgrade start

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, run the 3.8.41 upgrade backup-area slot
command to define the active and backup areas and ensure that all member
switches in the stack are running the same system software and support smooth
upgrades.
If an upgrade fails, error codes and displayed message help locate the cause.
Table 3-98 lists the error codes and displayed messages in different upgrade
failure scenarios.

Table 3-98 Error codes and displayed messages in different upgrade failure
scenarios

Upgrade Failure Error Code Displayed Message

Scenario

Record in the backup 1 Rollback due to timeout.

area: The upgrade in the
backup area times out
and rolls back.

Record in the active 2

area: The upgrade in the
backup area times out
and rolls back.

Record in the backup 3

area: The upgrade in the
active area times out
and rolls back.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1045

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Upgrade Failure Error Code Displayed Message

Scenario

Record in the active 4

area: The upgrade in the
active area times out
and rolls back.

Record in the backup 257 Rollback due to topology

area: Rollback occurs changes.
due to a topology
change in the backup
area.

Record in the active 258

area: Rollback occurs
due to a topology
change in the backup
area.

Record in the backup 259

area: Rollback occurs
due to a topology
change in the active
area.

Record in the active 260

area: Rollback occurs
due to a topology
change in the active
area.

A member switch 512 Master is not upgraded.

records that the master
switch is not upgraded.

During a backup area 769 Master notifies others of

upgrade, the master rollback.
switch instructs switches
in the backup area to
roll back (after the
active area instructs the
backup area to upgrade
and switches in the
backup area restart).

During a backup area 770

upgrade, the master
switch instructs switches
in the backup area to
roll back (after the
active area instructs the
backup area to upgrade
and before switches in
the backup area restart).

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1046

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Upgrade Failure Error Code Displayed Message

Scenario

During an active area 771

upgrade, the master
switch instructs switches
in the active area to roll
back (after the backup
area instructs the active
area to upgrade and
before switches in the
active area restart).

During an active area 772

upgrade, the master
switch instructs switches
in the active area to roll
back (after the backup
area instructs the active
area to upgrade and
switches in the active
area restart).

During a backup area 1025 Master of the active area

upgrade, the master notifies others of
switch in the active area rollback.
instructs switches in the
backup area to roll back
(after switches in the
backup area restart).

During a backup area 1026

upgrade, the master
switch in the active area
instructs switches in the
backup area to roll back
(before switches in the
backup area restart).

During an active area 1027

upgrade, the master
switch in the active area
instructs switches in the
active area to roll back
(before switches in the
active area restart).

During an active area 1028

upgrade, the master
switch in the active area
instructs switches in the
active area to roll back
(after switches in the
active area restart).

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1047

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Upgrade Failure Error Code Displayed Message

Scenario

During a backup area 1281 Master of the backup

upgrade, the master area notifies others of
switch in the backup rollback.
area instructs switches in
the backup area to roll
back (after switches in
the backup area restart).

During a backup area 1282

upgrade, the master
switch in the backup
area instructs switches in
the backup area to roll
back (before switches in
the backup area restart).

During an active area 1283

upgrade, the master
switch in the backup
area instructs switches in
the active area to roll
back (before switches in
the active area restart).

During an active area 1284

upgrade, the master
switch in the backup
area instructs switches in
the active area to roll
back (after switches in
the active area restart).

A load event occurs, and 1537 Rollback due to a load

switches in the backup event.
area roll back.

A load event occurs, and 1549

switches in the active
area roll back.

The system software 5 Active startup file is

package is incorrect in incorrect.
the active area.

The system software 6 Backup startup file is

package is incorrect in incorrect.
the backup area.

Example
# Start a smooth upgrade.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1048

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] upgrade start

3.9 SVF Configuration Commands

3.9.1 Command Support

3.9.2 arp anti-attack check user-bind enable (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.3 as-admin-profile (AS group view)
3.9.4 as-admin-profile name
3.9.5 as-auth
3.9.6 as-group name
3.9.7 as access dtls psk
3.9.8 as access manage-mac
3.9.9 as auto-replace enable
3.9.10 as-mode disable
3.9.11 as all (AS group view)
3.9.12 as name (AS group view)
3.9.13 as name interface (port group view)
3.9.14 as name (uni-mng view)
3.9.15 as reset
3.9.16 as service-vlan igmp-snooping
3.9.17 as service-vlan authorization
3.9.18 as type
3.9.19 attach as
3.9.20 authentication access-user maximum (user access profile view)
3.9.21 auth-mode none
3.9.22 authentication-profile (user access profile view)
3.9.23 blacklist mac-address
3.9.24 broadcast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.25 clear direct-command
3.9.26 commit as
3.9.27 confirm
3.9.28 description (Fabric-port view)
3.9.29 description (port group view)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1049

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.30 dhcp snooping enable (network enhanced profile view)

3.9.31 direct-command
3.9.32 display as
3.9.33 display as access configuration
3.9.34 display as blacklist
3.9.35 display as run-info
3.9.36 display as unauthorized record
3.9.37 display as whitelist
3.9.38 display snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all
3.9.39 display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all
3.9.40 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all
3.9.41 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all
3.9.42 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all
3.9.43 display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics
3.9.44 display uni-mng as-group
3.9.45 display uni-mng as index
3.9.46 display uni-mng as interface brief
3.9.47 display uni-mng as interface eth-trunk
3.9.48 display uni-mng commit-result
3.9.49 display uni-mng global
3.9.50 display uni-mng indirect configuration
3.9.51 display uni-mng execute-failed-record
3.9.52 display uni-mng interface fabric-port configuration
3.9.53 display uni-mng interface fabric-port state
3.9.54 display uni-mng patch-delete info
3.9.55 display uni-mng port-group
3.9.56 display uni-mng profile
3.9.57 display uni-mng profile as
3.9.58 display uni-mng topology configuration
3.9.59 display uni-mng topology information
3.9.60 display uni-mng unauthen-user
3.9.61 display uni-mng unauthen-user offline-record
3.9.62 display uni-mng upgrade-info

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1050

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.63 display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port

3.9.64 down-direction fabric-port
3.9.65 down-direction fabric-port connect independent-as
3.9.66 forward-mode centralized
3.9.67 independent-as-admin
3.9.68 interface fabric-port
3.9.69 ip source check user-bind enable (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.70 mac-limit (user access profile view)
3.9.71 multicast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.72 network-basic-profile name
3.9.73 network-basic-profile (port group view)
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name
3.9.75 network-enhanced-profile (port group view)
3.9.76 pass-vlan (network basic profile view)
3.9.77 patch delete as
3.9.78 port connect independent-as
3.9.79 port connect-type indirect
3.9.80 port-group name
3.9.81 port eth-trunk trunkmember
3.9.82 port member-group interface
3.9.83 portal url-encode disable
3.9.84 rate-limit (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.85 reboot uni-mng
3.9.86 reset uni-mng as-discover packet statistics
3.9.87 shutdown interface
3.9.88 slot
3.9.89 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap
3.9.90 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap
3.9.91 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng
3.9.92 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm
3.9.93 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng
3.9.94 traffic-limit inbound (user access profile view)
3.9.95 traffic-limit outbound (AS administrator profile view)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1051

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.96 topology explore

3.9.97 undo uni-mng enable
3.9.98 uni eth-trunk
3.9.99 uni-mng
3.9.100 uni-mng indirect fabric-port
3.9.101 uni-mng indirect mng-vlan
3.9.102 uni-mng up-direction fabric-port
3.9.103 unicast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.104 upgrade as
3.9.105 upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server }
3.9.106 upload config
3.9.107 user-access-port enable (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.108 user-access-profile name
3.9.109 user-access-profile (port group view)
3.9.110 user-vlan (network basic profile view)
3.9.111 user password (AS administrator profile view)
3.9.112 voice-vlan (network basic profile view)
3.9.113 whitelist mac-address

3.9.1 Command Support

Commands provided in this section and all the parameters in the commands are
supported by all switch models by default, unless otherwise specified. For details,
see specific commands.

3.9.2 arp anti-attack check user-bind enable (network

enhanced profile view)

Function
The arp anti-attack check user-bind enable command configures dynamic ARP
inspection (DAI) in a network enhanced profile.

The undo arp anti-attack check user-bind enable command disables DAI in a
network enhanced profile.

By default, DAI is not configured in a network enhanced profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1052

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
arp anti-attack check user-bind enable

undo arp anti-attack check user-bind enable

Parameters
None

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure DAI in the profile.
After the profile is bound to an AS port, DAI is automatically enabled on the port.
The following configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
arp anti-attack rate-limit enable
arp anti-attack rate-limit packet 5 interval 1
arp anti-attack check user-bind enable
arp anti-attack check user-bind alarm enable
#

You can configure DAI to prevent Man in The Middle (MITM) attacks and theft on
authorized user information. When a device receives an ARP packet, it compares
the source IP address, source MAC address, interface number, and VLAN ID of the
ARP packet with DHCP snooping binding entries. If the ARP packet matches a
binding entry, the device allows the packet to pass through. If the ARP packet does
not match any binding entry, the device discards the packet.

Prerequisites

DHCP snooping has been enabled in the network enhanced profile using the dhcp
snooping enable command.

Example
# Enable DAI in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] dhcp snooping enable
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] arp anti-attack check user-bind enable

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1053

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.3 as-admin-profile (AS group view)

Function
The as-admin-profile command binds an AS administrator profile to an AS group.
The undo as-admin-profile command unbinds an AS administrator profile from
an AS group.
By default, no AS administrator profile is bound to an AS group.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as-admin-profile profile-name
undo as-admin-profile

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of an AS The value must have an existing
administrator profile. AS administrator profile name.

Views
AS group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can bind an AS administrator profile to an AS group to deliver the
configurations in the profile to all the member ASs in the AS group.
Prerequisites
The AS administrator profile has been created.
Precautions
AS groups can only be bound to AS administrator profiles. Each AS group can be
bound to only one AS administrator profile.

Example
# Bind an AS administrator profile to an AS group.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1054

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-admin-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-admin-profile_1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] as-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-group-group_1] as-admin-profile profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.4 as-admin-profile name
3.9.6 as-group name

3.9.4 as-admin-profile name

Function
The as-admin-profile name command creates an AS administrator profile.
The undo as-admin-profile name command deletes an AS administrator profile.
By default, no AS administrator profile is configured.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as-admin-profile name profile-name
undo as-admin-profile name profile-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of an The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
AS administrator profile. sensitive characters without spaces. The
value can contain letters, digits, and
underscores (_).

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In an AS administrator profile, you can configure AS administrator information
and the rate limit for outgoing ARP and DHCP packets on an uplink fabric port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1055

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions

You can create a maximum of 16 AS administrator profiles.

Example
# Create an AS administrator profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-admin-profile name profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.111 user password (AS administrator profile view)

3.9.5 as-auth

Function
The as-auth command displays the AS authentication view.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as-auth

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After entering the AS authentication view, you can configure the AS
authentication mode, blacklist, and whitelist.

Example
# Enter the AS authentication view.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] as-auth

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1056

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.6 as-group name

Function
The as-group name command creates an AS group or displays the AS group view.

The undo as-group name command deletes an AS group.

By default, no AS group is created.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as-group name group-name

undo as-group name group-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
group-name Specifies the name of The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
an AS group. sensitive characters without spaces. The
value can contain letters, digits, and
underscores (_).

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

An AS group contains one or more ASs, which facilitates AS batch configuration.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the as name as-name or as name-include string command to add ASs to an

AS group.

Precautions

You can create a maximum of 16 AS groups.

AS groups can only be bound to AS administrator profiles. Each AS group can be

bound to only one AS administrator profile.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1057

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Create an AS group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-group name group_1

Related Topics
3.9.12 as name (AS group view)
3.9.3 as-admin-profile (AS group view)

3.9.7 as access dtls psk

Function
The as access dtls psk command configures a pre-shared key for Datagram
Transport Layer Security (DTLS) encryption on an access switch (AS).
The undo as access dtls psk command deletes a pre-shared key used for DTLS
encryption.
The default username and password are available in S Series Switches Default
Usernames and Passwords (Enterprise Network or Carrier). If you have not
obtained the access permission of the document, see Help on the website to find
out how to obtain it.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
as access dtls psk psk-value
undo as access dtls psk

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
psk-value Specifies a pre- The value is a string of 6 to 32 case-sensitive
shared key. characters without spaces. The pre-shared key
must be in plain text and contain at least two
of the following: letters, digits, and special
characters.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1058

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To encrypt CAPWAP-encapsulated packets between the parent and an AS,

configure the same pre-shared key on the parent and AS. You can run the as
access dtls psk command to configure a pre-shared key for DTLS encryption on
the AS.

Precautions

● The default pre-shared key has security risks. You are advised to change the
pre-shared key.
● After an AS has connected to an SVF system, configuring or deleting the pre-
shared key for DTLS encryption is not allowed on the AS.

Example
# Set the pre-shared key for DTLS encryption to test@1234.
<HUAWEI> as access dtls psk test@1234

3.9.8 as access manage-mac

Function
The as access manage-mac command configures the management MAC address
of an AS.

The undo as access manage-mac command restores the default management

MAC address of an AS.

By default, an AS uses the system MAC address as the management MAC address.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
as access manage-mac mac-address

undo as access manage-mac

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
mac-address Specifies the The value is in H-H-H format, where H is a
management MAC hexadecimal number of 1 to 4 digits.
address of an AS.
The value cannot be all 0s, all Fs, or a
multicast MAC address.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1059

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In a Super Virtual Fabric (SVF) system, each AS has a unique management MAC
address to identify itself. By default, an AS uses its system MAC address as the
management MAC address to connect to an SVF system. When the management
MAC address of an AS conflicts with that of another AS, you can run the as access
manage-mac command to change the management MAC address so as to
prevent MAC address conflicts.
Precautions
● Use of this command is not recommended when no MAC address conflict
occurs, as an improper management MAC address may affect service
operations.
● This command can be used only before an AS connects an SVF system. If an
AS has connected to an SVF system, use of this command is not allowed.
● Before using this command to change the management MAC address of an
AS, you must run the undo as access manage-mac command to delete the
existing management MAC address.

Example
# Configure the management MAC address of an AS.
<HUAWEI> as access manage-mac 4cb1-6c91-52a0

3.9.9 as auto-replace enable

Function
The as auto-replace enable command enables AS automatic replacement.
The undo as auto-replace enable command disables AS automatic replacement.
By default, AS automatic replacement is disabled.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as auto-replace enable
undo as auto-replace enable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1060

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In an SVF system, each AS is identified by its MAC address by default. When a new
device is used to replace an AS, the SVF system considers the new device as a new
AS because their MAC addresses are different. As a result, the new AS does not
inherit services on the previous AS.

You can enable AS automatic replacement to solve this problem. When an AS is

replaced by a new device connected to the same fabric port, the SVF system
replaces the AS MAC address with the MAC address of the new device in the
configuration. Consequently, the new device can inherit services on the AS.

Precautions

● An AS can only be replaced by a device of the same model. If the new device
is a different model, the SVF system considers it as a new AS, which then
cannot inherit services on the previous AS.
● Only a standalone AS can be replaced, and a stacked AS cannot be replaced.
● AS automatic replacement is not supported when an AS connects to the
parent through a network.
● To ensure that a replacement AS can be successfully authenticated, run the
auth-mode none command to set the AS authentication mode to none, or
run the whitelist mac-address command to add the management MAC
address of the replacement AS to the whitelist. If the replacement AS has no
management MAC address configured, its system MAC address is used as the
management MAC address.

Example
# Enable AS automatic replacement.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as auto-replace enable

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1061

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.10 as-mode disable

Function
The as-mode disable command changes the device working mode to the parent
mode.
The undo as-mode disable command restores the device working mode to the AS
mode.
By default, the device works in AS mode.

NOTE

This command is only supported by S6720SI, S6720S-SI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI.

Format
as-mode disable
undo as-mode disable

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The S6720SI, S6720S-SI, S6720EI, and S6720S-EI can function as the parent or AS
in an SVF system. By default, the device works in AS mode and functions only as
an AS. To use the device as the parent, run the as-mode disable command. This
command will change the device working mode to the parent mode.
Precautions
After the working mode of a device is changed, the device does not use any
configuration file at the next startup.

Example
# Change the device working mode to the parent mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] as-mode disable
Warning: Switching the AS mode will clear current configuration and reboot the s
ystem. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1062

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.11 as all (AS group view)

Function
The as all command adds all ASs to an AS group.

The undo as all command deletes all ASs from an AS group.

By default, no AS is added to an AS group.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as all

undo as all

Parameters
None

Views
AS group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After creating an AS group, you need to add the ASs that require the same
configuration to the AS group. This command adds all ASs to the same AS group.

Precautions

An AS can be added to only one AS group. For example, if you run the as all
command in group_1 and then in group_2, the system displays a message, saying
that the ASs need to be deleted from the previous AS group before they can be
added to the new AS group.

Example
# Add all ASs to the AS group group_1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-group-group_1] as all

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1063

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.9.6 as-group name

3.9.12 as name (AS group view)

Function
The as name command adds an AS with a specified name to an AS group.

The as name-include command adds an AS of which the name contains a

specified string to an AS group.

The undo as name command deletes an AS with a specified name from an AS

group.

The undo as name-include command deletes an AS of which the name contains

a specified string from an AS group.

By default, no AS is added to an AS group.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as name as-name

as name-include string

undo as name as-name

undo as name-include string

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value must have an existing AS
name.

string Specifies the string contained The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-

in an AS name. insensitive characters without
spaces.

Views
AS group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1064

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating an AS group, add the ASs that need to be configured in a batch to
the AS group. You can only add created ASs to an AS group.
Precautions
An AS can be added to one only AS group.
After an AS is added to an AS group, to change the AS group, run the as name
command to add the AS to another AS group.

Example
# Add the AS as_1 to the AS group group_1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-group-group_1] as name as_1

Related Topics
3.9.6 as-group name

3.9.13 as name interface (port group view)

Function
The as name interface command adds ports on the AS with a specified name to a
port group.
The as name-include interface command adds ports on the AS of which the
name contains a specified string to a port group.
The undo as name interface command deletes ports on the AS with a specified
name from a port group.
The undo as name-include interface command deletes ports on the AS of which
the name contains a specified string from a port group.
By default, no ports on an AS are added to a port group.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as name as-name interface { { interface-type interface-number1 [ to interface-
number2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
as name-include string interface all
undo as name as-name interface { { interface-type interface-number1 [ to
interface-number2 ] } &<1-10> | all }

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1065

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo as name-include string interface all

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value must have
an existing AS name.

string Specifies the string contained in an AS The value is a string

name. of 1 to 31 case-
insensitive characters
without spaces.

interface-type Specifies the type and number of AS -

interface- interfaces.
number1 [ to
interface- ● interface-type specifies the
number2 ] interface type. The interface type
can be Eth-Trunk interface.
● interface-number1 specifies the
first interface number.
● interface-number2 specifies the
last interface number.

all Indicates all downlink service ports on -

an AS.

Views
Port group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a port group, add the AS ports that need to be configured in a
batch to the port group.
Precautions
A port can be added to only one port group.
After ports on an AS are added to a port group, to change the port group, run the
as name interface command to add the ports to another port group.

Example
# Add ports on the AS as1 to the port group group_1.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1066

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] port-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-portgroup-group_1] as name as1 interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1 to 0/0/5

Related Topics
3.9.80 port-group name

3.9.14 as name (uni-mng view)

Function
The as name command configures an AS name or displays the AS view.

The undo as name command deletes an AS.

By default, system default name-device MAC address is used as the AS name, for
example, huawei-000a-123d-2200.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as name as-name [ model as-model mac-address mac-address ]

undo as { all | name as-name }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as-name Specifies the name of The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
an AS. insensitive characters without spaces.

model as- Specifies the device The value is an enumerated type. You
model model of an AS. can enter a question mark (?) and
select a value from the displayed
value range.

mac-address Specifies the The value is in H-H-H format, where

mac-address management MAC H is a hexadecimal number of 1 to 4
address of an AS. digits. The value cannot be all 0s, all
Fs, or a multicast MAC address.

all Deletes all ASs. -

Views
uni-mng view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1067

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

You can configure a name for an AS and use the name to uniquely identify the AS.
This configuration facilitates AS identification and management.

If no AS name is configured, system default name-device MAC address is used as

the AS name after the AS connects to an SVF system.

You can change the name of an AS that has connected to an SVF system when the
following conditions are met:
1. The AS is not bound to any service profile.
2. The AS is not added to any AS group.
3. Ports of the AS are not added to any port group.

Precautions

● If the model as-model mac-address mac-address parameter is not specified,

the AS view is displayed. You can enter the view of an AS only when the AS
has been created.
● If an AS has connected to an SVF system, the AS leaves the SVF system and
restarts after being deleted.

Example
# Configure an AS name.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1 model S5700-28P-LI-AC mac-address 0200-0000-0022

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

3.9.15 as reset

Function
The as reset command restarts an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as reset { all | name as-name }

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1068

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
all Restarts all ASs. -

name as-name Restarts an AS with a specified The value must have an

name. existing AS name.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When an AS is upgraded or working abnormally, you can restart the AS.

Example
# Restart the AS as1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as reset name as1

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

3.9.16 as service-vlan igmp-snooping

Function
The as service-vlan igmp-snooping command enables IGMP snooping for a
service VLAN on an AS.
The undo as service-vlan igmp-snooping command disables IGMP snooping for
a service VLAN on an AS.
By default, IGMP snooping is disabled for service VLANs on an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as service-vlan igmp-snooping { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-16>
undo as service-vlan igmp-snooping { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-16>

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1069

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
vlan-id1 [ to Specifies range of service VLANs: The vlan-id1
vlan-id2 ] and vlan-id2
● vlan-id1 specifies the start VLAN ID. are integers
● vlan-id2 specifies the end VLAN ID. ranging from 1
vlan-id2 must be greater than or equal to to 4094.
vlan-id1. vlan-id1 and vlan-id2 define a
range together.
● If the parameter to vlan-id2 is not
specified, only the VLAN specified by vlan-
id1 is a service VLAN ID.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
By default, IGMP snooping is disabled for service VLANs on an AS. If IGMP
snooping needs to be enabled on an AS, run the as service-vlan igmp-snooping
command to deliver the configuration to the AS. After the configuration is
delivered successfully, the igmp-snooping enable configuration will be generated
in the corresponding VLAN view of the AS.
Precautions
This VLAN cannot be a stack reserved VLAN, SVF management VLAN, super VLAN,
or RRPP/SEP/ERPS control VLAN.

Example
# Enable IGMP snooping for the service VLAN 10 on an AS.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as service-vlan igmp-snooping 10

3.9.17 as service-vlan authorization

Function
The as service-vlan authorization command creates service VLANs on ASs.
The undo as service-vlan authorization command deletes service VLANs on ASs.
By default, all interfaces on an AS belong to the default VLAN, that is, VLAN 1.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1070

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as service-vlan authorization { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-16>

undo as service-vlan authorization { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-16>

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
vlan-id1 [ to Specifies service VLAN IDs in a batch: Values of vlan-
vlan-id2 ] id1 and vlan-id2
● vlan-id1 specifies the first VLAN ID. are integers in a
● vlan-id2 specifies the last VLAN ID. range of 1 to
4094.
vlan-id2 must be larger than or equal to
vlan-id1. vlan-id1 and vlan-id2 together
determine a VLAN range.
● If you do not specify to vlan-id2, only one
service VLAN is specified by vlan-id1.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

You can run the as service-vlan authorization command to deliver service VLANs
to ASs in a batch. After these service VLANs are delivered successfully,
corresponding VLANs are created on these ASs.

Precautions

This VLAN cannot be a stack reserved VLAN, SVF management VLAN, super VLAN,
or RRPP/SEP/ERPS control VLAN.

Example
# Create the service VLAN 10 for ASs.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as service-vlan authorization 10

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1071

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.18 as type
Function
The as type command specifies the file to be loaded during the upgrade of an AS
of a specified device type.
The undo as type command deletes the file to be loaded during the upgrade of
an AS of a specified device type.
By default, the file to be loaded is not specified during the upgrade of an AS of a
specified device type.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
as type as-type { system-software system-software | patch patch } *

undo as type as-type [ system-software | patch ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as-type Specifies the device type The value is an enumerated type. You
of an AS. can enter a question mark (?) and
select a value from the displayed
value range.

system- The value is a string of 4 to 48 case-

Specifies the name of
software insensitive characters without spaces
the system software file
system- or special characters, including ~ * : '
to be loaded on an AS.
software " ? < > | [ ] % \ /.
patch patch The value is a string of 5 to 48 case-
Specifies the name of
insensitive characters without spaces
the patch file to be
or special characters, including ~ * : '
loaded on an AS.
" ? < > | [ ] % \ /.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1072

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

When an AS is automatically upgraded after going online, the AS is upgraded

using the file specified using the as type command. If no file is specified, the
system searches the root directory unimng/ of the parent for a system software
file applicable to the AS.
Precautions
You can run the as type command multiple times to specify different files for
different types of ASs.

Example
# Specify the file to be loaded on the AS of the S5700-P-LI type.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as type s5700-p-li system-software s5700-p-li-v200r011c10.cc

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

3.9.19 attach as
Function
The attach as command allows you to log in to an AS from the parent.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
attach as name as-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name as-name Specifies the name of an AS for The value must have an
login. existing AS name.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1073

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

In addition to local login through a console port, you can log in to an AS from the
parent. This login mode is supported in two service configuration modes:
centralized mode and independent mode.

After you log in to an AS in centralized mode, you can configure only commands
related to file management and service diagnosis for fault location.

After you log in to an AS in independent mode, you can use more commands to
configure services on the AS.

Prerequisites

In centralized mode, an AS administrator profile has been bound to the AS, and an
AS user name and password have been configured.

In independent mode, an AS user name and password have been configured in the
uni-mng view using the independent-as-admin command.

Precautions

After an AS user name and password are configured, you need to enter the correct
user name and password when logging in to an AS through the console port.
When you log in to an AS from the parent using the attach as command, you can
log in to the AS without entering the user name or password.

In versions earlier than V200R011C10, at most one VTY user can log in to an AS at
a time. In V200R011C10 and later versions, at most four VTY users can log in to
an AS at a time.

Example
# In centralized mode, log in to the AS as1 from the parent.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-admin-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-admin-profile_1] user asuser password Pwd@123456
[HUAWEI-um-as-admin-profile_1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] as-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-group-group_1] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-group-group_1] as-admin-profile profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-group-group_1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] commit as all
Info: Commiting the configuration will take a long time. Are you sure you want to commit the
configuration? [Y/N]: y
[HUAWEI-um] attach as name as1

# In independent mode, log in to the AS as1 from the parent. Before the login, the
independent mode needs to be enabled on the fabric-port connected to the AS
as1. The following uses a level-1 AS as the AS as1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] independent-as-admin user asuser password Pwd@123456
[HUAWEI-um] interface fabric-port 1
[HUAWEI-um-fabric-port-1] port connect independent-as
[HUAWEI-um-fabric-port-1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] attach as name as1

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1074

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.20 authentication access-user maximum (user access

profile view)
Function
The authentication access-user maximum command configures the maximum
number of access users in a user access profile.
The undo authentication access-user maximum command deletes the
maximum number of access users in a user access profile.
By default, the maximum number of access users is not configured in a user
access profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
authentication access-user maximum max-num
undo authentication access-user maximum

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
max-num Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 1
maximum number of to 512. After the value is delivered to an AS,
access users in a user the effective value depends on the AS
access profile. specifications. For details, see 13.6.5
authentication access-point max-user.

Views
User access profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a user access profile, you can configure the maximum number of
access users in the profile. When the profile is bound an AS port, the maximum
number of access users is automatically configured for the port. The following
configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
authentication access-point max-user max-num
#

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1075

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions
The authentication access-user maximum command configuration takes effect
only for new users.

Example
# Set the maximum number of access users to 100 in the user access profile
profile_1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] user-access-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-user-access-profile_1] authentication access-user maximum 100

Related Topics
3.9.108 user-access-profile name

3.9.21 auth-mode none

Function
The auth-mode none command sets the AS authentication mode to no
authentication.
The undo auth-mode command restores the default AS authentication mode.
By default, authentication is required when an AS connects to an SVF system.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
auth-mode none
undo auth-mode

Parameters
None

Views
AS authentication view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
By default, an AS needs to be authenticated using a blacklist or whitelist before
connecting to an SVF system. You can also configure no authentication for ASs. In

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1076

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

no authentication mode, an AS can connect to an SVF system regardless of

whether it is in a blacklist or whitelist.

Example
# Configure no authentication for ASs to connect to an SVF system.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] as-auth
[HUAWEI-as-auth] auth-mode none

Related Topics
3.9.5 as-auth

3.9.22 authentication-profile (user access profile view)

Function
The authentication-profile command binds an authentication profile to a user
access profile.
The undo authentication-profile command deletes the authentication profile
bound to a user access profile.
By default, no authentication profile is bound to a user access profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
authentication-profile authentication-profile-name
undo authentication-profile

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
authentication- Specifies the name of The value is a string of 1-31 case-
profile-name an authentication sensitive characters, which cannot be
profile. configured to - and --. It cannot
contain spaces and the following
symbols: / \ : * ? " < > | @ ' %.

Views
User access profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1077

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a user access profile, you can bind an authentication profile to the
user access profile. When the user access profile is bound to an AS port, the user
access authentication mode specified in the authentication profile is automatically
configured on the AS port.
NAC provides three user authentication modes: 802.1X authentication, MAC
address authentication, and Portal authentication. To implement user access
authentication, run the dot1x-access-profile name access-profile-name, mac-
access-profile name access-profile-name, and portal-access-profile name
access-profile-name commands in the system view to create an access profile,
bind one or multiple of the three user authentication modes to the authentication
profile, and then bind the authentication profile to the user access profile in an
SVF system.
Precautions
● If Portal authentication is deployed in an SVF system, you must run the web-
auth-server server-name command to specify the Portal server profile used in
Portal authentication in the Portal access profile view. Additionally, only one
Portal server profile can be configured in a Portal access profile.
● If the Portal authentication mode has been set to layer3 in the portal-access-
profile bound to the authentication profile, it is not allowed to bind this
authentication profile to the user access profile. If an authentication profile
has been bound to the user access profile, it is now allowed to set the Portal
authentication mode to layer3.
● Different user access profiles must be bound to the same authentication
profile.
● The authentication-profile and mac-limit maximum max-num as well as
authentication-profile and traffic-limit inbound { arp | dhcp } cir cir-value
commands are mutually exclusive and cannot be configured together in a
user access profile.
● If many users are connected to the port to which a user access profile is
bound, the authentication configuration in the profile may need to take a
certain period of time to complete.
● Before changing the authentication profile on the parent, run the undo
authentication-profile command to delete the existing authentication profile
and then run the commit as { name as-name | all } command to commit the
configuration. You can then create a new authentication profile on the parent.
● After bidirectional flow control is configured in an authentication profile using
the authentication control-direction all command, this authentication
profile cannot be bound to a user access profile.

Example
# Bind an authentication profile to the user access profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] mac-access-profile name 1
[HUAWEI-mac-access-profile-1] quit
[HUAWEI] authentication-profile name test

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1078

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

[HUAWEI-authen-profile-test] mac-access-profile 1
[HUAWEI-authen-profile-test] quit
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] user-access-profile name huawei
[HUAWEI-um-user-access-huawei] authentication-profile test

Related Topics
3.9.108 user-access-profile name

3.9.23 blacklist mac-address

Function
The blacklist mac-address command adds a specified MAC address to the
blacklist.

The undo blacklist mac-address command deletes a MAC address from the
blacklist.

By default, no MAC address is added to the blacklist. A maximum of 128 MAC

addresses can be added to the blacklist.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
blacklist mac-address mac-address1 [ to mac-address2 ]

undo blacklist mac-address { mac-address1 [ to mac-address2 ] | all }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
mac-address1 [ to Specifies the MAC The value is in H-H-H format,
mac-address2 ] address to be added to where H is a hexadecimal number
the blacklist. of 1 to 4 digits. The value cannot
be all 0s, all Fs, or a multicast
MAC address.

all Deletes all the MAC -

addresses in the blacklist.

Views
AS authentication view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1079

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When an SVF system needs to authenticate an AS, the SVF system allows the AS
to connect to if the MAC address of the AS is in the whitelist and disallows the AS
to connect to if the MAC address is in the blacklist.

Precautions

● A MAC address cannot exist in both the whitelist and blacklist.

● By default, if the MAC address of an AS is neither in the whitelist nor in the
blacklist, the AS fails the authentication. You can run the confirm { all | mac-
address mac-address } command to allow all ASs or a specified AS to pass
the authentication.
● If the MAC address of an AS that has connected to an SVF system is added to
the blacklist, the AS restarts and exits from the SVF system.

Example
# Add the MAC address 0025-9e07-8281 to the blacklist.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] as-auth
[HUAWEI-as-auth] blacklist mac-address 0025-9e07-8281

Related Topics
3.9.5 as-auth

3.9.24 broadcast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)

Function
The broadcast-suppression command configures broadcast traffic suppression in
a network enhanced profile.

The undo broadcast-suppression command cancels broadcast traffic suppression

in a network enhanced profile.

By default, broadcast traffic suppression is not configured in a network enhanced

profile. By default, the percentage of broadcast traffic that can pass through an AS
port is 50%.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
broadcast-suppression packets packets-per-second

undo broadcast-suppression

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1080

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
packets Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 0
packets-per- packet rate of an to 14881000, in packets per second (PPS).
second interface.
If the configured packet rate on the parent
switch is larger than the maximum value
on the AS port, the maximum value takes
effect on the AS port.

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure broadcast traffic
suppression in the profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, broadcast
traffic suppression is automatically configured on the port. The following
configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
broadcast-suppression packets packets-per-second
#

To prevent broadcast storms, you can run the broadcast-suppression command

to configure the maximum number of broadcast packets that can pass through a
port. When the broadcast traffic rate reaches the maximum value, the system
discards excess broadcast packets to control the traffic volume within a proper
range.

Example
# Configure broadcast traffic suppression in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] broadcast-suppression packets 148810

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.25 clear direct-command

Function
The clear direct-command command deletes commands to be directly delivered
to an AS from the parent.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1081

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
clear direct-command [ slot slot-id ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot slot-id Specifies the stack ID of a member The value is an integer that
device in an AS. ranges from 0 to 4.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After you run the direct-command command to directly deliver commands to an
AS, you can run the clear direct-command command to delete the commands
from the parent.

You can delete directly delivered commands only when the AS is offline. Do not
run the clear direct-command command when the parent is delivering the
commands to an AS.

Example
# Delete the commands to be directly delivered to AS1 from the parent.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] clear direct-command

Related Topics
3.9.31 direct-command

3.9.26 commit as

Function
The commit as command delivers the service configuration to ASs.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1082

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
commit as { name as-name | all }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name as-name Delivers the service configuration to an The value must have
AS with a specified name. an existing AS name.

all Delivers the service configuration to all -

ASs.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After configuring or changing services (including service profiles and user
authentication-free rules) on the parent, you need to run the commit as
command to deliver the configuration to ASs to make the configuration take
effect.

Example
# Deliver the service configuration to all ASs.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] commit as all

Related Topics
3.9.48 display uni-mng commit-result

3.9.27 confirm

Function
The confirm command confirms that unauthenticated ASs pass the
authentication.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1083

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
confirm { all | mac-address mac-address }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
all Confirms that all ASs pass -
the authentication.

mac-address Confirms that an AS with a The value is in H-H-H format,

mac-address specified MAC address where H is a hexadecimal number
passes the authentication. of 1 to 4 digits. The value cannot
be all 0s, all Fs, or a multicast
MAC address.

Views
AS authentication view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When an AS needs to be authenticated before connecting to an SVF system, the
AS fails the authentication if its MAC address is neither in the whitelist nor in the
blacklist. You can run the confirm command to allow all ASs or a specified AS to
pass the authentication.

You can run the 3.9.36 display as unauthorized record command to check
information about the ASs that fail the authentication.

Example
# Confirm that the AS with the MAC address 0025-9e07-8280 passes the
authentication.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] as-auth
[HUAWEI-as-auth] confirm mac-address 0025-9e07-8280

Related Topics
3.9.5 as-auth
3.9.36 display as unauthorized record

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1084

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.28 description (Fabric-port view)

Function
The description command configures the description of a fabric port.

The undo description command deletes the description of a fabric port.

By default, no description is configured for a fabric port.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
description description

undo description

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
description Specifies the The value is a string of 1 to 64 case-
description. sensitive characters with spaces supported.

Views
Fabric-port view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
To facilitate fabric port management and identification, you can configure
descriptions for fabric ports. For example, you can describe the name of an AS
that connects to a fabric port.

Example
# Configure the description of a fabric port.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] interface fabric-port 1
[HUAWEI-um-fabric-port-1] description To_as1

Related Topics
3.9.68 interface fabric-port

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1085

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.29 description (port group view)

Function
The description command configures the description of a port group.

The undo description command deletes the description of a port group.

By default, a port group does not have a description.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
description description

undo description

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
description Specifies the The value is a string of 1 to 15 case-
description. sensitive characters with spaces supported.

Views
Port group view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
To facilitate identification and management of terminals connected to a port
group in the web system, configure the description of the port group.

Example
# Configure the description of a specified port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] port-group name 1
[HUAWEI-um-portgroup-1] description switch

Related Topics
3.9.80 port-group name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1086

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.30 dhcp snooping enable (network enhanced profile view)

Function
The dhcp snooping enable command configures DHCP snooping in a network
enhanced profile.

The undo dhcp snooping enable command cancels DHCP snooping in a network
enhanced profile.

By default, DHCP snooping is not configured in a network enhanced profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
dhcp snooping enable

undo dhcp snooping enable

Parameters
None

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure DHCP snooping in
the profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, DHCP snooping is
automatically enabled on the AS and AS port. The following configuration is
generated on the AS:
#
dhcp enable
#
dhcp snooping enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
dhcp snooping enable
#

In the preceding configuration, GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is used for reference only.

The actual configuration depends on the profile configuration.

You can run the dhcp snooping enable command to enable DHCP snooping on a
port so as to improve DHCP security.

Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1087

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Before running the undo dhcp snooping enable command, ensure that the
network enhanced profile view is not configured with IPSG or DAI. To disable IPSG
and DAI, run the undo ip source check user-bind enable (network enhanced
profile view) and undo arp anti-attack check user-bind enable (network
enhanced profile view) commands respectively.
The dhcp snooping enable command configured in the network enhanced profile
can only configure a DHCP dynamic binding table but not a DHCP static binding
table.

Example
# Configure DHCP snooping in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] dhcp snooping enable

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.31 direct-command
Function
The direct-command command configures ASs on the parent. The parent directly
delivers the configuration to the ASs, and you do not need to run the commit as
command.
The undo direct-command command cancels the configuration for ASs on the
parent.
The following table lists service configurations that can be delivered using this
command. If no configuration dependency and restriction are provided for a
command, see the details in the command reference.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
direct-command view { system | interface-type interface-number | stack-port
member-id/port-id } command command-text
undo direct-command view { system | interface-type interface-number | stack-
port member-id/port-id } command command-text

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1088

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
view { system | Specifies the view in which a command -
interface-type is executed.
interface-number }
● system: system view
● interface-type interface-number:
interface view. It cannot be an Eth-
Trunk interface view.
● stack-port member-id/port-id: stack
interface view
command Specifies the command to be delivered The value is a
command-text to ASs. string of 1 to 64
characters.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
The following lists the commands that can be directly delivered to ASs. You can
run the undo direct-command view { system | interface-type interface-number }
command command-text command to cancel the configuration or restore default
settings. The command-text parameter specifies the commands listed in the
following table.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1089

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

Energy port-auto-sleep enable Interfac Enables the This

- e view port sleeping command
saving function on can be used
manag an electrical on electrical
ement interface. interfaces
(excluding
MultiGE
interfaces)
and combo
interfaces
working as
electrical
interfaces.

PoE poe force-power Interfac Enables -

e view forcible PoE
power supply
on an
interface.

poe legacy enable Interfac Enables an -

e view interface to
check
compatibility
of PDs.

poe priority { critical | high | Interfac Sets the -

low } e view power supply
priority of a
PoE
interface.

poe af-inrush enable slot System Configures -

slot-id view the IEEE
802.3at-
compliant
device to
provide
power in
accordance
with IEEE
802.3af.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1090

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

poe high-inrush enable slot System Configures a -

slot-id view device to
allow high
inrush
current
during
power-on.

undo poe enable (supported Interfac Disables the -

in V200R011C10 and later e view PoE function
versions) on an
interface.

Ethern undo negotiation auto Interfac Configures ● This

et e view an interface command
interfa to work in cannot be
ces non-auto- configured
negotiation on combo
mode. interfaces.
After you run ● Do not
the undo cancel the
direct- undo
command negotiati
command, on auto
the interface command
works in when
auto speed
negotiation { 10 | 100
mode. | 1000 } or
duplex
{ full |
half } is
specified.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1091

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 } Interfac Sets the rate ● This

e view in non-auto- command
negotiation cannot be
mode. configured
on combo
interfaces.
● Ensure
that the
interface
works in
non-auto-
negotiatio
n mode
before
configurin
g this
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1092

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

speed auto-negotiation Interfac Enables ● Support

e view auto- for this
negotiation command
on a GE varies
optical depending
interface. on switch
models.
For
details,
see the
speed
auto-
negotiati
on
command
in the
Command
Reference
- Interface
Managem
ent
Command
s-
Ethernet
Interface
Configurat
ion
Command
s.
● Ensure
that the
interface
works in
auto-
negotiatio
n mode
before
configurin
g this
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1093

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

duplex { full | half } Interfac Sets the ● This

e view duplex mode command
for an cannot be
electrical configured
interface in on combo
non-auto- interfaces.
negotiation ● Ensure
mode. that the
interface
works in
non-auto-
negotiatio
n mode
before
configurin
g this
command.
● When the
working
rate of a
GE
electrical
interface
is 1000
Mbit/s,
the
interface
supports
only the
full duplex
mode.

loopback internal Interfac Configures a -

e view loopback
detection
mode on an
interface.

description description Interfac Configures The

(supported in V200R011C10 e view the description
and later versions) description contains a
for an maximum of
interface. 52
characters.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1094

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

Port port bridge enable Interfac Enables the -

bridge e view bridging
function on
an interface.

Voice voice-vlan mac-address System Configures -

VLAN mac-address mask mask view the OUI
(supported in V200R011C10 address of
and later versions) the voice
VLAN.

LBDT loopback-detect enable Interfac Enables -

e view loopback
detection on
an interface.

loopback-detect packet Interfac Enables If you

vlan vlan-id e view loopback configure
detection for this
a specified command
VLAN. multiple
times,
loopback
detection is
enabled for
multiple
VLANs.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1095

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

ARP arp speed-limit source-mac System Configures ● Only the

rate maximum maximum view ARP rate S5720EI,
limitin limiting S6720S-EI,
g based on and
source MAC S6720EI
addresses. support
this
command.
● The value
of
maximum
maximum
ranges
from 0 to
256.
● This
function
takes
effect only
for the
ARP
packets
sent to
the CPU.

arp speed-limit source-ip System Configures ● The value

maximum maximum view ARP rate of
limiting maximum
based on maximum
source IP ranges
addresses. from 0 to
256.
● This
function
takes
effect only
for the
ARP
packets
sent to
the CPU.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1096

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

Stack port interface { interface- Stack Configures a Before

type interface-number1 [ to interfac service restoring the
interface-type interface- e view: interface as a physical
number2 ] } enable stack- physical member
(supported in V200R010 and port member port ports that
later versions) membe and adds it are added to
r-id/ to a stack a stack port
port-id port. in direct
configuration
mode as
common
service
interfaces,
you do not
need to run
the
shutdown
interface
command in
the stack
interface
view.

stack slot slot-id priority System Sets a stack -

priority (supported in view priority for a
V200R010 and later versions) member
switch in a
stack.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1097

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

stack slot slot-id renumber System Changes the A stack ID

new-slot-id (supported in view stack ID of a cannot be
V200R011C10 and later specified changed in
versions) member the following
switch in a situations:
stack. ● The switch
NOTICE is a
If there are standalon
services
e switch
running,
delivering that does
this not join
command any stack.
may cause
● The newly
service
interruptions configured
and stack ID is
configuration an
loss. existing
Therefore, stack ID
you are
of a
advised to
deliver this specified
command member
when an AS switch in
is a stack.
unconfigured
. ● Ports with
the
specified
slot-id
have been
configured
as
member
ports of
an uplink
fabric
port.
● Ports with
the
specified
slot-id
have been
configured
as
member
ports of a
downlink

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1098

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Servic Format View Function Configuratio

e n
Categ Dependency
ory and
Restriction

fabric
port.

Precautions

● When you configure a directly delivered command on the parent, enter the
complete and correct command instead of the abbreviated form. No info
message is displayed for confirming your input.
● A directly delivered command supports the help and typeahead functions but
not real-time check during input. The system checks the input only after you
complete typing a command and press Enter. No detailed description is
provided in help information. If you fail to configure a command for an AS, an
info message is displayed.
● When you configure a directly delivered command, the AS to which the
command is to be delivered must be online. If you need to specify a port or
slot-id in a command, the corresponding member device must be available. If
the AS is offline, run the clear direct-command command to delete the
completed configuration on the parent.
● If a port has the configuration directly delivered using commands, the port
cannot be configured as a member port of the Eth-Trunk to which a fabric
port is bound. If a port has been configured as a member port of the Eth-
Trunk to which a fabric port is bound, the configuration cannot be directly
delivered to the port using commands.
● Directly delivering configuration using commands and delivering
configuration using service profiles are mutually exclusive and cannot be
performed simultaneously.
● A maximum of 4096 commands can be configured.

Example
# Configure the parent to deliver the loopback-detect enable command to
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 on as1 to enable loopback detection on
GigabitEthernet0/0/1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] direct-command view gigabitethernet 0/0/1 command loopback-detect enable

Related Topics
3.9.25 clear direct-command

3.9.32 display as

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1099

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The display as command displays information about access switches (ASs).

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display as { all | name as-name | mac-address mac-address | vpn-instance
information }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
all Displays information -
about all ASs.

name as-name Specifies the name of The value must have an existing
an AS. AS name.

mac-address mac- Specifies the MAC The value is in H-H-H format,

address address of an AS. where H is a hexadecimal number
of 1 to 4 digits. The value cannot
be all 0s, all Fs, or a multicast MAC
address.

vpn-instance Displays VPN instance The value must be an existing VPN

information information. instance name.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display as command to view information about ASs in an SVF
system, including the AS device type, VPN instance information, and access status.

Example
# Display information about all ASs.
<HUAWEI> display as all
Total: 1, Normal: 1, Fault: 0, Idle: 0, Version mismatch: 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1100

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

No. Type MAC IP State Name

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 S5700-P-LI aaaa-bbbb-cc92 192.168.11.254 normal as1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-99 Description of the display as all command output

Item Description

Total Total number of ASs.

Normal Number of ASs that are running

normally.

Fault Number of ASs in abnormal running

status.

Idle Number of ASs that have been

configured but no gone online.

Version mismatch Number of ASs of which the software

versions do not match the software
version of the parent.

No. Sequence number.

Type Device type of an AS.

MAC Management MAC address of an AS.

IP IP address of an AS.

State Status of an AS:

● idle: The AS is in initial state.
● normal: The AS has gone online
and connected to an SVF system.
● fault: The AS does not connect to
an SVF system.
● version mismatch: The V, R, or C
versions of the AS and parent are
inconsistent.

Name Name of an AS.

# Display information about the AS as1.

<HUAWEI> display as name as1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Management MAC : aaaa-bbbb-cc92
System MAC : aaaa-bbbb-cc92
ESN : 2102353173107C800132
Name : as1
Model : S5700-28P-LI-AC
Device type : S5700-P-LI
State : normal
Mode : centralized
Slot :0
AS group : group1

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1101

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Port group : group2

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-100 Description of the display as name command output

Item Description

Management MAC Management MAC address of an AS.

In a Super Virtual Fabric (SVF) system,
each AS has a unique management
MAC address to identify itself. To set a
management MAC address for an AS,
run the as access manage-mac
command. If no management MAC
address is configured for an AS, the
system MAC address of the AS is used
as the management MAC address.

System MAC System MAC address of an AS, which

is the physical MAC address of this AS.

ESN Sequence number of an AS.

Name Name of an AS.

Model Device model of an AS.

Device type Device type of an AS.

State Status of an AS:

● idle: The AS is in initial state.
● normal: The AS has gone online
and connected to an SVF system.
● fault: The AS does not connect to
an SVF system.
● version mismatch: The V, R, or C
versions of the AS and parent are
inconsistent.

Mode Service configuration mode of an AS:

● centralized: indicates the centralized
mode.
● independent: indicates the
independent mode.

Slot Stack ID of an AS in a stack.

AS group AS group to which an AS belongs.

Port group Port group to which an AS port

belongs.

# Display VPN instance information of ASs.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1102

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

<HUAWEI> display as vpn-instance information

Total: 5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. VPN-Instance AS Name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 VPN1 e-10005(1-1)
1 -- t-10018(2-2)
2 VPN2 s-10021(1-1)
3 -- 6-10023(2-1)
4 -- 11-t-16(x-s)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-101 Description of the display as vpn-instance information command

output

Item Description

Total Number of ASs.

No. AS number.

VPN-Instance VPN instance name.

AS Name AS name.

3.9.33 display as access configuration

Function
The display as access configuration command displays the access configuration
of ASs.

NOTE

Only the switches that function as ASs support this command.

Format
display as access configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1103

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display as access configuration command on an AS to check the
access configuration of the AS.

Example
# Display the access configuration of an AS.
<HUAWEI> display as access configuration
AS mode : centralized
Access interface : vlanif11
Access controller configuration : --
Current connected access controller : 192.168.11.1(dynamic)
Access management MAC : 0200-0000-0022
Access system MAC : 0200-0000-0022
Current connected state : normal

Table 3-102 Description of the display as access configuration command output

Item Description

AS mode AS mode:
● disable: The device works in parent mode. To
change the device working mode, run the as-
mode disable command. This field is only
supported on S6720SI, S6720S-SI, S6720EI, and
S6720S-EI.
● enable: The device works in AS mode, but it does
not have the SVF function enabled using the uni-
mng command.
● centralized: The device works in AS mode and the
service configuration mode is centralized mode.
● independent: The device works in AS mode and
the service configuration mode is independent
mode.

Access interface VLANIF interface for the management VLAN of an

AS.

Access controller Parent IP address configured using the as access

configuration controller ip-address command. If this IP address is
configured, the Current connected access controller
field value contains configured.

Current connected IP address of the parent to which an AS is connected.

access controller If this field contains dynamic, the IP address is
obtained through DHCP or in broadcast mode. If this
field contains configured, the IP address is statically
configured.

Access management Configured management MAC address of an AS.

MAC

Access system MAC System MAC address of an AS.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1104

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Current connected state Connection status of an AS:

● idle: The AS is in initial state.
● normal: The AS has gone online and connected to
an SVF system.
● fault: The AS does not connect to an SVF system.
● version mismatch: The V, R, or C versions of the
AS and parent are inconsistent.

3.9.34 display as blacklist

Function
The display as blacklist command displays blacklist information of an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display as blacklist

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display as blacklist command to check blacklist information of
an AS.

Example
# Display blacklist information of an AS.
<HUAWEI> display as blacklist
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID MAC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0025-9e07-8281

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1105

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1

Table 3-103 Description of the display as blacklist command output

Item Description

ID ID of a blacklist.

MAC MAC address added to the blacklist.

To add a MAC address to a blacklist,
run the blacklist mac-address
command. If no MAC address is
specified, no information is displayed.

3.9.35 display as run-info

Function
The display as run-info command displays running status information of an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display as { name as-name | mac-address mac-address } run-info

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name as-name Specifies the name of The value must have an existing AS
an AS. name.

mac-address Specifies the MAC The value is in H-H-H format, where

mac-address address of an AS. H is a hexadecimal number of 1 to 4
digits. The value cannot be all 0s, all
Fs, or a multicast MAC address.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1106

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display as run-info command to check running status
information of an AS, including the AS access status, CPU usage, and memory
usage.

Example
# Display running status information of an AS.
<HUAWEI> display as name as1 run-info
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait...
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Software version : Version 5.160 V200R011C10
Hardware version : VER.A
Patch version : V200R011SPH001
Patch state : running
IP address : 192.168.1.154
IP mask : 255.255.255.0
Gateway : 192.168.1.1
VPN-Instance : --
State : normal
Online time : 1 day, 18 hours, 40 minutes, 0 second
CPU usage : 12%
Memory usage : 52%
Slot 0 : present
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-104 Description of the display as run-info command output

Item Description

Software version Software version running on an AS.

Hardware version Hardware version running on an AS.

Patch version Patch version.

This field displays-- when the patch
package is not installed.

Patch state Patch status.

● Running: The patch is running.
● not running: The patch is not
running.
This field displays-- when the Patch
version field displays --.

IP address IP address of an AS.

IP mask Subnet mask.

Gateway Gateway of an AS.

VPN-Instance Name of a VPN instance.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1107

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

State Status of an AS:

● idle: The AS is in initial state.
● normal: The AS has gone online
and connected to an SVF system.
● fault: The AS does not connect to
an SVF system.
● version mismatch: The V, R, or C
versions of the AS and parent are
inconsistent.

Online time Online time of an AS.

CPU usage CPU usage of an AS.

Memory usage Memory usage of an AS.

Slot 0 Whether an AS member device is

present:
● present
● absent

3.9.36 display as unauthorized record

Function
The display as unauthorized record command displays information about the
ASs that fail the authentication.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display as unauthorized record

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1108

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display as unauthorized record command to check information
about the ASs that fail the authentication.

Example
# Display information about the ASs that fail the authentication.
<HUAWEI> display as unauthorized record
Unauthorized AS record:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS type : S5720-SI
Host name : huawei-000b-0987-d5aa
AS MAC address : 000b-0987-d5aa
AS IP address : 192.168.1.253
Record time : 2015-05-20 16:06:10 DST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1

Table 3-105 Description of the display as unauthorized record command output

Item Description

AS type Device type of an AS.

Host name Name of the AS.

AS MAC address MAC address of the AS.

AS IP address IP address of the AS.

Record time Time when the AS is authenticated.

3.9.37 display as whitelist

Function
The display as whitelist command displays whitelist information of an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display as whitelist

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1109

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display as whitelist command to check whitelist information of
an AS.

Example
# Display whitelist information of an AS.
<HUAWEI> display as whitelist
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID MAC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0025-9e07-8282
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1

Table 3-106 Description of the display as whitelist command output

Item Description

ID ID of a whitelist.

MAC MAC address added to the whitelist.

3.9.38 display snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all command displays the
status of all traps for the ASMNGTRAP module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1110

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all command to check the status of
all traps of the ASMNGTRAP module. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable
feature-name asmngtrap command to enable the trap function of the
ASMNGTRAP module.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the ASMNGTRAP module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: ASMNGTRAP
Trap number : 23
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwAsFaultNotify on on
hwAsNormalNotify on on
hwAsAddOffLineNotify on on
hwAsDelOffLineNotify on on
hwAsPortStateChangeToDownNotify
on on
hwAsPortStateChangeToUpNotify on on
hwAsModelNotMatchNotify on on
hwAsVersionNotMatchNotify on on
hwAsNameConflictNotify on on
hwAsSlotModelNotMatchNotify on on
hwAsFullNotify on on
hwUnimngModelNotMatchNotify on on
hwAsBoardAdd on on
hwAsBoardDelete on on
hwAsBoardPlugIn on on
hwAsBoardPlugOut on on
hwAsInBlacklist on on
hwAsUnconfirmed on on
hwAsComboPortTypeChange on on
hwAsOnlineFailNotify on on
hwAsSlotIdInvalidNotify on on
hwAsSysmacSwitchCfgErrNotify on on
hwAsSlotOnlineFailNotify on on

Table 3-107 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name

asmngtrap all command output

Item Description

Feature Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1111

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Trap Number of traps.

number

Trap name Trap name of the module:

● hwAsFaultNotify: An AS goes offline.
● hwAsNormalNotify: An AS goes online.
● hwAsAddOffLineNotify: An AS has been added offline.
● hwAsDelOffLineNotify: An AS has been deleted offline.
● hwAsPortStateChangeToDownNotify: An AS port goes Down.
● hwAsPortStateChangeToUpNotify: An AS port goes Up.
● hwAsModelNotMatchNotify: The actual AS model does not
match the configured one.
● hwAsVersionNotMatchNotify: The AS version does not match.
● hwAsNameConflictNotify: The AS name conflicts.
● hwAsSlotModelNotMatchNotify: An AS has a different SVF
enabling status than the parent.
● hwAsFullNotify: The number of ASs reaches the maximum
value.
● hwUnimngModelNotMatchNotify: The model of a new device
in the AS stack system differs from the configured model.
● hwAsBoardAdd: An AS slot has been added.
● hwAsBoardDelete: An AS slot has been deleted.
● hwAsBoardPlugIn: A new member has joined an AS stack
system.
● hwAsBoardPlugOut: A member has left an AS stack system.
● hwAsInBlacklist: An AS is in the blacklist.
● hwAsUnconfirmed: An AS fails authentication.
● hwAsComboPortTypeChange: The AS interface type has
changed.
● hwAsOnlineFailNotify: An AS fails to go online.
● hwAsSlotIdInvalidNotify: An AS slot ID is invalid.
● hwAsSysmacSwitchCfgErrNotify: The MAC address switching
mode of the AS stack system is not set to non-switching.
● hwAsSlotOnlineFailNotify: When an AS is a stack, some
member switches in the stack fail to go online.

Default Default status of the trap function:

switch ● on: The trap function is enabled.
status
● off: The trap function is disabled.

Current Status of the trap function:

switch ● on: The trap function is enabled.
status
● off: The trap function is disabled.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1112

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.9.89 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap

3.9.39 display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all command displays the
status of all traps on the UNIMBRTRAP module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all command to check the status of
all traps of UNIMBRTRAP. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-
name unimbrtrap command to enable the trap function of UNIMBRTRAP.
Prerequisites
SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the UNIMBRTRAP module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: UNIMBRTRAP
Trap number : 30
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1113

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Trap name Default switch status Current switch status

hwASBrdTempAlarm on on
hwASBrdTempResume on on
hwASBoardFail on on
hwASBoardFailResume on on
hwASBoardInvalid on on
hwASBoardInvalidResume on on
hwASOpticalInvalid on on
hwASOpticalInvalidResum on on
hwASPowerRemove on on
hwASPowerInsert on on
hwASPowerInvalid on on
hwASPowerInvalidResum on on
hwASFanRemove on on
hwASFanInsert on on
hwASFanInvalid on on
hwASFanInvalidResume on on
hwASCommunicateError on on
hwASCommunicateResume on on
hwASCPUUtilizationRising on on
hwASCPUUtilizationResume on on
hwASMemUtilizationRising on on
hwASMemUtilizationResume on on
hwASMadConflictDetect on on
hwASMadConflictResume on on
hwUniMbrLinkStateChange on on
hwUniMbrASDiscoverAttack on on
hwUniMbrConnectError on on
hwUniMbrIllegalFabricConfig on on
hwUniMbrFabricPortMemberDelete on on
hwUniMbrAsServiceAbnormal on on

Table 3-108 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap

all command output
Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1114

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the UNIMBRTRAP module

include:
● hwASBoardFail: An AS becomes unavailable
partially.
● hwASBoardFailResume: An AS becomes available.
● hwASBoardInvalid: An AS is invalid.
● hwASBoardInvalidResume: An AS is valid.
● hwASBrdTempAlarm: The AS temperature is out
of the normal range.
● hwASBrdTempResume: The AS temperature
restores to the normal range.
● hwASCommunicateError: A communication fault
occurs.
● hwASCommunicateResume: A communication
fault is rectified.
● hwASCPUUtilizationResume: The AS CPU usage
falls below the threshold.
● hwASCPUUtilizationRising: The AS CPU usage
exceeds the threshold.
● hwASFanInsert: An AS fan module is installed.
● hwASFanInvalid: An AS fan module becomes
unavailable completely.
● hwASFanInvalidResume: An AS fan module
becomes available.
● hwASFanRemove: An AS fan module is removed.
● hwASMadConflictDetect: A MAD conflict is
detected.
● hwASMadConflictResume: A MAD conflict is
resolved.
● hwASMemUtilizationResume: The AS memory
usage restores to the normal range.
● hwASMemUtilizationRising: The AS memory
usage exceeds the threshold.
● hwASOpticalInvalid: The AS optical module is
invalid.
● hwASOpticalInvalidResum: The AS optical module
is valid.
● hwASPowerInsert: An AS power module is
installed.
● hwASPowerInvalid: An AS power module is
invalid.
● hwASPowerInvalidResum: An AS power module is
valid.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1115

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

● hwASPowerRemove: An AS power module is

removed.
● hwUniMbrASDiscoverAttack: An AS discovers
attacks.
● hwUniMbrConnectError: Cable connection of a
fabric port is incorrect.
● hwUniMbrFabricPortMemberDelete: A member
port of a fabric port is removed.
● hwUniMbrIllegalFabricConfig: The fabric port
configuration is invalid.
● hwUniMbrLinkStateChange: The connection status
changes.
● hwUniMbrAsServiceAbnormal: Services on an AS
become abnormal.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.9.90 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap

3.9.40 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all command displays the
status of all traps on the UNI-TOPOMNG module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1116

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all command to check the status
of all traps of UNI-TOPOMNG. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-
name uni-topomng command to enable the trap function of UNI-TOPOMNG.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the UNI-TOPOMNG module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: uni-topomng
Trap number : 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwTopomngLinkNormal on on
hwTopomngLinkAbnormal on on

Table 3-109 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-

topomng all command output

Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the UNI-TOPOMNG module

include:
● hwTopomngLinkNormal: The connection status
becomes normal.
● hwTopomngLinkAbnormal: A connection fault
occurs.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1117

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.9.91 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng

3.9.41 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all command displays the
status of all traps on the UNI-TPLM module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all command to check the status of all
traps of UNI-TPLM. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-
tplm command to enable the trap function of UNI-TPLM.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1118

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display all the traps of the UNI-TPLM module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: uni-tplm
Trap number : 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwTplmCmdExecuteFailedNotify on on
hwTplmCmdExecuteSuccessfulNotify
on on
hwTplmDirectCmdRecoverFail on on

Table 3-110 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all
command output
Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the UNI-TPLM module include:

● hwTplmCmdExecuteFailedNotify: The command
fails to be executed on the AS.
● hwTplmCmdExecuteSuccessfulNotify: The
command is executed successfully on the AS.
● hwTplmDirectCmdRecoverFail: Configurations of
the commands directly configured on the parent
for the AS fail to be restored.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.9.92 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm

3.9.42 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all

Function
display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all command displays the
status of all traps on the UNI-VERMNG module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1119

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the trap function of a specified feature is enabled, you can run the display
snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all command to check the status of
all traps of UNI-TPLM. You can use the snmp-agent trap enable feature-name
uni-vermng command to enable the trap function of UNI-TPLM.

Prerequisites

SNMP has been enabled. For details, see snmp-agent.

Example
# Display all the traps of the UNI-VERMNG module.
<HUAWEI>display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feature name: uni-vermng
Trap number : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trap name Default switch status Current switch status
hwVermngUpgradeFail on on

Table 3-111 Description of the display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng

all command output

Item Specification

Feature name Name of the module that the trap belongs to.

Trap number Number of traps.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1120

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Specification

Trap name Trap name. Traps of the UNI-VERMNG module

include:
● hwVermngUpgradeFail: An AS fails to be
upgraded.

Default switch status Default status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled by
default.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled by
default.

Current switch status Status of the trap function:

● on: indicates that the trap function is enabled.
● off: indicates that the trap function is disabled.

Related Topics
3.9.93 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng

3.9.43 display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics

Function
The display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics command displays AS
Discovery packet statistics on a fabric port.

NOTE

This command can be used on the parent or an AS. After running this command, you can check
AS Discovery packet statistics on a fabric port of the local device.

Format
display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics interface fabric-port port-id

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1121

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 0 to
fabric-port number of a 63 on an AS and the value range on the
port-id fabric port. parent varies depending on the switch model:
● S12700: 0 to 255
● S7712 (SRUE/SRUH)/S7706 (SRUE/SRUH):
0 to 255
● S9312 (SRUE/SRUH)/S9310/S9306(SRUE/
SRUH)/S9310X: 0 to 255
● Other switch models: 0 to 63

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics command to
check AS Discovery packet statistics on a fabric port.

Example
# Display AS Discovery packet statistics on a fabric port.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics interface fabric-port 1
The statistics of AS Discover packet on Fabric-port1:

PortName Packet-type Receive Send

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GE9/0/19 AS Discover Request 0 2
AS Discover ACK 1 0
AS Discover ParaSyn Req 0 1
AS Discover ParaSyn ACK 1 0
AS Discover HeartBeat Req 0 210
AS Discover HeartBeat ACK 210 0
AS Discover NAK 0 0
AS Discover FabricCfg Req 0 0
AS Discover FabricCfg ACK 0 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-112 Description of the display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics

command output

Item Description

PortName Name of a member port in a fabric

port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1122

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Packet-type Packet type:

● AS Discover Request: neighbor
discovery request packet
● AS Discover Request: neighbor
discovery request packet
● AS Discover ParaSyn Req: neighbor
discovery parameter
synchronization packet
● AS Discover ParaSyn ACK: neighbor
discovery parameter
synchronization response packet
● AS Discover HeartBeat Req:
neighbor discovery heart packet
● AS Discover HeartBeat ACK:
neighbor discovery heart response
packet
● AS Discover NAK: neighbor
discovery error packet
● AS Discover FabricCfg Req: neighbor
discovery AS fabric port
configuration packet
● AS Discover FabricCfg ACK:
neighbor discovery AS fabric port
configuration response packet

Receive Statistics about received packets.

Statistics about AS Discover HeartBeat
Req and AS Discover HeartBeat ACK
packets will be cleared and start from
0 after an active/standby switchover is
performed on the device.

Send Statistics about sent packets.

Statistics about AS Discover HeartBeat
Req and AS Discover HeartBeat ACK
packets will be cleared and start from
0 after an active/standby switchover is
performed on the device.

Related Topics
3.9.86 reset uni-mng as-discover packet statistics

3.9.44 display uni-mng as-group

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1123

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The display uni-mng as-group command displays information about AS groups.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng as-group [ name group-name | verbose ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name group-name Specifies the name of an AS The value must be an
group. existing an AS group
name.

verbose Displays detailed information -

about an AS group.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng as-group command to check information about
created AS groups.

Example
# Display brief information about all AS groups.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng as-group

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number AS-group Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 asgroup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-113 Description of the display uni-mng as-group command output

Item Description

Number Sequence number.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1124

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

AS-group Name AS group name.

# Display detailed information about all AS groups.

<HUAWEI> display uni-mng as-group verbose

AS-group name: asgroup

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS name list: (Total number = 1)
as1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS-admin profile name: admin
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-114 Description of the display uni-mng as-group verbose command

output

Item Description

AS-group name AS group name.

AS name list List of ASs added to an AS group.

AS-admin profile name Name of the bound AS administrator

profile.

3.9.45 display uni-mng as index

Function
The display uni-mng as index command displays the index of an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng as index

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1125

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng as index command to check the index,
management MAC address, and name of an AS.

Example
# Display the index of an AS.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng as index
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index MAC-Current MAC-Saved Name
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 aaaa-bbbb-cc92 aaaa-bbbb-cc92 as1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1

Table 3-115 Description of the display uni-mng as index command output

Item Description

Index Index of an AS.

MAC-Current Management MAC address.

MAC-Saved MAC address saved in the flash

memory.
This field indicates the MAC address
saved in the flash memory using the
save command after an AS goes
online or the as name (uni-mng
view) command is configured.
● If this field displays --, the save
command is not executed after an
AS goes online or the as name
(uni-mng view) command is
configured.
● When MAC-Current and MAC-
Saved are inconsistent, the save
command is not executed after an
AS is replaced or the as name (uni-
mng view) command is configured.

Name Name of an AS.

3.9.46 display uni-mng as interface brief

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1126

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
The display uni-mng as interface brief command displays brief information
about AS ports.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng as name as-name interface brief

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value must have an existing
AS name.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng as interface brief command to check brief
information about AS ports.
When an AS is offline or its version is inconsistent with the parent version, this
command displays default attributes of ports on this AS.

Example
# Display brief information about AS ports.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng as name as1 interface brief
PHY: Physical
*down: administratively down
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface Type PHY Online MSTP state
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth-Trunk1 Fabric Port up present forwarding
Eth-Trunk40 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/1 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/2 Service Port up present forwarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/3 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/4 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/5 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/6 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/7 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/8 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/9 Service Port down present discarding

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1127

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

GigabitEthernet0/0/10 Service Port down present discarding

GigabitEthernet0/0/11 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/12 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/13 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/14 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/15 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/16 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/17 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/18 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/19 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/20 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/21 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/22 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/23 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/24 Service Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/25 Fabric Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/26 Fabric Port up present forwarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/27 Fabric Port down present discarding
GigabitEthernet0/0/28 Fabric Port up present discarding
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-116 Description of the display uni-mng as interface brief command

output
Item Description

Interface Interface number.

Type Interface type:

● Service Port: indicates a service
port.
● Stack Port: indicates a physical
stack member port.
● Fabric Port: indicates a member
port of a fabric port.

PHY Interface status:

● up: The interface is Up.
● down: The interface is Down.
● *down: The administrator shuts
down the interface.

Online Whether the card where the interface

resides is present:
● present
● absent

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1128

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

MSTP state STP forwarding status of the interface:

● disabled
● discarding
● learning
● forwarding
● --: The interface is absent or a
physical stack member port.
If the interface is an Eth-Trunk
member port, this field displays the
forwarding state of the Eth-Trunk.

3.9.47 display uni-mng as interface eth-trunk

Function
The display uni-mng as interface eth-trunk command displays information
about an Eth-Trunk interface of an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng as name as-name interface eth-trunk eth-trunk-id

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

name as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value must have an
existing AS name.

eth-trunk-id Specifies the ID of an Eth- The value range varies

Trunk. depending on the device.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1129

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
After you use the uni eth-trunk command to create an Eth-Trunk on an AS, you
can run the display uni-mng as interface eth-trunk command to view
information including the Eth-Trunk working mode, member interface, and
member interface status.

Example
# Display information about Eth-Trunk 40 on AS as1.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng as name as1 interface eth-trunk 40
Eth-Trunk40's state information is:
WorkingMode: NORMAL
Operate status: down
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PortName Status
GigabitEthernet0/0/10 down
GigabitEthernet0/0/11 down
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Number of Ports in Trunk : 2
The Number of UP Ports in Trunk : 0

Table 3-117 Description of the display uni-mng as interface eth-trunk

command output

Item Description

Eth-Trunk40's state information is State information of Eth-Trunk 40.

WorkingMode Working mode of the Eth-Trunk

interface:
● NORMAL: manual mode
● LACP: LACP mode. To set the LACP
mode, specify the mode lacp
parameter when running the uni
eth-trunk command to create an
Eth-Trunk.

Operate status Status of the Eth-Trunk interface:

● down: The interface is Down.
● up: The interface is Up.

PortName Eth-Trunk member interface name.

To add or delete an Eth-Trunk member
interface, run the port eth-trunk
trunkmember command.

Status Eth-Trunk member interface status:

● down: The member interface is
Down.
● up: The member interface is Up.

The Number of Ports in Trunk Number of Eth-Trunk member

interfaces.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1130

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

The Number of UP Ports in Trunk Number of Eth-Trunk member

interfaces in Up state.

3.9.48 display uni-mng commit-result

Function
The display uni-mng commit-result command displays the configuration delivery
result.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng commit-result { profile | free-rule | as-direct-config }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile Displays the delivery result of the service profile -
configuration.

free-rule Displays the delivery result of user authenticate-free -

rules.

as-direct-config Displays the direct configuration recovery result after -

an AS goes online.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng commit-result command to check the result of
delivering the configuration to an AS, including the service profiles configured on
the parent, user authentication-free rules, and configurations directly delivered to
ASs. This command displays only the latest result but not historical information.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1131

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Display the result of delivering the service profile configuration to an AS.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng commit-result profile
Result of profile:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS Name Commit Time Commit/Execute Result
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
as1 2014-09-16 14:38:03 Success/Success
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-118 Description of the display uni-mng commit-result profile command

output
Item Description

AS Name Name of an AS.

Commit Time Time when the configuration is

delivered.

Commit/Execute Result Commit Result indicates the

configuration delivery result:
● Success: The configuration is
delivered successfully.
● Failed: The configuration fails to be
delivered.
● Committing: The configuration is
being delivered.
Execute Result indicates the execution
result of the delivered configuration:
● Success: The configuration is
executed successfully.
● Failed: The configuration fails to be
executed.
● Executing: The configuration is
being executed.

3.9.49 display uni-mng global

Function
The display uni-mng global command displays the global configuration of SVF.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng global

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1132

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng global command to view the globally
configured service functions of SVF.

Example
# Display the global configuration of SVF.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng global
Forward-mode : Centralized
Portal url encode : Disable
IGMP snooping VLAN : 10

Table 3-119 Description of the display uni-mng global command output

Item Description

Forward-mode SVF forwarding mode:

● Distributed: distributed forwarding.
In distributed forwarding, local
traffic of an AS can be forwarded
from the AS, and traffic between
ASs is sent to the parent for
forwarding.
● Centralized: centralized forwarding.
In centralized forwarding mode,
both traffic forwarded by the local
AS and traffic forwarded between
ASs are sent to the parent for
forwarding.

Portal url encode Whether URL encoding is enabled:

● Disable: URL encoding is disabled.
● Enable: URL encoding is enabled.
To disable URL encoding, run the
portal url-encode disable command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1133

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

IGMP snooping VLAN Service VLAN in which IGMP snooping

is enabled.
To configure a service VLAN in which
IGMP snooping is enabled, run the as
service-vlan igmp-snooping
command. If no service VLAN is
configured, this field is not displayed.

3.9.50 display uni-mng indirect configuration

Function
The display uni-mng indirect configuration command displays the indirect
connection configuration on ASs.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
display uni-mng indirect configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng indirect configuration command on an AS to
check the indirect connection configuration on the AS.

Example
# Display the SVF indirect connection configuration on an AS.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng indirect configuration
Uni-mng configuration information:
Current uni-mng status : disable
Next uni-mng status : enable
Current management VLAN : --

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1134

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Next management VLAN : 100

Current fabric-port members :
Next fabric-port members :
GigabitEthernet0/0/9

Table 3-120 Description of the display uni-mng indirect configuration

command output

Item Description

Current uni-mng status Current manually configured client

mode.

Next uni-mng status Next startup manually configured

client mode.
To configure the client mode and
management VLAN, run the uni-mng
indirect mng-vlan command.

Current management VLAN Current management VLAN.

To configure the client mode and
management VLAN, run the uni-mng
indirect mng-vlan command.

Next management VLAN Next startup management VLAN.

Current fabric-port members Current member port configuration in

a fabric port.
To configure member ports for a fabric
port, run the uni-mng indirect fabric-
port command.

Next fabric-port members Next startup member port

configuration in a fabric port.

3.9.51 display uni-mng execute-failed-record

Function
The display uni-mng execute-failed-record command displays execution failure
records after the configuration is delivered to an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng execute-failed-record { profile | as-direct-config } as name as-
name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1135

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile Displays records of configurations -
delivered through profiles.
as-direct-config Displays records of configurations -
directly delivered through commands.
as name as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value must have
an existing AS name.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng execute-failed-record command to check
execution failure records after the configuration is delivered to an AS.

Example
# Display execution failure records after the configuration is delivered to an AS.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng execute-failed-record as-direct-config as name as1
Info: This operation may take a few seconds. Please wait....done.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
View name : system
Command : arp speed-limit source-mac maximum
1
Execute time : 2015-01-19 15:09:23 DST
Failed reason : This device does not support this
command.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-121 Description of the display uni-mng execute-failed-record as-direct-

config command output

Item Description

View name View in which the configuration is

executed.

Command Command that failed to be executed.

Execute Time Time the configuration is executed.

Failed reason Cause of the execution failure.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1136

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.52 display uni-mng interface fabric-port configuration

Function
The display uni-mng interface fabric-port configuration command displays the
fabric port configuration.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng interface fabric-port configuration [ parent | as name as-
name ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
parent Display the parent-side fabric port -
configuration.

as name as- Display the AS-side fabric port The value must
name configuration. have an existing
AS name.
If parent and as-name are not specified,
the configurations of all the fabric ports in
an SVF system are displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng interface fabric-port configuration command
to check the fabric port configuration.

Example
# Display the fabric port configuration.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng interface fabric-port configuration
Interface Direction Connect-type Member-name
Location
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fabric-port0 Down Direct Eth-Trunk0 Parent
Fabric-port1 Down Direct Eth-Trunk1 Parent

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1137

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Fabric-port3 Down Direct Eth-Trunk3 Parent

Fabric-port5 Down Direct Eth-Trunk5 Parent
Fabric-port6 Down Direct Eth-Trunk6 Parent
Fabric-port7 Down Direct Eth-Trunk7 Parent
Fabric-port8 Down Direct Eth-Trunk8 Parent
Fabric-port9 Down Indirect Eth-Trunk9 Parent
Fabric-port10 Down Indirect Eth-Trunk10 Parent
Fabric-port11 Down Direct Eth-Trunk11 Parent
Fabric-port15 Down Direct Eth-Trunk15 Parent
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total : 11

Table 3-122 Description of the display uni-mng interface fabric-port

configuration command output
Item Description

Interface Fabric port name.

Direction Direction of a fabric port. Down

indicates downlink and Up indicates
uplink.

Connect-type Connection mode of a fabric port.

Direct indicates the direct connection
mode, whereas Indirect indicates the
indirect connection mode (connection
through an intermediate network).

Member-name Eth-Trunk to which a fabric port is

bound.

Location Device where a fabric port resides.

3.9.53 display uni-mng interface fabric-port state

Function
The display uni-mng interface fabric-port state command displays the fabric
port status.

NOTE

This command can be used on the parent or an AS. After running this command, you can check
the fabric port status on the local device.

Format
display uni-mng interface fabric-port [ port-id ] state

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1138

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

port-id Specifies the number of a fabric The value is an integer and
port. must be set according to the
device configuration.
If this parameter is not specified, the
status of all fabric ports is displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng interface fabric-port state command to check
the fabric port status.

● If an AS connects to the parent through an intermediate network, peer fabric

port information cannot be obtained and displays --.
● If a fabric port is incorrectly connected, the system displays an error summary
message to provide the cause of the error.

Example
# Display the fabric port status on the parent.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng interface fabric-port state
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fabric-port name : Fabric-port1
Fabric-port direction : Down
Fabric-port member name : Eth-Trunk1

Peer MAC : 0000-1382-4569

Peer AS name : as1
Peer fabric-port member name : Eth-Trunk0

Physical member number :1

Local-port Peer-port State Detail Exptime(s)
XGE6/0/3 XGE0/0/1 Connected None 32
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-123 Description of the display uni-mng interface fabric-port state

command output

Item Description

Fabric-port name Fabric port name.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1139

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Fabric-port direction Direction of a fabric port. Down

indicates downlink and Up indicates
uplink.

Fabric-port member name Eth-Trunk to which a fabric port is

bound.

Peer MAC MAC address of the peer device.

Peer AS name Name of the peer device.

Peer fabric-port member name Eth-Trunk to which the peer fabric port
is bound.

Physical member number Number of member ports in a fabric

port.

Local-port Local member port.

Peer-port Peer member port.

State Port connection status:

● Init: initialization state
● Config: negotiation state
● Error: negotiation error state
● Connected: connected state
● unknown: unknown state

Detail Detailed information when the port

connection state is Error.
For error reasons and solutions, see
Table 3-124.

Exptime(s) Timeout period of link heartbeat

packets, in seconds.

Table 3-124 Error reasons indicated by the Detail field and solutions
Detail Field Meaning Solution

Startup cfg file exists The AS has a startup Clear the startup
configuration file. configuration file and
restart the AS.

Console input exists Input exists on the Restart the AS and do

console interface of an not log in to the console
AS. interface immediately
after the AS is restarted.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1140

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Detail Field Meaning Solution

VLAN for VCMP exists The VLAN for VCMP Run the reset vcmp
exists on the AS. command on the AS to
restart the AS.

Port not supported The AS attempts to Connect the AS to the

connect to the parent parent through an uplink
through an unsupported port or subcard port.
port.

Fabric-port linked to Member ports of the Member ports of a

multi-AS same downlink fabric downlink fabric port can
port connect to two ASs. connect to only one AS,
and different ASs must
connect to different
fabric ports.

Parent exists already The AS connects to two Disconnect the AS from

parent switches. one parent switch.

Linked to multi fabric- The uplink port of the AS Ensure that the AS
port connects to multiple connects to only one
fabric ports of the fabric port of the parent
parent. and disconnect the AS
from other fabric ports.

Level-1 AS linked to The downlink fabric port Disconnect the two

level-1 AS of a level-1 AS connects level-1 ASs from each
to another level-1 AS. other.

Parent linked to level-2 The parent directly Disconnect the parent

AS connects to a level-2 AS. from the level-2 AS.

Downstream fabric-port A downlink fabric port of Disconnect the fabric

linked an AS connects to the port of the AS from the
parent. parent.

No response received The parent does not ● Ensure that the

receive any response parent is a Huawei
packet. switch that supports
the SVF function.
● Ensure that the AS
starts without
configuration.
● Ensure that physical
ports that connect the
AS to the parent are
of the same type.

Failed to create Eth- Failed to create an Eth- Disconnect the AS from

Trunk Trunk on an AS. the parent and then
reconnect them.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1141

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Detail Field Meaning Solution

Failed to bind trunk Failed to add ports of an Disconnect the AS from

AS to an Eth-Trunk. the parent and then
reconnect them.

Force Uni-mng mode An AS has been On the parent, configure

configured to work in the indirect connection
client mode. mode for the fabric port
that connects to the AS.
Alternative, run the
undo uni-mng enable
command on the AS and
restart the AS to enable
it exit from the client
mode.

Parent linked to parent The fabric port of the Disconnect the fabric
parent connects to port from the remote
another parent. parent.

System is busy on AS The system is busy on Wait until the AS is idle.

the AS.

Linked to AS with IPv4- When an S5700-10P-LI, Disable Layer 3

hardware S5700-10P-PWR-LI-AC, hardware forwarding for
or S2750EI functions as IPv4 packets.
an AS, Layer 3 hardware
forwarding for IPv4
packets has been
enabled using the assign
forward-mode ipv4-
hardware command.

Configurations exist on Configurations exist on Delete the configurations

port the port of an AS. of the port.

Invalid stack config exists Downlink service port of Clear the stack
AS is configured as a configuration of the
stack port. downlink service port.

3.9.54 display uni-mng patch-delete info

Function
The display uni-mng patch-delete info command displays information about the
operation of deleting patches on ASs.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1142

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display uni-mng patch-delete info

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
After patches on a specified AS are deleted using the patch delete as command,
you can use the display uni-mng patch-delete info command to view
information about the operation of deleting the patches.

Example
# Display information about the operation of deleting patches on ASs.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng patch-delete info
Total: 7
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS Name Result Time
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
e-10005(1-1) successful 2014-09-04 15:51:05 DST
t-10021(1-s) failed 2014-09-04 15:51:05
m-10018(x-1) deleting 2014-09-04 15:51:05
p-10017(2-2) expired 2014-09-04 15:51:05
6-10016(2-1) successful 2014-09-04 15:51:05
7-10015(2-2) successful 2014-09-04 15:51:05
2-10011(2-1) -- --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-125 Description of the display uni-mng patch-delete info command

output
Item Description

Total Number of ASs.

AS Name Name of an AS.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1143

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Result Result of the operation of deleting

patches:
● successful: Patches are deleted
successfully.
● failed: Patches fail to be deleted.
● deleting: Patches are being deleted.
● expired: Deleting patches expires.
After the operation of deleting
patches is delivered, if no operation
result is received within 2 minutes,
the Result field displays expired.
● --: No records of the deletion
operation are available.

Time Time for the last operation.

Related Topics
3.9.77 patch delete as

3.9.55 display uni-mng port-group

Function
The display uni-mng port-group command displays information about port
groups.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng port-group [ name group-name | verbose ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name group-name Specifies the name of a port The value must be an
group. existing a port group
name.

verbose Displays detailed information -

about a port group.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1144

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng port-group command to check information
about created port groups.

Example
# Display brief information about all port groups.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng port-group

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number Port-group Name Port-group Type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 group1 connect to user
2 ap_group1 connect to AP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-126 Description of the display uni-mng port-group command output

Item Description

Number Sequence number.

Port-group Name Port group name.

Port-group Type Port group type:

● connect to user: port connected to
a terminal user
● connect to AP: port connected to an
AP

# Display detailed information about all port groups.

<HUAWEI> display uni-mng port-group verbose

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port-group name : ap
Port-group type : connect to AP
Interface list :
AS name as1 interface Eth-trunk 5 GigabitEthernet 0/0/2
Network-basic profile : --
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port-group name : group_2
Port-group type : connect to user
Interface list :
AS name as1 interface Eth-trunk 4 GigabitEthernet 0/0/10
Network-basic profile : --
Network-enhanced profile : --

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1145

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

User-access profile : --
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-127 Description of the display uni-mng port-group verbose command

output
Item Description

Port-group name Port group name.

Port-group type Port group type:

● connect to user: port connected to
a terminal user
● connect to AP: port connected to an
AP

Interface list List of member ports added to a port

group.

Network-basic profile Name of the network basic profile

bound to the port group. When no
network basic profile is bound to the
port group, this field displays --.

Network-enhanced profile Name of the network enhanced profile

bound to the port group. When no
network enhanced profile is bound to
the port group, this field displays --.

User-access profile Name of the user access profile bound

to the port group. When no user
access profile is bound to the port
group, this field displays --.

3.9.56 display uni-mng profile

Function
The display uni-mng profile command displays service profile information.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng profile [ { as-admin | network-basic | network-enhanced |
user-access } [ name profile-name ] ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1146

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as-admin Displays information about AS -
administrator profiles.

network-basic Displays information about network basic -

profiles.

network- Displays information about network -

enhanced enhanced profiles.

user-access Displays information about user access -

profiles.

name profile- Specifies the name of a service profile. The profile must
name have an existing
If this parameter is specified, you can profile name.
check information about services
configured in a specified profile.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng profile command to check information about
created service profiles.

Example
# Display brief information about all service profiles.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng profile

AS-admin profile:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number Profile Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 hehe
2 profile_1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Network-basic profile:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number Profile Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 b_pro
2 p

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1147

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Network-enhanced profile:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number Profile Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 enp
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

User-access profile:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number Profile Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 u_pro
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-128 Description of the display uni-mng profile command output

Item Description

Number Sequence number.

Profile Name Name of each profile type.

AS-admin profile AS administrator profile created using

the as-admin-profile name
command.

Network-basic profile Network basic profile created using

the network-basic-profile name
command.

Network-enhanced profile Network enhanced profile created

using the network-enhanced-profile
name command.

User-access profile User access profile created using the

user-access-profile name command.

# Display information about the service profile with a specified name.

<HUAWEI> display uni-mng profile network-basic name basic

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Profile name: basic
User-vlan : 110
Voice-vlan : 114
Pass-vlan : 1 112 to 113
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-129 Description of the display uni-mng profile network-basic name

command output
Item Description

Profile Name Name of a service profile.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1148

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

User-vlan Default VLAN configured in a service

profile.
To configure a default VLAN, run the
user-vlan command. By default, VLAN
1 is a default VLAN.

Voice-vlan Voice VLAN configured in a service

profile.
To configure a voice VLAN, run the
voice-vlan command. If no voice
VLAN is configured, this field displays
--.

Pass-vlan Allowed VLAN configured in a service

profile.
To configure an allowed VLAN, run the
pass-vlan command. By default, only
VLAN 1 is allowed.

3.9.57 display uni-mng profile as

Function
The display uni-mng profile as command displays the configuration generated
after an AS is bound to service profiles.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng profile as name as-name [ interface interface-type interface-
number ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
name as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value
must have an
existing AS
name.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1149

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

interface Displays the configuration of a specified -
interface-type interface:
interface-number
● interface-type specifies the interface type.
The interface type can be Eth-Trunk
interface.
● interface-number specifies the interface
number.
If this parameter is not specified, the
configurations of all the service interfaces on
an AS are displayed.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng profile as command to check the configuration
generated after an AS is bound to service profiles.

Example
# Display the configuration generated on an AS.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng profile as name as1

Global
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Centralized forward mode: disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Portal url-encode: disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS-group name: xy
Username: admin
Privilege-level : 3
Service-type : terminal ssh
Traffic-limit outbound ARP(Kbps) : 512
Traffic-limit outbound DHCP(Kbps) : 128
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port-group name: --
User-vlan : --
Voice-vlan : --
Pass-vlan : --

Priority-trust : disable
User-access-port : disable
DHCP snooping : disable
IP source check : disable

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1150

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

ARP anti-attack check : disable

Unicast-suppression(pps) : --
Multicast-suppression(pps) : --
Broadcast-suppression(pps) : --
Rate-limit(Kbps) : --

Authentication : --
Authentication maximum user-num : --
MAC-limit : --
Traffic-limit inbound ARP(Kbps) : --
Traffic-limit inbound DHCP(Kbps) : --
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port-group name: --
User-vlan : --
Voice-vlan : --
Pass-vlan : --

Priority-trust : disable
User-access-port : disable
DHCP snooping : disable
IP source check : disable
ARP anti-attack check : disable
Unicast-suppression(pps) : --
Multicast-suppression(pps) : --
Broadcast-suppression(pps) : --
Rate-limit(Kbps) : --

Authentication : --
Authentication maximum user-num : --
MAC-limit : --
Traffic-limit inbound ARP(Kbps) : --
Traffic-limit inbound DHCP(Kbps) : --
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
......

Table 3-130 Description of the display uni-mng profile as command output

Item Description

Global Global AS configuration.

Centralized forward mode Whether centralized forwarding is

enabled:
● disable: Centralized forwarding is
disabled, and distributed forwarding
is used currently.
● enable: Centralized forwarding is
enabled.
To configure centralized forwarding,
run the forward-mode centralized
command. By default, distributed
forwarding is used.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1151

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Portal url-encode Whether URL encoding is enabled for

an AS:
● disable: URL encoding is disabled
for the AS.
● enable: URL encoding is enabled for
the AS.
To disable URL encoding for an AS, run
the portal url-encode disable
command. By default, URL encoding is
enabled for an AS.

AS-group name Name of the AS group to which an AS

belongs.

Username AS administrator user name. If no AS

administrator user name is configured,
this field displays --.
AS administrator user name
configured in the AS administrator
profile bound to an AS group. To
configure an AS administrator user
name, run the user password
command.

Privilege-level User level.

Service-type User access type. The value is terminal

ssh and cannot be changed.

Traffic-limit outbound ARP(Kbps) Outbound ARP packet rate limit of the

uplink fabric port of an AS, in kbit/s.
To set the outbound ARP packet rate
limit, run the traffic-limit outbound
command.

Traffic-limit outbound DHCP(Kbps) Outbound DHCP packet rate limit of

the uplink fabric port of an AS, in
kbit/s.
To set the outbound ARP packet rate
limit, run the traffic-limit outbound
command.

Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 Interface name.

Interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2

Port-group name Name of the port group to which an

interface belongs. If an interface is not
added to any port group, this field
displays -- or disable.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1152

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

User-vlan Default VLAN.

To configure a default VLAN, run the
user-vlan command.

Voice-vlan Voice VLAN.

To configure a voice VLAN, run the
voice-vlan command.

Pass-vlan Allowed VLAN.

To configure an allowed VLAN, run the
pass-vlan command.

Priority-trust Whether the priority trust function is

enabled:
● disable: The priority trust function is
disabled in a network enhanced
profile.
● enable: The priority trust function is
enabled in a network enhanced
profile.

User-access-port Whether the edge port function is

enabled:
● disable: The edge port function is
disabled in a network enhanced
profile.
● enable: The edge port function is
enabled in a network enhanced
profile.
To enable the edge port function, run
the user-access-port enable
command.

DHCP snooping Whether DHCP snooping is enabled:

● disable: DHCP snooping is disabled
in a network enhanced profile.
● enable: DHCP snooping is enabled
in a network enhanced profile.
To enable DHCP snooping, run the
dhcp snooping enable command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1153

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

IP source check Whether the IP packet check function

is enabled:
● disable: IP packet check is disabled
in a network enhanced profile.
● enable: IP packet check is enabled
in a network enhanced profile.
To enable IP packet check, run the ip
source check user-bind enable
command.

ARP anti-attack check Whether the dynamic ARP detection

function is enabled:
● disable: The dynamic ARP detection
function is disabled in a network
enhanced profile.
● enable: The dynamic ARP detection
function is enabled in a network
enhanced profile.
To enable the dynamic ARP detection
function, run the arp anti-attack
check user-bind enable command.

Unicast-suppression(pps) Rate limit for unknown unicast traffic,

in pps.
To set the rate limit for unknown
unicast traffic, run the unicast-
suppression command.

Multicast-suppression(pps) Rate limit for multicast traffic, in pps.

To set the rate limit for multicast
traffic, run the multicast-suppression
command.

Broadcast-suppression(pps) Rate limit for broadcast traffic, in pps.

To set the rate limit for broadcast
traffic, run the broadcast-suppression
command.

Rate-limit(Kbps) Traffic rate limit, in kbit/s.

To set the traffic rate limit, run the
rate-limit command.

Authentication User authentication profile created

using the authentication-profile
command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1154

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Authentication maximum user-num Maximum number of access users

configured in a user access profile.
To set this parameter, run the
authentication access-user
maximum command.

MAC-limit MAC address learning limit.

To set the MAC address learning limit,
run the mac-limit command.

Traffic-limit inbound ARP(Kbps) Inbound ARP packet rate limit of an AS

port, in kbit/s.
To set the inbound ARP packet rate
limit, run the traffic-limit inbound
command.

Traffic-limit inbound DHCP(Kbps) Inbound DHCP packet rate limit of an

AS port, in kbit/s.
To set the inbound ARP packet rate
limit, run the traffic-limit inbound
command.

3.9.58 display uni-mng topology configuration

Function
The display uni-mng topology configuration command displays the SVF network
topology collection configuration.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng topology configuration

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1155

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng topology configuration command to check the
SVF network topology collection configuration.

Example
# Display the SVF network topology collection configuration.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng topology configuration
Explore timer: 10 minutes
Last collection time: 10:03:58 UTC+00:00 2014/09/11
Total time for last collection: 9 ms

Table 3-131 Description of the display uni-mng topology configuration

command output
Item Description

Explore timer Network topology collection interval.

To set the network topology collection
interval, run the topology explore
command.

Last collection time Last time the SVF network topology is

collected.

Total time for last collection Time taken to collect the SVF network
topology.

3.9.59 display uni-mng topology information

Function
The display uni-mng topology information command displays SVF network
topology information.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng topology information [ by-name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1156

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
by-name Displays SVF network topology information based on the -
device name.
If this parameter is not specified, SVF network topology
information is displayed based on the MAC address.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng topology information command to check SVF
network topology information.

Example
# Display SVF network topology information.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng topology information
The topology information of uni-mng network:
<-->: direct link <??>: indirect link
T: Trunk ID *: independent AS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local MAC Hop Local Port T || T Peer Port Peer MAC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
00e0-0987-7890 0 GE6/1/0 11 <-->0 GE0/0/26 00e0-0001-0008*
00e0-0001-0008 1 GE0/0/2 -- <-->-- GE0/0/0 00e0-0001-0005
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total items displayed : 2

# Display SVF network topology information based on the device name.

<HUAWEI> display uni-mng topology information by-name
The topology information of uni-mng network:
<-->: direct link <??>: indirect link
T: Trunk ID *: independent AS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Dev Hop Local Port T || T Peer Port Peer Dev
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100-S1 0 GE6/1/0 1 <-->0 GE0/0/26 as1*
as1 1 GE0/0/2 -- <-->-- GE0/0/0 ap-1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total items displayed : 2

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1157

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-132 Description of the display uni-mng topology information command

output
Item Description

Local MAC MAC address of the local device. If by-

name is specified, this field displays
Local Dev, indicating the device name.

Hop Hierarchy of a device on the SVF

network:
● 0: the parent
● 1: level-1 AS
● 2: level-2 AS

Local Port Local physical port.

When two devices are indirectly
connected, port information cannot be
displayed because ports are not
indirectly connected.

T ID of the Eth-Trunk to which a physical

port belongs.

|| Whether two devices are directly

connected:
● <-->: indicates that two devices are
directly connected.
● <??>: indicates that two devices are
indirectly connected. For example,
two devices are connected through
other networks.

Peer Port Peer physical port.

When two devices are indirectly
connected, port information cannot be
displayed because ports are not
indirectly connected.

Peer MAC MAC address of the peer device. If by-

name is specified, this field displays
Peer Dev, indicating the device name.
If * is displayed, the AS is configured in
the independent mode.

Local Dev Local device name.

Peer Dev Peer device name.

If * is displayed, the AS is configured in
the independent mode.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1158

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.60 display uni-mng unauthen-user

Function
The display uni-mng unauthen-user command displays information about non-
authenticated users on an AS.

NOTE

This command can be used on the parent or an AS.

Format
display uni-mng unauthen-user [ as name as-name | mac-address mac-
address ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as name as- Specifies the name of The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
name an AS. insensitive characters without
spaces.
NOTE
This parameter is
supported only on the
parent.

mac-address Specifies the MAC The value is in H-H-H format, where

mac-address address of an AS. H is a hexadecimal number of 1 to 4
digits. The value cannot be all 0s, all
Fs, or a multicast MAC address.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To view information about non-authenticated users on an AS, run the display uni-
mng unauthen-user command.

Example
# Display information about non-authenticated users on the AS test1.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng unauthen-user as name test1
Total: 5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1159

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

MAC Address VLAN IP Interface AS Name

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0001-c002-c302 212 1.1.1.1 Ge1/0/1 test1
000b-099a-8a3d 212 1.1.1.2 Ge1/0/1 test1
0010-0020-0004 212 1.1.1.3 Ge1/0/1 test1
0200-0000-0000 212 1.1.1.4 Ge1/0/1 test1
4cb1-6c91-52a1 212 1.1.1.5 Ge1/0/1 test1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-133 Description of the display uni-mng unauthen-user command output

Item Description

Total Number of non-authenticated users on

an AS.

MAC Address MAC address of a non-authenticated

user.

VLAN VLAN to which a non-authenticated

user belongs.

IP IP address of a non-authenticated user.

NOTE
When this command is run on the AS, this
field is displayed as --.

Interface Access interface of a non-

authenticated user.

AS Name Name of an AS.

3.9.61 display uni-mng unauthen-user offline-record

Function
The display uni-mng unauthen-user offline-record command displays offline
records of non-authenticated users on an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng unauthen-user offline-record [ as name as-name | mac-
address mac-address ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1160

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as name as- Specifies the name The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
name of an AS. insensitive characters without spaces.

mac-address Specifies the MAC The value is in H-H-H format, where H

mac-address address of an AS. is a hexadecimal number of 1 to 4
digits. The value cannot be all 0s, all
Fs, or a multicast MAC address.

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To view offline records of non-authenticated users on an AS, run the display uni-
mng unauthen-user offline-record command.

Example
# Display offline records of non-authenticated users on the AS test1.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng unauthen-user offline-record as name test1
Total: 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS name : test1
User MAC : 0021-9746-b67c
User VLAN : 212
User access interface : Ge1/0/2
User IP address : 192.168.1.1
User offline time : 2016/01/21 04:59:43
User offline reason : As offline
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS name : test1
User MAC : 0021-9746-b67d
User VLAN : 212
User access interface : Ge1/0/3
User IP address : 192.168.1.2
User offline time : 2016/01/21 05:59:43
User offline reason : User offline
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-134 Description of the display uni-mng unauthen-user offline-record

command output

Item Description

Total Number of offline records of non-

authenticated users on an AS.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1161

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

AS name Name of an AS.

User MAC MAC address of a non-authenticated

user.

User VLAN VLAN to which a non-authenticated

user belongs.

User access interface Access interface of a non-

authenticated user.

User IP address IP address of a non-authenticated user.

User offline time Time when a non-authenticated user

goes offline.

User offline reason Reason that a non-authenticated user

goes offline.
● User offline: The user goes offline.
● AS offline: The AS is offline.

3.9.62 display uni-mng upgrade-info

Function
The display uni-mng upgrade-info command displays AS version upgrade
information.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
display uni-mng upgrade-info [ as name as-name | verbose ]

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

as name as-name Specifies the name of an AS. The value must have an
existing AS name.

verbose Displays detailed version upgrade -

information.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1162

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng upgrade-info command to check AS version
upgrade information.

Example
# Display AS version upgrade information.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng upgrade-info
The total number of AS is : 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name Method Phase Status Result
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
as1 -- -- NO-UPGRADE --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-135 Description of the display uni-mng upgrade-info command output

Item Description

Name Name of an AS.

Method Upgrade mode of the AS:

● --: The upgrade task is not started.
● ver-sync: The AS is automatically
upgraded when going online.
● upgrade: The AS is manually
upgraded after going online.

Phase Upgrade phase:

● --: The upgrade task is not started.
● sys-file: The system is determining
whether to download the system
software or is downloading the
system software from the parent.
● patch-file: The system is
determining whether to download
the patch file or is downloading the
patch file from the parent.
● waiting: The AS is waiting for
activation.
● activating: The AS is being
activated.
● rebooting: The AS is restarting.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1163

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Status Whether the AS is being upgraded:

● NO-UPGRADE: The AS is not
upgraded.
● UPGRADING: The AS is being
upgraded.

Result Upgrade result:

● --: The upgrade task is not started.
● successful: The upgrade succeeds.
● failed: The upgrade fails.

# Display detailed AS version upgrade information.

<HUAWEI> display uni-mng upgrade-info verbose
The total number of AS is : 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS name : as1
Work status : NO-UPGRADE
Startup system-software : flash:/s5700-p-li-v200r011c10.cc
Startup version : V200R011C10
Startup patch : --
Next startup system-software : --
Next startup patch : --
Download system-software : --
Download version : --
Download patch : --
Method : --
Upgrading phase : --
Last operation result : failed
Error reason : The local file server has not been configured.
Last operation time : 2016-07-04 15:51:05
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-136 Description of the display uni-mng upgrade-info verbose command

output
Item Description

AS name Name of an AS.

Work status Whether the AS is being upgraded:

● NO-UPGRADE: The AS is not
upgraded.
● UPGRADING: The AS is being
upgraded.

Startup system-software Running software software.

Startup version Current software version.

Startup patch Running patch file. If this field displays

--, no patch file is running.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1164

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Next startup system-software System software that is configured for

the next startup. If this field displays
--, no system software is configured
for the next startup.

Next startup patch Patch package file that is configured

for the next startup. If this field
displays --, no patch package file is
configured for the next startup.

Download system-software Downloaded system software. If this

field displays --, the upgrade task is
not started.

Download version Downloaded system software version.

If this field displays --, the upgrade
task is not started.

Download patch Downloaded patch file. If this field

displays --, the upgrade task is not
started.

Method Upgrade mode of the AS:

● --: The upgrade task is not started.
● ver-sync: The AS is automatically
upgraded when going online.
● upgrade: The AS is manually
upgraded after going online.

Upgrading phase Upgrade phase:

● --: The upgrade task is not started.
● sys-file: The system is determining
whether to download the system
software or is downloading the
system software from the parent.
● patch-file: The system is
determining whether to download
the patch file or is downloading the
patch file from the parent.
● waiting: The AS is waiting for
activation.
● activating: The AS is being
activated.
● rebooting: The AS is restarting.

Last operation result Upgrade result:

● --: The upgrade task is not started.
● successful: The upgrade succeeds.
● failed: The upgrade fails.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1165

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Error reason Upgrade failure reason.

Last operation time Last time the AS is upgraded.

3.9.63 display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port

Function
The display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port command displays information
about AS service ports added to an uplink fabric port.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port command to check the
current and next startup configurations of AS service ports added to an uplink
fabric port.

Example
# Display information about AS service ports added to an uplink fabric port.
<HUAWEI> display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port
Uni-mng up-direction fabric-port configuration:
Current fabric-port members :
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
GigabitEthernet0/0/2
GigabitEthernet0/0/3
GigabitEthernet0/0/4
Next fabric-port members :
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
GigabitEthernet0/0/2

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1166

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

GigabitEthernet0/0/3
GigabitEthernet0/0/4

Table 3-137 Description of the display uni-mng up-direction fabric-port

command output

Item Description

Uni-mng up-direction fabric-port Configuration of an uplink fabric port.

configuration

Current fabric-port members Effective member interfaces of the

uplink fabric port.

Next fabric-port members Effective member interfaces of the

uplink fabric port after the device's
next startup.

3.9.64 down-direction fabric-port

Function
The down-direction fabric-port command configures the fabric port that
connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS.

The undo down-direction fabric-port command deletes the fabric port that
connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS.

By default, no fabric port that connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS is configured.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
down-direction fabric-port port-id member-group interface eth-trunk trunk-id

undo down-direction fabric-port port-id member-group

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
port-id Specifies the number The value is an integer and must be
of a fabric port. set according to the device
configuration.

member-group Specifies the Eth-Trunk -

interface to which a fabric port
is bound.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1167

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

eth-trunk Specifies the ID of an The value is an integer that ranges
trunk-id Eth-Trunk. from 1 to 63.
NOTE
If an Eth-Trunk has been created and
configured on an AS in independent mode,
the eth-trunk trunk-id parameter cannot
be the same as the existing Eth-Trunk ID of
this AS. Otherwise, this command cannot
be delivered.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When a level-1 AS needs to connect to a level-2 AS, you need to configure a fabric
port on the level-1 AS to connect to the level-2 AS. A downlink port of a level-1
AS becomes Up only after the parent finishes delivering the configuration. A
level-2 AS begins to go online only after the downlink port of the level-1 AS
becomes Up.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the port eth-trunk trunk-id trunkmember interface interface-type interface-

number1 [ to interface-number2 ] command to add member ports to the bound
Eth-Trunk.

Example
# Configure the fabric port that connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] down-direction fabric-port 1 member-group interface eth-trunk 1

Related Topics
3.9.14 as name (uni-mng view)
3.9.99 uni-mng
3.9.81 port eth-trunk trunkmember

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1168

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.65 down-direction fabric-port connect independent-as

Function
The down-direction fabric-port connect independent-as command enables the
independent mode on the fabric port that connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS.
The undo down-direction fabric-port command restores the default mode of the
fabric port that connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS.
By default, the service configuration mode of the fabric port that connects a
level-1 AS to a level-2 AS is centralized mode.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
down-direction fabric-port port-id connect independent-as
undo down-direction fabric-port port-id connect

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
port-id Specifies the number of a The value is an integer and must be set
fabric port. according to the device configuration.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In independent mode, you can log in to an AS to configure this AS using
commands. After the independent mode is enabled on the fabric port that
connects a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS, the level-2 AS can be configured
independently.
Prerequisites
The fabric port used to connect a level-1 AS to a level-2 AS has been created using
the down-direction fabric-port port-id member-group interface eth-trunk
trunk-id command in the AS view.
Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1169

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Before enabling the independent mode, run the independent-as-admin

command in the uni-mng view to configure an administrator for AS login. If no
administrator is created, you can only log in to an AS through a console port and
need to enter the default password. The default username and password are
available in S Series Switches Default Usernames and Passwords (Enterprise
Network or Carrier). If you have not obtained the access permission of the
document, see Help on the website to find out how to obtain it. The default
password has security risks. You are advised to change the login password.

If service configurations have been delivered in centralized mode to a level-1 AS

port before this port is changed to the independent mode, this port cannot be
configured as a fabric port that connects to a level-2 AS. To do so, restore the
level-1 AS to the centralized mode and cancel the service configurations of this
port on the parent.

Example
# Enable the independent mode on the fabric port that connects a level-1 AS to a
level-2 AS.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] down-direction fabric-port 1 member-group interface eth-trunk 1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] down-direction fabric-port 1 connect independent-as

3.9.66 forward-mode centralized

Function
The forward-mode centralized command sets the forwarding mode of an SVF
system to centralized forwarding.

The undo forward-mode command restores the default forwarding mode of an

SVF system.

By default, the forwarding mode of an SVF system is distributed forwarding.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
forward-mode centralized

undo forward-mode

Parameters
None

Views
uni-mng view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1170

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

An SVF system uses the distributed forwarding mode by default. You can change
the forwarding mode to centralized mode.
● In centralized forwarding mode, traffic forwarded by the local AS and
forwarded between ASs is sent to the parent for forwarding.
● In distributed forwarding mode, an AS directly forwards local traffic and the
parent forwards traffic between ASs.

Precautions
● After changing the SVF forwarding mode, you must run the commit as
{ name as-name | all } command to commit the configuration so that the
device can deliver it to ASs.
● In centralized forwarding mode, ports of the ASs connected to the same fabric
port of the parent are isolated and so cannot communicate at Layer 2, and
need to have proxy ARP in the corresponding VLAN configured using the arp-
proxy inner-sub-vlan-proxy enable command to communicate at Layer 3.
● After an AS goes offline, downlink ports of the AS are automatically shut
down. As a result, traffic of the AS attached network will be interrupted.

Example
# Set the SVF forwarding mode to centralized forwarding.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] forward-mode centralized

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

3.9.67 independent-as-admin

Function
The independent-as-admin command creates an administrator for AS login in
independent mode.

The undo independent-as-admin command deletes the administrator for AS

login in independent mode.

By default, no administrator is created for AS login in independent mode.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1171

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
independent-as-admin user user-name password password
undo independent-as-admin user

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
user-name Specifies a The value is a string of 1 to 64 case-insensitive
user name. characters. It cannot contain spaces, asterisk, double
quotation mark and question mark.

password Specifies the The value is a string of case-sensitive characters

password. without spaces. A password in plain text is a string
of 8 to 128 characters. A password in cipher text is a
string of 48 to 188 characters and cannot be
generated using the irreversible algorithm. The
password is displayed in cipher text in the
configuration file regardless of whether the
password is input in plain or cipher text. The newly
configured password cannot be the default
password of local users.The default username and
password are available in S Series Switches Default
Usernames and Passwords (Enterprise Network or
Carrier). If you have not obtained the access
permission of the document, see Help on the
website to find out how to obtain it.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
If the AS service configuration mode is set to independent mode, you need to use
this command to configure the administrator account used to log in to ASs. After
the configuration is complete, the user name and password used for login are
automatically configured on the AS. The following configuration is generated on
the AS:
#
aaa
local-user user-name password irreversible-cipher password
local-user user-name privilege level 3
local-user user-name service-type terminal ssh
#

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1172

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

After an AS user name and password are configured, you need to enter the correct
user name and password when logging in to an AS through the console port.
When you log in to an AS from the parent using the attach as name as-name
command, you can log in to the AS without entering the user name or password.
Precautions
The user name and password configured using this command take effect after the
configuration is generated on ASs. It takes about 5 minutes for the configuration
to take effect after you run the command. Do not log in to an AS within this
period; otherwise, the configuration may take effect after a longer period of time.

Example
# Create an AS administrator user name and password in independent mode.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] independent-as-admin user test password Pwd@123456

3.9.68 interface fabric-port

Function
The interface fabric-port command creates a fabric port and displays the fabric
port view.
The undo interface fabric-port command deletes a fabric port.
By default, no fabric port exists in the system.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
interface fabric-port port-id
undo interface fabric-port port-id

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1173

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

port-id Specifies the ● When the S12700 functions as a parent switch,
number of a the value ranges from 0 to 255.
fabric port. ● When the S9300X functions as a parent switch,
the value ranges from 0 to 255.
● When the S9700 functions as a parent switch,
the value ranges from 0 to 63.
● When the S7700 functions as a parent switch,
the value ranges from 0 to 255 when it uses
SRUE or SRUH or ranges from 0 to 63 when it
uses other cards.
● When the S9300 functions as a parent switch,
the value ranges from 0 to 255 when it uses
SRUE, SRUH or SRUK or ranges from 0 to 63
when it uses other cards.
● When the S9300E functions as a parent switch,
the value ranges from 0 to 63.
● When the S5720HI, S6720EI and S6720S-EI
function as parent switches, the value ranges
from 0 to 63.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
To set up an SVF system, create fabric ports on the parent switches to allow ASs to
connect to the parent switches.

Example
# Create a fabric port and enter the fabric port view.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] interface fabric-port 1

Related Topics
3.9.82 port member-group interface

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1174

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.69 ip source check user-bind enable (network enhanced

profile view)
Function
The ip source check user-bind enable command configures IP packet checking in
a network enhanced profile.
The undo ip source check user-bind enable command cancels IP packet checking
in a network enhanced profile.
By default, IP packet checking is not configured in a network enhanced profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
ip source check user-bind enable
undo ip source check user-bind enable

Parameters
None

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure IP packet checking in
the profile. After the profile is bound to the port of an AS, IP packet checking is
automatically enabled on the port. The following configuration is generated on
the AS port:
#
ip source check user-bind enable
ip source check user-bind alarm enable
#

When attackers steal authorized users' IP addresses or MAC addresses to send

packets to access or attack networks, authorized users cannot obtain stable and
secure network services. After configuring IP packet checking on a device, the
device checks received IP packets against the binding table to prevent such
attacks.
Prerequisites

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1175

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

DHCP snooping has been enabled in the network enhanced profile using the dhcp
snooping enable command.
Precautions
When an AS is an S2750EI, S5700-10P-LI, or S5700-10P-PWR-LI and works in
Layer 3 hardware forwarding mode, the ip source check user-bind enable
command does not take effect on the AS. Because an AS performs only Layer 2
forwarding in an SVF system, you are advised to run the undo assign forward-
mode command to cancel the Layer 3 hardware forwarding mode and then
connect the AS to the SVF system.

Example
# Configure IP packet checking in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] dhcp snooping enable
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] ip source check user-bind enable

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.70 mac-limit (user access profile view)

Function
The mac-limit command configures MAC address learning limiting in a user
access profile.
The undo mac-limit command cancels MAC address learning limiting in a user
access profile.
By default, MAC address learning limiting is not configured in a user access
profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
mac-limit maximum max-num
undo mac-limit

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1176

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

maximum Specifies the maximum The value is an integer that ranges
max-num number of MAC from 0 to 4096. The value 0
addresses that can be indicates that the maximum
learned on an interface. number of MAC addresses that can
be learned is not limited.

Views
User access profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After creating a user access profile, you can configure MAC address learning
limiting in the profile. When the profile is bound an AS port, MAC address learning
limiting is automatically configured on the port. The following configuration is
generated on the AS port:
#
mac-limit maximum max-num
#

To control the number of access users and protect the MAC address table against
attacks, you can limit the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on an interface.

Precautions

The mac-limit and authentication commands are mutually exclusive and cannot
be configured together in a user access profile.

Example
# Configure MAC address learning limiting in a user access profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] user-access-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-user-access-profile_1] mac-limit maximum 1024

Related Topics
3.9.108 user-access-profile name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1177

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.71 multicast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)

Function
The multicast-suppression command configures multicast traffic suppression in a
network enhanced profile.
The undo multicast-suppression command cancels multicast traffic suppression
in a network enhanced profile.
By default, multicast traffic suppression is not configured in a network enhanced
profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
multicast-suppression packets packets-per-second
undo multicast-suppression

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
packets Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 0
packets-per- packet rate of an to 14881000, in packets per second (PPS).
second interface.
If the configured packet rate on the parent
switch is larger than the maximum value
on the AS port, the maximum value takes
effect on the AS port.

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure multicast traffic
suppression in the profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, multicast traffic
suppression is automatically configured on the port. The following configuration is
generated on the AS port:
#
multicast-suppression packets packets-per-second
#

To prevent broadcast storms, you can run the multicast-suppression command to

configure the maximum number of multicast packets that can pass through a

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1178

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

port. When the multicast traffic rate reaches the maximum value, the system
discards excess multicast packets to control the traffic volume within a proper
range.

Example
# Configure multicast traffic suppression in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] multicast-suppression packets 148810

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.72 network-basic-profile name

Function
The network-basic-profile name command creates a network basic profile.

The undo network-basic-profile name command deletes a network basic profile.

By default, no network basic profile is created.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
network-basic-profile name profile-name

undo network-basic-profile name profile-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
network basic profile. sensitive characters without spaces. The
value can contain letters, digits, and
underscores (_).

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1179

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can configure basic user services in a network basic profile, including the
default VLAN, allowed VLAN, and voice VLAN of a port.
Precautions
You can create a maximum of 256 network basic profiles in a version earlier than
V200R011C10.
You can create a maximum of 512 network basic profiles in V200R011C10 and
later versions.

Example
# Create a network basic profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-basic-profile name profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.110 user-vlan (network basic profile view)
3.9.76 pass-vlan (network basic profile view)
3.9.112 voice-vlan (network basic profile view)

3.9.73 network-basic-profile (port group view)

Function
The network-basic-profile command binds a network basic profile to a port
group.
The undo network-basic-profile command unbinds a network basic profile from
a port group.
By default, no network basic profile is bound to a port group.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
network-basic-profile profile-name
undo network-basic-profile

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1180

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of a network The value must have an existing
basic profile. network basic profile name.

Views
Port group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can bind a network basic profile to a port group to deliver the configurations
in the profile to all the member ports in the port group.
Prerequisites
The network basic profile has been created.
Precautions
A port group can be bound to only one network basic profile.

Example
# Bind a network basic profile to a port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-basic-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-basic-profile_1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] port-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-portgroup-group_1] network-basic-profile profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.72 network-basic-profile name
3.9.80 port-group name

3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

Function
The network-enhanced-profile name command creates a network enhanced
profile.
The undo network-enhanced-profile name command deletes a network
enhanced profile.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1181

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

By default, no network enhanced profile is created.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
network-enhanced-profile name profile-name
undo network-enhanced-profile name profile-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
network enhanced sensitive characters without spaces. The
profile. value can contain letters, digits, and
underscores (_).

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can configure value-added services in a network enhanced profile, such as
network security and QoS.
Precautions
● You can create a maximum of 16 network enhanced profiles.
● A network enhanced profile can be bound to only an AS port group but not
an AP port group.

Example
# Create a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.24 broadcast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.71 multicast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1182

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.103 unicast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)

3.9.30 dhcp snooping enable (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.69 ip source check user-bind enable (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.2 arp anti-attack check user-bind enable (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.84 rate-limit (network enhanced profile view)
3.9.107 user-access-port enable (network enhanced profile view)

3.9.75 network-enhanced-profile (port group view)

Function
The network-enhanced-profile command binds a network enhanced profile to a
port group.
The undo network-enhanced-profile command unbinds a network enhanced
profile from a port group.
By default, no network enhanced profile is bound to a port group.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
network-enhanced-profile profile-name
undo network-enhanced-profile

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of a The value must have an existing
network enhanced profile. network enhanced profile name.

Views
Port group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can bind a network enhanced profile to a port group to deliver the
configurations in the profile to all the member ports in the port group.
Prerequisites

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1183

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The network enhanced profile has been created.

Precautions
● A network enhanced profile can be bound to only an AS port group but not
an AP port group.
● A port group can be bound to only one network enhanced profile.

Example
# Bind a network enhanced profile to a port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] port-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-portgroup-group_1] network-enhanced-profile profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name
3.9.80 port-group name

3.9.76 pass-vlan (network basic profile view)

Function
The pass-vlan command configures allowed VLANs in a network basic profile.
The undo pass-vlan command deletes allowed VLANs in a network basic profile.
By default, no allowed VLANs are configured in a network basic profile, and
downlink ports of an AS allow packets from VLAN 1 to pass through.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
pass-vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10>
undo pass-vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10>

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1184

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

vlan-id1 [ to Specifies IDs of The value is an integer that ranges from
vlan-id2 ] VLANs from which 1 to 4094.
packets are allowed
to pass through. The value cannot be the ID of an SVF
management VLAN, a stack
management VLAN, an ERPS control
VLAN, an RRPP control VLAN, an SEP
control VLAN, or a super VLAN.

Views
Network basic profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After creating a network basic profile, you can configure allowed VLANs in the
profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, the port allows packets from these
VLANs to pass through. The following configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
port link-type hybrid
port hybrid tagged vlan vlan-id1 to vlan-id2
#

Precautions

● The default VLAN, allowed VLANs, and voice VLAN in a network basic profile
must be different.
● You can configure a maximum of 32 allowed VLANs in a network basic
profile.

Example
# Configured allowed VLANs in a network basic profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-basic-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-basic-profile_1] pass-vlan 10 to 12

Related Topics
3.9.72 network-basic-profile name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1185

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.77 patch delete as

Function
The patch delete as command deletes patches on a specified online AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
patch delete as { all | name patch-name | name-include string }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

name patch-name Specifies the name of an The value is a string of 1

AS. to 31 case-insensitive
characters without
spaces.

name-include string Specifies the string The value is a string of 1

contained in an AS to 31 case-insensitive
name. characters without
spaces.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

If you find errors in the patches loaded to an AS, run this command to delete the
patches to prevent system operation failures.

If non-incremental patches need to be loaded to an AS, you need to run the patch
delete as command to delete the existing patches on the AS first. Otherwise, non-
incremental patches will fail to be loaded.

Precautions

If the patch file to be loaded to an AS type has been specified using the as type
command, patches on this AS type cannot be deleted.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1186

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Delete the patches on as1.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] patch delete as name as1
Warning: This command will start to delete the patch of AS. Continue?[Y/N]:y
Info: This operation will take several seconds, please wait...

Related Topics
3.9.54 display uni-mng patch-delete info

3.9.78 port connect independent-as

Function
The port connect independent-as command enables the independent mode on
the fabric port that connects the parent to a level-1 AS.
The undo port connect command restores the default mode of the fabric port
that connects the parent to a level-1 AS.
By default, the service configuration mode of the fabric port that connects the
parent to a level-1 AS is centralized mode.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
port connect independent-as
undo port connect

Parameters
None

Views
Fabric-port view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In independent mode, you can log in to an AS to configure this AS using
commands. After the independent mode is enabled on the fabric port that
connects the parent to a level-1 AS, the level-1 AS can be configured
independently.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1187

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions

● Before enabling the independent mode, run the independent-as-admin

command in the uni-mng view to configure an administrator for AS login.
● If the AS connected to a fabric port is online, running the undo port connect
command on the fabric port for mode switching will cause the AS to
automatically restart and register with the parent again.
● During mode switching on a fabric port, the parent and AS exchange packets
for multiple times. In this process, if faults occur, for example, link or device
faults, mode switching may fail. An error message will be displayed on the
parent, indicating that mode switching fails. Additionally, the AS may restart
and then registers with the parent again. In this situation, run commands on
the fabric port again to change the mode after the AS has registered with the
parent.
● When the service configuration mode of an AS is independent mode,
configuring the following commands on the Eth-Trunk bound to or on the
member port of a fabric port connected to the AS may cause this AS to go
offline.

Table 3-138 Commands that may cause an AS to go offline

Command

loopback internal

traffic-policy

traffic-filter

speed

negotiation

port media-type

port split

training disable

wavelength-channel

undo port hybrid tagged vlan

undo port trunk allow-pass vlan

storm-control action

mac-address flapping action

port-security protect-action

port-security enable

● If the Eth-Trunk bound to a fabric port has other configurations in addition to

the following Table 2 and Table 3, you need to manually delete the other
configurations before running the undo port connect command on this fabric

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1188

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

port for mode switching. Otherwise, an error message will be displayed to

indicate that mode switching fails.

Table 3-139 Commands that can not be manually deleted in an Eth-Trunk

Command

port link-type hybrid

port hybrid tagged vlan

Table 3-140 Commands that do not need to be manually deleted in an Eth-

Trunk
Command

undo port hybrid vlan

stp root-protection

stp edged-port disable

loop-detection disable

mode lacp

mad relay

trust 8021p

authentication-profile

authentication control-point

Example
# Enable the independent mode on the fabric port that connects the parent to a
level-1 AS.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] interface fabric-port 1
[HUAWEI-um-fabric-port-1] port connect independent-as

Related Topics
3.9.68 interface fabric-port

3.9.79 port connect-type indirect

Function
The port connect-type indirect command configures the indirect connection
mode for a fabric port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1189

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The undo port connect-type command restores the default connection mode for
a fabric port.

The default connection mode of a fabric port is direct connection.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
port connect-type indirect

undo port connect-type

Parameters
None

Views
Fabric-port view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
When the parent connects to an AS across a network, you need to run the port
connect-type indirect command to configure the indirect connection mode for
the fabric port that connects the parent to the AS.

Prerequisites

No Eth-Trunk is bound to the fabric port.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the 3.9.82 port member-group interface command to bind an Eth-Trunk to

the fabric port.

Example
# Configure the indirect connection mode for a fabric port.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] interface fabric-port 1
[HUAWEI-um-fabric-port-1] port connect-type indirect

Related Topics
3.9.68 interface fabric-port

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1190

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.80 port-group name

Function
The port-group name command creates an AS port group.
The port-group connect-ap name command creates an AP port group.
The undo port-group name command deletes an AS port group.
The undo port-group connect-ap name command deletes an AP port group.
By default, no AS port group is created.

NOTE
This command can be executed only on a parent switch of models except the S6720EI,
S6720S-EI, S6720SI, and S6720S-SI.

Format
port-group name group-name
port-group connect-ap name group-name
undo port-group name group-name
undo port-group connect-ap name group-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
group-name Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
port group. sensitive characters without spaces. The
value can contain letters, digits, and
underscores (_).

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
A port group is a set of AS ports. The purpose of a port group is to facilitate batch
configuration of AS ports.
Port groups are classified into AS port groups and AP port groups.
● Ports in an AS port group are used to connect an AS to a user terminal. An AS
port group can be bound to three types of service profiles (network basic

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1191

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

profile, network enhanced profile, and user access profile), but only one
profile of the same type can be bound.
● Ports in an AP port group are used to connect an AS to an AP. To connect an
AP to an AS, you need to add the port that connects the AS to the AP to an
AP port group. An AP port group can be bound to only a network basic
profile, and only the pass-vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> command
configured in the profile takes effect.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the as name as-name or as name-include string interface all command to

add AS ports to a port group.

Precautions

● You can create a maximum of 256 AS port groups in a version earlier than
V200R011C10.
You can create a maximum of 512 AS port groups in V200R011C10 and later
versions.
● You can create a maximum of 1 AP port groups.

Example
# Create a port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] port-group name group_1

Related Topics
3.9.13 as name interface (port group view)
3.9.73 network-basic-profile (port group view)
3.9.75 network-enhanced-profile (port group view)
3.9.109 user-access-profile (port group view)

3.9.81 port eth-trunk trunkmember

Function
The port eth-trunk trunkmember command adds member ports to the Eth-
Trunk.

The undo port eth-trunk trunkmember command deletes member ports from
an Eth-Trunk.

By default, no member ports are added to the Eth-Trunk.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1192

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
port eth-trunk trunk-id trunkmember interface interface-type interface-
number1 [ to interface-number2 ]
undo port eth-trunk trunk-id trunkmember interface interface-type interface-
number1 [ to interface-number2 ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
trunk-id Specifies the ID of an Eth-Trunk. The value is an integer and
the minimum value is 1.
The maximum value varies
according to the switch
model. For a specific switch
model, the maximum value
is the same as that
described in interface eth-
trunk.

interface Specifies the type and number -

interface-type of the interface added to an
interface- Eth-Trunk:
number1 [ to
interface- ● interface-type specifies the
number2 ] interface type.
● interface-number1 specifies
the first interface number.
● interface-number2 specifies
the last interface number.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After a downlink fabric port of a level-1 AS is configured using the down-
direction fabric-port port-id member-group interface eth-trunk trunk-id
command, you need to add member ports to the Eth-Trunk to which the fabric
port is bound.
When an Eth-Trunk has been created for an AS using the uni eth-trunk
command, you can run the port eth-trunk trunkmember command to add
member ports to this Eth-Trunk.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1193

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Precautions
AS uplink ports can be used to connect to the parent or level-1 AS or set up a
stack and be configured as downlink fabric ports to connect to other ASs.
On the S6720EI and S6720S-EI, 40GE ports and 10GE ports split from 40GE ports
cannot be configured as downlink fabric ports.

Example
# Add member ports to the Eth-Trunk to which a fabric port is bound.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] down-direction fabric-port 1 member-group interface eth-trunk 1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] port eth-trunk 1 trunkmember interface gigabitethernet 0/0/16

# Add member ports to the Eth-Trunk configured on the specified AS.

<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] uni eth-trunk 40
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] port eth-trunk 40 trunkmember interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/10

Related Topics
3.9.14 as name (uni-mng view)
3.9.64 down-direction fabric-port
3.9.99 uni-mng

3.9.82 port member-group interface

Function
The port member-group interface command binds a fabric port to an Eth-Trunk.
The undo port member-group command unbinds a fabric port from an Eth-
Trunk.
By default, no fabric port is bound to an Eth-Trunk.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
port member-group interface eth-trunk trunk-id
undo port member-group

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1194

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
eth-trunk trunk-id Specifies the ID of the Eth-Trunk The value is an integer
to which a fabric port is bound. that ranges from 0 to
127.

Views
Fabric-port view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a fabric port using the interface fabric-port port-id command, bind
the fabric port to an Eth-Trunk.
Follow-up Procedure
Run the eth-trunk trunk-id command in the interface view to add interfaces to
the bound Eth-Trunk.
Precautions
● A created Eth-Trunk cannot be bound to a fabric port. When a fabric port is
bound to an Eth-Trunk, the system creates the Eth-Trunk.
● You can run the interface eth-trunk command to enter the view of the Eth-
Trunk to which a fabric port is bound and configure services. Currently, the
following commands can be executed in the view of the Eth-Trunk to which a
fabric port is bound: authentication open ucl-policy enable, mac-address
multiport, quit, and all display commands.
● If physical member interfaces have been added to the Eth-Trunk bound to a
fabric port, the undo port member-group command cannot be used to
unbind the fabric port from the Eth-Trunk.
● Running the undo port member-group command will delete the
configuration in the Eth-Trunk interface view and delete the Eth-Trunk.
● When a fabric port is bound to an Eth-Trunk, the system creates the Eth-Trunk
and performs some service configurations on the Eth-Trunk, for example, the
stp root-protection and mad relay command configurations.

Example
# Bind a fabric port to an Eth-Trunk.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] interface fabric-port 1
[HUAWEI-um-fabric-port-1] port member-group interface eth-trunk 11

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1195

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng
3.9.68 interface fabric-port

3.9.83 portal url-encode disable

Function
The portal url-encode disable command disables the URL encoding function of
ASs.
The undo portal url-encode disable command enables the URL encoding
function of ASs.
By default, the URL encoding function of AS is enabled.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
portal url-encode disable
undo portal url-encode disable

Parameters
None

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
To improve web application security, data from untrustworthy sources must be
encoded before being sent to clients. URL encoding is most commonly used in web
applications. After URL encoding is enabled for ASs, special characters in
redirected URLs are converted to secure formats, preventing clients from mistaking
them for syntax signs or instructions and unexpectedly modifying the original
syntax. In this way, cross-site scripting attacks and injection attacks are prevented.
By default, URL encoding is enabled in ASs. This function can be disabled using
the portal url-encode disable command.
Precautions
If the system software is upgraded from a version earlier than
V200R009C00SPC500 to V200R009C00SPC500 or a later version, the switch

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1196

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

automatically runs the portal url-encode disable command to disable URL

encoding and decoding.

Example
# Disable URL encoding.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] portal url-encode disable

3.9.84 rate-limit (network enhanced profile view)

Function
The rate-limit command configures traffic rate limiting in a network enhanced
profile.

The undo rate-limit command cancels traffic rate limiting in a network enhanced
profile.

By default, traffic rate limiting is not configured in a network enhanced profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
rate-limit cir-value

undo rate-limit

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

cir-value Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 64
committed information to 1000000, in kbit/s.
rate (CIR), which is the
allowed rate at which The packet rate range of an interface
traffic can pass depends on the interface bandwidth:
through. ● Ethernet interface: 64 to 100000
● GE interface: 64 to 1000000
If the configured packet rate is larger than
the maximum value, the maximum value
takes effect.

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1197

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure traffic rate limiting
in the profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, traffic rate limiting is
automatically configured on the port. The following configuration is generated on
the AS port:
#
qos lr inbound cir cir-value cbs 125*cir-value
#

If user traffic is not limited, continuous burst data from numerous users can make
the network congested. You can configure traffic rate limiting in inbound direction
on an interface to limit traffic entering from the interface within a specified range.

Precautions

When an AS is an S2750EI, S5700-10P-LI, or S5700-10P-PWR-LI switch and works

in Layer 3 hardware forwarding mode, the rate-limit cir-value command does not
take effect on the AS. Because an AS performs only Layer 2 forwarding in an SVF
system, you are advised to run the undo assign forward-mode command to
cancel the Layer 3 hardware forwarding mode and then connect the AS to the SVF
system.

Example
# Configure traffic rate limiting in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] rate-limit 100000

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.85 reboot uni-mng

Function
The reboot uni-mng command restarts an SVF system.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
reboot uni-mng

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1198

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When upgrading or troubleshooting an SVF system, you can restart the SVF
system, including the parent and all ASs.

Precautions

● This command can be used only after the SVF function is enabled.
● The next startup software version of the AS must be V200R011C10 or later,
and the next startup software version of the parent cannot be earlier than
that of the AS.
● Before running this command to restart an SVF system, you must save the
configuration of the parent. If an AS is configured in independent mode, you
also need to save the configuration of the AS.

Example
# Restart an SVF system.
<HUAWEI> reboot uni-mng

3.9.86 reset uni-mng as-discover packet statistics

Function
The reset uni-mng as-discover packet statistics command clears AS Discovery
packet statistics on a fabric port.

NOTE

This command can be used on the parent or an AS. After running this command, you can clear
AS Discovery packet statistics on a fabric port of the local device.

Format
reset uni-mng as-discover packet statistics interface fabric-port port-id

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1199

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 0 to
fabric-port number of a 63 on an AS and the value range on the
port-id fabric port. parent varies depending on the switch model:
● S12700: 0 to 255
● S7712 (SRUE/SRUH)/S7706 (SRUE/SRUH):
0 to 255
● S9312 (SRUE/SRUH)/S9310/S9306(SRUE/
SRUH)/S9310X: 0 to 255
● Other switch models: 0 to 63

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Before collecting statistics about AS Discovery packets on a fabric port, clear the
existing statistics.

Example
# Clear AS Discovery packet statistics on a fabric port.
<HUAWEI> reset uni-mng as-discover packet statistics interface fabric-port 1

Related Topics
3.9.43 display uni-mng as-discover packet statistics

3.9.87 shutdown interface

Function
The shutdown interface command disables an AS port.

The undo shutdown interface command enables an AS port.

By default, an interface is enabled.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1200

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
shutdown interface interface-type interface-number
undo shutdown interface interface-type interface-number

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
interface-type Specifies the interface type and number. -
interface-number
● interface-type specifies the interface type. The
interface type cannot be an Eth-Trunk interface.
● interface-number specifies the interface number.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can run the shutdown interface command to disable an AS port.
Precautions
Running this command can disable only an AS downlink port but not an AS uplink
port. If an uplink port has been configured as a downlink fabric port, this port can
be disabled.
If the version of an AS is inconsistent with that of the parent, the shutdown
interface and undo shutdown interface commands do not take effect on the
ports of this AS.
If an AS is configured in the independent mode, the shutdown interface and
undo shutdown interface commands do not take effect on the ports of this AS.

Example
# Disable an AS port.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] shutdown interface gigabitethernet 0/0/1

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng
3.9.14 as name (uni-mng view)

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1201

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.88 slot
Function
The slot command pre-configures a stack ID or changes the pre-configured device
model.
The undo slot command deletes the pre-configured stack ID or changes the pre-
configured device model.
By default, the pre-configured stack ID is 0.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
slot slot-id1 replace-model model-name
undo slot slot-id1 replace-model
slot slot-id2 [ to slot-id3 ] [ replace-model model-name ]
undo slot slot-id2 [ to slot-id3 ] [ replace-model ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
slot-id1 Specifies the pre-configured The value is 0.
stack ID.

slot-id2 [ to slot- Specifies the pre-configured The value is an integer

id3 ] stack ID. that ranging from 1 to 4.
slot-id3 must be larger than
slot-id2.

replace-model Specifies the device model of The value range depends

model-name which the stack ID needs to be on the device
pre-configured. configuration.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1202

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

When an AS is a stack of multiple member switches, the system pre-configures

only stack ID 0 by default. You can only pre-configure services for the member
switch with stack ID 0. Before pre-configuring services for another member switch,
pre-configure a stack ID for the member switch.

The pre-configured stack ID does not affect the actual stack ID. For example, the
pre-configured stack ID is 0 (default value), but the actual stack IDs are 0 and 2.
The actual stack IDs remain 0 and 2 except that no services are configured on the
device with stack ID 2.

An AS can be a stack of the same device series but different device models. If the
stack contains different device models, you need to specify the replace-model
parameter to change the device model that is different from the other device
models in the stack to the actual access device model. If you do not specify the
device model of a specified member, by default, the device model of this member
is consistent with the pre-configured AS type.

Precautions

If the AS does not support stacking, the slot slot-id command configuration takes
effect on the parent only when slot 0 is configured as the stack ID.

Changing the device models of online devices in a stack is not allowed.

Example
# Pre-configure a stack ID.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] slot 1 to 4

# Change the device model of the switch with stack ID 2 in the AS as1 to
S5720-28X-SI-AC.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name as1
[HUAWEI-um-as-as1] slot 2 replace-model S5720-28X-SI-AC

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng
3.9.14 as name (uni-mng view)

3.9.89 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap command enables the trap
function for the ASMNGTRAP module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap command disables the

trap function for the ASMNGTRAP module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the ASMNGTRAP module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1203

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap [ trap-name trap-name ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap [ trap-name trap-
name ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1204

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parame Description Value
ter

trap- Enables or ● hwasaddofflinenotify: the trap for the event

name disables the trap that an AS is added offline.
function for a ● hwasboardadd: the trap for the event that an
specified event. AS slot is added.
● hwasboarddelete: the trap for the event that
an AS slot is deleted.
● hwasboardplugin: the trap for the event that
a new member joins an AS stack system.
● hwasboardplugout: the trap for the event
that a member leaves an AS stack system.
● hwascomboporttypechange: the trap for the
event that the AS interface type changes.
● hwasdelofflinenotify: the trap for the event
that an AS is deleted offline.
● hwasfaultnotify: the trap for the event that
an AS goes offline.
● hwasfullnotify: the trap for the event that
the number of ASs reaches the maximum
value.
● hwasinblacklist: the trap for the event that
an AS is in the blacklist.
● hwasmodelnotmatchnotify: the trap for the
event that the actual AS model does not
match the configured one.
● hwasnameconflictnotify: the trap for the
event that the AS name conflicts.
● hwasnormalnotify: the trap for the event
that an AS goes online.
● hwasonlinefailnotify: the trap for the event
that an AS fails to go online.
● hwasportstatechangetodownnotify: the trap
for the event that an AS port goes Down.
● hwasportstatechangetoupnotify: the trap
for the event that an AS port goes Up.
● hwasslotidinvalidnotify: the trap for the
event that an AS slot ID is invalid.
● hwasslotmodelnotmatchnotify: the trap for
the event that the model of a new device in
the AS stack system differs from the
configured model.
● hwassysmacswitchcfgerrnotify: the trap for
the event that the MAC address switching

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1205

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parame Description Value

ter

mode of the AS stack system is not set to

non-switching.
● hwasunconfirmed: the trap for the event that
an AS fails authentication.
● hwasversionnotmatchnotify: the trap for the
event that the AS version does not match.
● hwunimngmodelnotmatchnotify: the trap
for the event that an AS has a different SVF
enabling status than the parent.
● hwasslotonlinefailnotify: the trap for the
event that some member switches in a stack
fail to go online when this stack is an AS.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwasaddofflinenotify trap of the ASMNGTRAP module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name asmngtrap trap-name hwasaddofflinenotify

Related Topics
3.9.38 display snmp-agent trap feature-name asmngtrap all

3.9.90 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap command enables the trap
function for the UNIMBRTRAP module.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1206

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap command disables the

trap function for the UNIMBRTRAP module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the UNIMBRTRAP module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap [ trap-name
{ hwasboardfail | hwasboardfailresume | hwasboardinvalid |
hwasboardinvalidresume | hwasbrdtempalarm | hwasbrdtempresume |
hwascommunicateerror | hwascommunicateresume |
hwascpuutilizationresume | hwascpuutilizationrising | hwasfaninsert |
hwasfaninvalid | hwasfaninvalidresume | hwasfanremove |
hwasmadconflictdetect | hwasmadconflictresume |
hwasmemutilizationresume | hwasmemutilizationrising | hwasopticalinvalid |
hwasopticalinvalidresum | hwaspowerinsert | hwaspowerinvalid |
hwaspowerinvalidresum | hwaspowerremove | hwunimbrasdiscoverattack |
hwunimbrconnecterror | hwunimbrfabricportmemberdelete |
hwunimbrillegalfabricconfig | hwunimbrlinkstatechange |
hwunimbrasserviceabnormal } ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap [ trap-name

{ hwasboardfail | hwasboardfailresume | hwasboardinvalid |
hwasboardinvalidresume | hwasbrdtempalarm | hwasbrdtempresume |
hwascommunicateerror | hwascommunicateresume |
hwascpuutilizationresume | hwascpuutilizationrising | hwasfaninsert |
hwasfaninvalid | hwasfaninvalidresume | hwasfanremove |
hwasmadconflictdetect | hwasmadconflictresume |
hwasmemutilizationresume | hwasmemutilizationrising | hwasopticalinvalid |
hwasopticalinvalidresum | hwaspowerinsert | hwaspowerinvalid |
hwaspowerinvalidresum | hwaspowerremove | hwunimbrasdiscoverattack |
hwunimbrconnecterror | hwunimbrfabricportmemberdelete |
hwunimbrillegalfabricconfig | hwunimbrlinkstatechange |
hwunimbrasserviceabnormal } ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

hwasboardfail Enables the trap function -

when an AS becomes
unavailable partially.

hwasboardfailresume Enables the trap function -

when an AS becomes
available.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1207

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

hwasboardinvalid Enables the trap function -

when an AS is invalid.

hwasboardinvalidre- Enables the trap function -

sume when an AS is valid.

hwasbrdtempalarm Enables the trap function -

when the AS
temperature is out of the
normal range.

hwasbrdtempresume Enables the trap function -

when the AS
temperature restores to
the normal range.

hwascommunicateerror Enables the trap function -

when a communication
fault occurs.

hwascommunicatere- Enables the trap function -

sume when a communication
fault is rectified.

hwascpuutilizationre- Enables the trap function -

sume when the AS CPU usage
falls below the threshold.

hwascpuutilizationris- Enables the trap function -

ing when the AS CPU usage
exceeds the threshold.

hwasfaninsert Enables the trap function -

when an AS fan module
is installed.

hwasfaninvalid Enables the trap function -

when an AS fan module
becomes unavailable
completely.

hwasfaninvalidresume Enables the trap function -

when an AS fan module
becomes available.

hwasfanremove Enables the trap function -

when an AS fan module
is removed.

hwasmadconflictdetect Enables the trap function -

when a MAD conflict is
detected.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1208

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

hwasmadconflictre- Enables the trap function -

sume when a MAD conflict is
resolved.

hwasmemutilizationre- Enables the trap function -

sume when the AS memory
usage restores to the
normal range.

hwasmemutilizationris- Enables the trap function -

ing when the AS memory
usage exceeds the
threshold.

hwasopticalinvalid Enables the trap function -

when the AS optical
module is invalid.

hwasopticalinvalidre- Enables the trap function -

sum when the AS optical
module is valid.

hwaspowerinsert Enables the trap function -

when an AS power
module is installed.

hwaspowerinvalid Enables the trap function -

when an AS power
module is invalid.

hwaspowerinvalidre- Enables the trap function -

sum when an AS power
module is valid.

hwaspowerremove Enables the trap function -

when an AS power
module is removed.

hwunimbrasdiscoverat- Enables the trap function -

tack when an AS discovers
attacks.

hwunimbrconnecterror Enables the trap function -

when cable connection
of a fabric port is
incorrect.

hwunimbrfabricport- Enables the trap function -

memberdelete when a member port of
a fabric port is removed.

hwunimbrillegalfabric- Enables the trap function -

config when the fabric port
configuration is invalid.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1209

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

hwunimbrlinkstate- Enables the trap function -

change when the connection
status changes.

hwunimbrasserviceab- Enables the trap function -

normal when services on an AS
become abnormal.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwasboardfail trap of the UNIMBRTRAP module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name unimbrtrap trap-name hwasboardfail

Related Topics
3.9.39 display snmp-agent trap feature-name unimbrtrap all

3.9.91 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng command enables the trap
function for the UNI-TOPOMNG module.
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng command disables
the trap function for the UNI-TOPOMNG module.
By default, the trap function is enabled for the UNI-TOPOMNG module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1210

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng [ trap-name
{ hwtopomnglinkabnormal | hwtopomnglinknormal } ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng [ trap-name
{ hwtopomnglinkabnormal | hwtopomnglinknormal } ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

hwtopomnglinkabnor- Enables the trap function -

mal when a connection fault
occurs.

hwtopomnglinknormal Enables the trap function -

when the connection
status becomes normal.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwtopomnglinkabnormal trap of the UNI-TOPOMNG module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-topomng trap-name hwtopomnglinkabnormal

Related Topics
3.9.40 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-topomng all

3.9.92 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1211

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm command enables the trap
function for the UNI-TPLM module.

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm command disables the

trap function for the UNI-TPLM module.

By default, the trap function is enabled for the UNI-TPLM module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm [ trap-name
{ hwtplmcmdexecutefailednotify | hwtplmcmdexecutesuccessfulnotify |
hwtplmdirectcmdrecoverfail } ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm [ trap-name

{ hwtplmcmdexecutefailednotify | hwtplmcmdexecutesuccessfulnotify |
hwtplmdirectcmdrecoverfail } ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

hwtplmcmdexecutefai- Enables the trap function -

lednotify when the command fails
to be executed on the
AS.

hwtplmcmdexecutesuc- Enables the trap function -

cessfulnotify when the command is
executed successfully on
the AS.

hwtplmdirectcmdreco- Enables the trap function -

verfail when configurations of
the commands directly
configured on the parent
for the AS fail to be
restored.

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1212

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwtplmcmdexecutefailednotify trap of the UNI-TPLM module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-tplm trap-name hwtplmcmdexecutefailednotify

Related Topics
3.9.41 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-tplm all

3.9.93 snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng

Function
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng command enables the trap
function for the UNI-VERMNG module.
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng command disables the
trap function for the UNI-VERMNG module.
By default, the trap function is enabled for the UNI-VERMNG module.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng [ trap-name
hwvermngupgradefail ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng [ trap-name
hwvermngupgradefail ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trap-name Enables or disables the -

trap function for the
specified event.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1213

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

hwvermngupgradefail Enables the trap function -

when an AS fails to be
upgraded.

Views
System view

Default Level
2: Configuration level

Usage Guidelines
When the trap function is enabled, the device generates traps during running and
sends traps to the NMS through SNMP. When the trap function is not enabled, the
device does not generate traps and the SNMP module does not send traps to the
NMS.
You can specify trap-name to enable the trap function for one or more events.

Example
# Enable the hwvermngupgradefail trap of the UNI-VERMNG module.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] snmp-agent trap enable feature-name uni-vermng trap-name hwvermngupgradefail

Related Topics
3.9.42 display snmp-agent trap feature-name uni-vermng all

3.9.94 traffic-limit inbound (user access profile view)

Function
The traffic-limit inbound command configures the rate limit for incoming ARP
and DHCP packets on an AS port.
The undo traffic-limit inbound command restores the default rate limit for
incoming ARP and DHCP packets on an AS port.
By default, the forwarding rate of incoming ARP and DHCP packets on an AS port
is not limited.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
traffic-limit inbound { arp | dhcp } cir cir-value

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1214

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo traffic-limit inbound { arp | dhcp }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
arp Specifies the ARP packet. -
dhcp Specifies the DHCP packet. -
cir cir-value Specifies the committed information The value is an integer
rate (CIR), which is the allowed average that ranges from 8 to
rate of traffic that can pass through. 128, in kbit/s.

Views
User access profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After a user access profile is created, you can configure the rate limit for incoming
ARP and DHCP packets on an AS port. After the user access profile is bound to the
AS port, the following configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
traffic-limit inbound acl 4999 cir cir-value pir pir-value cbs cbs-value pbs pbs-value
traffic-statistic inbound acl 4999
traffic-limit inbound acl 3999 cir cir-value pir pir-value cbs cbs-value pbs pbs-value
traffic-statistic inbound acl 3999
#

Precautions
● This command and the authentication command cannot be both run in the
user access profile view.
● Do not run the traffic-limit inbound dhcp and dhcp snooping enable
(network enhanced profile view) commands simultaneously on the same
port; otherwise, the traffic-limit inbound dhcp command does not take
effect. On an AS of the S2720EI, S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI, S5720S-LI,
S5720LI, S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5710-X-LI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-
LI, S6720SI, S6720S-SI, or S600-E model, running the dhcp snooping enable
(network enhanced profile view) command on any port may cause the
traffic-limit inbound dhcp command unable to take effect on all ports. You
are advised to shut down the attacked port after detecting DoS attacks.
● Do not run the traffic-limit inbound arp and arp anti-attack check user-
bind enable (network enhanced profile view) commands simultaneously
on the same port. Otherwise, the traffic-limit inbound arp command may
not take effect. On an AS of the S2720EI, S2750EI, S5700LI, S5700S-LI,
S5720S-LI, S5720LI, S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5710-X-LI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI,
S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI, S6720S-SI, or S600-E model, running the arp

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1215

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

anti-attack check user-bind enable (network enhanced profile view)

command on any port may cause the traffic-limit inbound arp command
unable to take effect on all ports. You are advised to shut down the attacked
port after detecting DoS attacks.

Example
# Set the rate limit for incoming ARP packets to 64 on an AS port.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] user-access-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-user-access-profile_1] traffic-limit inbound arp cir 64

Related Topics
3.9.108 user-access-profile name

3.9.95 traffic-limit outbound (AS administrator profile view)

Function
The traffic-limit outbound command configures the rate limit for outgoing ARP
and DHCP packets on an AS uplink fabric port.
The undo traffic-limit outbound command restores the default rate limit for
outgoing ARP and DHCP packets on an AS uplink fabric port.
By default, the rate limits for outgoing ARP packets and DHCP packets are 32
kbit/s and 128 kbit/s respectively on an AS uplink fabric port.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
traffic-limit outbound { arp | dhcp } cir cir-value
undo traffic-limit outbound { arp | dhcp }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
arp Specifies the ARP packet. -
dhcp Specifies the DHCP packet. -
cir cir-value Specifies the committed information The value is an integer
rate (CIR), which is the allowed average that ranges from 8 to
rate of traffic that can pass through. 512, in kbit/s.

Views
AS administrator profile view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1216

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After an AS administrator profile is created, you can configure the rate limit for
outgoing ARP and DHCP packets on an AS uplink fabric port. After the AS goes
online, the following configuration is generated in the AS Eth-Trunk 0 view and
system view, regardless of whether the AS administrator profile is bound to the
AS:
#
acl number 3999
rule 5 permit udp destination-port eq bootps
#
acl number 4998
rule 5 permit vlan-id management-vlan
acl number 4999
rule 5 permit l2-protocol arp destination-mac ffff-ffff-ffff
rule 10 permit l2-protocol arp
#
interface Eth-Trunk0
traffic-filter outbound acl 4998
traffic-statistic outbound acl 3999
traffic-limit outbound acl 3999 cir cir-value pir pir-value cbs cbs-value pbs pbs-value
traffic-statistic outbound acl 4999
traffic-limit outbound acl 4999 cir cir-value pir pir-value cbs cbs-value pbs pbs-value
#

Example
# Set the rate limit for outgoing ARP packets to 64 on an uplink fabric port.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-admin-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-admin-profile_1] traffic-limit outbound arp cir 64

Related Topics
3.9.4 as-admin-profile name

3.9.96 topology explore

Function
The topology explore command triggers SVF network topology collection
immediately.
The topology explore interval command sets the interval for collecting SVF
network topology information.
The undo topology explore interval command restores the default interval for
collecting SVF network topology information.
By default, the interval for collecting SVF network topology information is 10
minutes.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1217

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
topology explore [ interval interval ]

undo topology explore interval

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

interval Specifies the interval for The value is an integer that ranges from 0
collecting SVF network to 1440, in minutes.
topology information.
The value 0 indicates that SVF network
topology information is not automatically
collected.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can adjust the interval for collecting SVF network topology information based
on SVF network stability. When the network topology is stable, you can increase
the interval or disable periodic topology information collection. When the network
topology is unstable, you can shorten the interval.

You can also run the topology explore command to trigger SVF network topology
collection immediately.

Example
# Set the SVF network topology collection interval to 30 minutes.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] topology explore interval 30

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1218

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.97 undo uni-mng enable

Function
The undo uni-mng enable command changes an AS from the client mode to the
standalone mode.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS. After this command is executed, the AS restarts.

Format
undo uni-mng enable

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the undo uni-mng enable command to change an AS from the client
mode to the standalone mode.

Example
# Change an AS from the client mode to the standalone mode.
<HUAWEI> undo uni-mng enable

3.9.98 uni eth-trunk

Function
The uni eth-trunk command creates an Eth-Trunk interface for an AS.
The undo uni eth-trunk command deletes an Eth-Trunk interface of an AS.
By default, no Eth-Trunk interface is created on an AS.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on the parent.

Format
uni eth-trunk trunk-id [ mode lacp ]

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1219

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

undo uni eth-trunk trunk-id [ mode lacp ]

Parameters
Parameter Description Value

trunk-id Specifies the ID of an The value is an integer

Eth-Trunk interface. and the minimum value
is 1. The maximum value
varies according to the
switch model. For a
specific switch model,
the maximum value is
the same as that
described in interface
eth-trunk.

mode lacp Sets the working mode -

of an Eth-Trunk interface
to LACP mode.
If this parameter is not
specified, the working
mode of an Eth-Trunk
interface is manual
mode.

Views
AS view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When an AP with two network interfaces connects to an SVF system through an

AS or to improve access user bandwidth and reliability, you can create an Eth-
Trunk interface for this AS.

Precautions

● An Eth-Trunk interface can be created for an AS only when this AS is in

centralized mode.
● When an AS works in independent mode and its Eth-Trunk interface needs to
be deleted, you need to run the undo uni eth-trunk trunk-id command in the
AS view of the parent and log in to this AS to delete this Eth-Trunk interface.
● To delete an Eth-Trunk interface, ensure that it does not contain member
interfaces.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1220

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● The Eth-Trunk interface of an AS and Eth-Trunk interfaces bound to fabric

ports share the Eth-Trunk interface specifications.
● An Eth-Trunk interface contains a maximum of eight member interfaces.
● An Eth-Trunk interface cannot be created across ASs.

Follow-up Procedure

Run the port eth-trunk trunkmember command to add member interfaces to

the Eth-Trunk interface.

Example
# Create Eth-Trunk 2 in LACP mode for the AS test.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as name test
[HUAWEI-um-as-test] uni eth-trunk 2 mode lacp

Related Topics
3.9.13 as name interface (port group view)
3.9.47 display uni-mng as interface eth-trunk
3.9.55 display uni-mng port-group

3.9.99 uni-mng

Function
The uni-mng command enables SVF or displays the uni-mng view.

The undo uni-mng command disables SVF.

By default, SVF is disabled.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
uni-mng

undo uni-mng

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1221

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When SVF is disabled, the uni-mng command enables SVF and displays the uni-
mng view. When SVF has been enabled, this command displays the uni-mng view.

Prerequisites

● A source interface used to set up a CAPWAP link has been specified using the
capwap source interface vlanif vlan-id command.
● The STP working mode must be STP or RSTP. If the current working mode is
not STP or RSTP, run the stp mode { rstp | stp } command to set the STP
working mode to STP or RSTP before enabling SVF. By default, the STP
working mode is MSTP. You can run the display stp command to check the
current STP working mode.
● The default STP/RSTP port path cost algorithm must be used. If the current
port path cost algorithm is not the default one, run the undo stp pathcost-
standard command to restore the default port path cost algorithm before
enabling SVF. The default STP/RSTP port path cost algorithm is IEEE 802.1t
(dot1t). You can run the display stp command to check the current port path
cost algorithm.
● The default Eth-Trunk specifications are used. If the current Eth-Trunk
specifications are not the default value on S6720EI or S6720S-EI, run the
undo assign trunk command to restore the default Eth-Trunk specifications
before enabling SVF. You can run the display trunk configuration command
to check the default and configured Eth-Trunk specifications.
● The NAC configuration mode must be the unified mode. If the current mode
is not the unified mode, run the authentication unified-mode command to
set the NAC configuration mode to unified mode. The default NAC
configuration mode is unified mode. You can run the display authentication
mode command to check the current NAC configuration mode.
● Remote authorization is not configured in the system. If remote authorization
has been configured, run the undo remote-authorize command to disable
remote authorization before enabling SVF. By default, remote authorization is
not configured in the system. You can run the display current-configuration
command to check whether remote authorization is configured.

Precautions

When SVF is disabled on the parent, the STP priorities of ports change, and STP
recalculates the port role and changes the interface status.

After SVF is enabled on a switch used as the parent, the stack timer mac-address
switch-delay value changes to 0 (not changing system MAC address) and cannot
be changed. After SVF is disabled on this switch, this delay time is still 0, but you
can manually change it.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1222

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Enable SVF (default Eth-Trunk specifications and default NAC configuration
mode).
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] vlan batch 11
[HUAWEI] interface Vlanif 11
[HUAWEI-Vlanif11] ip address 192.168.11.1 24
[HUAWEI-Vlanif11] quit
[HUAWEI] capwap source interface vlanif 11
[HUAWEI] stp mode stp
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
Warning: This operation will switch to the uni-mng system and disconnect all online ASs. Continue? [Y/N]:y

Related Topics
13.4.38 authentication unified-mode
11.1.67 capwap source interface
5.12.47 stp mode (system view)
5.12.49 stp pathcost-standard

3.9.100 uni-mng indirect fabric-port

Function
The uni-mng indirect fabric-port command configures a member port for an
uplink fabric port that connects an AS to the parent through a network.

The undo uni-mng indirect fabric-port command deletes a member port of an

uplink fabric port that connects an AS to the parent through a network.

By default, no member port is configured for an uplink fabric port that connects
an AS to the parent through a network.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
uni-mng indirect fabric-port member interface interface-type interface-number

undo uni-mng indirect fabric-port member interface interface-type interface-

number

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

member interface interface- Specifies the type and number of -
type interface-number member ports of a fabric port.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1223

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

When an AS connects to the parent through a network, you must run the uni-
mng indirect fabric-port command to configure a member port for an uplink
fabric port of the AS. You can run this command multiple times to add multiple
member ports to the fabric port.

Prerequisites

The 3.9.101 uni-mng indirect mng-vlan command has been executed to

configure the device to work in client mode and configure a management VLAN.

Precautions

● Only AS uplink ports or subcard ports can be added to an uplink fabric port. If
you have to add AS downlink ports to uplink fabric ports, run the uni-mng
up-direction fabric-port member interface interface-type interface-number
[ to interface-number ] command.
● A maximum of eight member ports can be added to a fabric port.
● Ports used to set up a stack cannot be configured as member ports of a fabric
port.
● The command that configures the stack ID is mutually exclusive with the
command that configures a member port for a fabric port:
– After the stack slot slot-id renumber new-slot-id command is executed
in a specified slot, the port in the slot cannot be configured as a member
port of a fabric port.
– After a port in a slot is configured as a member port of a fabric port, the
stack ID of the slot cannot be configured using the stack slot slot-id
renumber new-slot-id command.
● You need to configure a member port of a fabric port according to the
network configuration. A member port needs to be reconfigured if the stack
ID changes because the stack changes, for example, the stacking function is
disabled, or existing stack IDs conflict after member devices are added to the
stack.

Example
# Configure member ports for an uplink fabric port that connects an AS to the
parent through a network.
<HUAWEI> uni-mng indirect fabric-port member interface gigabitethernet 0/0/27
<HUAWEI> uni-mng indirect fabric-port member interface gigabitethernet 0/0/28

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1224

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.101 uni-mng indirect mng-vlan

Function
The uni-mng indirect mng-vlan command configures a device to work in client
mode and configures a management VLAN.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
uni-mng indirect mng-vlan vlan-id

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
vlan-id Specifies a management VLAN. The value is an integer that
The VLAN must be consistent ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN
with the management VLAN cannot be the reserved VLAN
configured on a parent. (VLAN 4093) of a stack.

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When an AS connects to the parent through a network, you must run the uni-
mng indirect mng-vlan command to configure the AS to work in client mode and
configures a management VLAN.
Precautions
● The VCMP role switching command is mutually exclusive with the command
that configures a device to work in client mode. If the current device is not a
silent switch in a VCMP domain, the device cannot be configured to work in
client mode. You must run the vcmp role silent command in the system view
to set the VCMP role of the device to silent. After a device is configured to
work in client mode, the VCMP role switching command cannot be executed.
That is, the device cannot change from the silent role to another role.
● After running the uni-mng indirect mng-vlan vlan-id command on the
device in standalone mode, you must delete the configuration file of the
device and restart the device to make the configuration take effect.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1225

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● If the device has been configured to work in client mode but has not gone
online, you can run the uni-mng indirect mng-vlan vlan-id command
multiple times to change the management VLAN, and the configuration takes
effect immediately.
● If the device has been configured to work in client mode and has gone online,
the uni-mng indirect mng-vlan vlan-id command cannot be executed.
● When an AS is an S5700-10P-LI, S5700-10P-PWR-LI-AC, or S2750EI and Layer
3 hardware forwarding for IPv4 packets has been enabled using the assign
forward-mode ipv4-hardware command in the system view, the
management VLAN cannot be configured. To solve this problem, start the AS
in standalone mode and run the undo assign forward-mode command in
the system view to disable Layer 3 hardware forwarding for IPv4 packets.
● On the S5720SI, S5720S-SI, S5730SI, S5730S-EI, S6720LI, S6720S-LI, S6720SI,
S6720S-SI, S600-E, the electrical port stack configuration on the front panel is
mutually exclusive with the client mode configuration. If electrical ports on
the front panel have been configured as stack physical member ports, no
management VLAN cannot be configured. If a management VLAN has been
configured, electrical ports on the front panel cannot be configured as stack
physical member ports.
● If an AS is configured in the independent mode, its management VLAN
cannot be configured using this command.

Example
# Configure the device to work in client mode and configure a management VLAN
100.
<HUAWEI> uni-mng indirect mng-vlan 100

3.9.102 uni-mng up-direction fabric-port

Function
The uni-mng up-direction fabric-port command configures AS service ports as
an uplink fabric port's members.

The undo uni-mng up-direction fabric-port command cancels the configuration.

By default, AS service ports are not configured as members of uplink fabric ports.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
uni-mng up-direction fabric-port member interface interface-type interface-
number [ to interface-number ]
undo uni-mng up-direction fabric-port member interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-number ]
undo uni-mng up-direction fabric-port member all

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1226

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
member interface Specifies the type and number of an AS service -
interface-type interface- port to be configured as a member of an
number uplink fabric port.

all Specifies all AS service ports. -

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To configure AS service ports as an uplink fabric port's members, run the uni-mng
up-direction fabric-port command.

Precautions

● A maximum of eight interfaces can be configured as a fabric port's members

on an AS.
● Stack ports cannot be configured as members of fabric ports. Similarly, fabric
member ports cannot be configured as stack ports.
● After the uni-mng up-direction fabric-port command is run on an AS, you
must restart the AS to make the configuration take effect. If the AS is a stack,
you need to restart all stack members. If a configuration conflicting with this
command exists on the parent, the AS may fail to go online.
● The command for configuring a stack ID and the command for configuring a
fabric member port are mutually exclusive. Specifically:
– If you have run the stack slot slot-id renumber new-slot-id command in
a slot, you are not allowed to configure the service port of this slot as a
member of an uplink fabric port.
– If you have configured a service port of a slot as a member of an uplink
fabric port, you are not allowed to run the stack slot slot-id renumber
new-slot-id command to configure a stack ID in this slot.
● When configuring a service port as a member of a fabric port, pay attention
to the stacking configuration. A member port needs to be reconfigured if
stack IDs change because the stack changes, for example, the stacking
function is disabled, or existing stack IDs conflict after member switches are
added to the stack.
● If a downlink service interface of an AS is incorrectly configured as a stack
port, other interfaces on the AS cannot be configured as uplink interfaces. In

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1227

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

this case, delete the stack port configuration from the downlink service
interface.

Example
# Configure an AS service port as a member of an uplink fabric port.
<HUAWEI> uni-mng up-direction fabric-port member interface gigabitethernet 0/0/3
Warning: After a service port on an AS is configured as an uplink port, the AS needs to be restarted to
make the configuration take effect.
If the parent has a configuration conflict with the AS, the AS may fail to go online. Continue? [Y/N]:y

3.9.103 unicast-suppression (network enhanced profile view)

Function
The unicast-suppression command configures unknown unicast traffic
suppression in a network enhanced profile.
The undo unicast-suppression command cancels unknown unicast traffic
suppression in a network enhanced profile.
By default, unknown unicast traffic suppression is not configured in a network
enhanced profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
unicast-suppression packets packets-per-second
undo unicast-suppression

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
packets Specifies the The value is an integer that ranges from 0
packets-per- packet rate of an to 14881000, in packets per second (PPS).
second interface.
If the configured packet rate on the parent
switch is larger than the maximum value
on the AS port, the maximum value takes
effect on the AS port.

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1228

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure unknown unicast
traffic suppression in the profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, unknown
unicast traffic suppression is automatically configured on the port. The following
configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
unicast-suppression packets packets-per-second
#

To prevent broadcast storms, you can run the unicast-suppression command to

configure the maximum number of unknown unicast packets that can pass
through a port. When the unknown unicast traffic rate reaches the rate limit, the
system discards excess unknown unicast packets to control the traffic volume
within a proper range.

Example
# Configure unknown unicast traffic suppression in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] unicast-suppression packets 148810

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.104 upgrade as
Function
The upgrade as name command upgrades an AS with a specified name.
The upgrade as name-include command upgrades ASs of which the name
contains a specified string.
The upgrade as type command upgrades ASs of a specified type.
The upgrade as all command upgrades all ASs.
undo upgrade as command rolls back ASs to the previous version.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
upgrade as name as-name [ reload [ in time ] ]
upgrade as name-include string [ reload [ in time ] ]
upgrade as type as-type [ reload [ in time ] ]
upgrade as all [ reload [ in time ] ]
undo upgrade as { all | name as-name | name-include string | type as-type }

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1229

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
as-name Upgrades an AS with a specified The value must have an existing
name. AS name.

string Upgrades all the ASs of which The value is a string of 1 to 31

the name contains a specified case-insensitive characters
string. without spaces.

as-type Upgrades ASs of a specified type. The value is an enumerated type.

You can enter a question mark
(?) and select a value from the
displayed value range.

reload Configures an AS to restart after -

upgrade files are downloaded.

in time Specifies the AS restart time. The value is a string of characters

in the HH:MM format, where
If reload is specified but time is HH:MM indicates the hour and
not specified, an AS restarts minute. HH ranges from 0 to 23,
immediately after loading files. If and MM ranges from 0 to 59.
time is specified, the AS restarts
at the specified time.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

You can run the upgrade as command to upgrade online ASs. You can upgrade
one AS, ASs of a specified type, or all ASs.

After performing upgrade configuration on an AS, the patch and system software
files for the next startup will be the specified ones. You can run the undo upgrade
as command to cancel the configuration as long as the AS is not restarted. After
this command is executed, the patch and system software files for the next startup
are consistent with the currently running ones. If the patch has taken effect after
upgrade configuration is performed, the patch cannot be rolled back to the
previous version.

Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1230

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● The patch and system software files used to upgrade ASs are specified in the
as type command.
● The system software file name or patch file name specified using the as type
command cannot be the same as the current or next startup system software
file or patch file of an AS. Otherwise, the AS cannot be upgraded using the
upgrade as command.
● When you upgrade an AS using the upgrade as command without specifying
reload:
– If you specify patch patch but not system-software system-software in
the as type command, the patch file is activated online immediately.
– If you specify both patch patch and system-software system-software in
the as type command and the specified system software file version is
the version running on the AS, the patch file is activated online
immediately.
– If you specify both patchpatch and system-softwaresystem-software in
the as type command and the specified system software file version is
earlier or later than the version running on the AS, the specified system
software file and patch file will be set as next startup files.

Example
# Perform an in-service upgrade on an AS of the S5700-P-LI type.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] upgrade as type s5700-p-li reload

Related Topics
3.9.99 uni-mng

3.9.105 upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server }

Function
The upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server } command configures a local
file server.

The undo upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server } command deletes a

local file server.

By default, no local file server is configured.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server } username username password
password
undo upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server }

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1231

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
local-ftp- Specifies the file -
server server type as FTP
server.

local-sftp- Specifies the file -

server server type as SFTP
server.

username Specifies the user The value is a string of 1 to 64 case-

username name for accessing insensitive characters. It cannot contain
the file server. spaces, asterisk, double quotation mark and
question mark.

password Specifies the The value is a string of case-sensitive

password password for characters without spaces. By default, the
accessing the file value is a string of 8 to 128 characters or
server. 48 to 188 characters. You can enter a
password in plain text or cipher text. The
password is displayed in cipher text in the
configuration file regardless of whether the
password is input in plain or cipher text.
● The password in plain text is a string of
8 to 128 characters.
● The password in cipher text is a string of
48 to 188 characters. The password in
cipher text cannot be generated using
the irreversible algorithm.
The newly configured password cannot be
the default password of local users.The
default username and password are
available in S Series Switches Default
Usernames and Passwords (Enterprise
Network or Carrier). If you have not
obtained the access permission of the
document, see Help on the website to find
out how to obtain it.

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1232

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In an AS automatic upgrade or in-service AS batch upgrade, you need to
download the version file or patch file from the parent. Before the upgrade, you
need to configure the parent as an FTP/SFTP server. The AS then can work as a
client to download files from the FTP/SFTP server.
Precautions
● The files used to upgrade an AS are often saved in the root directory unimng/
of the parent. These files can also be saved on an AS when the AS is upgraded
or downgraded to the software version that is consistent with that of the
parent.
● FTP has potential security risks, and so SFTP is recommended. If you want to
use FTP, you are advised to configure ACLs to improve security. For details, see
Configure the FTP ACL in "File Management" in the S1720, S2700, S5700, and
S6720 V200R011C10 Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration.
● When the file server is an FTP server, the FTP service is automatically enabled
and an FTP user is created on the parent, removing the need to perform the
FTP configuration.
● When the file server type is set to SFTP, the SFTP service is not automatically
enabled and no SFTP user is created on the parent. You need to manually pre-
configure SFTP on the parent.
● After the upgrade { local-ftp-server | local-sftp-server } command is
executed, the same user name and password configuration is also generated
in the AAA view. If you modify the configured local user information (the user
password for example) in AAA view, the version management function does
not take effect.
● If information about a user already exists in the AAA view, running this
command to create the same user will change the user password in the AAA
view to the configured password and change the user level to level 3.
Changing the user password is allowed only when the user level of the user
running this command is higher or equal to the user level configured in the
AAA view. Otherwise, the command does not take effect.
● Running this command multiple times to create new users will delete previous
user information. Previous user information can be deleted only when the
user level of the user running this command is higher or equal to the user
level configured in the AAA view. Otherwise, the command does not take
effect.
● If a remote authentication server is used for AAA authentication, the user
name and password configured using this command must also be configured
on the remote authentication server.
● If a remote authentication server is used for AAA authentication and the
remote authentication server does not support FTP or SFTP, ASs will fail to be
authenticated. In this case, run the 13.1.20 authentication-scheme (AAA
view) command in the AAA view to create an authentication scheme and run
the authentication-mode local command in the authentication scheme view
to set the authentication mode to local authentication. Then, run the 13.1.47
domain (AAA view) command in the AAA view to create a domain and run
the 13.1.19 authentication-scheme (AAA domain view) command in the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1233

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

AAA domain view to apply the created authentication scheme to the domain.
ASs can be authenticated when they use the newly created domain for local
authentication.

Example
# Set the local file server type to FTP server.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] upgrade local-ftp-server username test password Pwd@12345

3.9.106 upload config

Function
The upload config command saves the AS configuration to the flash memory of
an AS and uploads the configuration file of the AS to the parent.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on an AS.

Format
upload config

Parameters
None

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
In independent mode, after services are configured on an AS using commands,
you can run the upload config command to save the service configuration and
upload the configuration file to the parent.
Precautions
● After this command is executed, the AS configuration file uploaded to the
parent will be saved to the flash:/unimng/ind-cfg directory or the cfcard:/
unimng/ind-cfg directory on some parent switch models. If the file name
format is unimng-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx.zip (xxxx-xxxx-xxxx indicates the
management MAC address of an AS), and the service configuration mode of
this AS is independent mode, it is not allowed to delete this configuration file.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1234

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

● After the upload config command command is executed, the AS

configuration file may fail to be uploaded to the parent. The possible causes
include insufficient storage space on the parent and a fault of the link
between the AS and parent.
● To prevent services from being affected, it is recommended not to delete the
configuration file saved on the AS.
● The AS configuration file saved on the parent can ensure configuration
integrity for the AS. For example, after an AS goes online again or is replaced,
the AS will compare its saved configuration file with that saved on the parent.
If the two files are inconsistent, the configuration file saved on the parent will
replace the configuration file saved on the AS and take effect after the AS
restarts.

Example
# Save the AS configuration to the flash memory of the AS and upload the
configuration file of the AS to the parent.
<HUAWEI> upload config

3.9.107 user-access-port enable (network enhanced profile

view)
Function
The user-access-port enable command configures the edge port function in a
network enhanced profile.
The undo user-access-port enable command cancels the edge port function in a
network enhanced profile.
By default, the edge port function is not configured in a network enhanced profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
user-access-port enable
undo user-access-port enable

Parameters
None

Views
Network enhanced profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1235

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
After creating a network enhanced profile, you can configure the edge port
function in the profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, the port becomes
an edge port. The following configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
stp edged-port enable
#

Ports connected to a Layer 2 STP network do not need to participate in spanning

tree calculation. If these ports participate in the calculation, the network topology
convergence speed is affected and the status changes of these ports may cause
network flapping. After these ports are configured as edge ports, they do not
participate in spanning tree calculation. This configuration speeds up network
topology convergence and enhances network stability.

Example
# Enable the edge port function in a network enhanced profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-enhanced-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-enhanced-profile_1] user-access-port enable

Related Topics
3.9.74 network-enhanced-profile name

3.9.108 user-access-profile name

Function
The user-access-profile name command creates a user access profile.
The undo user-access-profile name command deletes a user access profile.
By default, no user access profile is configured.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
user-access-profile name profile-name
undo user-access-profile name profile-name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1236

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of a The value is a string of 1 to 31 case-
user access profile. sensitive characters without spaces. The
value can contain letters, digits, and
underscores (_).

Views
uni-mng view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

In a user access profile, you can configure authentication services for user access
(for example, the authentication mode), MAC address learning limiting, and the
rate limit for incoming ARP and DHCP packets on an AS port.

Precautions

You can create a maximum of 16 user access profiles.

Example
# Create a user access profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] user-access-profile name profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.22 authentication-profile (user access profile view)
3.9.70 mac-limit (user access profile view)

3.9.109 user-access-profile (port group view)

Function
The user-access-profile command binds a user access profile to a port group.

The undo user-access-profile command unbinds a user access profile from a port
group.

By default, no user access profile is bound to a port group.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1237

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
user-access-profile profile-name
undo user-access-profile

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
profile-name Specifies the name of a user The value must have an existing
access profile. user access profile name.

Views
Port group view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
You can bind a user access profile to a port group to deliver the configurations in
the profile to all the member ports in the port group.
Prerequisites
The user access profile has been created.
Precautions
● A user access profile can be bound to only an AS port group but not an AP
port group.
● A port group can be bound to only one user access profile.

Example
# Bind a user access profile to a port group.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] user-access-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-user-access-profile_1] quit
[HUAWEI-um] port-group name group_1
[HUAWEI-um-portgroup-group_1] user-access-profile profile_1

Related Topics
3.9.108 user-access-profile name

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1238

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.9.80 port-group name

3.9.110 user-vlan (network basic profile view)

Function
The user-vlan command configures the default VLAN in a network basic profile.
The undo user-vlan command deletes the default VLAN in a network basic
profile.
By default, no default VLAN is configured in a network basic profile, and downlink
ports of an AS use VLAN 1 as the default VLAN.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
user-vlan vlan-id
undo user-vlan

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
vlan-id Specifies a VLAN The value is an integer that ranges from 1 to
ID. 4094.
The value cannot be the ID of an SVF
management VLAN, a stack management VLAN,
an ERPS control VLAN, an RRPP control VLAN, an
SEP control VLAN, or a super VLAN.

Views
Network basic profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a network basic profile, you can configure the default VLAN in the
profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, the default VLAN is automatically
configured on the port. The following configuration is generated on the AS port:
#
port link-type hybrid
port hybrid pvid vlan vlan-id

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1239

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

port hybrid tagged vlan 1

port hybrid untagged vlan vlan-id
#

The user-vlan command can only configure the default VLAN for a port. To
enable this port to allow packets of multiple VLANs to pass through, run the pass-
vlan command in a network basic profile.

Precautions

The default VLAN, allowed VLANs, and voice VLAN in a network basic profile must
be different.

Example
# Configure the default VLAN in a network basic profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-basic-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-basic-profile_1] user-vlan 10

Related Topics
3.9.72 network-basic-profile name

3.9.111 user password (AS administrator profile view)

Function
The user password command configures an AS administrator in an AS
administrator profile.

The undo user command deletes an AS administrator in an AS administrator

profile.

By default, no AS administrator is configured in an AS administrator profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
user user-name password password

undo user user-name

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
user-name Specifies a The value is a string of 1 to 64 case-insensitive
user name. characters. It cannot contain spaces, asterisk, double
quotation mark and question mark.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1240

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameter Description Value

password Specifies the The value is a string of case-sensitive characters
password. without spaces. By default, the value is a string of 8
to 128 characters or 48 to 188 characters. You can
enter a password in plain text or cipher text. The
password is displayed in cipher text in the
configuration file regardless of whether the
password is input in plain or cipher text.
● The password in plain text is a string of 8 to 128
characters.
● The password in cipher text is a string of 48 to
188 characters. The password in cipher text
cannot be generated using the irreversible
algorithm.
The newly configured password cannot be the
default password of local users.The default
username and password are available in S Series
Switches Default Usernames and Passwords
(Enterprise Network or Carrier). If you have not
obtained the access permission of the document,
see Help on the website to find out how to obtain
it.

Views
AS administrator profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating an AS administrator profile, you can configure an AS administrator
in the profile, including the user name and password. After the profile is bound to
an AS, the user name and password for login are automatically configured on the
AS. The following configuration is generated on the AS:
#
aaa
local-user user-name password irreversible-cipher password
local-user user-name privilege level 3
local-user user-name service-type terminal ssh
#

After an AS user name and password are configured, you need to enter the correct
user name and password when logging in to an AS through the console port.
When you log in to an AS from the parent using the attach as name as-name
command, you can log in to the AS without entering the user name or password.
Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1241

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

When no AS user name and password are configured, you need to enter the
default user name and password when logging in to an AS through the console
port.
The default username and password are available in S Series Switches Default
Usernames and Passwords (Enterprise Network or Carrier). If you have not
obtained the access permission of the document, see Help on the website to find
out how to obtain it.

NOTE

The default password has security risks. You are advised to change the login password.

Example
# Configure the user name and password for an AS administrator.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] as-admin-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-as-admin-profile_1] user test password Pwd@123456

Related Topics
3.9.4 as-admin-profile name

3.9.112 voice-vlan (network basic profile view)

Function
The voice-vlan command configures a voice VLAN in a network basic profile.
The undo voice-vlan command deletes the voice VLAN in a network basic profile.
By default, no voice VLAN is configured in a network basic profile.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
voice-vlan vlan-id [ include-untagged ]
undo voice-vlan

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1242

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
vlan-id Specifies a VLAN ID. The value is an integer that ranges from 2
to 4094.
The value cannot be the ID of an SVF
management VLAN, a stack management
VLAN, an ERPS control VLAN, an RRPP
control VLAN, an SEP control VLAN, or a
super VLAN.

include- Adds voice VLAN IDs -

untagged to untagged packets.

Views
Network basic profile view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After creating a network basic profile, you can configure a voice VLAN in the
profile. After the profile is bound to an AS port, the voice VLAN is automatically
configured on the port. The following configuration is generated on the AS port:
● The include-untagged parameter is not specified:
#
port link-type hybrid
port hybrid tagged vlan vlan-id
lldp tlv-enable med-tlv network-policy voice-vlan vlan vlan-id
lldp compliance cdp txrx
#

● The include-untagged parameter is specified (S5720EI, S6720EI, and S6720S-

EI):
#
port link-type hybrid
port hybrid untagged vlan vlan-id
voice-vlan vlan-id enable include-untagged include-tag0
undo lldp tlv-enable med-tlv network-policy
#

● The include-untagged parameter is specified (except S5720EI, S6720EI, and

S6720S-EI):
#
port link-type hybrid
port hybrid untagged vlan vlan-id
voice-vlan vlan-id enable include-untagged
undo lldp tlv-enable med-tlv network-policy
#

Precautions

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1243

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

The default VLAN, allowed VLANs, and voice VLAN in a network basic profile must
be different.

When configuring a voice VLAN on an AS port, ensure that IP phones connected

to the AS port support LLDP and have LLDP enabled.

Example
# Configure a voice VLAN in a network basic profile.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] uni-mng
[HUAWEI-um] network-basic-profile name profile_1
[HUAWEI-um-net-basic-profile_1] voice-vlan 10

Related Topics
3.9.72 network-basic-profile name

3.9.113 whitelist mac-address

Function
The whitelist mac-address command adds a specified MAC address to the
whitelist.

The undo whitelist mac-address command deletes a MAC address from the
whitelist.

By default, no MAC address is added to the whitelist. A maximum of 512 MAC

addresses can be added to the whitelist.

NOTE

This command can only be executed on a parent switch.

Format
whitelist mac-address mac-address1 [ to mac-address2 ]

undo whitelist mac-address { mac-address1 [ to mac-address2 ] | all }

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
mac-address1 [ to Specifies MAC addresses The value is in H-H-H format,
mac-address2 ] to be added to a where H is a hexadecimal number
whitelist. of 1 to 4 digits. The value cannot
be all 0s, all Fs, or a multicast
MAC address.

all Deletes all the MAC -

addresses in a whitelist.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1244

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
AS authentication view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
When an SVF system needs to authenticate an AS, the SVF system allows the AS
to connect to if the MAC address of the AS is in the whitelist and disallows the AS
to connect to if the MAC address is in the blacklist.
Precautions
● A MAC address cannot exist in both the whitelist and blacklist.
● By default, if the MAC address of an AS is neither in the whitelist nor in the
blacklist, the AS fails the authentication. You can run the confirm { all | mac-
address mac-address } command to allow all ASs or a specified AS to pass
the authentication.

Example
# Add the MAC address 0025-9e07-8280 to the whitelist.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] as-auth
[HUAWEI-as-auth] whitelist mac-address 0025-9e07-8280

Related Topics
3.9.5 as-auth

3.10 Cloud-based Management Configuration

Commands
3.10.1 Command Support
3.10.2 cloud-mng controller ip-address
3.10.3 cloud-mng controller url
3.10.4 cloud-mng management-vlan
3.10.5 cloud-mng redirected-controller ip-address
3.10.6 display cloud-mng connect-attribute
3.10.7 display cloud-mng configuration
3.10.8 display cloud-mng register-fail-record
3.10.9 display cloud-mng register-status
3.10.10 display linux network status

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1245

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.10.11 display work-mode

3.10.12 work-mode cloud-mng
3.10.13 reset cloud-mng db-configuration
3.10.14 reset cloud-mng register-fail-record

3.10.1 Command Support

Cloud-based management can be configured only on the S5720LI, S5720S-LI,
S5720SI, and S5720S-SI.

3.10.2 cloud-mng controller ip-address

Function
The cloud-mng controller ip-address command configures an IP address for the
cloud management platform.

The undo cloud-mng controller ip-address command deletes the IP address

configured for the cloud management platform.

By default, no IP address is configured for the cloud management platform.

Format
cloud-mng controller ip-address ip-address port port-number

undo cloud-mng controller ip-address

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
ip-address Specifies an IP address for the The value is in dotted decimal
cloud management platform. notation.
port-number Specifies a port number. The value is an integer that
ranges from 0 to 65535.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1246

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the switch is changed to the cloud-based management mode, it needs to

register with the cloud management platform for authentication. Before
registration authentication, the switch needs to obtain the cloud management
platform's IP address. The switch can obtain the IP address using DHCP, the
registration query center, or the cloud-mng controller ip-address command.

Precautions

● If the switch is configured to obtain the cloud management platform's IP

address using DHCP, the registration query center, and commands, the three
methods are used in descending order of priority: DHCP, commands, and the
registration query center.
● If you run this command multiple times, only the latest configuration takes
effect.
● When both the cloud-mng controller ip-address and cloud-mng controller
url commands are configured on the switch, only the latest configured one
takes effect. That is, the switch registers with the cloud management platform
using either the cloud management platform's IP address or URL-resolved IP
address.
● The configuration of this command is saved in the flash memory and
therefore cannot be cleared by running the reset cloud-mng db-
configuration command. To clear the configuration of this command, run the
undo cloud-mng controller ip-address command.

Example
# Configure an IP address for the cloud management platform.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] cloud-mng controller ip-address 10.1.1.1 port 10020

3.10.3 cloud-mng controller url

Function
The cloud-mng controller url command configures a URL for the cloud
management platform.

The undo cloud-mng controller url command deletes the URL configured for the
cloud management platform.

By default, no URL is configured for the cloud management platform.

Format
cloud-mng controller url url-string port port-number

undo cloud-mng controller url

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1247

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
url-string Specifies a URL for the The value is a string of 3 to 128 case-
cloud management sensitive characters. If you need to set
platform. one or more consecutive spaces, enclose
the spaces in double quotation marks (").
port-number Specifies a port The value is an integer that ranges from 0
number. to 65535.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the switch is changed to the cloud-based management mode, it needs to
register with the cloud management platform for authentication. Before
registration authentication, the switch needs to obtain the cloud management
platform's IP address. The switch can obtain the IP address using DHCP or the
registration query center or obtain the IP address resolved from the URL
configured using the cloud-mng controller url command.
Precautions
● If the switch is configured to obtain the cloud management platform's URL
using DHCP, the registration query center, and commands, the three methods
are used in descending order of priority: DHCP, commands, and the
registration query center.
● If you run this command multiple times, only the latest configuration takes
effect.
● When both the cloud-mng controller ip-address and cloud-mng controller
url commands are configured on the switch, only the latest configured one
takes effect. That is, the switch registers with the cloud management platform
using either the cloud management platform's IP address or URL-resolved IP
address.
● The configuration of this command is saved in the flash memory and
therefore cannot be cleared by running the reset cloud-mng db-
configuration command. To clear the configuration of this command, run the
undo cloud-mng controller url command.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1248

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Example
# Configure a URL for the cloud management platform.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] cloud-mng controller url controller.huawei.com port 10020

3.10.4 cloud-mng management-vlan

Function
The cloud-mng management-vlan command records the VLAN used by the
switch to communicate with a DHCP server.
By default, the switch uses VLAN 1 to communicate with a DHCP server.

Format
cloud-mng management-vlan vlan-id

NOTE

This command cannot be configured on the switch and can only be configured through the
cloud management platform.

Parameters
Parameter Description Value
vlan-id Specifies the ID of the VLAN used by the The value is an integer
switch to communicate with a DHCP that ranges from 1 to
server. 4094.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario
After the switch is changed to the cloud-based management mode, it can obtain
the cloud management platform's address information using DHCP. As shown in
Figure 3-1, the switch obtains the cloud management platform's address
information through the DHCP server in step 2. The DHCP request initiated by the
switch is transmitted over VLAN 1. After the switch passes registration
authentication, the controller of the cloud management platform reconfigures the
VLAN used by the switch to communicate with the DHCP server. After the switch
restarts, to ensure that it continues to use the reconfigured VLAN to communicate
with the DHCP server, it records the management VLAN configured by the

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1249

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

controller for communication between the switch and DHCP server into its
configuration file. During the restart of the switch, the management VLAN can
take effect through configuration restoration.

Figure 3-1 Changing the device management mode and obtaining the cloud
management platform's address information through a DHCP server
Cloud management platform

Preconfigure DHCP Option 148, including

the cloud-based management mode and
1 cloud management platform’s
Egress gateway IP address/URL and port number
(also as a DHCP server)
Reply with a DHCP packet carrying
DHCP Option 148
Reply with a DHCP packet carrying 6
DHCP Option 148 3 Initiate a DHCP request again to obtain the
cloud management platform’s
Connect to the network and 5
IP address/URL and port number
initiate a DHCP request 2

4 Change to the cloud-based

management mode

Switch

AP

Precautions

This command cannot be configured on the switch and can only be modified
through the controller.

3.10.5 cloud-mng redirected-controller ip-address

Function
The cloud-mng redirected-controller ip-address command records the redirected
IP address and port number of the cloud management platform.

By default, the switch does not record the redirected IP address and port number
of the cloud management platform.

Format
cloud-mng redirected-controller ip-address ip-address port port-number

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1250

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

NOTE

This command cannot be configured on the switch and can only be configured through the
cloud management platform.

Parameters

Parameter Description Value

ip-address Specifies the redirected IP The value is in dotted decimal
address. notation.
port port-number Specifies the redirected The value is an integer that
port number. ranges from 0 to 65535.

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

After the switch is changed to the cloud-based management mode and passes
registration authentication with the cloud management platform, the IP address
and port number of the cloud management platform are redirected on the
controller of the cloud management platform.

After the switch restarts, to ensure that it continues to use the redirected cloud
management platform on the controller, it records the redirected IP address and
port number of the cloud management platform into its configuration file. During
the restart of the switch, the redirected IP address and port number can take
effect through configuration restoration.

Precautions

The switch can obtain the cloud management platform's address information
using different methods (listed in descending order of priority): obtain the cloud
management platform's redirection information recorded in its configuration file,
use DHCP, use commands, and obtain the information from the registration query
center.

3.10.6 display cloud-mng connect-attribute

Function
The display cloud-mng connect-attribute command displays information about
the connection between a switch and the cloud management platform.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1251

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display cloud-mng connect-attribute

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
This command can display information about the connection between a switch
and the cloud management platform, including the cloud management platform's
URL and port number.

Example
# Display information about the connection between a switch and the cloud
management platform.
<HUAWEI> display cloud-mng connect-attribute
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller address source : Allocated by Register Center
Controller URL : device_naas.huawei.com
Controller IP address :-
Controller port : 10020
Management VLAN :1
Management IP address : 10.10.10.1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1252

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Table 3-141 Description of the display cloud-mng connect-attribute command

output
Item Description

Controller address source How the cloud management platform's IP

address is obtained:
● User-defined configuration: indicates
that the IP address is the user-defined
configuration.
● Allocated by Register Center: indicates
that the IP address is obtained through
the registration query center.
● Allocated by DHCP: indicates that the
IP address is obtained through DHCP.
● Allocated by controller: indicates that
the IP address is obtained through the
cloud management platform.
● -: indicates that no IP address is
obtained.

Controller URL URL of the cloud management platform.

To configure the cloud management
platform's URL, run the cloud-mng
controller url command. If no URL is
configured or obtained, this field displays
-.

Controller IP address IP address of the cloud management

platform.
To configure the cloud management
platform's IP address, run the cloud-mng
controller ip-address command. If no IP
address is configured or obtained, this
field displays -.

Controller port Port number of the cloud management

platform.
To configure the cloud management
platform's IP address, run the cloud-mng
controller ip-address command. If no IP
address is configured or obtained, this
field displays -.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1253

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Management VLAN Management VLAN ID used when the

switch communicates with the cloud
management platform. The default value
is 1. You can configure the management
VLAN ID through the controller on the
cloud management platform. Then the
switch records the configured VLAN ID in
the configuration file using the cloud-
mng management-vlan command.

Management IP address IP address of the VLANIF interface for the

management VLAN used when the switch
communicates with the cloud
management platform. This IP address
can be dynamically allocated by the DHCP
server or use the IP address configured on
the VLANIF interface for the management
VLAN. If no IP address is dynamically
allocated or configured on the VLANIF
interface, this field displays -.

3.10.7 display cloud-mng configuration

Function
The display cloud-mng configuration command displays cloud management
platform information.

Format
display cloud-mng configuration

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1254

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Usage Guidelines
To view cloud management platform information (such as an IP address), run the
display cloud-mng configuration command.

This command cannot display cloud management platform information that is

obtained through DHCP or the registration query center.

Example
# Display cloud management platform information.
<HUAWEI> display cloud-mng configuration
--------------- Cloud-mng configuration begin---------------
cloud-mng controller ip-address 10.1.1.1 port 10020
cloud-mng controller ip-address 192.168.2.2 port 10020 (redirected)
--------------- Cloud-mng configuration end-----------------

Table 3-142 Description of the display cloud-mng configuration command

output

Item Description

cloud-mng controller ip-address The configured IP address and port

10.1.1.1 port 10020 number of the cloud management
platform are 10.1.1.1 and 10020. If the
information is marked redirected, the
switch has been redirected from the cloud
management platform with which it just
registers to another cloud management
platform for management.

3.10.8 display cloud-mng register-fail-record

Function
The display cloud-mng register-fail-record command displays records about
failures to register with the cloud management platform.

Format
display cloud-mng register-fail-record

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1255

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
After this command is executed, a maximum of five registration failure records can
be displayed.

Example
# Display records about failures to register with the cloud management platform.
<HUAWEI> display cloud-mng register-fail-record
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Error Info
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2016/02/09 22:21:02 Failed to apply IP address
2016/02/09 23:12:13 Failed to create TCP link to controller (192.168.1.1)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-143 Description of the display cloud-mng register-fail-record command

output
Item Description

Time Registration failure time.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1256

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Error Info Registration failure reason. The IP address

in this field is the IP address of the cloud
management platform with which the
switch failed to register. Possible reasons
include:
● Manage VLAN is physical down
● Change to tradition work mode failed
● Failed to apply IP address
● No DNS information in DHCP options
● No controller IP or URL information
● Failed to get IP address of controller
● Failed to create TCP link to controller
● Failed to get register result from
controller
● Controller certificate authentication
failed
● Controller ESN check failed
● Device is not authorized
● Device type and ESN does not match
● Failed to connect registration query
center
● Others

3.10.9 display cloud-mng register-status

Function
The display cloud-mng register-status command displays the status of
registration with the cloud management platform.

Format
display cloud-mng register-status

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1257

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display cloud-mng register-status command to check the
current registration status and registration phase.

Example
# Display the status of registration with the cloud management platform.
<HUAWEI> display cloud-mng register-status
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Register status : unregistered
Register phase : DHCP
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Table 3-144 Description of the display cloud-mng register-status command

output
Item Description

Register status Current registration status of the device.

NOTE
If the TCP connection between the switch and
cloud management platform is disconnected,
the switch changes from registered to
unregistered state after detecting the
disconnection within 3 minutes.

Register phase Current registration phase of the device.

● DHCP: The switch requests an IP
address from a DHCP server.
● registering: The switch has obtained an
IP address from a DHCP server and is
registering with the cloud
management platform.
● registered: The switch has registered
with the cloud management platform
successfully.

3.10.10 display linux network status

Function
The display linux network status command displays information of transport
layer connections.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1258

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
display linux network status

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the display network status command to view which transport-layer
ports are in use. However, this command does not display the transport-layer ports
used in NETCONF connections set up between the switch and remote device. To
view these ports, run the display linux network status command.

Example
# Display information of transport layer connections.
<HUAWEI> display linux network status
Active Internet connections (servers and established)
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address State
tcp 0 0 192.168.20.102:55800 192.168.10.7:55804 ESTABLISHED
tcp 0 0 192.168.20.103:55801 192.168.10.8:55805 ESTABLISHED
tcp 0 0 192.168.20.104:55803 192.168.10.9:55806 ESTABLISHED

Table 3-145 Description of the display linux network status command output

Item Description

Active Internet Information of transport layer connections.

connections (servers and
established)

Proto Transport layer protocol:

● tcp
● udp

Recv-Q The count of bytes not copied by the user program

connected to this socket.

Send-Q The count of bytes not acknowledged by the

remote host.

Local Address IP address and TCP port used by the switch to set
up a connection with the remote end.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1259

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Item Description

Foreign Address IP address and TCP port used by the remote end to
set up a connection with the switch.

State status of the connection:

● ESTABLISHED: The socket has an established
connection.
● SYN_SENT: The socket is actively attempting to
establish a connection.
● SYN_RECV: A connection request has been
received from the network.
● FIN_WAIT1: The socket is closed, and the
connection is shutting down.
● FIN_WAIT2: Connection is closed, and the socket
is waiting for a shutdown from the remote end.
● TIME_WAIT: The socket is waiting after close to
handle packets still in the network.
● CLOSE_WAIT: The remote end has shut down,
waiting for the socket to close.
● LAST_ACK: The remote end has shut down, and
the socket is closed. Waiting for
acknowledgement.
● LISTEN: The socket is listening for incoming
connections.
● CLOSING: Both sockets are shut down but we
still don't have all our data sent.
● CLOSED: The socket is not being used.

3.10.11 display work-mode

Function
The display work-mode command displays the working mode of the current
device.

Format
display work-mode

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1260

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Default Level
1: Monitoring level

Usage Guidelines
To check whether the current device works in cloud-based management mode,
run the display work-mode command.

Example
# Display the working mode of the current device.
<HUAWEI> display work-mode
Current work-mode: cloud-mng

Table 3-146 Description of the display work-mode command output

Item Description

Current work-mode Working mode of the current device:

● cloud-mng: cloud-based management
mode
● tradition: traditional management
mode

3.10.12 work-mode cloud-mng

Function
The work-mode cloud-mng command sets the device management mode of a
switch to the cloud-based management mode.

The undo work-mode command restores the default device management mode
of a switch.

By default, the device management mode of a switch is the traditional

management mode.

Format
work-mode cloud-mng (Supported when the switch is the traditional
management mode)

undo work-mode (Supported when the switch is the cloud-based management

mode.)

Parameters
None

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1261

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Views
User view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
Usage Scenario

To perform cloud-based management on a switch, you must first change the

switch to the cloud-based management mode. You can enable the switch to
automatically change to the cloud-based management mode through DHCP or
the registration query center. However, the two methods have some limitations.
For example, the DHCP-based method requires that the switch should be
unconfigured and have no input on the console port, and the registration query
center-based method requires that the registration query center should have
imported device ESNs and corresponding cloud management platform's address
information. If switches do not meet these conditions, run the work-mode cloud-
mng command to manually change their device management mode.

Precautions

If the switch works in AS mode, it cannot change to the cloud-based management

mode using the work-mode cloud-mng command.

After this command is executed, the system asks whether you want to clear all the
configuration and restart the switch. Confirm the action.

After the switch works in cloud-based management mode, pay attention to the
following points:

● The switch supports only some commands supported in traditional

management mode. These commands are mainly used for fault location,
including commands used to configure the mirroring function and packet
header obtaining function. For details about these commands, see
"Commands supported in cloud-based management mode" in the Licensing
Requirements and Limitations for Cloud-based Management - Feature
Limitations.
● The management interface of the switch will generate an IP address
192.168.1.253/24 so that you can log in to the switch through the web
system, Telnet, or FTP. To log in to the switch through the web system, hold
down the MODE button for 6s or longer.

Example
# Set the device management mode of a switch to the cloud-based management
mode.
<HUAWEI> work-mode cloud-mng
Warning:This command will clear current startup configuration and reboot, the unsaved configuration will
be lost. Continue? [Y/N]: y

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1262

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

3.10.13 reset cloud-mng db-configuration

Function
The reset cloud-mng db-configuration command clears the database
configuration.

Format
reset cloud-mng db-configuration

Parameters
None

Views
System view

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
To stop providing network services, run the reset cloud-mng db-configuration
command to clear all the database configuration.

NOTICE

After the reset cloud-mng db-configuration command is executed, the system

asks whether you want to restart the switch. If you enter Y, the switch restarts and
clears all thedatabase configuration. Confirm your action.

Example
# Clear the database configuration.
<HUAWEI> system-view
[HUAWEI] reset cloud-mng db-configuration
Warning: This operation will clear the database configuration and saved configuration file and restart the
device. Continue? [Y/N]:

3.10.14 reset cloud-mng register-fail-record

Function
The reset cloud-mng register-fail-record command clears records about failures
to register with the cloud management platform.

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1263

S1720, S2700, S5700, and S6720 Series Ethernet
Switches
Command Reference 3 Device Management Commands

Format
reset cloud-mng register-fail-record

NOTE

This command is supported only after the switch is changed to the cloud-based management
mode.

Parameters
None

Views
All views

Default Level
3: Management level

Usage Guidelines
You can run the reset cloud-mng register-fail-record command to clear records
about failures to register with the cloud management platform. Confirm the
action before running this command.

Example
# Clear records about failures to register with the cloud management platform.
<HUAWEI> reset cloud-mng register-fail-record
Warning: This command will clear the registration failures. Continue? [Y/N]: y

Issue 14 (2021-10-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1264